Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
e^l^Tfir, y-j,, JPe
I
HARVARD COLLEGE
LIBRARY
THE ESSEX INSTITUTE
TEXT-BOOK COLLECTION
GIFT OF
GEORGE ARTHUR PLIMPTON
OF NEW YORK
JANUAKV 25, 1924
r:i
3 2044 097 061 584
T
%^ ^03^
C) //«-/^^ M*'
Zy4U40>4u- i^/^'t^
*
Appleions' Catalogue of Valuable PublicaUon§m
CLASSICAL & SCHOOL BOOKS.
ARNOLD.— A FIRST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK
And Practical Grammar. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised and caieftilly
Corrected, by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12nio., neatly bound, 7i cents.
S^ If preferred, the First Latin Book, or the Second Latin Book and Gnunmar
ean be had separately. Price 50 cents each. *
The chief object of this work (which fa foanded on the prineiplei of imitatioc and fteqner
lepetitioa) ii to enable the pupil to do ez^reisea from the fint day of his be^nniof ok accidence
ARNOLD.— LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION :
A Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.H^
Revised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume* 12aio., neaUy
bound, $1,00.
This work ia alao founded on the principle! of imitation and ftaquaat repetition. It la at once
a Syntax; a Vocabuluy, and an Exercice Book ; and eonsiderablo attention has been paid to the
mbject of Synonymei.
ARNOLD.— A FIRST GREEK BOOK ;
With Easy Exercises and Vocabulary. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised ana
Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. 12mo. 62i cts.
ARNOLD.— GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION :
A Practical introduction to Greek Prose Composition. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M.
Revised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.JII. One v<Mume, 12mo. 76e.
Thia worlE conaiata of a Greek Syntax, founded on Battmann*a, and Eaay Sentences •»iii«»«»f4
>nto Greek, after given Examplea, and with giTcn Word*.
ARNOLD.— A GREEK READING BOOK ;
Including a Complete Treatise on the Greek Particles. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M.
Revised by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, ISmo. (ui Pros.)
ARNOLD.— CORNEUUS NEPOS ;
With Practical Questions and Answers, and an Imitative Exercise on each Chap
cer. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised, with Additional Notes, by Prof. John
ioa. Professor of the Latin Language in the University of the City of New- York
One neat volume, ISmo. 621 cts.
** Arnold's Grbkk and Latin Series.— The publication of thia Talnable coneetion of claf
lical achool hooka maybe regarded aa the preaage of better thinga in reapect to the mode of teach
ing and acquiring ianguagea. Heretofore boya hare been condemned to the drudgery of goinf
•Ter Latin and Greeli Grammar without the remoteat conception of the Talue of what they wen
learning, and every day becoming more and more diaguated with the dry and unmeaning taak ;
hut now, by Mr. Arnold^a admirable method— aubitantially the aame with that of 01bmdorfi^~-tho
moment they take up the atudy of Latin or Greek, they b^in to learn aentenooa, to aconiie ideaa,
to aee how the Romana and Greeka ezpreaaed themaelvea, how their mode of ezpreaaion differed
from oura, and by degreea they lay up a atock of knowledge which la utterly aatoniahtng to thoae
who have dragged on month after month in the old-faahioned, dry, and tedioua way m learning
Ianguagea.
** Mr. Arnold, in &ct, haa had the good aenae to adopt the ayatera of nature. A child leama hit
own language by imUattJif what he heara, and eonatantly rq^eating it till it ia &atmied in the
memory ; in the aame way Mr. A. puta the pupil immediately to work at Exerciaea in Latin and
Greek, involving the elementary principlea of the language— words are aupplied — the mode of
putting them together u told the pupil — he ia ahown how the ancienta expreaaed their ideaa ; ani
tb sn, by repeating theae thinga aigain and again-^'teraiM iterumque — the docile pupil haa then
inJelibly impreased upon hia memory and rooted in hie understanding.
** The American editor ia a thorough clasaical scholar, and haa been a nraetical teacher fo
Era in thia city. He haa devoted the utmost ciure to a completo revision or Mr. Amold'a works
orrecied aevexal enora of inadvertence or otherwiae, haa rearranged and improved variott
matters in the early volumea of the aeries, and has attended moat diligently to the accurate print
bu and rjechanical execution of the whole. We anticipate most confidently the speedy odoptira
•rthefte works in our schools and colleges." — Cour. if Enq.
j^^ Arnold's Series of Classical Works has atteined a circulation almost unparalleled in EngAnd,
being introduced into nearly all the great Public Schools and leading Educational bistitutions.
They are also very highly recommended by some of the best American Scholars, for introduction
into the Classical Schools of the United States. They are already used in the University of the
City of New-York, Butger's Fema« Institute, N. Y. ; Union College, Schenectady; Mt. BL
lfaxy*«Coili«o, Md.; Yalo College, New-Haven; ana bu«»«coas large sehooia throughoat it
Valoc.
D, Appleton 8f CoJs Educational PuhlicaUons,
ARNOLD'S CLASSICAL SERIES.
OPINIONS OF SCHOLARS.
Princxtoit, Deoember 3, 1846.
Gbntlkicbn^ — In reply to your letter, I have to say that I can, from the roost aatisfaotor*
■Kperienoe, bear testimony to the excellence of yonr series of Text Bookirf for Schools. I am ia
the daily use of Arnold's L&tin and Greek Exercises, and consider them decidedly sonerior to any
•tber Elementary Works in those Languages. LYMAN COLEMAN, D., D.,
Prof, of the Oermany Oreek, and JLaiin lJan£uage».
Dear Sir, — I am mach pleased with Arnoli't Latin Books. A clan of my older boys
have jnst finished the first and second books. They had studied Latin for a long time before
but never uwderatood it, they say. as they do now. CJl AS. M. BLAKE,
Ctasmeal Teacher in Brown* » Prinee-street Academy, Philadelphia.
Arnold's Lbssonb in Latin. I find nnsnrpassed ; and, if the Greek Lessons by the same
author shall prove as useful, they will form the commencement of a new era in the study of the
classics in this country. I wi&h you abundant success ia so noble an enterprise as furnishing oar
sofaools and scholars with such valuable books. SETH DAVIS,
Ruior of Zion'a Church, Rome.
Arkold'b Latin and Orbbk Composition. In the skill with which he sets forth the
sdtoniatie peeuliaritiee, as well as in the directness and simplicitv with which he states the facts
of the Ancient Languages, Mr. Arnold has no superior. I know of no books so admirably
adapted to awaken an interest ia the study of language, or so well fitted to lay the loandation
of a ooneet scholarship and refined taste. N. WHEELER,
Principal Worcester County Utgh Senooi.
MxssRB. Applbton : Pbnn. Collbob, Getttsburo, Oct. 39, 1846.
Dear Sirs, — ^The friends of edocatios are under great obligations to vou for the valuaUe service
you have rendered by the recent publication of Arnold's Cornelius Nepos. 1 have examined
the edition with mucn interest, and it gives me pleasure to say that I highly approve of it. A
text-book prepared by a man so distinguished for scholarship, exiierience, and success in teaching,
•s Dr. Amolo, cannot fail to secure universal favor. The mechanical execution, and the great
accuracy which prevails throughout, are highly creditable to the American editor and the
publisher.
I have determined to introduce the edition at cmce into the Academical Department c»f
Pennsylvania College, and have accordingly directed our book merchants to procure copies.
Respectfully, yours,
M. L. STOERER, A. M.,
JPrqf. tf History in PennsyltMnia College, and Principal of the Academical Department.
Mbisrb. Applbton & Co. : Oakland Hioh Scbool, April 28, 1846.
Gentlemen, — I acknowledge with many thanks the receipt of T. K. Am<dd's First and
Second Latin Book, and his Introduction to Latin Proee Composition. The style in which the
books are got up is not their only recommendation. With thorough instruction, on the part c^
the teacher using these books as text-books, I am confident a much more ample return for the
time and labor bestowed by our youth upon Latin must be secured. Tlie time certainly hns
•ome when an advance must be made upon the old methods of instruction. I am glad to have*
a work that promises so many advantages as Arnold's First and Second Latin Book to begin
I have little doubt of the result of the experiment. Very respectfully,
A. B. RUSSELL.
Extract from a Report of an Examination of the Male Department of the Parochial School of
St. PauTs Church, Rome, JV. Y., on Friday, March 26, 1847.
* * m * <* But were we to single out any part of the examination as worthy of special notice,
t would be that upon " Arnold's Fint Book in Latin." Many an Academictan, who has
studied^ Latin in the ordinary way for two years, could not sustain an examination as did the
lads of this class, who have studied Arnold's Fint Lessons only about six months. Arnold's
metliod is admirable for making thorough scholars and accurate grammarians ; but then it needj
a thorough and industrious teacher to use it to advantage. Such, evidently, is Mr. Piatt. He
has not oeen content to put his pupils upon writing out the exercises, but they have been
required to commit thoroughly to memory the vocabulary of words in each lesson, beginning with
nouns and verbs ; and as soon as they have learned the words they begin to make sentences.
Then they leam occasionally a declension, and immediately are made to put it to use by con-
■trvetiiig sentences that require the cases of that declension. A similar meUiod was pursued ia
Mm Eo^iih Giamnuur and in the French.''
PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION
TO
LATIN PBOSE COMPOSITION,
BT
THOMAS KERCHEVER AJEINOLD, M. A.
SECTOR OF LYKDOir,
AND LATE FELLOW OF TBINITT COLLEGE, CAMBBIDOl.
CAKEFULLT SEVISED AKD COBRECTBD
BY REV. J. A. SPENCER, A.M.
FIFTH AMEKICAN EDITION.
NEW- YORK :
D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 200 BROADWAY.
PHILADELPHIA :
G. S. APPLETON, 148 CHESNUT STREET.
1847.
MlltMB WllWf l!"*^*^
•{•USE ARTHUR PLIMPTOH
MNUARY 2A, 1824
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in tlie year 1846,
By D. APPLETON A COMPANY,
in the Clerk's Office of the District Couxt of 'Jie Southern District of New- York.
^
EXPLANATION OP ABBREVIATIONS, &c.
D., G., H., E., R., Z., stand respectively for DoderUin, CfroUfend, HabidU,
KrugeTf RarMhom^ and Zumpt,
Numerals above the line refer to the TabU of Diftravce*} if followed by a
curre, to the Cautiona.
An accent after a word, thus (parent) shows it to be somewhat emphatie.
Words printed in itaUcs in the Exercises are meant to call attention to some-
thing that has been said respecting them, or to some point which should be
carefully attended to in connection with them.
Two or more words connected together by hyphens show that they are to be
translated into Latin by one word ; as " branches-of-leaming," docMtuB ; " ad-
mirably-skilled," perUisnmtu^ &c.
PREFACE.
The present volume contains the First Part of Mr. Arnold's
Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition ; the introduc-
tory portion of the Second Part (as published by the Author) on
the Order of Words in Latin ; and nearly all the Longer Latin
Exercises, Part L, a work which was published separately, but
intended to follow immediately in order the use of the First Part
of the Prose Composition.
This arrangement was adopted for the purpose of embracing
as much valuable matter as possible within the compass of a rea-
sonably sized volume. The First Part is complete in itself, and,
so far as it goes, admirably fulfils the design of the author ; yet,
as the Exercises consist of single, short, and unconnected sen-
tences, it was deemed advisable to introduce other and longer Ex-
ercises, in which the student should be taught practically how to
arrange his ideas in passages of considerable length, and in which
are involved most of the minutiee and intricacies of the Latin
idiom. For this purpose Part H. of the present volume is most
excellently adapted. The work on the Latin Particles, which
was published by the author as the Second Part of the Practical
Introduction to Latin Prose Composition, is a production of much
value and importance, and is devoted to a lengthened and full elu-
cidation of the difficulties which stand in the way of one who
would become a thorough and accomplished Latinist. It is in-
tended — should the classical public demand it — to issue this work
at an early date.
The principal advantages which the present volume offers over
works of a similar kind are these. It contains a copious but con-
cise illustration of Latin Synonymes drawn mainly from the
standard treatise of Doderlein on this subject ; there is, through-
• ••
VUl PREFACE.
out, a careful and precise notation of the Differences of Idiom
between the Latin and English languages ; a freqi^nt calling
the attention of the student, by way of Cautions, to nice points
which might otherwise escape his notice ; and a constant repeti-
tion, under new forms and combined with new matter, of what has
gone before — the iterum iterumque of Virgil — ^till both the words
and expressions, with their peculiarities, are feistened in the mem-
ory. In addition to this, the Exercises are wholly in English,
that is, the English is given to be turned into the corresponding
Latin ; and full and very carefully arranged Vocabularies pre-
cede or accompany each Exercise. This plan is far superior —
in the Editor's judgment — to the common mode of giving all the
Latin words in the Latin order, simply requiring that the sentence
be made grammatically correct by the use of the right cases,
moods, tenses, &c. By such a course the pupil is not obliged to
study and exercise his powers of reflection and observation to any
great extent ; but only to be tolerably well acquainted with gram-
matical forms and usages ; he learns to expect the helps of the
Latin words ; he pays little regard to the peculiarities of the Latin
order ; and is very apt to be sadly puzzled when an English sen-
tence or passage is given to him to be turned into Latin. On the
contrary, by using Mr. Arnold's method the student is compelled
to examine well and constantly the mode which the Romans had
of expressing their ideas, and in what respect it differs from our
own, as well in regard to the choice as the collocation of words
and sentences ; and almost of necessity his memory has to be
stored with a large supply of words and phrases for continual
use.
Great care has been bestowed upon the volume, for the purpose
of securing accuracy and clearness of arrangement ; and it is
trusted that it will not be found inferior to any issues of the
American press,
J. A. S.
New-Yoek, March IGth, 1846.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PART I.
Intboductobt 'Rbmabxs on thx Abbanokmbkt or Wobds
IN A Latin Sentence • 13
I. S 1. Nominative Case and Verb • 18
II. 2. Accusative with Infinitive 19
3. Accusative with Infinitive continued 21
III. 4. Agreementof Adjective with Substantive • 22
IV. 5. The Relative 24
6. Infinitive used substantively* •••' •• 27
7. Relative continued. (Fundamental Rule for the employment
of subjunctive tenses.) ••• .•••• 29
B* Relative continued • 31
9. Relative continued. Rel. with Superlative: < The first wAo' •• 32
V. 10. Utne,expreBwag a, purpose •...-• •••». 34
11. Ut expresaing ti consequence. Quo. Ne prokibUive - • » ' 36
12. English infinitive translated by ut with subj. >../... 3^
[Vocabulary of Verbs followed by u/.] 5
13. CTiK, &c. continued. 'Thatnobodt/f&c.
[Vocab. of Phrases followed by u/.] ^
14. Quin after negative sentences. [Vocab. of Verbs, Ac. followed
by quin.'] • • 41
15. Qiunninus. [Vocab. ofVerbs followed by guommutf.] 43
VI. 16. Int^rogative Sentences • %..... 45
17. Interrogative Words • 45
18. Dependent Questions • 46
19. Double Questions. An in single questions • 47
20. ilfoyi can, &c. as principal Verbs 49
VII. 21. Apposition 52
22. Nomhiative after the Verb. AUracHon of the Predicate. [Vocab.
of Apposition Verbs.] • 64
23. Dative after eM«**.*«*t .•....•.•••. ..•..•.• 56
]| CONTENTS.
VIII. 24. TheGenitive °^
25. The Genitive continued. Partitives. Genitivus QualUatts,
Opus est. Summua mons^ &c. (64) 60
26. The Genitive after Adjectives 66
27. The Genitive continued 69
28. The Genitive continued "^^
29. The Genitive continued. Impersonals with gen. 74
IX. 30. The Dative. [ Vocab. of Adjectives with dat., Ac] * • • 76
31. The Dative continued. [Vocab. of Verbs governing the da/.] 79
32. The Dative continued. [Vocab. of Compounds of «»«.]•• • ? 82
[Vocab. of Verbs that take dot. or ace, 84.] 5
33. The Dative continued. Verbs with two constructions- • • • -n
[Vocab. of Verbs that take dai, of person with ace, of j
thing; or ace. of pers. with abl, of t^ing^.— Vocab. of V 86
Verbs with different constructions in different mean- |
ings.]
34. Verbs that take a second Dative. Est mihi rwmen 88
[Vocab. of Verbs followed by two Datives.] • • • • 89
X. 35. The Accusative. [Vocab. of transitive Compounds of in- > qq
trans. Verbs.] ^
36. The Accusative continued • 93
XI. 37. TheAblative •, • ^^
38. The Ablative continued. [Vocab. of Verbs governing the abl,] 99
XII. 39. The Vocative, iltfroc/uwi of the Vocative • 102
XIII. 40. The Passive Voice 104
41. The Passive Voice continued 107
XIV. 42. Time "
XV. 43. Place. Space •
XVI. 44. GerundffandPartic. indw. [Epistola scribenda.]
[Vocab. of words following the constr. of the proper ^ 117
names of places, 122.] • ^
XVII. 45. Participles. Ablative Absolute 124
46. Participles continued. Participles expressing a puTTJOw 126
47. Participles continued. The Supines . . v • • • • 123
XVIII. 48. Pronouns ; J^l
49. Pronouns continued. Is^ hicj iste^ ille 133
50. Pronouns continued. On the translation of any 137
51. Pronouns continued. On the prefixes and affixes of the Inter-
gatives • ^^O
XIX. 52. Comparison ••• J42
XX. 53. Remarks on some of the Tenses 145
54. Remarks on the Tenses continued 149
XXI. 56. Forms of Conditional Propositions (435) 152
56. Conditional Propositions continued 156
57. Conditional Propositions in dependent sentences • • 160
58. On 06Zi5t<e Narration 162
69. Oblique Narration continued. Mood in subordinate Clauses.
Dependence on an Infixtitive •..#•••••••••••••• •••• ^65
110
115
CONTEITTS. Zi
■SCT. WAOMm
XXIII. 60. Qut with Sttbjunctiye. [Vocab. of phrases, Ac, with which
9ui takes the subj.] 169
61. Q^i with the Subjunctive continued 171
2XIV. 62. Quum with the Indicative -%
[Vocab. of Gonjunc^ns that govern the subj. 494.] . . • . ) ^^^
XXV. 63. Antequam and Prituquam 179
XXVI. 64. DutHj donee, quoad, Ac. [Vocab. of Adverbs with gen.] .... 181
XXVII. 65. Quod 183
XXVIII. 66. The Roman Calendar 186
XXIX. 67. Connection of Propositions by the Relative, Ac 189
XXX. 68. On the Roman way of reckoning money 192
69. On the division of the Aa, the method of reckoning/rac<um«,
interest, Ac .,..„ 194
Tables for Reference.
I. Grenders 196
II. Formation of the Perfect and Supine 197
Table of Differences of Idiom, Ac 202
Questions on the Cautions , 211
Questions on the Sjmtaz 214
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.
On the Arrangement of Words in a Latin Sentence,
1. The general distinction between the English and Latin order
is this :
2. 0:^ In Latin the governed and dependent words generally
stand before Uie words on which they depend ; so that in simple
sentences, the verb, when not particularly emphatic, stands at the
end of the sentence.
3. Thus in simple narrative, after the conjunction comes the
subject (nom. case) ; then the governed cases with adverbs and
expressions of time, place, manner, &c., and last of all the verb.
4. But if the verb is emphatic, it must be placed earlier in the
sentence. — Quod non dedit iR)rtuna, id non eripit. Mirabile
videtur, quod non rideat haruspex, <Sz;c. Non inteUigunt homines,
quam magnum, vecfigal sit parsimonia.
For it must always be remembered that —
5. 0:^ The degree of prominence arid emphasis to be given to
a toord, is that wMch mainly determines its position in the sen^
tence. — And,
6. a) The two emphatic poiAtionn in a sentence are the beginning kdA the endg
" by the former our attention is exeUed, and on the latter it retts." (Crom-
bie.)
b) Add to this, that the more untuual a position is for any word, the more
emphatic it ia for that word. Thus, "arbores seret diligens agricola,
quarum adspiciet baccam ipse nunquam." (Cic.)
e) A word that generally stands close by another receires emphasis by
aeparoHon from it ; espeeialiy if it be thus brought near the beginning or
end of a sentence. VoluptaUmf percepi maximamf, Propterea quod
aJImd Uer haberent mUlum^. Mdvx equitea ad Cesarem omnef' rever-
tuntur.
d) Another principle aflactingf the position of words Is the harmonious
arriDgement of syllables ; ihejlow of the sentence.
14 INTBODUCTOBY REMARKS.
7. Genixive. The genitive, whether dependent on a sub-
stantive or adjective, stands first if it be the more emphatic ; if
not, not. But it is rendered more emphatic by separation :
see 6, c).
a) It probably somewhat prefers the position before the govern-
ing noun, when that is not decidedly emphatic.
h) When the governing substantive has an adjective with it,
the order is generally adj,, gen,, suhsU (Vera animi magnitudo.)
8. Attributive and its substantive. Of these the mxire
emphatic stands first. But see 6, c). '
a. A very short precedes a longer word : hence the dernxm-
stratvoes usually stand before their nouns, and monosyllable sub-
stanUves before their adjectives.
9. Apposition. Here too the more emphatic precedes : but
generally the word in apposition stands last.
a. This is particularly the case with titles, &c., in apposition to
proper names*
Q, Mnci\i3 Augur ; Kgiarex; Pythagoras PAiZojopAtw. But,
urbs Roma ; though Cyprus insula, Hypanis^Mrftw.
10. WoBDs DEPENDENT ON ADJECTIVES. Here too the more
emphatic precedes, with something of a preference for placing
the dependent words first.
11. Ablative absolute. The more emphatic first.
12. Infinitive dependent on Verb. The more emphatic first ;
generally the infinitive.
a. Of two infinitives, the more emphatic first.
13. Adverbs. Generally, immediately before the words they
belong to. Quoque immediately after its word.
14. Words that modify the meaning of an adjective are usually
placed between it and the substantive. (Proelio magisad eventum
secundo, quam, &c.)
15. Opposition and contrasted notions.
a) A r^peaied word, or a word akin to a word already used in
the sentence, is generally brought as near to that word as possible.
TYwior timorem pellit. Nulla virtus virtuti contraria est. Virtiitum
in aUd alius vult excellere. AlOs aliunde est periculum.
h) Of two contrasted clauses or groups of words, of parallel
construction! the order of the first is often reversed in the second :
INTRODUCTOBY REMARKS. 15
SO that two of the antithetical words are as far apart as possible.
Fragile corpus animus sempitemus movet. Ratio nostra consen*
tit ; pugnat oratio. Quae me moverunt, movissent eadem te pro-
fecto.
0:^ Enim, vero, autem, quoque, qmdem (with of course the
enclitics), caimot be the first words of a clause.
PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION
TO
LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION
I. The common concords are taken for granted ; that —
(1.) A verb agrees with its nominative case in number
and person.
(2.) An adjective, pronoun, or participle, agrees with its
stibsiantive in gender, number and case.
(3.) A transiUve verb, whether active or deponent, takes
after it an accusative of the person or thing tided ypon.
(4.) Verbs of existence (such as he, become, turn out,
&;c.); passive verbs of being called, considered, chosen,
&c., take a substantive or adjective afler them in the nomi-
native case.
(5.) The thing by which stands in the ablative ; the
person hy whom, in the ablative with the preposition a
or ab.
(6.) One substantive depending upon another is put in
the genitive case.
Obs. When a pronoun is the nominative case to a verb, it is
not expressed in Latin; except for the sake of emphasis or
particular distinction.
(a) In the same way the possetnve pronoun is seldom expressed,
when there can be no doubt as to whoM the thing is. See 3 (a).
(fi) When there i« any distinction to be expressed, as, for instance,
when / am opposed to you^* the pronouns must be expressed.
* The pron. is expressed, even when the distinction is only between two ao*
tioDB of the game person. Ejcci ego te armatis hominibus, non <2^«ei.
18 NOMINATIVE CASE AND VERB. [§ 1. 2-4.
I.
§ 1. Nominative Case and Verb.
2. (a) When two or more nominative cases singular come to-
gether, they take & plural verb,* which agrees with the nominative
case of the most worthy^ person.
{I) The verbs est and sunt are often omitted.
3. (a) £t ego^ ei Balbus sustuUmus manus, Both I and Balbus
lifted up our hands,
(h) Amiqi veterrimi optimi, The oldest friends are the best,
4. Vocabulary 1.
And, et ; que enclitics atque ; ac.d
If, si.
Both — and, et — et.
Hand, mSnus, fis, f.
Sister, shror, Oris, /.
Well, bene*
Hunger fSmes, is, /.
Seasoning, > j- « <
-, ? condimentum, I. n.
Sauce, 5
Army, exercitus, (is, m.
* The verb is often however in the singular, agreeing with one of the nomi-
natives, and being understood with the other. This is the common construe- .
tion with et—et; quum — tur/if d^c, when both the nominatives are singtUarf and
of the Barru per9on.
b The Jirat person is said to be more worthy than the second, the second than
the third.
« For " Balbus and /," the Romans, putting "/" first, said " Ego et Balbtu.**
When therefore Cardinal Wolsey said " Ego et Rex mens," he was a good
grammarian but bad courtier.
d Et joins words each of which is considered independently^ and as ofeqtuU
importance : atque ( = adqiu) or Ac, which is an abridged (and less emphatic)
form of the same word, adds a notion that is, if anything, of m^nre importance
than the preceding one ( = * and also,' * and w/freover') : que joins a word
closely to another, as an appendage to it, as belonging to it, and often as forming
one complex notion with it.
When et connects principal dauses^ subordinate ones and single words must
be connected by que, or {if similar notions) atgue,
Atque is used before vowels or consonants, but especially before vowels.
Ac is used before consonants (though not very often before the k sounds) ; but
not before vowels or h. Mr. Allen shows that ac (though very rarely met with
before^, q) is not very uncommon in Cicero before c. So also Zumpt.
§ 2. 5-9.] ACCUSATIVB WITH INFINITIVB. 19
War, bellum, i. n.
A Ghiul, GalluB, i m.
Many, multi, e, a.
Very many, permulti,* ae, a. ^
Caesar, Caesar, CaesXris, m.
To lift up, tollere, sustiil, sublit.
To be in good health, )
To be well, 5
vXiere, valfi, yaDt.
To wage (properly to carry), gSrCre, gess, gest.
To conquer, yincSre, vie, vict.
Exercise 1.
5. If you and the anny' arc-in-good-health, it is well (p. 14,
13). Both you and Balbus lifted up (your) hands. Both you
and 7(1 Obs, fi) have waged many' wars. Both you and Balbus
have waged very-many' wars. The best' sauce (is hunger.)
The Gauls were conquered by Caesar. Hands were lifted up
both by you and by Balbus. If you and your sister are-in-good-
health, it is well.
II.
§ 2. ^Accusative with Infinitive.
6. The infinitive takes before it not the nominative, but the
accusative. s
7. Many sentences that in English are joined to a verb by the conjunc-
tion * thati* are expressed in Latin by the accusative and inJinUive.
8. In turning such sentences into Latin *tkat* must be omitted; the
English nominative turned into the accuaatipes and the English verb
into the infinitive mood of the same tense.
9. The accusative with the infinitive follows verbs {aentiendi et decta-
rcmdX^ offeelingf knowing, Vfi^Ung, hearings believing^ thinking, &c,;
and such expressions as, it is certain, manifest, true, Ac,
* Per in composition with an adjective, adds to it the meaning of * very,*
t Exercitusque. Que must always be appended to the latter of the two words
connected by it.
ff This idiom is not uncommon in English, though far less common than in
Latin.
" I ordered him to be dismissed " (for ' I ordered that he should be dismisseeP),
"I BOW him to be a knave** (for *I saw that he was a knave').
20 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. [§ 2. 10-13.
10. (a) Respondeo, placere et mihi locum, I anstoer that the
j)lace pleases me too.
(h) Respondit, placere et sibi locum. He answered that the
place pleased him too.
(c) Sentimus calere ignem, nivem esse albam, dulce mel.
We know-by-our -senses, tliat fire is hot ; that snow is
white, honey sv)eet.
11. Vocabulary 2.
To answer, respondere, respond, respons.
To understand, intelhgere, intellex, intellect.
To deny, negare, av, at.
To sin, peccare, av, at.
I remember, mSmini, Imper. memento ; pi. mementote.
To know-by -the-senses, sen tire, sens, sens.
To iqjure, oifend-against, violare, av, at.
Law, lex, legls,/.
Cautions.
12. [C. I.] QCr Him, her, them (or he, she, they, when they are
to be translated by the accusative) must be trans-
lated by the proper case of sui, when they and the
nominative of the verb stand for the same person.
Also, in the same case, his, hers, its, theirs^
must be translated by suus.
13. { He saya that it pleaaea him.
( He said that it pleased him.
In English the dependent verb (by a kind of attraction) assumes the
past form, when the verb it depends on is in a past tense.
Hence
OCr [C. II.] In a sentence toith ^ that ' dependent on a past tense,
the perfect is to he translated by the present (and
imperfect) infinitive, lohenever. the notion expressed
by it is not to be described as over before the time of
the principal verb.^
05" [C. III.] 'Should' after 'that' is to be translated by the
present infinitive, when it does not express either
duty or a future event.
k Thus " he said that it pleased him"— when 1 at ffis time of hlB saying it 1
(placere) : before the Hme of his saying it? (placuisse).
§3. 14-17.] AccirsATiVE with mFmiTiVB. 21
Exercise 2.
14. He answered that he*^* had waged many' wars. He
denies that he has sinned (or : says that he has not sinned ).'f He
says^Aa^ he does not^ understand. He says that Csesarwill not*
ofiend-against the laws. Remember that hunger is the best sauce.
He answered that he imderstood.** He answered, that both you
and Balbus were-in-good-health. Both you and Balbus have
sinned.
\
§ 8. Acctisative with Infinitive continued.
15. (a) After hope, promise, undertake, &c., the future infinitive^
is used with the accusative of the pronoun ; and (h) difter pretend,
the ace. of the pronoun.
16. (a) Sperat plerumque adolescens diu se victurum (esse),^
A young man generally expects to live a long time.
(5) Simulat se furere, He pretends to he mad.
0^ [C. IV.] * Would/ * should,' ctfter a past tense are future
forms :
He says that he wiU come.
He said that he would come.
17. VOCABTJLARY 3.
A business, negotium, i, n.
A journey, Iter, itlnSris, n.
To hope, sperare, av, at.
To come, venire, vSn, vent
To promise, pollicSri, pollicitus ; promittCre, promis,
promiss.1
To undertake, engage, recypCre, io, recSp, recept.
* These Numerals, followed by a curve, refer to the CatUioru.
t These Numerals refer to the Table of Differences of Idiom.
I For ^ he promises to amu^ = he promises that he will come.
He hopes to live = he hopes thai he ahaU lice.
He pretends to be mad = he pretends ^lat he i» mad,
k With the compound infinitives esse is often omitted.
1 Promittere {to give it forth) is the general word £ot promising^ whether g^oocf
or evil. Polliceri is to offer from one's own free-will and inclinations, used only
of promising good. PoUiceor being used for fru and gracious promises,
22 AGKEEMENT OF ADJECTIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVE. [§ 4. 18-21.
To finish, accomplish, conf icere, io, confec, confect.
To pretend, BXmulare,™ av, at
To be. mad, ftlrgre, (aeut. : no ^erf. or njLipKnfi^
To (my, your, Ac.) satis- J
faction, satisfiEictorily, > ex sententi4°.
successfully, )
To have a prosperous voyage, ex sententii navigare.
Exercise 3.
18. Solon pretended to he mad. I will pretend to he mad. He
promised to come. I engage to finish the business to your saiisf ac-
tion . I hope that you will have a prosperous voyage . The business
has been finished by Balbus. I hope to finish the business. He
was pretending to he mad. I promised to finish the business.
He answered, that Caius had had a prosperous voyage. He
answered that he would *^^ish the business. He says thai he
will no^ come. He has accomplished his journey satisfactorily.
III.
§ 4. Agreement of Adjective with Suhstantive.
19. (a) When an adjective agrees with several singular nouns,
it will be in the plural number, and agree with the mx)st worthy.
20. (h) If the substantives are thinga that have not life, the
adjective is usually in the neuter gender.
21. (c) When the noun is ' man,' ' woman,' * thing,' it is seldom
expressed in Latin.
[C. v.] ' Thing' should be expressed by * res' (fem.) when the
adjective alone would leave it doubtful whether men
or things were meant.
Thus ' of many things^ not muUorumf but muUarum rerum.
pr(miitto would naturally be often used of promising what has been re^^uesied.
Hence
UUro polliceor ; promitto (saepe) rogatus :
Nee mala polliceor, mala sed promittere possum.
m duEB non sunt Hmulo ; quas sunt ea diaaimulaniur.
B The pronoun should be expressed {ex me& senteniUi, &c.) whenever to leave
it out would cause an ambiguity*
§ 4. 22-25«] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVE. 23
22. (a) Castor et Pollux ex equis pugnare m'si sunt, Castor and
Pollux were seen to fght on horsehcLck.
{b) Inter se contraria sunt beneficium et injuria^ A benefit
and an injury are contrary to each other.
(c) Boni sapientesque ex civitate pelluntur, The good and
wise are banished (literally, driven from the state),
{d) Prtxterita mutare non possumus, We cannot change
the past,
(e) Omnia mea mecum porto, I am carrying all my property
with me*
23. Oba. 1. The neuter plural without' a substantive is generally used
in Latin, where we use t/ie singular. Thus
mticA, very much, every thing, thepoMt,
multa, permulta, omnia, « praetenta,
Uttle (few things), very UUle,
pauca, perpauca.
24. Obs. 2. The neuter adj. is used in Latin without a substantive,
where we might substitute 'thingB,* but really use some more appro-
priate noun, as property, objects, poaeeesunu, performanete, Ac.
[C. VI.] Obs. Cum is written cfter, and as one toord withy the
ablatives me, te, d^c. : mecumy tecum, secum, no^
biscum, vobiscum.
25. VOCABULAKY 4.
Contrary, contrarius, a, um.
(to each other, after contrary) inter se {between themselves).
Good, better, best.
btfnus, melior, optimus.
Wise,
sSpiens, tis.
Deaf,
surdus, a, iim.
Parent,
parens, tis, com. gend.
Virtue,
virtus, litis, /.
Vice,
vitium, i. n.
Blind,
csecus, a, um.
All my property.
omnia mea«.
To owe,
debdre, debu, debit. -
To banish.
pellSre ex civitate (peUSre, p<$pttl, puis, to
drive).
To be ignorant-of,
ignorire, av, it. (ace.)
To see.
cemSre, crev, cr5t (properly to separate;
hence, to distinguish ; to see clearly ; the
proper word to express the possession of
distinct vision).
o The other possessives, tuus, niu«, noder, dkc., must be used foiihy, his, our,
Ac, property.
24 THE KELATIYE. [§ 5. 26-30.
To carry, portire, 5v. it.
• To hear, audlre, iv. it, \
To speak, Ittqui, lociitus, oi^ioquatus.
To fight on horseback, ex equo, or ex eqvisP pugnare. •
Exercise 4.
I
26. They are banishing the good and wise. We are all
ignorant-of many things. Virtue and vice are contrary to each
other. A blind man does not see. The gooct and loise have been
banished. A decif man does not hear. Hear -much (23) ; speak
little (p. 14. 15, h,) We shall carry all our property with us.
He spoke very little. Both you and Balbus are ignorant of many
things. He says that he is not"^ well. They will hear little' :
they wiH speak much (p. 14, 15, h). We owe very much to our
parents. Remember that you owe very much' to your parents.
He says that he will nof fight on horseback.
\
IV.
§ 5. The Relative,
27. The relative pronouns
gut, qualiSf ~ qtumtua, quot,
answer respectively to
isj talia, tarUnSf tot,
28. In a relative sentence, *»
0:^7" Each clause has its own verb, and its own independent
construction,
29. A relative pronoun agrees with some coat of a substantive which is
expressed in the preceding sentence. The substanti^ to which it
thus rtfera is called its antecedent (or fore-going substanuve).
The antecedent, in a sentence fuUy expressed, would|>& expressed
twice ; and it sometimes is expressed twice in Latin : tnis| however,
is but seldom the case, and the antecedent is generally omitted in the
relative dauac, ^ ^
30. (c) Sometimes however the antecedent is expressed in the
P Ex eqtu), if we are speaking of one person ; ex equia, if of more.
4 The clause in which the relative stands is called the rekUive dauae ; the
other, the principal^ or antecedtnt clause.
^5. 31-33.] THE RELATIVE. 26
relative, and omitted in the principal clause ; and (d) when this is
the case, the relative clause is often placed fir^ ; the antecedent
heing expressed in it, and represented in the principal clause
(though not always) by the proper case of * w' or * hie,'
31. The * iff/ however, is often omitted, especially when ' mofi' or * tiUn^
is meant, or, when the verbs govern the same case.
If the antecedent would be in different caetB in the two clauses,
'is^ or *ku? is but seldom omitted.'
32. (a) Nullum animal, quod sanguinem habet, sine corde esse
potest, No animal that has blood, can be without a heart,
(b) Arbdres seret diligens agricdla, quarum adspiciet
baccam* ipse nunquam, The industrious husbandman
will plant trees, a berry of which he will himself
never behold.
(c) Accepi quas Uteras ad me dedisti, I have received the
letters which you sent me,
(d) Bestiae in quo loco natse sunt, ex eo se non commdvent.
Animals do not move themselves from the neighbour-
hood (place) in which they were bom.
[C. vii.] Many Englii^ verbs become transitive by the addition
of a preposition ; for instance, to smile at, &c.
It often happens that the corresponding Latin verb is already tnxfi-
ntvoe^ 86 that the preposition is not to be expressed. To determine
whether the preposition belongs (as it were) to the verb, turn the sen-
tence into the passive : when, if the prepo^tion still dings to the veriA
(adverbially), it is generally not to be expressed in Latin.
Of course a verb, compound or single, must be sought for, that ifi
equivalent to the verb and preposition together ; as to doride := la
laugh (U.
33. VOCABTTLARY 5.
Obs. Substantives in u«from the root of the supine (which end there-
fore in tus or nts) are of the fourth declension ; except,of course, those
that, like legatus, denote persons.
' It is, however, sometimes :
Qiios cum Matio pueros miseram, epistolam mihi attulerunt. (Cic.)
Qtus prime innocentis mihi defensio est oblata, suscepi.
■ A berry; any little round fruit, not a nut; e.g. of the ciUoe, cedar, juniper, «be,
t Thus :
' He laughs at Cassius.'
* Cassius is lovghed est? Therefore to laughs is virtually one verb.
26 THE BELATIVE. [§ 5. 34.
fjOf nullus, a, um. Gen. nullius.
Anlmalj animal, alls, n.
Blood, sanguis, Inls, m.
Withouti sine (govems ablat.).
Heart, cor, cordis, n.
Tree, arbor, »ris,/.
Fruits (of the earth, a crop), fruges, G. frugum, /.
(of trees,) fructas, fis," m.
Field, ager, agri, m.
In vain, nequidquam, fnistraJ
Harvest, mcssis, is, /.
Praise, laus, laudis, /.
Easily, fificile.
Not yet, nondum.
Right, rectus, a, um.
To till, cultivate, colSre, colu, cult.
To bear, produce, ** f Sro, tiili, latum.
To deserve, • merSri, meritus.
To deserve well, *c., o^ de (with ablat.).
To praise, laudare, av, at.
To believe, crSdere, credid, credit {dat.).
To deceive, decipere, io, decep, decept.
To behold, adspicSre, io, adspex, adspect.
Self, myself himself, Ac, in nom., ipse (which stands for all these, the pro-
nouns ego, tu, &c,i not being ex-
pressed.)
OCT * What ' as a relative = that which ; those {things) which.
Exercise 5.
34. No animals, which have blood, can be without a heart.
Not every field which is sown, bears a crop. (He) who easily
believes is easily deceived. What is right', is praised. (Those
things) which are right' are praised. Both you and V have been
deceived. Praise what deserves praise. (He) who does not till
his field, in vain hopes for^^ a harvest. He says that he has not^
been deceived. I shall not easily believe Balbus^. Balbus has
" Fh%teht8 arboribus, frugea nascuntur in agris. But this is only true of
frugtsi and of fructuSt as vpposed to frugea. Fructua is the general name for
produce, and may be spoken of ^nd as well as of trees ; and in poetry we find
frugUma (Columella's poem on Gkirdening), and fruge (Hor.) of the fruit of
treea.
▼ Nequidquam {to no purpoae, in vaiiC), so far as nothing has resulted from a
Mng done ifruetra {in vain\ of a peraon who has not attained his purpose. D.
§ 6. 35-88.] INFINITIVE USED StTBSTANTIVELY. 27
deserved well of me. The business which you promised to
finish,^ has not yet been finished.^ I have planted a tree, the
fruit of which I shall myself never' behold. He is pretending to
have finished^ the business to Jus satisfcLctwn.*
§ 6. Infimtive used suhstantheJy,
85. (a) Sometimes an infinitive moody or a sentence^ is the nomu
native case to a verh ; and sometimes it is used as the substantive
to an adjective ; and sometimes as the atUecedent to a relative : and
in this case the adjective and the relative must be in the neuter
gender.
When an infinitive or sentence is the nominative to a verb, it gen-
erally foUowa it in English, and the pronoun ' it ' stands as its repre-
sentative before the verb; — as, "it is sweet to hear."
Of course this 'i^' is not to be translated into Latin.
86. (h) When the relative has a sentence for its antecedent, we
o^n -find id^ quod or qua res. (Here id and res are in apposi-
tion to the former sentence.)
37. (a) Turpe est mentiri, It is disgraceful to He.
(b) Multse civitates, a Gyro defeoerunt ; qua res multo-
rum bellorum causa fuit, Many states revolted from
Cyrus, a circumstance which tmw the cause of many
wars.
(c) Timoleon, id^ quod difficilius putatur, sapientius tulit
secundam quam adversam fortunam, Timoleon, which
is thought mxfre. difficult, lore a prosperous more wisely
than an adverse fortune.
88. VOCABULABY 6.
Pleasant, jucundus, a, um.
Duty, officium, i, n.
Against, contra, (gov. accus,)
Promise, promissum, i, n.
Disgraceful, torpis, is, e.
Easy, facilis, is, e.
^ Invert these clauses : that is, put the relative clause first.
* The use oiid quod, for quod only, adds emphasis to the relat. clause ; which
then generally precedes the principal clause, or is inserted In it
28 INFINITIVE USED SUBSTANTIVELY. [§6. 39.
One thing— another, aliud — aliud.
Man, h»mo, hommis ; vir, viri.<
To keep, servare, av, at.
Revile, maledicere, dix, diet {dot.).
To accuse, accusare, av, at.
To break one's word, fidem falli^re; failure, f^felli,^ £alsum,
deceive, beguile.
To keep one's word, fidem prsestare ; praestare, prsestiti*,
praestitum, et prsstatum.
To lie, mentiri, mentltus.
To utter many falsehoods, multa mentiri.
It is a breach of duty, contra officium, (it is against duty.)
[C. VIII.] * For^ before a substantive or pronoun followed by
the fn/i/i., is not to be translated. The construction
is the ace. with injin,*^
It i ' \ -^ ^ ^^ ^^^ ^ ^^ ^^^ parents.
c (kat a boy should not obey his parents.
Exercise 6.
39. It is pleasant to be praised. It is a breach of duty not to
keep promises. It is a breach of duty to praise what {plur,) is
disgraceful. I hear that you keep your promises, a thing which
(37, c) all' good men do. I hear that you are going to keep your
word. It is disgraceful to break one's word. It is one thing to
revile, another to accuse. It is certain that Balbus has deserved
well of me. It is a breach of duty to lie. Both you and Balbus
have uttered many falsehoods. It is disgraceful to banish the
good and wise. It is easy (for me) to carry all my property with
me.** It is a breach of duty for a /nan to revile men. I have
praised, not blamed you {note*, p- n)*
X Homo is the general term for Tiian, {. e. for a human being, distinguished
from other living creatures. Vir is rnan as distinguished from womnn. Homo
is often used contemptuously: vtr, respectfully; a Tnan with a manly character.
7 Distinction between./aZ/o and decipio:
NuUdfaUentis culpd saepissime^o/^or ;
At quum dedpiur^ culpam deceptor habebit.
* Cic. has prtBstaiurus.
•■ But we shall see below that if *for^ follows immediately after ' it is* it must
be translated by the genitive. * It is for a rich man to do so and so;' dvoUiM
esti dc
§ 7. 40-44.] THE RELATIVE. 29
§ 7. Relative continued. (Fundamental Rule for the employ-
ment of subjunctive tenses.)
Wherever dependent verbs are used in the subjunctive, the followliig
. is the fundamental rule for the use of the tenaes.
40. OC?" The imperfect and pluperfect of the subjunctive are
the regular attendants of the pcist tenses of the indicative.
But — ^the perfect definite^ (or perfect with * Jiave') is con-
sidered a present tense.
Hence the present, future, and perfect with 'hav^ are followed by the
present^ or (for a completed action) the perfect of the subjunctive.^
05" The future perfect is not a subjunctive tense.
41. The only future subjunctive is the part, in rus with nm, e«tf«m, dkc.
But where we use a future in a dependent sentence, the Romans often
used the present or imperfect subjunctive.
(^On some English Relative forms.)
42. * That' is often a relative pronoun.
(Especially after mperlaiives { the interrogative tpha; the tame; and
when both persona and things are meant.)
43. (a) ' As' is often, in effect, a relative pronoun.
The relative *€u^ must be translated by qui after idems by fiio/i*,
quaniusj quot, after talis, tantuSf tot, respectively.
44. (1) ' Buf is often, in effect, a relative pronoun, when it
follows universal negatives^ as nemo^ nuHuSy nihil.
(2) The relative * hut' is to be translated by quin with the
suhjunctive. (c)
(3) When * hut' might be substituted for a relative with
not, the relative and not may be translated by quin ;«*
if the relative is in the nom. (or even ace.) case.
b The perfect definite is used of -actions done in some space of time, a part of
Present subj.
Perfect subj. (for a
completed action).
Imperfect subj.
Pluperfect subj. (for an
action amtpleted before
the time spoken of).
A With other cases than the jiaminatiDe and oocuM^e, the use of there^o/ipa
which is still present.
6 Thus then the
Present ^
)
Future i
' are followed by the
Perfect with 'ftooc'J
1
Imperfect ^
Perfect \
. are followed by the
Pluperfect )
30 EELATIVE CONTINUED. [§ 7, 45, 46.
[C. IX.] 5^ *Aj^ alid * &ur are often (in effect) rdatwes,
[C. X.] 11^ * Suck* in English is often used where 8izt is meant rather
than quality. * Sw^v—as* should then be translated into Latin by tantus
— quantus; not tali^—qwdU.
45. (a) Talis est, qualis semper fuit, He is such as he has
ever been.
(b) Idem est qui semper fuit, He is the same that (or as)
he has ever been,
(c) Nemo est, quin'^ te dementem putet. There is no one
but thinks you mad (or, who does not ^^inA; you
mad)*
46. VOCABITLAEY 7.
The same, idem, eSdem, idem ; gen. ejusdem, &c.
Rule, rSgula, ae,/.
Expediency, utilitas, atis,/.
Expedient, utilis, is, e.
Honor, the honorable, ) honestas, atis ,/. "
honorable conduct, >
Nobody, no one, nemo, inis ; nemo = ne hbmo.
To think, deem, putare, av, St.
This, hie, hsec, hoc : g. hujus, &c.
That, ille, ilia, illud ; g. illius, <&c.
Nearly, fgre,
Another, alius, a, ud ; g. alius, D. alii, &c.
Never, nunquam,
Before, antea.
To be able, can, posse, pUtui.f
Wave, fluctus, iis, m. (See. 33.)
(a) Sunt qui putent (Obs. subf, after ' sunt qui? ) there are some who think.
Exercise 7.
[C. XI.] Hj* * Thatf^ when it stands for a substantive which has been
expressed in the preceding clause, is not to be translated.
i:V The Imperfect and Pluperfect of the Suhjunct, are the regular at*
tendants of the past tenses of the Indicative.
with non is commonly preferred. Z. When qui rum must be used will be ex-
plained below.
* Cluin is qut ra(=ut non). The demonstr. pronoun (which is the real
nom.) is sometimes expressed : as in 88, (a),
f This verb is compounded of an old adj. potis^ neut. pate, with sum. 'Pot'
is prefixed to the tenses of «um, ts being changed into ss^ and pot-esse, pot-
essem shortened into posse^ possem (posses, Ac). The perfect tenses regular
from potui ( :=poHsfm). No imperaJt, : the part, potene is used as an a4jective.
§8.47-51.] BELATIVE CONTINXTED. 31
47. This is the same cls that. The rule of expediency is the
same asthat^^' of honour. This is nearly the same cls another
thing. You are such as I have always thought you. There ia
nobody hut knows, that the Gauls were conquered by Caesar.
There is no one who does not (45, c) understand, that you are
pretending. There is no one hut knows that the past (23, Obs. 1,)
cannot be changed. There is no one hut knows, that these things
are contrary to each other. Both you and I are such as we have
ever been. The waves were «tcA*"'a* I had never seen before.
There are some who think you mad (46, a). There were
some who blamed me.
§ 8. Relative continued.
48. (a, h) When the relative connects (by means of to 5e or a
verb of naming, &c.) two substantives of different genders, &c.
it generally agrees with the lattery rather than with its ante-
cedent.
(This is the ruUs agreement with the antecedent the exception.
Z. E., <fcc)
49. But when the second substantive is a foreign wordy the
relative generally agrees with its antecedent. (Z.)r
(Jovis Stella, qua <pai&(ov dicitur.)
50. (a) DomicHia conjuncta, quas urhes dicimus, Contiguous
dwellings, which we caU cities.
(Jti) ThehcB, quod Bceotise caput est, Thebes, which is the
capital of Bceotia.
51. VOCABULAEY 8.
Glory, gloria, ae,/.
Honorable, httnestus, a, um.
Star, Stella, ae ; astrum, i, which is properly
a Greek word ; and sidus, eris, n, a
' KrUger approves of ZwmpPe rule ; but thinks that we cannot go beyond
this in determining tDhen agreement with the antecedent should be preferred.
Bremi says : " videntur id (pronomen) ad antecedens substantivum referre
si ad vocabulum respiciunt ; sin vero ad rent, ad consequens." But Kruger
shows that even if this should explain Cicero's practice, it is obviously at
variance with that of other writers.
32 " RELATIVE CONTINUED. [§ 9. 52, 53.
conatellation, and al80,one of the great
heavenly luminaries, e. g. the sun,
the moon, Slrius, &c.
Perpetual, lasting, sempitemus, a, um.
Fire, ignis, is, m.
Island, insula, ae,/.
Sea, mSre, is, n.
Ocean, oceanus, i, m.
As it were, quSsi.
The world, orbis terras, or terrarum ; orbis, is, m.
Head,~capital city, cSput, itis, n.
To reject. repudiare, av, St.
To admire, wonder at, admirari, admiratus.
To be washed. circumfundi, circumfusus (literally, to
be poured around ; and either the
iatand or aea is said circumfundi).
To inhabit, incolSre, incolu, incult.
To call (in sense of naming), Yocare,b appellare, nominare, Sv, at.
Exercise 8.
52. He rejects glory, which is the most honorable fruit' of
true' virtue (Gen. before fructus). He is admiring those perpetual
fires, which we call stars. The island is washed by the sea,
which you (pL) call ocean. We inhabit a great island, as it
were,i which we call the world. There is nobody buf^ thinks
Rome the capital' of the world. * There is no one but thinks
that Balbus has deserved well of us. There are some who
laugh. There are some who laughed (46, a).
§ 9. Relative continued. — Relative tmth superlative : ** The
first loho — "
53. (a) When the antecedent has a superlative* with it, the
adjective is generally put in the relative clause.
h Vocarej appeUaret nominare are all to caU; but vocare has, beside thia^ the
meaning of to ccUl ss summon j appellare, that of appealing to, of eaUing to for
aid ; nominare, that of naming, in the sense of appointing or electing.
i QiMMi should tftand between great and island.
k Orbis terrarum, rather than terrce, when there is a decided reference to
oOier lands,
* The same rule holds good of other adjectives and of apposiiiona.
§ 9. 54-57.] RELATIVE CONTINUED. 83
54. (b) To express "the first person who did a thing" the
Romans did not use a relative sentence, but made primus agree
with the nominative of the principal verb.
55. (a) Volsci civitatem, quam habebant optimam, perdiderunt,
TheVolsci lost the best city they had.
(h) Primus mala nostra sensit. He vxts ike first person who
perceived our evils.
Eng. He was the fvrat who did this : (or,) He w^ the frd to
do thU,
Lot, He ^^r«/did this.
56. Vocabulary 9.
Faithful, fidelis, is, e.
Slave, servus, i, m.
God, Deus,i i, m, et,/.
Fire ( := conflagration), incendium, i, n.
To help, apersoninperplexity,&c., subvSnfre, ven, ventn {dot. of person).
To lose, amittere, amis, amiss ; perdere,^ per-
did, perdit.
An opportunity, occasio, 5nis,/.
To lose an opportunity, occasionem amittSre.
Now = already, jam.
Suck is your teTnperanee ( quae tua est temperantia,
With your usual tern- } qui es temperantiil,^
perance ( pro tuA temperantift.
As far as IknoWf quod sciam.
Exercise 9.
57. He was the first who promised to help^ me. They will
lose the lest tMng they have. I will send the most faithful slave
I have. He was the first who denied that there are' gods. The
fire is such*"^ as 1 have never seen before. The constellations
are the same, that they have ever been. He was the first who
undertook to finish' the business. I hope that you, such is your
temperancCy are already well. No one, as far as I knoWf has
1 Deus, V. DeuSf Plur. {Dei), Dii, Dt, Dat. (Deis\ Diis, Dt»^
^ That is, to came under a thing ; i. e. to support it.
I* Amitiere is simply to lose. Perdere is to lose actively ; «. «. by some eier»
tion qf om£s own, wiU, &c. Hence perdere is often to destroy. Aetiv^ perdo,
passivl amittere possum.
** Or, cujus es temperarUus.
2*
34 ITT, NE. [§ 10. 58-60,
said this. Sestins was not come,p as far as I know, I have
lost no opportunity, as far as I know.' There are some who
have lost the opportunity (46, a).
§ 10. Ut, N6 expressing a purpose.
58. (a) * That* followed by may or might expresses a purpose,
and must be translated by ut with the subjunctive.
(J) * Thaf followed by * not,* or any negative word (the
verb having may or might for its auxiliary), must be
translated by ne with the subjunctive.
59. Vocabulary 10.
It is all over with, actum est de (with the dblat,).
News of the town, res urbanse.
To send or write news, perscribere, scrips, script, = to write
fuUy.
Courtesy, humanitas, atls,^.
Courageously, fortiter.
Virtuously, honorably, honeste.
To cry out, clamare, av, at.
To live, vivgre, vix, vict.
To die, mori, lor, mortuus.
To obey, parere, paru, pant {dat.).
To make the same promise, idem poUiceri.
60. (a) Multi alios laudant, ut ab illis laudentur, Many men
praise others, that they may be praised by them,
(h) GallinsB avesque reliquse pennis fovent pullos ne
frigore IcBdantur, Hens and other birds cherish their
young tcith their feathers, that they may not be hurt
hy the cold.
[C. XIII.] 05" * To* is omitted after many verbs, which thus
seem^ to govern two accusatives.
P [C. XII.] H^ InlranaUive verbs of motion often form their perfect active
with 'anif* not *fuive.* Thus, am come, was come^ are the perfect and pluper-
feet active (respectively).
<i Such verbs are : give^ mntchacife, asaigrif grants send.
§ 11. 61-66.] UT. quo. ne. 85
When a verb «miiu to govern two accnsativef^ try whether yon can-
not put in tti^ before one of them.
Exercise 10.
61. That you may be able to die courageously, obey' the laws
of virtue. He was pretending to be mad,' that he might not be
banished. He cries out, that it is all over with the army. You
promised that you would send me all the news of the town. That
you may die courageously', live virtuously [p. 14, 15, (J)]. He
praises' Caius, that he may himself be praised by Caius. He will
praise' Caius, that he may be praised by Caius. No one, tis far
as I knowy^^ had praised^ Balbus, that he might himself be praised
by Balbus. You, such is your courtesy ^^ promised to finish' the
business. You, with your usual courtesy,^ made me the same prO'
mise^* as before.— —There were some who laughed.
§11. \Jt expressing a consequence. Quo. NB prohibitive.
62. (a) ' That ' after such, so, &c. must be translated hy^ut*
with the suhjunclive.
After these words, *ihat* does- not express a jnirpoae^ but a om^tf-
quence; and the English verb will not have *may* or 'might* with it
63. {b) ' That,' when the sentence has a comparative in it, is
translated by quo ; which is equivalent tout eo {' that by this ').
64. * Not* in profubitioM is n«.
65. (c) < Not ' therefore with the imperative, or subjunctive used
imperatively, must be translated by ne.
Obs. H^ The mibjimctwd present is more eommorify used than ffie
imperative.
66. (d) * As ' before the ir^., and after so, such, must be
translated by ut,*
Except in this idiom (where *<u* expresses a coneequence conceived
as resulting on a particiilar supposition), u^ *aa,* goes with the
Indicative. ■ ■
' " He gave him a penny." What did he give 1 to wham 7
• It will be seen afterwards, that qui ( = u^ is) is generally used in sentences
of this kind ; also that ' aa not to , . . dc' after a negative sentence is yutn. 85.
36 UT. QUO. NE. [§11. 67-70.
67. OCT' No ut or n6 goes with the infinitive.
68. (a) Tanta vis prob^atis est, ut earn vel in hoste diligamus,
The 'power of integrity is so great, that we love it
even in an enemy,
(5) Medico puto aliquid dandum esse, quo sit studiosior, 1
think that some thing should he given to the physician^
that he may he the more attentive,
(c) JVi^ multa discos, sed multum, Do not learn many
things, hut much,
{d) Nemo tam potens est, ut omnia quae velit efficere possit,
Nobody is so powerful as to be able to perform all he
wishes,
69. VOCABULART 11.
Daily, quotidie, indies, or in dieB.t
Even mind, resignation, sequus animus.
Young, jiivenis, junior =juvcnior.
Age, time of life, eetas, atis,/.
About, de (governs ahlai.).
Agricultural operations or affairs, res rustical.
Of such a kind, ejusmbdi.
Wind, ventus, i. m.
Season, tempestas, atis,/.
Multitude, multitudo, inis,/.
To meditate, meditation, meditari, meditatus.
To leave, . relinquCre, rellqu, relict.
To learn, discSre, didic.
To appear, seem, videri, vlsus.
To govern = moderate, limit, moderari, atus {accua.).
To number, numerare, av, at.
Exercise 11.
70. Meditate upon''> this daily, that you may leave life with
an even mind. He told many falsehoods'^ about his age, that he
might appear younger (than he is). Do not learn many things,
t From qud dies {as many days as there are) ; compare the Greek hvfintpai. In
dies {daily) = day c^Ur day^ day by day ; when, that is, we speak of a thing
increasing or diminishing daily. In ' in dies^* therefore, oi * in dies singvlos^*
each day is considered as a term of a progressive series. Quotidie is ' every
4ayy daily* in both senses ; either, that is, when the simple repetition of an
action is to be expressed, or its repetition combined itith progressive vncrease
or decrease.
§ 12. 71-77.] TIT WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 37
but useful things. He spoke much (23, 1,) that he might be
thought wise. Agricultural afiairs are of such a kind that the
winds and seasons govern them." I know that my father does not
learn many things, but much. I will live virtuously, that I may
die the more courageously.* He lived virtuously, that he might
l,eave life with the greater resignation. The multitude of stars is
such *®^ that they cannot be numbered. There are some who
promise to help me.
^ 12. English Infinitive translated by ' ut ' with the subjunctive.
71. Oi^The Infin. never expresses a purpose in prose Latin.
72. (a) The English Infinitive expressing a purpose may be
translated by ut with the subjunctive.
73. Whenever the English infinitive may be taraed into in order thatf or
thcUf with mat/ or mighty it is to be translated by tU with the aubjundioe,
74. Thus, " / am come to see you" =i " I am come in order that Imay
see you." Here my seeing you is obviously the jmrpoat of my coming.
But in many verbs this relation of the purpose is more obscure.
For instance
I adTnse > to do it J ^ advise or exhort you, in order
I exhort S "" ( that you maydo it
^^^ I youtodoit= SI <uk, or beg you, in order that yon
I begy &c. S ( may do it.
Icammandyou to do it = ^ command you, in order that you
c may do it.
I strive to do it = I strive in order that I may do it.
75. * By 'ttf* translate infinitive
With ask, command, advise^ and strive.
But never be this rule forgot,
Put *m* for* tit* when there's a *not.*
76. But of verbs signifying *to command,^ jubeo takes ace. and
infin, — [See however note"* 219.]
77. (a) Romulus, tU civium numerum augeret, asylum pate-
fecit, Romulus, to increase the number of his citizens,
opened an asylum.
« Q" '/«' is the proper pronoun for the ikird person, when there is no
distinction to be expressed between a nearer and remoter object, and no refer-
ence to be strongly marked.
▼ The neuter of the comparative adjective is used tor the comparative adverb.
38 UT WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. [§ 12. 78.
(b) Militibus imperavit, ut clypeos hastis percuterent^ He
commanded the soldiers to strike their shields toith
their spears.
(c) Enitar, ut vineaniy I wUl strive to conquer.
{d) Magno opere te Junior, ut hos de philosophic libros
studiose legos, I earnestly advise you to read atteiu
tively these hooks about philosophy.
(e) Capram monet, ut in pratum descendat, He advises the
she-goat to come down into the meadow*
(f) Hoc te rogo, ne* demittas animum, I beg of you not
to be disheartened. (Literally, not to depress your
mind.)
[C. XIV.] When ' that ' introduces a consequence, * that not ' is
'\ ut non, not ne.
That-^not \^or a purpose ne.
( consequence. . .ut non*
78. VocABULAEY 12. (Verbs followed by ut.)
To ask, rbgare, av, at.
To strive, niti, more commonly eniti, nisus, and
nixus.
To advise, suadere, suas, suas (dot. of person).
To warn, monere, monu, monit {ace, of person).
To exhort, hortari, adhortari, tatus.
To command, impSrare,^ av, at (dot.).
To charge or commission, mandare, av, at {dai.).
To direct, tell, when spoken of > - . ^.
an instructor, ) *- > > i** i*
* For neftUneis found with no perceptible difference of meaning. Z. Grot^
Jend thinks that Cicero uses tUnein the following cases : (1) when the negative
does not so much belong to the lohole clause^ as to a particular part of tt^ e, g.
the verbf or quiBf quid; (2) when a demonstrative pron. or pronominal adverb is
expressed or implied in the preceding clause ; (3) when without ut^ ne would
stand by a word to which ne is often appended, as noro, an. He says that tU ne
is foimd, though Less commonly than in Cicero, in PlautuSy Terence^ Ovid, Ac. :
but four times (and that in doubtful passages) in Livy, and not at all in Cteear
and Thcitiu.
^ Juberey to orders bid (with the notion of the thing being right, or of the
person having a right to order) ; tmperarej to command with power; presdpere,
to directy from being qualified to do so by superior knouledge ; mandare, to give
a diarge or commianon to a person ; edicere, to declare officially as a magistrate,
to publish a proclamation.
§ 18. 79, 80.] UT WITH THE SUBJUlfCTIVB. SO
To order, by a proclamauon, or J ^^ ^ ^^^
edict, to publish an edict, 3
To decree, decem^re, crdT, crSt.
Perseverance, perse verantia, ae,/.
Fury, ftiror, Oris, m.
Senate, senitus, fts, m.
Dress, vesfitus, fis, m.
To return, rediv > (re and eo).
To hold a levy of troops, to levy } delictum habere.
troops, )
Consul, consul, consiilis, m.
To assist, j&yare,juvi, jGtum.
To suffer, pati, ior, passus.
To take by storm, per Tim expugnire.
By letter, per literas.
Exercise 12.
79. I ask you to do this. I asked you to do thb. Strive to
assist me. He is striving to govern the winds and seasons. He
warned Caesar not to believe the Gauls. Do not believe the Gauls.
Do not lie. Religion warns men not to He, It is certain, that
the boy is striving to ham. I will exhort the boy to learn. We
know that virtue and vice are contrary to each other. He pub-
lished- an-edict, that the Senate should return to its (usual) dress.
He had charged Treboniud by letter not to sufier Marseilles' to
be taken by storm. His perseverance is as great as^^ his fury.
The Senate decrees, that the Consuls should levy troops.— There
are some who lie.
§ 13. Utf &c. continued.
80. (a) In sentences where ' ut ' should be used (to express a
purpose), if a negative follows, ne takes its place, and the qffirmO'
five pronoun or adverb is used. Thus
X eo, voi {U generally in the compounds), Tfttm. Pres., eo, igfit} rmut, UU,
euni. Imp. tbam, Fut. ibo. Imperat. i Subj. pres. earn. Imp. irem. Part.
t«n«, ewnJtia. Gter. evmdi, Ac.
f Maseilia.
40
UT.
[§ 13. 81-83.
that nobody y
that nothingy
that nOf
that never,
not,
ut nemo,
ut nihil,
ut null us,
but,
ne quis,
ne quidy
neuUusy
ne unquam.
ut nunquam,
81. (6) But i[ the f^ntence IB ti cq/wequencCy then ut nemo f Ac. ahouldhe used.
82. (a) Alexander edixit, ne quis ipsum alius, quam Apelles,
pingeret, Alexander published an edict, that no other
person than Apelles should paint him (^Purpose),
(b) Cimon fuit tantd liberalitate, ut nunquam hortis suis
custodem imposuerit,* Cimon was (a person) of such
liberality, that he never appointed a keeper for his
gardens (Consequence).
83. Vocabulary 13.
It remains,
It follows ; the next thing is,
rellquum est, restat.
sequitur.t
That (offer reliquum est, restat, > ^^ ^^^ ^junctive),
and sequitur,) >
To desert,
To make this request pf you,
To leave == go out of,
City,
Town,
First,
At first,
For the sake of.
For my sake,
Fear,
Unwilling,
Glad, jo)rful,
desgfgre, seru, sert.
illud te rogare.
excedSre, cess, cess {ablat.).
urbs, urbis, /.
oppidum,' i, n.
primum.
primo.*
causlt.
me& causS.
timor, oris, m,
invitus. a, um.
laetus, a, um.
(Liot.) He did it imwiUing ; glad; joyful.
{Eng.) He did it untDHlmglij ; gladJIy; joyfully.
* The use of the perfect subj. in this example instead of the imperf. will be
explained in another place [418. (a)]. It is not to be imitated in doing the
exercises.
t Abait uty * be it far from me? (as given in the earlier editions), belongs to the
later poets and Appuleius. Instead of it we should use velim fwc abait; or quod
proeul abaiif inserted parenthetically. .
■ ** Oppidum proprie infra urbem est ;" but all cities and towns came to be
(frequently) denominated oppida except Rome. (Valla, quoted by Crombie.)
* Primo is sometimes used for ^firaV but not primum for ^ at first* C.
§ 14. 84-88.] qniN. 41
Exercise 13.
84. Religion warns (us) never to break our word. The boy
strives to learn nothing. I first make this request of you, to do
nothing against your will for my sake. The Consuls publish-a-
proclamation, that no one should leave the city. So great was
the fear of all men, that^'^ no one left the city. The Senate
decreed that the Consuls should hold a levy. It remains that I
should assist Balbus. There was no one but exclaimed, that it
was all over with the army. They had joyfully helped Balbus.
There were some who assisted Balbus. There were some
who denied that virtue and vice were contrary to each other. It
follows that you deny virtue and vice to be contrary to each other.
§ 14. Quin after verbs of doubting, dsc.
85. (a) When ' as not * with the infinitive follows * so* or
^ such ' in a negative sentence, it is to be translated by ' quin * with
the subjunctive.
i:^ The sentence before quin is alwajrs negative, (An interrogative
sentenee that expects the answer 'no,' is in eifect a negative sentence.)
86. (b) * But,^ * hut thaty' or * that,' after verbs of doubting,
denying, restraining, &c., in negative sentences, must be trans-
lated by quin.
87. (c) After negative sentences the participial subdantive governed by a pre-
position (especially after the verbs mentioned in 86) should be trans-
lated by quin, with euibj.
88. (a) Cleanthes negat ullum esse cibum tarn gravem, quin is
die et nocte concoquatur, Cleanthes says that no food
is so heavy, as not to be digested in a day and a
night,
(b) Negari non potest, quin turpius sit fallere quam falli.
It cannot be denied, that it is more disgraceful to
deceive than to be deceived.
(c) Nunquam adspexit, quin fratricidam compellaret, She
never saw him without calling him fratricide.
Vix inhiberi potuit, quin saxa jacSret, He could
. scarcely be prevented from throwing stones.
42 quiN. [§ 14. 89-92.
89. Vocabulary 14. [Of words, &c., followed by quin.l
Not to doubt, non dubitare.
There is no doubt, non est dubium (it is not doubtful).
It cannot be but that, < fieri non potest quin.
I cannot refrain from, temperare mihi non possum.
It cannot be denied, negari non potest.
To leave nothing undone to, &c. nihil praetermittere quin.
I am not ignorant, non ignoro.
World, mundus, 1, m.
Design, consilium, i, n.
Sometimes, interdum.
Exercise 14.
90. Who doubts that virtue and vice are contrary to each other 1
It cannot he denied that it is disgraceful to lie. Who doubts that
the world was made by design ? I don't doubt that both you and
Balbus lifted up your hands. He never sees CsBsar without crying
out that it is all over with the army. I left nothing undone to
finish the business. I cannot hut help' Balbus. It cannot be
denied thai Caius has had a prosperous voyage. I cannot refrain
from leaving the city. No one is so good as not sometimes to sin.
There were some who left the city. I am not ignorant, that
Caius has lost the opportunity.
91. Non possumus, quin alii a nobis dissentiant, recusare, We
cannot object to others dissenting ^rom us.
Minimum abfuit (impers,) Octavianus quin periret, Oc-
tavianus was very near perishing. (Or, But a little
more, and Octavianus would have perished,)
92. Vocabulary 15. (Words and phrases followed by quin.)
Not to object, non recusare.b
To be very near, to be within a 7 minimum abesse (to be used imper-
very little, J sonally).
Not to be far from, hand multum abesse, or haud procul
abesse (impersonally).
To kill, ' interficere, io, fBc, feet.
Of iron, iron-hearted, > ferreus, a, um.
Children, libCri (plur.).
b From re and causa. •
§ 15. 93-97.]
quoMiNirs.
To love,
amire, St, it
A letter,
liters (plur.).
Truly,
vere.
The soul,
animus, i, m.
The mind.
mens, mentis,®^
Immortal,
Immortalifi, i% e.
Exercise 15.
48
93. He was toitMn a Utile of being killed. It cannot be denied
that it is disgraceful to break one's word. It cannot be denied
that duty commands us to keep (75) our promises. I am within a
very little of being most miserable. No one is so iron-hearted as
not to love his own children. I cannot but^^ send you a letter
daily. That you may be able to learn much, do not learn many
things. The truly wise man will never doubt that the soul is
immortal. I will not object to your banishing me. I will not
object to your all leaving the city. It cannot be denied thai the
rational-faculty should (debeo) command the heart. It cannot be
that the mind is not immortal.'*
§ 15. Quominus,
94. Verbs of hindering are generally followed by quominus.
This quo minuM (by which the less) =:zut eo mintu {that the lew by U),
95. With verbs of fearing, * that ' must be translated by, * ne ;'
* that not* by ' uU'
a) * ThaJtnat* may also be translated by 'ne fum,' which is stronger
than *vt?
96. [C. xv.] After verbs of fearingy the "Eng.Juiwe and the participial
avbstantive are translated by the preeent or imperfect subjunctive with
ut orns.
97. (a) Quid obstat quomlnus Caius sit beatus ? What pre-
vents Coins from being happy ?
(Or, quid obstat Caio'^ quominus sit beatus ?)
c AnimOf the breath of Ufe, the vital principle (common to all living things).
Animu9f * the Mm/,' the mind with its passions, emotions, appetites, Ac, * the
heart.* MenSj the intellectual faculty ; the rational faculty. Hence animus should
be used for mtiu2, when it means disposUUm^ tpirit^ Ac.
<i With quid ehstai (especially when (he per sen is represented by a pran. of the
first or second person), the dot. is generally omitted. Unless it be a pron., it
44
QUOMINUS.
[§ 15. 98-100.
(h) { Vereor ne veniat, I fear that he will come.
( Vereor ui veniat, I fear that he will not come.
98. {En^.) What prevents Cains from being happy 1
{Lai.) What prevents, by tphich Gaius should be ^ less happy?
99. Vocabulary 16.
(Verbs that may be
To prevent,
To deter,
To hinder,
It is owing to Gaius that,
To endure,
To fear,
Nothing,
To obey.
To increase,
By sea and land,
followed by qibOmimu.)
obstaxe, obstU, obstlt {dot.),
deterrere, deterru, deterrit
impedire, Ivi, Ttum.
per Gaium stat quominus, Ac.
sustinere, tinu, tent.
vereri, veritus ; timere ; metugre, me-
tUL«
nihil {indeclinable).
parere, ui itum {dot.).
augere, aux, auct, trans. ; cresccre crev,
cret, {intrans.).
terr& marique.
Exercise 16.
[Is quotidie or indies used of daily increase or decrease 1]
100. What prevents us from doing this ? Nothing prevents
you from doing this. Nothing deters a wise man from obeying
the laws of virtue^. Nothing deterred Caius from obeying the
laws. I fear that I shall not endure such^"^ labours. I fear that
he loUl not be able to endure such labours. I fear that I shall
increase your labours. What prevents us from waging war by
sea and land 1 What prevents you from carrying all your pro-
perty with you ? Do not pretend to be mad.^ It cannot be de-
nied that vice increases daily. It was owing to Caius that we did
not wage war by sea and land.
will then stand as nom. to the next verb. After deter^ <ftc., the ace. should be
express^ unless it be a pronoun of the first or second person.
* Timere, metuSre, vereri, are all used for fear ; but (1) if a revereriXval or
humble fear is to be expressed, vereor should be used ; (2) if an anxious fear of
a threatening evil, m^ttiere. Metus is the^ear of the mind arising from a con-
sideration of circumstances and appearances : timor^ the fear that arises from
the body ; from timidity. (See D. v5reri.) Vereor^ which expresses the least
degree of actual/ear, should be used to express doubt or/ear about the happen-
ing of such an event, or the truth of such an opinion. Formidare, * to dread,*
oigretu and lasting fear.
§ 16, 17. 101-106.] INTERROGATIVE WORDS. 46
VI.
§ 16. Interrogative Sentences.
101. Questions (when xrUerrogaiive pronowu or adverbM are not used) are
generally asked in Latin by interrogative partides.
102. (a) Ne asks simply for information, (b) Num expects
the answer *no ;' (c) nonne, the answer *yw.'
103. Ne is enditic; that is, always appended to a word, and written as its
last syUable,
104. (a) Scribitne Caius ? J* Cam« writing 7
{h) Num putas . . . ? Do you think ? { = you don't
think, do you ?)
(c) Nonne putas . . ? Don't you think ? ( = you do
think, don't you ?)
Quid 1 nonne canis similis est lupo ? What ? is not
a dog like a wolf ?
§17. Interrogative Words,
105. Who ? (quis.) -How 7 (qut, abl. : with an adjective^
quam.) How does it happen thai ? (qui fit ut . . ? with subj,)
C cur ( = cui rei).
^^y ^ \ quare^ ( = quSL re).
When? (quando?) {Quum is never interrogative.)
Where,
Whence,
Whither,
ubi, } C ibi,
unde, > relatives to < inde, hinc,
quo, I ( eo (hue, illuc).
Exercise 17.
106. Have not the good and wise been banished ? Are not
virtue and vice contrary to each other ? Do men govern the
r Quare {wherefore) is only used when the cause is decidedly asked : when,
that is, an answer is required. Cur is used whether an answer is required or
not : hence it is the proper word in expostviatory and objurgatory sentences.
46 DEPENDENT QUESTIONS. [§ 18. 107-115.
winds and seasons ? [No.] Shall we not all die ? Wais not the
world made by design ? Do we not owe very much to our parents ?
Was it not owing to you that we did not leave the city ? Was
not Caius withiiji a very little of being killed ?'* Were not the
waves such***' as you had never seen before ? Whence do you
come ? (or, Where do you come from ?) Did all promise to help'
you ? [No.] Did he not promise unwillingly to finish the busi-
ness ? Do we not all hope to live* a long while ? Has he not
finished the business satisfactorily ?• There are some who*"*
deny that Caius has finished the business. There were some
who reviled me. '
I ;
§ 18. Dependent Questions,
107. A dependemi question is one that is connected with a preceding word
or sentence.
108. Dependent questions foUoib and depend on such words as to aak^
doubty know, or not know, examirUf try, &c.
109. (a) (b) (c) The verb in a dependent question must be in
the subjunctive mood.
110. In English, dependent questions are asked by whether; or by inter-
rogative pronouns and adverbs.
111. Since wftat and w?io are also relaiives, but the relative is in Latin a
different pronoun, care must be taken to use quia, quid, (not qui, quod)
in dependent questions.
112. [C. XVI.] OCT" Who, what, whicJi, are often dependent
interrogativesy especially after verbs of asking,
knowing, doubting, &c.
113. After most of these verbs the dependent sentence stands as the
accusative to the transitive verb.
114. The verb in an accusative sentence must be in the sub-
junctive mood.
115. (a) Dubito, nwm« id tibi suadere deheam, I douht whether
I ought to give you that advice.
8 Obs. In a dependent sentence, num is * whether,'' and does not necessarily
imply that the answer *noMs expected. If, however, the answer ^no* w ex-
pected, num should be used, not ne.
§ 19. 116-119.] DOUBLE QUESTIONS. 47
(h) Quaesieras ex me, wmne ptUarem, dsc, You had in"
quired of me whether I did not think, <Sz;c.
(c) Quis es ? — Nescio, quia sis.
116. Vocabulary 17.
To inquire, quaerere, quaesiv, qassit.
Of (after inquire), ez (with ablat,).
To say, dicSre, diz, diet.
Well ^ rightly, recte.
Dog, canis, is, com. gend.
Like, similis, is, e (dot.),
Wol^ Itfpus, i, m.
"^ p^e^'' '• »• " *"°« *° ** I saUn. esse.
I don't know whether, I almost > haud scio an, or nescio an {wUh tub"
think, I am not sure that— not, ) jtmeL),
Dishonourably. turpiter.
Exercise 18.
117. Where do you come firom ? I will ask him where he
comes from. Ought I to do this ? I douht whether I ought to do
this. He asked whether a dog was not very like a wolf. I
donH know whether he has not said well. He said that he did
not^ know.'* Balbus has not come, as far as I knoto,^^ Is it not
better to die than to live dishonourably ? I will leave nothing un-
done to finish ^^ the business to your satisfaction^ I will ask (him)
how great the waves were. Who does not know how delightful
it is to be praised by the good ? I will inquire of Balbus how
many there were. There are some who^"' have inquired of
Balbus.
§ 19. Double Questions, Use of ^ on' in single questions.
118. (a) (h) In double questions ' whether ' is to be translated
by utruniy num, or the appended ne; ^or^ by an.
Num in direct questions is only to be used when the answer ' no ' is
expected.
119. (c) {d) (e) But in dependent questions 'whether' is
often untranslated, and * or ' translated by an, anne, or the ap-
pended ne.
48 DOUBLE QUESTIONS. [§19. 120-122.
120. (/) An is often found before single questions, but this was at least
not a common practice with Cicero, <&c. When an is so used, there is
always an ellipse of the (^er possibility, which may generally be e(up-
plied without difficulty.
(a) The supposition involved in the question is often obviously absurd;
80 that assent is really demanded to the suppressed alternative. The
force of such a question may often be given in English by ' then*
(/?) This use of ^an ' is often found in replies ; between which and the
preceding statement an expression of assent or dissent must be supplied.
(y) There is the same suppression of the first supposition, in hatid sdo^
or nescio an ; dubito an ; incertum est an ; qua:ro an ; consulo an ;forsi'
tan (fors sit an), &c. {Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 190.)
^^ ' Or ' in questions is to be translated by an or ne ; never by aut in a
proper double question ; when, that is, one question is to be answered in
the affirmative, the other in the negative.
121. (a) Utrum ea vestra an nostra culpa est ? Is that your
fault or ours ?
(ft) Permultum interest, utrum perturbatione aliquSl animi
an consulto et cogitato fiat injuria, It makes a very
great difference, whether an injury is done from
some perturbation of mind, or deliberately and pur^
posely.
(c) Stellarum numerus par an impar sit, incertum,
Whether the number of the stars is even or odd, is
uncertain,
{d) Quseritur unuswe pit mundus an plures, It is a ques^
tion whether there is one world or more.
(e) Servi liberine sint quid refert ? What does it signify
whether they are slaves or free ?
(f) An'- turn quoqueest utilis (iracundia) ? Is (passion^
aieness) useful even tlien ? [Is it not then preju-
dicial 1]
122. Vocabulary 18.
It makes a very great dijfference, permultum interest.
What difference is there 1 what ) . , .
difference does It make 9 ( quid interest 1
*■ In the following passage the suppressed alternative is so obvious, that tr«
might introduce the question by ' or.^ Cur misereare potius quam feras opem,
si id facere possis ? an sine misericordia liberales esse non possumus 7 Why
akotdd you pity^ rather than assist them if you can ? Oif is it impossiblejor us to
be libeind without pitying ?
§ 20. 123, 124.] MAT, MIGHT ] CAN, COTTIJ). 49
There is no diiference, nihil interest.
Beasts (in their wild state), £SraB.
To drink, bibere, bib, bibit
Wine, vinuni, i, n.
Water, aqua, ae, f.
Death, mors, mortis,/.
Sleep, somnus, i, m.
Beginning, initium, i, n.
Another ^ a second, one more, alter, altera, alteram, Oai. altenus, Ac.
Or not (often without a yerb, as) ^ ^^^ ^ ^^^n, usually m dxr^
the second member of a dou- > ^^^^ ^ ^,^,j^ yu«.<««,.
bl%question), ^
Exercise 19.
123. What difference does it make whether you drink wine or
water 1 Whether the Romans have conquered or are conquered,
is uncertain. Was the world made for the sake of men or
beasts ? Is death an eternal* sleep or the beginning of another
life ? It makes a great difference, whether death be a perpetual
sleep or the beginning of another life. Whether the Romans
have conquered or not, is uncertain. // ^
/
§ 20. How to translate may, might ; can, could, &c., Vfhen ihetf
are principal verbs,
124. Mat ; perf. Might (permission). Licet,' it is permitted.
b By necne the questions are joined coptUatvodyf by an non adveraaihefy. In
rucne therefore the question is made, as it were, one; and no opinion of the
speaker's is implied as to the thing's being so or not. In an non the notions
are opposed to each other, either simplyt or so that it is implied that the one is
more prcbabU than the other {Hand).— The verb Is more frequently repeated
with necne than with annon : the only instance of necne in a direct question is
Cic. Tusc. 3, 18. Sunt hoc tua verbOf necne? (K.) Necne generally occurs in
d^endent questions.
« jEtemite^ without beginning or end, *etemalJ SempUemus is 'ever-
lasting* *perpetiudf* * eternal* in a looser sense, without reference to an
eternity without either beginning or end. SempUemus is therefore the right
word here.
d Licet, it is permitted^ or lawful^ by hwman law (positive, customary, or
traditional) : fas est, it if permiUed by dboine law (including the law of
8
50 UA7, MIGHT ; CAN, COULD. [§ 20. 125, 126.
Pbes. (mihi) ire licet, I may go,
(tUn) ire licet, t?um mayest go7
&c.
Pebf. (mihi) ire licuit, I might have gone.
(tibi) ire licuit, thou mightesi have gone.
^c.
125. Can; perf. Could (pouter, possibility). Possum,* eaUf
am able*
Pbes. (eg'o) facere possum, lean do it.
(tu) facere potes, thou canst do it.
&c.
Pebf. (ego) facere potui, I could have done it.
(iu) &cere potuisti, thou couMst have done it.
&c.
126. Ought; seovld {duty, propriety), j ^^^ V' ^'ST'*'
Pbes. (me) facere oportet' < ^ toaos f ^^^^^ fecere debeo.
(te) facere oportet < ^, * > (tu) facere debes.
( to do (it) )
conaeimee): concessom est, U ia permitted^ comprehends both as a general
expression.
* OPf queo : eemnot, nequeo (Inf. quires nequire^ like eo). Possum relates to
the abiUty of the doer; queo to the feasibUUy {to him) of the thing to be done.
Possum^ I am do it, if no external hlnderances occur : queo , I can do it, because
there are no external hinderances, sufficient to prevent me ; lamina condition
to do it. This is expressed by saying that possum denotes subjecUoef queo objeo'
tvoe possibility : or (in DoderlnrCs words) possum quantitative^ queo qualitatiDS
possibility. DSderlein observes: "The best prose writers, as Cicero and Sal-
lust, and even Pliny and other later authors, frequently use queOj but (like quis'
quam and vUus) only in negatvoe propositions : that is, only in such as actually
contain a negation, or at least are of a negatvoe character."
f Necesse est, expresses necessity; oportet^ duty or propriety; opus est^ advisa-
bleness. Debeo is the corresponding personal form to oportet, as indigeo to opus
est. Oportet expresses the moral dawi; debeo, the moral obligation of a par-
ticular person to satisfy that claim. Debdre is generally supposed to be de-habere,
* to have/rom' a person, and therefore to owe it to him. Doderlein is inclined
to refer it with debilis, to Ha, ie6a, to toant,
i Or, I should do {it). 7
Thou^umldttdo{%e^ S^^'
§ 20. 127-132.] MAY, MIGHT ; CAN, COULD. 51
(te) facere oportuit | ^,,'^) j (te) facere debuisti.
(a) Or, with the subjunctive governed by * irf' omitted ;
(ego) faciam oportet,'» I ought to do (it),
(/u) facias oportet, thou oughtest to do (it).
128. 0:^ May, might ; can, could ; should, &c., when they
stand in principal clauses, are not auxiliary but princtpal verbs ;
and must be translated by the proper tenses of Ucet, possum^
oportet, or deheo, &c.
129. Mayy might, are often used of events the possibility of
which is granted by the speaker. May or might is then equivalent
to may (or might) possibly ; may for any thing I know.
r may happen, ^ it is to be trans*
(a) When * may ' = < may possibly, > lated hj fieri
( may for anything Iknow, j potest ut
{Fieri potest ut fallar, / may be deceived.)
130. The perf. infin. after a pa>st tense of a verb expressing
duty, possibility, permission^ &c., is generally to be translated by
the pres. infinitive.
HhaX is, the time is marked by the tenae of the verb expressing duty,
^., and the pre«. injin. marks the time rdaJtvody to that verb. If it is
meant, tliat the action should ftooe htenpomptet^ befort the time spoken
o^ the peif. infin. must be used.
131. [C. xvir.] QCr'May,^ ^ might,' sometimes mean 'ean,'
' could,' and must be translated by possum.
[C. xviii.] OCT The pejf. infin. must be translated by the
present infin. after might, could, ought, unless the
action is to be represented as over before the time
to which might, could, &c., refer.
When the infin. perfect follows * ought,' * ought ' is the perfect.
132. Vocabulary 19.
To be the slave o^ servire, servlvi, servltum (dot.).
To spend, or lead, a life, agSre, Bg, act.
i> Legem brevem esse aportetf A law ought to be short.
Me ipsum amea oportet, non mea, You ought to love me^ not merely (Mngo
behngingtome.
52 APPOSITION. [§ 21 . 133-136.
Virtuoua, honorable, honestus, a, um.
Chaste, castus, a, um.
Moral, sanctus, a, um.
To shed one's blood, profundSre, fud, fus.
For = in behalf of, pro (gOTems dblcU.).
Country = country of one's birth, > p^^,..^ ^^^ ^
or citizenship, )
To snatch away, take away, eripSre, ertpu, erept.'
To take away a man's life, vitam alicui i enpSre.
Exercise 20.
[N. B. A parenthetical ^then* in an interrogative sentence is used to
indicate that *an' is to be used.]
133. May a meui be-the-slave-of glory ? [No.] Ought we
not to have obeyed the law*, of our country ? What ought I to
have done ? I asked what I oughf^ to have done ? No man
may take away another's life. It cannot be denied, that he has
led a very moral' life. Ought he not to have shed his blood for
his country ? There is no doubt, that he lived a very disgrace-
ful' life. Ought' we (then) to be the slaves of glory ? Ought'
he not to have obeyed the laws of virtue ? It was owing to you
that** my life was not taken away by Caius.
VII.
§ 21. Apposition.
134. When to a substantive or personal pronoun there is added a sub-
stantive (without a prepontion) explaining or describing it, the latter is
said to be placed in appoaUion to the former. * Alexander the conqueror
of Persia.'
135. A noun in apposition may be turned into the predicate (nom. qfler the
verb) of a relative sentence.
136. (a) A substantive in apposition must agree in case with
the substantive of 2&Afc A it is spoken.
i Obs, The person^om whom is put in the dot. This dot, may be explained
thus : it is the person towards or against whom the actioh of snatching away
life is directed.
k The pluperf, must here be used, for the imperfect would fix the duty to tlto
Ume of asking.
§21. 137-142.] APPOSITION. 58
137. (b) If the flubstantive of whkh it is spoken he feminine, the fern,
/om should be chosen for the substantive m appotUion, wlienever
there is one.
138. (c) If the principal word be the name of a totm,i with
urhs or oppidum in apposition to it, the verb or participle gene-
rally agrees with the apposition instead of the principal noun.
(With this exception, agreement with the principal noun is the ruU^
though' a rule that is not ahoayM observed.)
139. {d) The English *a«/ ^uhen^* *for* standing with a noon, axe often
omitted, and the Latin substantive placed in oppomHan,
140. {Eng.) The city of Rome. The island of Cyprus.
(Lot,) The city Rome. The island Cyprus.
141. (a) Alexander victor tot regum atque populorum, Alex-
ander the conqueror of so many lungs and nations*
{Usus magister egregius. Experience an admirable
teacher,
Philosophia magistra morum, Philosophy the teacher
of morals.
(c) Volsimi, oppidum Tuscorum opulentissimuniy toUim
concrematum est fulmine, Volsinii^ the most wealthy
town of the Tuscans^ was entirely destroyed (burnt)
by lightning.
(d) Mdem Salutis, quam consul voverat, dictator dedi-
cavit, He dedicated as dictator the temple of Salus,
which he had vowed when consul.
142. Vocabulary 20.
To take, cXpCre, io, c£p, capt.
King, rex, regis, m.
Philosophy, philosophia, sb, f.
Inventor, inventor, Oris ; inventrix, Tcis.
Teacher, magister, tri ; magistra, as.
Manners, morals, characteTi mOres, um, m.
Discipline, dlscipllna, », f.
Frugality, frugalitas, atis, f.
Parent, genitor, 5ris ; genltrix, icis.
Athens, AthSnsB, arum, f,
Branch-of-leaming, doctrina, s, f.
Maker, causer, effector, oris ; efiectrix, icis.
1 The name of a people often stands with the substantive dvitoM^ in apposi-
tion to it in the singular; ^CamumeMee, qxuB est longe firmissima totius pro-
vincis cmtaa,* Css. Bell. Civ. it 19.
54 NOMINATIVE AFTER THE VERB. [§22. 143-146.
Wisdom, saplentia, sb,/.
Happy, beatus, a, um.
An old man, sSnex, senis, G, plur. Benum*
To wish, desire, be willing, velle, vttlu,
To blot out, efface, destroy utterly, dslere, (ielev, deldt.
Treaty, foedus, eris, n.
To renew, rSnovare, iv, at.
Exercise 21.
143. Apiolse, a town of the Latins (LcUini), was taken by king
Tarquinius. Philosophy was the inventor' of laws, the teacher'
of morals and discipline. Frugality is the parent' of virtues. It
cannot be denied, that philosophy was the inventor' of laws.
Caius used to call" Athens the inventor" of all branches-of-
leaming. It cannot be denied, that wisdom is rightly called the
maker of a happy life. I do not desire the same things as an old
man, that I desired when a boy (p. 14. 15, h). jj I have left nothing
undone to finish^^ the business to your satisfaciion. It was
owing to you** that the city of Rome was not destroyed by fire.
The treaty between the cities of Rome and Lavinium* has been
renewed. Has not the treaty been renewed between the cities
of Rome and Lavinium ? Ought not the treaty between the
cities of Rome and Lavinium to have been renewed ?
- /
/ < 7
§ 22. Nominative after the verb, — Attraction of the predicate,
144. (a) If the verb esse, &c. standing after a verb that is
immediately followed by the infinitive, has a participle or adjec-
tive with it, it will stand in the nominative case.
145. (5) After a verb of wishing, &c.p the accusative of the
pronoun is sometimes expressed, and sometimes omitted, if it means
the same person as the nom, of the principal verb.
146. (5) If the ace. is omitted before the infin,, the noun or parti-
ciple with the infinitive is attracted into the nom, case.
"» i:^ * Wotdd* or *u8ed to^ may be considered as signs of the Imperfeet.
(Dicebat, would say; used to say.) n Plural.
• Inter Romam Lav^Lniumque urbes.
P StudU ct deaiderii.
§22. 147-150.] NOMINATIVE AFTEB THB YSBB* 65
147. (c) After verbs of declaring^ &c.4 the accusative under
the same circumstances, is sometimes^ but less commonly omitted.
148. (c) When the ace. pronoun is omitted before the m/En.
after a verb of declaring, &c., the adjective or participle is gene^
rally attracted into the nominative ; but sometimes not, especialty
when it is the part, of the fiU. in ruSy esse being omitted.
149. (a) Soleo (possum) esse otiosus, J am accustomed lobe {I
can he) at leisure.
(J) Vuh V**' esse J»TOC^p«m, j ^ ^j^ tohetkejirst.
( esse prvncepsy . )
(c) Ait '* *^ ^^"^^ \HeMy*a<aheu ready.
( esse" paratttSf^ )
Facturos"^ pollicentur, They promise to doit.
150. VocABPLART 21. (Of Appositton-Verhs.^)
To become, to be made, fiSii, factus.
To turn out, eyadSre, erifl, evis.
To be named = appointed, nominiri, nominaU^
To be elected or chosen, eligi, electus.
To be made (of an appointment ) ^^^^ ^^^^^^
to an office), J
To be bom, naaci, natus.
To be considered, or held, babSri, habitus.
To seem, appear, viddri, visus.^
To be rendered, reddi, reddxtns.
An orator, orator, Oris, m.
4 SaUiendi d dedarandi.
' Cicero is fond of inserting m after vdle,
• In Cicero the pronoun is seldom omitted except after J^i<ert^ dieere, opmari,
and similar verbs. (Ochsner.)
t Bentley says : ' ait esse paraium * " ne Latinum quidem est ;" wUch, how-
ever, Kriiger thinks Is too much to say.
u But the participle of thefut, ace. standing (with the omission of eMe)for the
Jui, vryin. is sometimes aitractedy especially in poetry. ' Vitura et quamvis
nunquam speraret Ulizen.* Propert. ii. 7. 46. < FenAtraque rauco \ Ore mina-
tur hiems. Stat, Tfub. i. 347. So with other predicates. * Retulit Ajax 1 Ewe
Jovis pronepot.* ' Acceptum re£ero versibus, €tte nocmaJ * Seiuit medios de-
lapsus in hostes,' ^c. (K.)
^ By appontum-verbs are meant the verbs that make no complete predieaief
but require a noun after them, which is rather in appoeUion to the subject {file
nam, to verb) than governed by the verb.
^ Tb appear must be translated by videri, when it means to teem; by appoi'
nre, wh^ it means to come into eight g to be eeeng to beemdeni.
56 n^-THrs after esse. [§ 23. 151, 152.
A poet, poeta, s, m.
To be wont, or accustomed, stflere, solitus sum.
To desire. cupSre, cupiv, cupft.
To have rather, malle, malu,
Rich, dives, divxtis.
To begin, coepisse ; incipBre, cep, cept,*
Troublesome, molestus, a, um (with dot.).
To cease, leave off, desinSre, desii, dealt.
Timid, timid us, a, um.
To go on, continue, perg^re, perrez, perrect.
By accident, c&su.
Exercise 22.
15K I had rather be-in^good-health' than be rich. I begin to
be troublesome to you. Cease to be timid. There is no doubt
that the boy will turn out an orator. Do not continue to be
troublesome to Caius. It cannot be denied that Balbus seems
wise to many persons. No one is bom rich. No one becomes
good by accident^. Numa Pompilius was made king. It was
awing to you iha^ I was not made king. He promises to perform^
the business (omit esse). No one can be happy without virtue.
i There is no doubt, that no man can be happy without virtue. I
had rather be a good man, than seem (one). Many persons can-
not turn out orators. A poet is born, not made. Wos the world
made by accident or by design ? j; \
§ 23. Dative (xfier esse.
152. fa. J. c. d,) When esse^ &c., having the same subject as
the principal verb, follows a verb that governs the dative, if the
X CoBpi has only the tenses derived from the 'perf. CcBptua eat is used for
its perf. before pass, infinitives. So desUus est (ceased), though more rarely.
(Zumpt.) When he add s that the perf.^ phtperf.y andfut. perf. have respectively
the meanings of the pres.y imperf.^ and simple future^ I believe him to be mis-
taken, for : (1) In many passages ccepi has certainly the meaning of the perf.
(2) In many more, I think in all, the Latin idiom requires one of the perfect^
where we should use one of the imperfect tenses. Ccepi is regularly joined only
with the infin. : incipio with {infin. or) a noun (as its subject or object) : and
eoBpi dwells more on the action begun ; incept gives more prominence to the
biginmng that is made, and is altogether more emphatic. (D.)
§28. 153-155.] DATIVE AFTER ESSE. 57
accus. pron. is omitted, the noun after esse either remains in the
accus. or is (more commonly) attracted into the dativeJ
153. (a) Expedit honcLs esse vohis, It is expedient for you to be
good women.
(h) Licet esse heaUs^ They may he happy (if they please).
(c) Medios esse non licet, We may not be neutral.
(d) Mihi negHgenti esse non licet,* J may no< he negligent.
154. Vocabulary 22.
(Verbs in the third person gOTeming the dot., and often used with a
sentence as their mbject.)
It is permitted, licet.
I have leisure, Tacat mihi (but dot. of prwioun gener-
ally omitted when the person Is
known).
It is given, datur, datum est. '
It is expedient, expSdit.
It is profitable, prodest, profuit, Ac.
It is injurious, hurtful, nbcet.
Negligent, negUgens, tis.
Neutra], medius, a, um.
Luxurious, luxuriSsus,* a, um.
Exercise 23.
155. Let us be permitted^ to be miserable. Let us be per-
mitted to be neutral. There is no doubt that no man may be neu-
tral. It is injurious to be negligent. There is no doubt that it
is expedient for all to be ^Dod. Many persons doubt what is ex-
pedient for them. It is not given to all to be wise. It is expe-
dient for no man to be luxurious. I have no leisure to be luxu-
rious. It cannot be denied that few have leisure to be luxurious.
There is no doubt that it is profitable to all to spend a virtuous'
life. There is no doubt that a wise man would rather be-in-good-
health^ than be rich. There is no doubt that no one becomes
good by chance. Had you rather be rich, or be-in-good-health ?
y The gen. and ablai. are never attracted in this way. We may not say :
' Interest Ciceronis esse eloquenHa :* * damnor a nolente esse bono.* {K.)
■ 'Per quam non licet esse negUgentem* (sc. miki). (Catull.)
*■ Adjectives in osu*y {nyUntnSf icfiw, denote being full of what the root ex«
presses.
b Let-it-be-permitted to tts.
3*
r ~* '*
\.
M.-*-
-•■■%?
§ 24. 162.]
THE GSNITIVX.
59
king's cause. Timor externuSy Fear from taiAaut ;
. fear of foreign enemies,
(c) Quantum voluptatis, Hmo mucA pleasure, Aliquid
temporiSy Same time, Nimium temporisy Too
much time. Multum boni, Much good. Plus boni.
More good. Quid novi? (what of new? 8=)
What new thing ? what news ?
(Obs. Bom, maUf novi, falsi, are used as subsiantiioes after
these neuters.)
162. VoCABTri.ART 23.
€rratitTide,
gratia, «,/.
Benefit, faYOur,
beneficium, i, n.
Weight, burden,
tfnus, Kris, ft.
Heavy,
gravis, is, «.
Light,
tBvis,is, e.
Flight, escape from,
fuga,«j,/.
Labour,
labor, 5riB, m.
Remedy,
lemedinm, i, n.
Anger,
ira,B,/.
Tooverpower,(bya violent emo- )^^,^^^ lrtg,fiict (UtenUy to brak).
Care,
eura,B,/.
Not one's own ; of others,
alienua, a, nm.
Aflair,
res, rei,/.
Difficult,
difficili8,is,6.
Silver,
argentum, i, n.
Gold,
aurum, i,n.
Nature,
rerumnatfinu
Of Abdgra,
Abdeiftes.*
Advantage = profit, gain,
emolumentum, i, it.
To receive or gain advantage.
emolnmentum capSre ; cfip, capt
Replies; says be,
inquit (always following a won! or two
of the reply).
Compassion, pity.
misericordia, n,^
Poor,
pauper, paupSris.
What,
quid.
Too much.
nimium.
More,
plus.f
* Names from one's nathe town end in Ensis ; Avus (frt>m tO'
Inus with i (from towns in to, ium) ; as, O. atis (from townsiin
Greek nouns the a4jectives generally end in itu (often with somi
root) ; also in UeSf ites, totes ; and in au9 from a. Those from to
origin, but not in Greece, usually end in tnuo. (Z.)
( Pbu, plurif, only in the aing. Plur. phareSf plvra, G. phurhan^ do
58 THE GENITIVE. [§24.156-161.
I asked him whether he had rather be-in-good-health or be wise.
You ought not to have heen}^^ neutral. J/,,
}
VIII.
^ § 24. The Genitive.
156. (a) The Romans often used a dependent genitive where
toe use prepositions ; in, for, with, &c.
167. Almost every substantiye that depends so closely on another as to
form almost om notion with it, may in Latin be expressed by the geni-
five, no matter what preposition we should use in English.
158. The genitive is joined attribtUively to its substantive, and as no two
languages exactly agree, it often happens that what one language ex-
presses by an adjective^ another for want of an adjective would express
by the genitive case. Hence —
159. (6) Whereweusetheg-ent^tpeor the preposition 'of' with a substantive,
an adjective may often be used in Latin.
160. (c) Where we use a substantive with an adjective agree-
ing with it, an adjective in the neuter is often used in Latin, with
a genitive governed by it.
(a) These adjectives are indefinite numerals and demtmstraUve pronouns.
They are only used as quasi-sjtbstantvDes (governing the gen.) in the
nom. and ace. singular.
(fi) The following are peculiar phrases : id temporis, at that time : id
etatis, of thai age : quid aetatls? of what age 7
161. (a) Gratia beneficii,^ Gratitude for a kindness. Mu-
lierum Sahinarum injurise, The wrongs done to
the Sabine women. Luctus Jilii, Grief for his
son. Suarum rerum fiducia. Confidence in his
own chairs. Pyrrhi regis helium, The war with
king Pyrrhus.
(b) Res alienee. The affairs of others (or, Other people's
affairs). Causa regia, The royal cause ; or, The
« * The genitive is suhjectivey when it denotes that which does something,
or to which something belongs : it is ohjectvoe^ when it denotes that which is
the object of the feeling or action spoken of. The objective genitive usztally fol-
lows the noun on which it depends.' (Z.)
§ 24. 162.]
THE GBNITIYX.
59
king's cause. Timor exiernuSf Fear from wUhoiU ;
. fear of foreign enemies,
(c) Quantum voluptatis, JBoto modi pleasure. Aliquid
temporiSy Same time. Nimium temporis. Too
much time. Multum boni, Much good. Plus boni.
More good. Quid novi? (what of new? 8=)
What new thing ? what news ?
(Obs. Bonif maUj nom^ falsi^ are used as suJbstantiioes after
these neuters.)
162. VOCABULAST 23.
Chratitude,
Benefit, fayouTi
Weight, burden,
Heavy,
Light,
Flight, escape firom,
Labour,
Remedy,
Anger,
gratia, IB,/.
beneficium, i, n.
tfnuB, Kris, n.
graviBjis, «.
tBria, Li, e.
fuga,«j,/.
labor, Oris, m.
remediam, i, n.
ira,«j,/.
To overpower, (by a violent emo- ) f„,j^^ f^^ f^ (QeenUy to braQ.
tion,) )
Care, eura, e,/.
Not one's own ; of others,
Afiair,
Difficult,
Silver,
Gold,
Nature,
Of Abdera,
Advantage = profit, gain.
To receive or gain advantage.
Replies; says be.
Compassion, pity.
Poor,
What,
Too much,
More,
alienua, a, nm.
res, rei,/.
difficilis,is,6.
' argentum, i, n.
aurum, i,n.
rerumnatfinu
Abdexftes.*
emolumentum, i, it.
emolumentum capSre ; cfip, capt
( inquit (always following a woni or two
c of the reply).
misericorcUa, e,^
pauper, pauirtSris.
quid.
pinyj i im -
plus.f
* Names from one's noftve town end in Ensis ; Avus (from tO'
Inub with i (from towns in to, {um) ; as, O, atis (from townsiin
Greek nouns the adjectives generally end in iaa (often with so:
root) ; also in UeB^ iteB, idUt; and in aus from a. Those from tow:
origin^ but not in Gretee^ usually end in frmt. (Z.)
t PbUf plurif, only in the sing, Plur. jdures, plvrOf G. pharkan, StQ
60 THE GENITIVE. [§25. 16&-168,
How much, quantum.
Much, multum.
Nothing, nihil (indecl. neut aubwt.).
No time, nihil tempOris.
Exercise 24.
163. Is gratitude for a bfsnefit a heavy weight ? [No.] Is not
death an escape from labours ? There is no escape from death.
Are there not many remedies against anger ? Good men are
often overpowered by compassion for the poor. The care of
other people's affairs is difficult^. We all lose too much time.
Is there more silver or gold in nature ? It was owing to you'*
that I did not keep my promises. We are now of such an age,
that we ought to bear all things^ courageously. It cannot be de-
nied that Pythagoras of Abdera was a very great philosopher.
Antisthfines was asked what advantage he had received from (ex)
philosophy. Antisthenes, being asked what advantage he had
received from philosophy, * To be able,^« says he, * to converse
with myself.'** How much time do we all lose ! It cannot be
denied that we all lose much time. There were some*** who
lost much time. '.
§25. The Genitive continued. (Partitives. Grenitivus Qualitatis.)
164. A jHxriUive adjective is one that ezpresfles mmte individuals consid-
ered as parts of a larger number or body.
Partitive adjectives are, therefore, such as whickf every, eadiy both,
9onu, Ac, with ordinal numerals, ecmparaavea^ and superUUixea,
165. (a) A partitive adjective governs a noun in the genitive.^
166. The gender of the partitive adjective is generally the gender of the
governed genitive, because that expresses the thing meant,
167. (6) But sometimes the genitive is the name of a country of which the
person is one inhabitant : of course then the adjective agrees with man
understood.
168^c) Also when a superlative, or solus, &c., governs a gen.,
k PaTlitives are often followed by the prepositions meaning from, out qf,
^fmmigat (e, inter, de), instead of by the genitive.
§25. 169-175.] THE GENITIVE. 61
and is also (with the gen.) spoken of another substantive, the
partitive agrees in gender, not with the gen., but with the other
substantive*
169. {d) A substantive having an adjective agreeing mth it, and
describing a former substantive, stands in the genitive or ablative.
J (It may be used attributively or predicativdyf as an adjective, that is,
to the substantive, or after the verb to be.)
If the description be merely numerical, the genitive only can be used.
170. (e) Opus esti (there is need) is followed by an ablative of
what is needed. The person who needs must be put in the dative.
171. (/) After opuB eat, an English substantive is often translated by u pas-
sive participle,
172. (g) But the thing needed is oflen the nam. to the verb sum ;
or the ace. before esse.
In this construction the verb mm will agree, of course, with
its Twm,
In the former, it is always in the third permm sing. ; opua beiog its
real nom.
173. {Eng.) r I have need of food.
(Lot.) ^ (1) There is a business to me with food {abl. without prep.).
or (2) \ ^^^ is & business to me.
I These things are a busioess to me.
The second construction is preferred with neuter pronouns and ad-
jectives. (Z.)
174. How many are there of you 7 = how many are you 7
There are very many of you, =r you are very many.
Few of rohom there are, =: who are few.
When *qf* with a demonstrative or relative pronoun follows a phi-
ral numeral or superlative, the numeral often expresses aU who are
meant by the pronoun ; and then the pronoun and the numeral must
be in the same case in spite of *of\^
175 [C. XIX.] X^ ' Of you,* ' of us,* are not to be translated after Jww many,
or other numerals, when the vshole party are spoken of.
i Opus est {it is a ta^ or business). Grotefeqfl, comparing the Greek fpyov
larl Ttvot, thinks that the ablative originally expressed ^ means by which the
busioess is to be accomplished. Probably opus esse had, in various construc-
tions, come to have nearly the meaning of to be necessary or required : and then
other constructions were commonly, or 6ccasionally, used before the ablaOee
prevailed. Plautus uses even the accusative, as if i^ were the otject required:
the gen. is still sometimes found : probably the preference was at last given to
the abl., from that being the usual case after verbs of needing, or requiring,
k Consider, therefore, after such words, whether the pronoun expresses mors,
or no more, than the numeral.
62 THE GENITIVE. [§25.176,177.
When of vs^of youj are omitted, the verb will be of the^r«^ and sec-
and pers. respectively.
176. (a) liter vestrum ? Which of you ? Alter consCdum^
Ojie of the consuls, Graecorum orcUorumprcBstan-'
tissimusy The best of the Grecian orators,
{h) Plato totius GracicR docHssimus, PkUo the most learned
man of all Greece.
(c) Hordeum est frugum molHssimum, Barley is the softest
species of com.
(d\ J ^^^ summo ingenio,^ A man of the greatest ability.
I Vir exceUentis ingeniij A man of distinguished ability.
Ingentis magnitudinis serpens, A serpent of immense
size.
Classis septuaginta navium, A fleet of seventy ships.
(e) Acuto homine nobis opus est. We have need of an acute
man. Quid opus est verbis ? What need is there
of words ?
(f) Properato'' opus est. It is necessary to make haste.
(g) Quarundam rerum nobis exempla ^ermxiltA opus sunty
Of some things we have need of a great many
examples.
177. VOCABULAEY 24. '
Which (of two), uter, utra, utrum ; g. utrius.
Each (do.), uterque ; g. utriusque.
Another; one (of two things), a > ^^^^^ ^ alterum; g. alteriua.
second ; one more, )
1 According to the German grammarians, the gen, denotes a permanent^ the
(ibl. a temporary state. Grotefend says, the gen. is used of a thoroughly inhe-
rent and permanent quality, penetrating the whole being, and making the thing
what it is : whereas the abl. is used of any part or appendage of the thing spo-
ken of, and only so far as it manifests itself; which part or appendage, more-
over, may be accidental and temporary. To establish this he quotes : " Murena
mediocri ingeniot sed magno studio rerum veterum, rrndtm indtutruB et magni
laboris fuit.*' 'Murena showed but moderate talents, though a great zeal for
antiquarian pursuits ; industry and laborious perseverance constiitUed his diar-
aeterJ Why not as well or better, ' He Stowed great industry and persever-
ance; but his mind was {essenHaUyj and, permanently) one of little power,
though with a great fondness for antiquity?' Was his ingmium (the vnrhom
power of his mind) a less permaneni quality than his xndwitria 7 Zumpt says :
' With essCf Cicero seems to prefer the abV
n Properare is used of a praiaeworthy haste for the attainment of a purpose j
§ 25. 178.] THE GBNmYB. 68
Of Miletus, Haieslus (162, e).
Greek, GnscuB, i, m.
Roman, Romanus, i, m.
To predict, foretell, pnB<Ucere, dix, diet.
Eclipse, defectio, OiUs,/.
Sun, sol, BdUs, m.
Body, corpus, corpdris, n.
Food, meat, cibus, i, m.
Drinking, drink. potio, Onis, /.
Serpent, serpens, entis, eom,gmiL
Immense, ingens, ingentis.
Size, magnitudo, inis,/.
Lemnos, Lemnos,* iff.
To find, discover, invenire, yen, vent; repei!^ rep6r|
repert.®
Custom, consuetudo, inis,/.
Nature (U e. a man's nature), natura, sb,/.
Money, (often argentum, i, n. silver).
To draw away, avttcare, iv, it.
Connection, conjunciio, Onis,/.
Honour (i.e. probity, trustworthi- 7 fides, elf.
ness), >
( making haste, ^ properato.
' There U need qf} deliberation, > consulto.
( prompt execution, ) mature fiicto.
Exercise 25.
178. One of them was a Greek, the other a Roman. ThalesP
of Miletus was the first of the Greeks who' predicted an eclipse
of the sun. I did the same when (139) consul. He says (aiti)
Jeatinare = to be in a hurry. An adj. properue was formed from pro (JMh^
forwards)^ as inferus, ezterus, from their prepositions. (D.)
a Greek nouns in oe of the eeoond decL are declined like Latin nouns of the
2d, but have ace. on or unt.
o * InvemOf properly to come upon any thing, expresses the general notion of
to find: reperiOf like to find out nnd todiecoverf implies that the thing found was
before hid^ and was sought fin- with pains.' (D.). Crombie observes that inve^
nire is the proper word for the fiicuUy iteeffi when we talk, that is, of the power
of diaeovervng generally, without adding to^; i. e. without an aeeueatwe after
it He quotes from Cicero^ 'vigSre, sapere, invenire^ meminisse,' a passage
which plainly proves that invenire does not exdude the notion of seardiingf
though it does not Qikereperire) necessarily imply it
P Thales, dtis.
^ Fari is to talk; use arHculate speech: loqui, to speak or talk (opposed to
tacdre^ to be silent) ; dicere is to My, the tranaitice form of loqui. As disHu"
64
THE GENITIVE,
[§ 25. 179.
that there is no occasion for making-haste. The body has need
of much food. Are not serpents of immense size found in the
island of '^ Lemnos ? It cannot be doubted that he is a man of
no honour. What need have we of your authority ? It cannot
be denied that the body has need of meat and drink. (We)
have need of deliberation. It cannot be denied that we have
need of deliberation. Is not custom a second nature ? Verres
used to say*' that he had need of many things. How much money
have you need of? I left nothing undone to" draw-away Pom-
pey from his connection withCsesar (156). How many are there
of you ?^ I will ask how many there are of them.
/
7
179. The top of the
mountain,
N. summus mons,
G. summi mentis,
&c.
The middle of the
way,
media via,
mediae vise,
The rest of the
work.
reliquum opus,
reliqui operis,
&c.
&c.
So, ima quercus, the bottom (or foot) of the oak ; universa
Grsecia, the whole of Greece : sapientia prima, the beginning of
wisdom .: extremus lib^r,*^ the end of the book, <Sz;c.
Some English substantives relative to position, are often translated
into Latin, by adjectives agreeing with their substantives. Such are,
endj middle^ whole, top, &c.
These adjectives generally stand before their scibstantives."
., :^
guished from loqui, dicere expresses a more artificial on. ^tH^ed speech, loqui
being to speak in the style of ordinary conversation. As distinguished from
ajo, dicere is to speak for the information of the hearers, ajo expressing the as-
sertion of the speaker, as the opposite of nego. Hence ajo is I say ^ I assert,
affirm, maintain (but somewhat weaker than these words). JnquU (which Do-
derUin derives from injlcU^ throws-in) is used to introduce the words of an-
other, and also the objections yrhicYi we suppose another to make. (Bentley.) It
is also used in a vehement re-assertion (* one, one Isar^).
' The adjective so used does not distinguish its substantive from other things
of the same kind, but a part of itself from another part. Thus summus mons
is the mountain where it is highest : not, the highest of a number of mountains.
■ Not, however, always, 6. g, * sapientia prima* (Bbr,), and, * In hac insulU
6^em4 est fens aquae dulcls,' &c. (Ctc. Verr. 4. 1 18.)
\
§25.180,181.]
TBB GENITIVB-.
§5
180. YoCABtrLABT 25*
The Alps,
Cold,
SnoW)
To melt,
To count, reckon,
Out of;
A thousand,
To survive,
Three hundred,
To swear,
Moon,
Lowest,
Planet,
Master = * master of a house,'
' owner of any property,' staves
as well as any other.
Wool,
Black,
White,
Some — others.
Only,
Chameleon,
To nourish, support,
River,
Neither— nor.
Alpes, ium,/.
firigiis, ttris,n.
nix, nivis, /.
UquesoSre, lieu,
numerSre, ftv^ it.
ex {ablat,),
mille (indecl. in sing. In plur. milUa,
him, ibu9,t &c.)
superesse, supeifui {dot,).
trScenti, sb, a.
jurare, ftv, it.
luna, SB, /.
inf imus, a, um.
planeta, or es, n, m.
\ dominus, i, m. ; kerus^ t, m. is a master
> only in relation to his servants or
) slaves.
lana, as, /.
niger, gra, gram.
albus, a, um.
alii — alii.
solus, a, um, O. solTus.
chameleon, ontis, or Onis, m.
Xlere, alu, alit or alt.
fltlmen, inis, n.
nee or neque, followed by nee or
neque.^
Exercise 26.
181. On the top of the Alps the cold is so great, that the snow
never melts there. Count how many there are of you."' Out
of (ex) so many thousands of Greeks (but) few of us survive.
Three hundred of us have sworn. The top of the mountain was
held by T. (Titus) Labienus. The moon was considered the
lowest of the planets. It cannot be denied that custom is a
second nature. Slaves are of the same morals as*^ their master.
t MUle the adj. is indeclinable.
« * Nee and neque stand before either vowels or consonants.' (Z.) Mr. Ridrg|^
die says : ' in good writers nee is found usually only before consonants.; neqtJm
before vowels.' But merely taking the examples as they are given in Broder's^
Grammar, we have from Cicero^ *nee sibi neealteri;' 'ne^iMnaufragio neque
incendio ;' * nee hominum ;' * negu^perfringi.'
66 THE GENITIYB. [§26. 182-184.
Who is there hut'^ understands that custom is a second nature !
Caius promises that he will finish the rest of the work. Three
hundred of us have finished the rest of the journey. Of wools
some are hlack, others white. The chameleon is the only animal
that^ is nourished neither by meat nor drink.^ The Indus is the
largest of all rivers. '/
§ 26. The Genitive conUnued. (Gen. after adjectives.)
182. Adjectives which signify desire, knowledge, recoUectum,
fear, participation, and their opposites ; together with verbals in
ax, and many of those that express fulness or emptiness, govern
the genitive.
(a) These adjectives have an incompUU meanings and may be compared
with transitvDe verbs. The governed substantive expresses generally
the object of aome feeling of the mind.
183. (h) To this class belong many participles used adjec-
Uvely.
(c) In Poetrjr* the gen, may almost always stand . after an adjective^
where its relation to the adjective might be expressed by *wUh
regptGlto,*
184. (a) Avidus novitatis, Crreedy of novelty, Insidiarum
plenus, FuU of plots. Beneficii immSmor, Apt-to^
forget a favour. Rei maritimse peritissimi, Very
skilful in naval affairs. Magnse urbis capax> Able
to contain a large city.
(Ji) Yeritatis amans, Attached to truth ; a lover of truth.
Amans patriee, A lover of his country. Officii
negligens, Negligent of duty.
(c) Audax ingenii, Bold of temper ; of a bold temper.
Insolitus servitii, Unaccustomed to slavery. Insue-
tus laboris (Cos.). Fidissima tui (Virg.). Seri
studiorum (Hor.). Utilis medendi (Ov.).
<" Potus, ta, " Potio is the act qf drinking^ and that on which this action is
performed ; a draught! a liquid aipaUowed: potua is drinking^ and drink ia ittelf,
without reference to the action" (R.)
V And in TocUub, who has : vetus regnandi, summus aeverUoHg, &c.
§ 26. 185.]
THB OSMITIVJC*
67
185. VOCABVLABT 26.
To hate,
Courage,
Contentioii,
Truth,
Philosopher,
Glorious,
Jest,
To hesitate.
To undertake,
In-such-a-maimer,
Not eyen,
Nothing but,
Odisses (with tenses deiiTed from the
perfect).
Tirt&s^Htis,/.
oontentio, Onis, f,
Teiltas, itis, /.
philosophos, I, m.
gloriOsus, a, um.
jtfcus, i, m.
dttbitire,' It, it.
Buacipere, cSp, cept.
xta.
ne — quidem, (with the word the even be-
longs to between them ; ne jHeo qwf
dem^ not even in jest.)
nihil aliud nisi , (the following adj. Is
not to agree with nihil but with the
substantiye afternm.)
To take in good part, to receiye ) boni consttlere,* snlu, suit ; in bonam
fiiyourably. > partem accipCre.
(A4iectiyes goyeming the Grenitiye.)
Mindful,
Unmindful, apt-to-forget,
Negligent, careless o^ inatten
live to,
Greedy,
Eagerly-desirous,
Fond, desirous,
Skilled in,
Unacquainted with, ignorant o(
mSmor, ttris.
immemor, tf ris.
; negUgens, tls.
ayidus, a, um.
8tudi5su8, a, um.
cupidus, a, um.
peritus, a, um.
rudis, is, e.
X Of this yerb the perf.f plvptif., zndfut. per/, are respectiyely ueedjbr (that
is where toe should use) the prea., imperf., and simple fvJt, This is the case
with most yerbs that express simple emo^ion^ and optraiianB of the mind, which
are completed the moment they exist. The moment I do hate, I have hated ; the
moment I do know, I hace known.
y Dubitare, to htaitate, is generally followed by inf.
* So, tequi boni (or lequi bonique) iacere, to take in good parts to he taiigfied.
Lucri facere, to turn to account; to get the credit of. In boni connUere, boni is
probably a gen. of the price or value, consulere being used in its first sense
(according to Riddle) of * to think upon, whether by oneself, or with others.' He
deriyes it from an obsolete coneo, from which censeo is deriyed. Doderieki
thinks con-sulere meant originally ' to ait down ' (from the same root as «oMum,
«eZ-la, and perhaps sol-um), and that boni is an old ady. (of the same form as
heri) ; so that boni consulae = bene considas or aequieacaa. It occurs in Quint.,
Sen., Ac. : not, I belieye, in Cicero.
68 THE GENITIVE. [§26. 186.
A partner \ censors,* tls (properly a4JM one who ha9
' C the same lot).
A lover of, attached to, amans, tis ; diligens,* tis.
Productive of, efficiens, tis.
Such a lover of, adeo amans, or dillgens.
Exercise 27.
186. All men hate (him who is) apt-to- forget a kindness.
Courage is greedy' of danger. Many are fonder of contention
than of truth. Pythagoras calls (those who are) eagerly-desirous
of wisdom philosophers. All men ought to be mindful of benefits
(received). Cicero has lost Hortensius, the partner** of his glori-
ous labour. That (Iste) beisest of all men is the same that he
always was. Epaminondas was such a lover^ of truth that he
did not utter-a-falsehood even<* in jest. We ought all to be such
lovers of our country as not to« hesitate to shed our blood for it.
I will warn the boy not to become inattentive to duty. He said
that he was not' negligent of duty. It cannot be denied, that we
ought all to be lovers of our country. He begs me to take these
things in good part. They say that virtue is not productive of
pleasure. Let war be undertaken in-sucb-a^-manner that nothing
but peace may seem (to be) sought for. .
/
• Soeiu9, * a companion ;' ' associate ;' ' member of the same society $' * sharer
of the same fortune;' in which last meaning it is synonymous with eonsors,
ComeSf 'companion,' 'fellow-traveller.* SodalUy ' companion in amusement or
pleasure.' (C.)
Consortta fortuna eadem, eocws labor idem ;
Sed caros £Eu:iunt schola, ludus, mensa wdale*
Vir comis multos oomUea sibi jungit eundo,
Com-it-es, am and < i^,' as in supine of eo.
* Amare expresses the affection qflove; dUigere (properly ^ to choose apart) the
preference of one object to another. ^ therefore any thing of deliberate dunce
or preference is to be expressed, diUgere should be used.
b Consors. Sociua would imply that they shared the same toil, not that
Hortensius had a separate share of the same occttpation.
• Diligens with gen., his attachment to truth being a principle with him.
In the next sentence, amansj because, though patriotism should be a principle^
affection for one's country is the thing required.
d Say : ' that he uttered a falsehood not even in jest.*
* A consequences not a purpose.
§ 27, 187, 188.]
THE 6ENIT1VB.
69
§ 27. The Genitive continued.
187. (a) (Eng,) To prefer a capital charge against a man.
iTo make a man an accused-person of a capi-
tal matter.
Aliquem rei capitalis reum facere.
(by (Eng.) To bring an action against a man for bribery,
(Lat) Aliquem de ambitu reum facere.
(c) (Eng.) To prefer a charge of immorality against a
man.
(Lat,) Aliquem de moribus reum facere.
(d) (Eng.) He has informed me of his plan.
(Lat.) Certiorem me sui consilii fecit.*
188, VOCABULAEY 27.
(Adjectives governing the gen.)
Tenacious,
Capable of containing,
Without,
Accused of.
In his absence,
Bribery,
Extortion,
Assault,
Impiety,
tenax, acis.
capax, acis.
expers, tis (er, para),
reus f (from res),
absens, tis {adj. agreeing with the aube.).
ambitus, iis, m. from ambire, to go
round, to canvass. Properly, there-
fore, to accuse a man de ambUu is,
' to bring an accusation about his can-
vassing ;' and then, as ' reum facere
de moribus ' is ' to accuse of immoral-
t/y,' so to accuse him de ambitu is ' to
accuse him of improper, illegal can-
l vassinjg",' i. e., of bribery,
res or pecunis repetundse ; or repetun-
dse atone; properly things or moneys
to be claimed back.
vis ff {violence).
impietas, atis, /.
* Certiorem facere may also be followed by abl, with de :
* Eum de rebus gestia certiorem faciunt.'
f " Reos appello non eos modo qui arguuntur, sed omnes quorum de re dis-
ceptatur; sic enim olim loquebantur." (Cic. De Orat. 2. 43.) From the oUm
it is plain that reus had come to be used of the defendant almost exclusively.
s Vis, vis, — , vim, vi \ vires, virium, Ac, Gen, vis m The., but very
rare.
70 THE GENITIVE. [§28. 189,190
To prefer a charge against, reum faoSre.
To inform, certiorem facSre ; fee, fact.
To learn, discSre, didic,
Design, plan, consilium, i, n.
Full, plenus, a, um.
Danger, perlculum, i, n.
Exercise 28.
189. We are very tenacious of those things which we learned
as*'*^ boys. The island of Pharos is not^ capable-of-containing a
great city. They are going to prefer a charge of immorality
against Caius. They have brought an action against Caius for
an assault. They have preferred a charge of impiety against
Caius in his absence. I left nothing undone to^' inform CsBsar of
my design. I fear that he will not*' inform me of his design. It
is disgraceful to be without any learning. I fear that he will
not keep his word. He promised that he would^' leave nothing
undone to draw away Pompey from his connection with**
CsBsar. There is no one but'^ believes that you will be without
anyi dangers. He wams^ us that all things are full of danger.
There are some who"' deny that virtue is productive of
pleasure, r
f/
§ 28. The Genitive continued,
190. (a) Such a substantive as property, duty, part, mark, &;c.,
is often omitted in Latin after 'to he ;' so that to he is followed by
a genitive governed by this substantive, or an adjective in the
neuter gender agreeing with it.
(Such a noun as officium, munus, indicium, &c., must be under-
stood.
This geniUve is construed in various ways in English : and therefore
b Nan is *not:* haud is * certainly not,* *turely not,* used especially with
adjectives^ adverbs^ and impersoTud verbs,
1 * Any^* after expers, must be translated by omnis, * aUJ
k When Ttumeo does not mean to warn or advise mb to do {ox not to do) some-
thing, it takes ace. with injln, (not ut ne).
§ 28. 101-200.] THB GENrnvB. 71
there are varioiiB EogUsh phraaes that may be reduced to this con-
struction.
191. (a) Such phrases are ; it ia tharaderUtie qf; U it incumhent on; it i»for
(the ricli, Ac.,) i it it not every one who ; any man may ; it demanda or
retpdree; it betray e, showSy Ac. ; it belonge to.
When the adjective is of on« termination (and therefore would leaye
it doubtful whether man or thing is meant), it is better to use this con-
struction.
{* It is itise s* not ' oaipimB eat^^ but * oaffienti* e&t.*)
192. So when the predicate is an abstract noun in the nom., it is more
• commonly in the gen, in Lat— ' It is madnesMy* * dementiee est.'
193. (6) These genitives are used in the same way withyacere, JUri^ haberi,
dvcL
194. (c) Verbs of accusing^ condemning, <icquiUing, dec, take a
genitive of the charge.
195. (/) But if the duirgc be expressed by a neuter pronoun, it stands in the
aecusatvDe.
196. This construction may be explained by the omission of erimine, or
nomine, which are sometimes expressed.
197. (c) Instead of the gen,, the ablat. with de is very common.
198. {d) The punuhmevU to which a person is condemned, stands generally
in the ablat. ; sometimes in the gen., and often in the ace. with ad.
199. (e) Satago,^ misereor, and miseresco, govern the gen, :
verbs of reminding, remembering,^ and forgetting, the gen. or
accusative.
But verbs of reminding rarely take an aeetu. unless it be a neut.
jmmoun. Sallust has the three forms : admonere aliquem, rei; de re ;
and rem.
200. (a) Imbecilli animi est superstitio, Superstition is a
mark of {or betrays) a weak mind. Judicis est,
It is ike part (or duty) of a judge. Est boni
oratoris, It is the business of a good oraior. In-
genii magni est, It requires great abilities. Cujus-
vis hominis est errare, Any man may err. Meum
est, It is my business. Extremes est dementis, It
is the height of madness. Suae ditionis facere,
To reduce to subjection ; to bring under his domino
ion.
k Satagere (to be doing enough) : * to have one's hands full.'
I When memini and recorder signify *to make mention of^ memini takes
the^en., or ablai. with de; rewrdor, the ace. — Mtimini seldom takes the oee.
of a permm, except in the sense of remembering him a$ a contemporary. (Z.)
72 THE GENITIVE. [§ 28. 201.
(h) Tempori cedere semper sapientis est hahitutJh It has
always been held a wise thing to yield to the times.
(c) Proditiofiis accusare, To accuse of treachery. De
pecuniis repetundis damnari, To he condemned for
extortion.
(d) Capitis (or capite) damnari, To he capitally condemned
(or, condemned to death). Ad hestias condemnare,
To condemn to the wild beasts.
(e) Misereri omnium, To pity all. Meminisse prceterito-
rum, To rememher past events : meminisse heneficia,
7b rememher kindnesses. Officii sui commonere,
To remind a man of his duty. Dissensionum obli-
visci, To forget disagreements.
(/) Si uZ me accusas. If you accuse me of that. (So, id
me admonuit.)
201. Vocabulary 28.
To accuse, accusare,» av, at.
To charge falsely, to get "P a ? i„,j„^j j j,
charge againflt, >
To prosecute, po8tulare,« av, at.
To acquit, absolvSre, solv, solut.
To remember \ meminisse,P recordari,<» also to make
i mention of.
To forget, oblivisci, oblltus.
To remind, put in mind of, admtfnere, commonere, ui, Ytum.
rp^ t^y i miserSri,' miserltus, misertus ; miseres
C cSre.
To condemn, damnSre," condemnare, av, at.
™ Incusare is ' to aceuse^* but not in a court of justice.
» Properly, * to pretend a thing cLgainst a man.'
^ Literally, * to demand^^ 1. e. for punishment.
P With tenses derived from the perf. (See (k2£, 185, z.) Imperai, memento ;
pi. mementote).
^ Meminisse is, ' to retain in my recoUecHon,* * to rem^niber : ' reminisci is, ' to
recall a thing to mind,' < to recollect : ' recordari is, ' to recall a thing to mind,
and dwell upon the recoUecHon of it.' (D.)
' Miserari governs the ace. Miserari is ' to show compassion,' misereri^ * to
feel compassion,' as an act of free will, implying a generous mind, and thereby
distinguished from miseret m^ tui (I am miserable on your account), which car-
ries with it the portion of an irresistible feeling. (D.)
■ Damnare aliquem voti (or votorum), is, to condemn a man to pay his vow (or
vows) by granting his prayers. Also, damnare votie.
§28. 202.] THB GBNinVB. 7S
^- An Athenian, Athenieniis (IG^ •).
Socrates, Socrates, it, m.
Barbarian, barbarua, i, m.
To Uve for the day, forgetful, that 7 ^ ^^^ ^^g^
is, of the morrow, )
It is agreed upon, it is an allowed > ^Qg^^ t
fact, >
Superstition, superstitio, Snis,/.
Feeble, imbdciUus, a, nm.
To disturb, agitate, perturbire, &▼, it.
Constancy, firmness of mind, constantia, ae, f.
To persist, perseyer&re, iv, it
Error, error, 5ris, m.
Treachery, proditlo, Onis,^
Sedition, seditio, 5nis,/.
y A Christian, christiinus, i, m.
Injury, injuria, m, f.
Adversity, res adverssB.
To condemn to death, capitis damnire.
To acquit of a capital charge, capitis absolySre.
Religion, religio, Onis, /.
Exercise 29.
202. The Athenians (falsely) charged Socrates with impiety,
and condemned him to death. It is for barbarians to live for the
day (only). It is an allowed fact, that superstition is the mark of
a feeble mind. It requires great constancy not to be disturbed
in adversity. It is characteristic of a fool to persist in error.
It is your business to obey the laws of your country. It is not
every man who can leave life with an even mind. It was owing to
you that he did not accuse Balbus of treachery. He promises*
to prosecute Dolabella for extortion. He was condemned to death
by Augustus. Caius was acquitted of sedition by Augustus.
Do not forget benefits. It is the duty of a Christian to pity the
poor. It cannot be denied that (86) it is the duty of a Christian
to pity the poor. I fear that he will not" easily forget the inju-
ry. I fear that he will remember the injury. Did you not
admonish me of that (200,/) ? Adversity puts us in mind of reli-
gion. It cannot be denied that he has been acquitted of the capital
charge.
t Literally, U dandt togeihtr ai a eonsUtetU tmth.
4
74 THE GENITIVE. [§ 29. 203*206.
§ 29. The Genitive continued. (Impersonal verbs,)
203. (a) With interest and refert (it concerns or is important) ;
1) The thing that is of importance may be either (a) an infin-
itive (with or toithout ace.) or (/?) a neuter pronoun (hoc, idy illud,
quod :' so that they ^re not quite impersonal )j or a clause intro-
duced either (/) by an interrogative, or (S) by ut or ne.
2) The person to whom it is of importance is put in the gen.
with interest or refert ; but, instead of the personal pronouns, a
possessive pronoun is used in the ablative feminine : m^d, iud, sua,
nostra, vestrd : so cujd sometimes for cujus."^
3) The degree of importance is expressed either by the gen.
(magni, pctrvi, quanti, &c.) ; or by an adverb {multum, plurimum^
magnopere, nihil, &c.).
4) The thing with reference to which it is of importance is
governed by ad ; as mag;n,i interest ad laudem civitatis, it is of
great importance to the credit of the state,
204. (b) These impersonals, pudet, piget, pcenitet, tcBdet, miseret,
take an accusative of the person feeling, a genitive of what causes
the feeling.
205. What caustt iheftelmg may also be a verb (in the inJinUive, or in an
indicaiiot clause with quadf or a aubjuncHve one with an interrogcUitt
word).
206. (a) Intelligo quanti retpublicce inter sit omnes copias con-
venire, 1 am aware of what importance it is to the
republic, that all our forces should assemble.
Interest omnium recte facere, It is the interest of all
to do right.
Quid nostra refert ? Of whai importance is it to us?
(or, What does it signify to us ?)
Magni interest ad laudem civitatis, It is of great im-
portance to the credit of the state.
Magni interest, quos quisque audiat quotidie, It is of
great consequence whom a man hears every day.
« To be explained perhaps by reference to catiad, gratid. It seems to be
proved that these are (as Priscian teaches) ablatives, since the a is long : e. g.
Ter. Phoria. iv. 5, 11 : — Datum 6sse dotis. De. Quid tua, malum! id refert?
G/i. Magni, D^mipho. Refert zzreifert, for *adrem fert' or confert.
§ 29. 207, 208.]
THE GENITIVE.
75
IHud mek magni interest, te ut videara. It is of great
consequence to me that I should see you.
Vesird interest, commilitones, ne imperatorem, pes-
simi faciant. It is of importance to you, my com"
radesy thai the worst sort should not elect an em-
peror.
. (h) Ignavum paenitebit aliquando ignaoia^ The shthful
man toill one day repent of his sloth.
Me non aoXumpiget stultia mese, sed etiam pudet.
Icon not only sorry for my folly, hut also ashamed of
it, Tffidet me vitae, lam weary of my life. Tsedet
eadem audire milites. The soldiers are tired of
hearing the same thing. Tui me miseret, mei piget,
I pity you ; I am vexed at myse^.
207. VOCABULABY 28.*
interest, r^ert; the latter yery rarely
when a person is expressed, unless by
It concerns, it is of importance or
consequence, it is the interest o^*^
a pronoun ; principally in quid rtfert ?
what does it signify 1 what difference
does it make? and nihil nfert, it is
of no consequence, or makes no dif-
ference.
I am sorry for, vexed at, piget me.
I repent, am discontented or dls- > j^g^nUet me
satisfied with, >
I am ashamed o^ pudet me.
I pity, miseret me (see 201 ').
1 am disgusted at ; am weary or ) ^^^ ^^ . ^^ ^^ pertesum est.
tired o^
Like ; equal to ; as good as,
On account o(
To present.
Crown,
Golden,
instar ; an old subst. signifying a model
or image: and as such followed by
ihe genitive. It should only be used
of equality in magnitude, real or figu-
rative.
S ergo, governing and following the gmL
I tice. It is the Greek Ipyv*
donSre, av, at.
cordna, le,/.
aureus, a, um.
Exercise 30.
[What are the various ways of translating tM<&«r— «r?]
208. What difference does it make to Caius, whetlier he
76 THE DATIVE. [§30.209-212.
drinks wine or water ? It makes a great difference to me why he
did this. It makes a great difference to us, whether death is a
perpetual sleep or the beginning of another life. I will strive
that no one** may be dissatisfied with the peace. It is of great
importance to me, that Caius should'^ be informed of my design.
I will strive thai it may be your interest to finish the business.
It is your business to strive that no one may be dissatisfied with
the peace. We pity those men who have been accused of treason
in their absence. 1 will strive that no one may recollect my
error. I am ashamed of, and vexed at my levity^ (p. 14. 15, a).
I will strive that no one may be ashamed of me. It is your
interest that they should not condemn me to death. It is the
interest of all, that the good and wise should not be banished*
Plato is to me equal to (them) all. That (ille) one' day was to
Cicero equal to an immortality. He was presented (perf.) with
a golden crown on account of his virtue^.
(For the Genitiye of price see under the Ablative.)
IX.
§ 30. The Dative. (Dative with Adjectives.)
209. Adjectives which signify advantage, likeness, agreeable-
ness, usefulness, JUness, facility, 6^c. (with their oppowte*), govern
the dative.
210. But of such adjectives, several take a genitive without any essential
difference of meaning.
211. Natus, commodus, incommodus, utilis, inutilis, vehemens,
aptus, accommodatus, idoneus, may also be followed by ad with the
ace. of the object, or purpose, for which.
Propior (nearer), proximtu (nearest), take dot., but sometimes the acau.
212. Vocabulary 29. (Adjectives governing the dative,)
Grateful (both actively and pas- >
sively) acceptable ; agreeable, )
▼ SuoBoia and dubia are *9weet:* the former especially sweet to the sense of
avMingf the latter to that of taste ; both being used generally and figuratively,
§ 30. 212.] THB DATIVB. 77
Liable, subject, exposed to, obnoziiis, a, um.
Common, commwiis, is, e.
(A^'ectives that take Gen. or Dot.).
Like, similis,* is, e ; auperl, simillimus.
Unlike, dissimilis, is, e.
Equal, par,x pans.
Peculiar to, proprius, a, um. .
Foreign to ; averse to ; inconsis- ) ^^j,^y
tent with, S "»» «>™»
Friendly, a friend, amicus, a, um ; amicus, i, m.
Unfriendly, an enemy, inimicus.*
Allied to (of a feult), chargeable > ^j^j^^^ ^^ ^^
with, ^
Surviving \ superste8,b itis ; used substantiyely, a
' suTvivor,
(The following are often followed by * ad ' to express tLpurpow or
objtctffor which, Ac.)
Bom, natus, partic. of nascor.
Convenient;of character, obliging, commodus,^ a, um.
like our 'npeet.* JueunditSy that which directly causes joy and deUgfU. Cfratus^
that which is grateful or atx^tabU from any cause. AmoBnusy agreeable or de-
lightful to the sight, though extended to other things by later writers.
Dulcia delectant gustantem ; suavia odore ;
Jucunda exhilarant animum, sed grata probantur
A gratis : qusB visa placent loca, amcBna vocamus.
Do4erUin thinks that amcBnum is not * quod amorem pnsstat,' but is a sjrncope
for animcmum^ as CamcBnce for CamrnoBruBy and is equivalent to * ammo laxando
idoneus.'
* Similis takes gen. of internal, dat. of external resemblance. This does not
hold without exception ; but to express, Wee me, Hm^ Ac. (i. e. equal to), the^cfi.
should be used :
Ille tut simUis, mores qui servat eosdem ;
Ille tibi similis, faciem qui servat eandem.
X Similis expresses mere resemblance : ecqualis denotes mutual and absolute
equaJlity ; par, mutual congruity, proportionate equality. (C.)
7 Alienus also governs the abl., and especially with ab. * In the sense of dt»-
incUned, hostile, the prep, is rarely wanting.' (Z.)
B Hostis, properly a stranger; hence a public enemy (an enemy to my country,
not necessarily to m« personally). Inindcus, one who is an enemy to me per-
sonally. Amicus, inimicus, as adjectives, may be compared ; and as such generally
take the dat.
* Also to he implicated or concerned in (a conspiracy, ^c.) ; an objed (of sus-
picion).
b jEqualis and super stes have usually a dat. ; but the former more commonly
a ^6n., when it signifies a 'c(m/«mj9orary.' (Z.)
* Commadus (from con, modus), commensuraU with.
78 THE DATIVE. [§30.213.
Inconvenient, unsuitable, incommodus, a, um.
Fit, aptus, a, um.
Suitable, serviceable, idoneus,* a, um.
Fitted, adapted, accommodatus, a,^ um.
Useful, expedient, good, utilis, is, e.
Useless, inutilis, is, e.
Prone, proclivis, is, e.
Innocent, innocens, tis.
Word, . verbum, i, n.
Fault, culpa, ae,/.
Lust, , libido, inis,/".
Age = time of Ii£e^ setas, tatis,/.
(Eng.) Common to kings and peasants (or, to kings with peasants),
(Lot,) Commoii to kings with peasants.
Exercise 81.
[Should invenire or reperire b^'^edifor finding what has been sought 1 (177, o.)]
213. It cannot be doubted that (we) men are born for virtue.
It cannot be^ denied that it is very inconsistent' with your charac-
ter to lie. It is eaajp to an innocent man to find words. I fear
that you will not find words. It CEUinot be denied that death is
common to every ag[e. His father warned him not to think him-
self born for glory. I fear that these things are not*' useful for
that purpose (res). Don't you understand to how many dangers
we are eiposed ? I fear that these things will not be agreeable
to the rich. We all love (those who are) like ourselves.** Our
own ;^ngers are nearer to us (p. 14. 15, a) than those ^*^ of-
others. r He says that he is not^ chargeable with this fault. It
cannot be denied that he was of a character very averse from
* Jdoneus expresses a natural JUness actually existing, but that requires to be
cbservedf made avaUabUi or (if spoken of a person) called forth. Aptus ( = con-
yenienter junctus) expresses achud fUnesSy now existing. In use, the two words
may be thus distinguished :
(1) Jdoneus necessarily requires a purpose to be mentioned or implied. Aptus
does not necessarily require the mention of a piiipose, but may expresa;^^it is^
generally. (2) Jdoneus may express a person's fitness to suffer ^ to be W^ fipon.
Aptus expresses a fitness or readiness to ad. (3) Idanms^ spoken of a person^
describes ^finess that may never be observed or ixdled forth : aptus^ a fitness
actually existing ; that has been called forth, and is ready to act. [Jdoneus from
ideOf as tUtroneus from rdtro. (D.)]
< NOBtri, ^071. pi.
^ 31. 214, 215.] THE DATIVE. 79
impiety (p. 14. 14). There is no one but*^ thinks it inconsistent
with your character to keep your word. I wished to be like
Balbus (149, h). You, such is your temperance,* are the enemy
of (all) lusts' (jgen,), I will strive to discover what is"^ expe-
dient for the whole of Greece. I fear that these arguments are
not fit for the times. Are you exposed to these or greater
dangers ? / '
1.
< ' • *' Exercise 32.
[What is the Lat for delightful to the eyes.]
214. Are not your own dangers nearer to you than those of
others ? It cannot be denied that he is (a person) of a very oblig-
ing character. Many persons say that their own dangers are
nearer to them than those^ *^ of-others. They say that they are
not prone to superstition. Might he'^> not have spent*^* a more
honourable life ? It was owing to you that our life was not taken
away. Is philosophy' the best teacher of morals and discipline ?
[No.] He used to say that Athens was the inventor of all
branches-of-learning. It was owing to you that I did not turn out
an orator. I had rather be like Cato" than Pompey. Even Bal-
bus is not^ averse to ambition. It cannot be denied that (we)
have need of a mind averse from superstition. Have we done
more good or evil ? This is common to me and you. There is no
one hut understands that these things are common to the rich man
and the poor man. I cannot buP^ take these things ingoodpart.^
I will strive that nobody'* may pity me.« Is wisdom peculiar' to
you ? [No.] I fear the boy will not be the survivor of his
father. There is no doubt that we are come^*' into a very de^
Ughtful place.
§ 31. The Dative continued,
215. All verbs may be followed by a dative of the thing or
person to, for, or against which any thing is done. Hence —
• Begin with * Caioni^ and go on with * than Pompey.*
t *Not eyen Balbus is.' f Mueret^ not miterefi. See 201, r.
80 TEE DATIVE. [§31. 216-222.
216. The dative follows verbs that signify advantage or dis-
advantage ; verbs of comparing ; of giving and restoring ; of
promising and paying ; of commanding and telling ; of trusting
and entrusting ; of complying with and opposing ; of threatening
and &eing angry, &c.
217. 0:^ Of these verbs many are transitive, and govern
the ace.
(a) With these verbs the ace, expresses the immediate, the
dot. the remoter object of the verb.
218. (a) Verbs of comparing aie also followed by the prepM£^ion«, cum, in^y
and sometimes ad.
(6) Of verbs that signify advantage and disadvantage, juvo^ lado^ ddtda,
and offendo govern the ace,
219. (c) Of verbs that signify eommandt^ r^go and gvbamo govern the ace,,
tempera and moderor the ace, or (2a<.
220. T(?wipero and moderor with the (fa<. are 'to moderate,^ * re-
strain within pit>per limits :' in the ace. * to direct ' or *got?cm.*
Temperara ab aliqu& re = ' to abstain from.'
221. (a) Confer nostram longissimam setatem cum seternitate,
Compare our longest life vnth eternity.
Hominem cum homine comp^at, He compares man
with man.
Vitam utriusque inter se conferte. Compare the Uves
of both of them together.
(b) Librisme delecto, J amuse myself with books. Ofiendit
neminem. He offends nobody. Hsec Isedunt oculum,
These things hurt the eye. Fortuna fortes ad-jiivat,
Fortune helps the bold.
(c) Moderari animo, To restrain your feeling. Tempe-
rare sibi, To restrain oneself. Temperare ab
injuria, To abstain from (committing) injury.
222. Vocabulary 30.
(Verbs governing the dat. but followed by no preposition in English.)
Advise, snadSre.! suas, suas.
b Jubeo takes ace. with injin. It may be followed by 'u^* with subj. if used
absolutely, without the mention of a person. (Z.)
i AToiMTtf (properly, to make a man Hhxnk ofwmeQiing. D.) calls his attention
§ 31. 222.]
Beliere,
Command,
Please,
Displease,
Envy, grudge,
Help, aid, assist,
Heal, cure,
Hurt,
Indulge,
Favour,
Marry (of a female).
Obey,
Oppose,
Pardon,
Persuade,
Resist,
Spare,
Threaten,
To compare,
THE PATIYE.
61
( credSre, credid, credit ; (also to enJbruti^
\ with accua. ofwhcU is entrusted),
impSrare, &v, at.
placere, placu, placit.
difipIicSre.
^ invidere, ^d, vis (it may also have accuM,
i of the tiling grudged).
auziliari ; subvSnire, ven, vent ; succur-
rSre, curr, curs; opitulari, subievire
and juvare^take the accuaJ^
medSri.1
nOcere^ nocu, nocXt.
indulgere, induls^ indult.
&vere, fav, faut.
nubSre," nups, nupt {properly to veil).
( parere (of the habit) obedire (of partial-
C lar acts).
repugnare, av, at.
ignoscSre, ignov, ign5t.
persuadSre, suas, suas.
resistere, restTt, restit.
parc6re, pSperc et pars, pars et parclt.
^ minari (with aams. of tiie thing threat-
C ened).
comparare ; conferre,*^ tttl, coUat.
to something from which he is to draw an inference for himself by his own
reason and good sense. Hortari appeals to his tpill; suadere^ to his understand-
ing. Suadere is to attempt to persuade ; persuadere is to advise effectually ; to
persuade.
k AuxUiari (to make oneself a man's auxUium)y to increase a person's strength ;
to help. Juvare (allied to juvenis; properly to make youthfrdy powerfuly active;
hence) to hdp (one who is striving. D.) ; to fiEicilitate the accomplishment of a
purpose; support. Opitulari (from opes), to aid with one's meoiw, credit^ re-
sources, a person who is in great need or peril, from, which he has no power to
deliver himself. Subvenxre (to come-under, i. e., to support) ; to come to the as-
sistance of a person in difficulty or danger. Succurrere, to run to the assist-
ance of; which implies a more pressing danger; to succour. SubUvare, to
raise a man up ; to hold him up ; to support : — figuratively, to aUeviate, mUigatey
lighten. (R.) AdjUvo and auxUior do not necessarily imply, that the person as-
sisted needed assistance ; the other verbs do. Adjuvare (to help forward) often
means to increase ; enhance, (C.)
I Mederi (to administer a remedy with good effect) relates rather to the sick
person, or to the operation of the physician ; sanare, to the disease, or to the
operation of the medicine. (D.)
^ Tobe married is nuptam esse, and we find, nuptam esse cum aliquo.
*^ Conferre (to bring together), contendere (to stretch together), componere (to
4*
82 THB DATIVE. [§ 32. 223, 224.
m« \^ «».«» «,i*K $ irasci, iritus ; succensere (of deep hut-
To be angry with, < . » ^ ,x u *u j i*
C tn^ reseniment)^ both govern dative.
To injure, hurt, IsdSre, Iss, laes (occim.)*
To delight, amuse^ delectare, av, at {accua.).
To offend, offendSre, fend, fens {accua.),
X ' He threatens me wWidecUh^ should be
In Latin, * threatens death to me.*
Exercise 33.
[Which interrog. particle is to be used when the aruwer would be 'no ' ?]
223. Do not hurt another. It is not every man who can" com-
mand his mind. Is it easy to restrain (one's) mind ? It is
the duty of a Christian to leave nothing undone, that*^ he may
learn to govern his mind'. Ought (you) not to obey the laws ?
We ought to be angry* with vices', not with men. He promised
to abstain from* injury. Venus married Vulcan {Vulcanus),
It is the duty of a Christian to succour the miserable. They
promised to abstain from (committing any) injury. I will ask
him whether he can cure my head. I have left nothing undone '•
that I might cure my head. It is strange that you should favour
me. Do you envy (pi.) me or Balbus? I almost think'* that I
have opposed nature in vain. It shows'' a great mind to spare
the conquered. I warned my son to envy nobody.** Compare
this peace with that war. I have unwillingly offended Caius.
He threatens me with death every day. Do not grudge me my
glory. There are some who**' grudge me my glory.
§ 32. The Dative continued.
224. Sum with its compounds, except possum, governs the
dative.
place together), all express the bringing of things into juxiapoHtian for the sake
of instituting a comparison between them. From their meaning, one should
Bay that cor^erre is to compare things, the difference of which wiU be obvious,
as soon as they are brought together : contendere^ to institute a close comparison,
Ramshorn says, comparare is to compare things that are exactly similar, and
form, as it were, a pair (par). But Cicero has : * conferre pugnantia, comparare
eontraria,*
o StuxensirCf because the anger is lasting.
§32. 225-227.] the dative. 8S
225. Verbs compounded with prepositions, or with the adverbe
hene, sods, male, generally govern the dativey but with many ex-
ceptions.
(a) Most of the verbs compounded with ad, in, inter, oh,
prcB, sub, con, govern the dot.
(P) Many of those compounded with ah, ante, de, e, post, pro,
re, super, govern the dot.
226. Some are transitive, and govern the accusative only;
some govern the dative or the accusative with no difierence of
meaning ; and very many of them may be followed by the pre^
positions^ they are compounded with.
227. Vocabulary 31.
To be absent, abesse, abfoL
To be present, adesse,^ adful (hence, to dand by).
To be engaged in, inteiesse.
To be in the way, to be prejudi- -i vgg_g
cial to, >
To be wanting, fail, deesse.'
To be before, or at the head o^ to i pneggge^
command, )
To profit, to do good to, to be ad- > pjodesse.*
vantageous to, 5
To survive, superesse.
To oppose, obstore, sdt, stit.
To satisfy, satisfiioere, ftc, &ct.
To confer benefits on, benefiloere, fee, fact
To prefer, antepOnSre, ptfsu, pttsit.
To reckon one thing q/fcr, i. e., > ^^^i^ ^^ ^^bit.
as inferior to another, )
P This is especially the case when the object is no personal drcumstance, or
cannot weU be conceived as such, for then the preposition merely expresses a
local relation. (G.)
4 PrtBaeno is used as the pariidple of adeage. PrcBBtntem etae expresses an
immediate audible or vinble presence ; adeaat^ presence generally within some
sphere belonging to us. An expected guest ade»tf when he is within our walU;
but to be prcB8enSf he must be in the Bome room with ourselves. Adeose relates
to a peraon or thing to which one is near; tnleresM^ to an a/etion that one is as-
sisting at. (D.)
r Ahtaae is simply to he aboent or away; not to be there, Deeeee Is spoken of a
thing that is wanting^ ihepreeenee of it missed, because necessary to the complete'
neoe of a thing. Deficere is the indioative of dseoaef tmprqfiecre to prodeeeee. (D.)
• Prodease drops the d before those parts of mm that begin with a consonant.
84 THE DATIVE. [§32. 226,229.
Eng. To prefer death to slavery.
£^ J To ret^ton slavery after death {posihab^t servitutem morti).
C (Or, as the English.)
Exercise 34.
[Obs. * BetUr ' when it means *prcfcra6fe,* * tnort Btdirfaudtary^ should be
translated by m^iw.] **- "^^'^
228. It is wise*' to prefer virtue! to all things {iransl, both
ways). He says that he has done good to very many'. He
says that he was not engaged in the battle. It is your business
to stand by your friends. It is not every one who can satisfy the
wise. It is the duty of a judge to assist {suhoemo) an innocent
man. He says that he will not* be wanting to his friends.
Who commands the army ? I will ask whox^ommands the army.
I warned the boy to prefer nothing** to honourable conduct.
Ho^o does tt happen that all of you*»> prefer death to slavery ?
It is better to 4o good even to the bad; than to be wanting to the
good. All of us"* have been engaged in many' battles. To
some courage is wanting, to others opportunity.* He promised
that he would not be wanting either'' to the time or to the oppor-
tunity. Sometimes if 402) fortune opposes our designs. There
w-ere some who**' preferred death to slavery.
229. VOCABULAEY 32.
(Verbs that take the {2crf. or dec. without difference of meaning.) ^
To flatter, fawn upon, adulari, adulatus.
Lie near, border on, adjacere, jScu, jScit.
Attend to, consider, \ ""^^^t'^T^' ^^°* ^'^' ^ ^'''®'°* ""'
c antecellere,ceUu (very rar«); prsstare,^
Excel, sorpass, am superior to, < prsstit, prsestit {dai, best vrith ante-
' cellere).
pj^y ( def icere,» fee, feet (to revolt from, a,
l a&; to, odf. Also with aocu».to desert).
t See note, on th|3 second of the Differences of Idiom.
" Let the verb be the last word in the sentence.
▼ Translate as if it were, 'would b^ wanting neither to the time novt* &c,
* So also the other verbs of going heforcy or surptunng : ante- or pr<B- cedere,
^currere, -venire, -vertere, Ac. {jpnecedert has only the ace. in prose. Z.)
X See 227, r.
.V
§32. 230.] THE DATIVE. 85
/ desperare (also with dt which governs
To despaired / the ablaJt.y hence desperatus, given
\ over).
To make sport of; make merry ^ illudere, lus, IGs (also followed by in
with, mock, ,C with €uxub, or abUd)»
PaU upon, seize upon (of cares, > i„ee8s6re,T cessfy, et cess, cestit
dbc., assailing the mmd), )
Wait for, prsstttlari, atus.«
Rival, emulate, ssmulari, atus.^
Accompany, comitari, atus.
r praebere or praBstare se fortem (the latter
To .how oneself brave, 4c. J taP'ylng »««<«/ the former not necea-
I sanly so ; ptsebSre se^ to tihow one-
(. self; pnestare se, to praot oneself).
Grief, dtflor, 5ris, m.
Tuscan, Tuscus, a, um.
Territory, ager, agri, m.
Exercise 35.
230. I will advise- the boy to emulate the virtues of his father.
Attend to what** (pL) will be said. Let us not flatter the power-
ful. The Tuscan territory borders on the Roman (territory).
' Did not words fail you ? Are the Veientes going to revolt from
the &pmans ? [No.] I almost think that the Lydians (Lydii)
are going to revolt from king Cyrus. Does it show*' a brave mind
to despair of one's (sut^s) fortunes ? Grief seized upon the whole
(omnw) army. It was owing to you" that the treaty between the
cities of^Some and Lavinium was not renewed. I cannot but*'
mock you. She never beheld Caius without" making merry
with his folly. I will ask Balbus whom he is waiting for. There
Viere some who mocked the boy.
7 So also invadere.
* Expectare expresses merely a looking for the future in general ; opperirif to
be keeping oneself in readiness for an occurrence; prcestolari, to be in readiness
to perform a »ervice. (Rid. after Doderlein.)
*■ uEmtUor is sometimes said to govern the da/, in the sense of to envy; it does
not however express simple envy, but the endeavour to eqital or turpaat a pertonf
which mayf or may naif be caused by envy.
b < What ' is here rd, (= those thingBf which).
86 THE DATIVE. [§33. 231-233.
§ 33. The Dative continued, ( Verbs toith two constructions,)
«
231. (a) Dono,*" circuffK^o, and several other verbs, take either
a dative of the person and an accusative of the thing; or an a^cU'
sative of the person and an ablative of the ^Ain^.
Verbs of fearing take a da^ of the person for whom one fears.
232. (a) Cirdumdat urbem muro ; or, circumdat murum urbi,
He surrounds the city with a wall.
Ciceroni immortalitdiem donavit ; or, Ciceronem im-
mortalitate donavit, (The Roman people) conferred
immortality on Cicero,
233. Vocabulary 33.
(Verbs that take dot. of person with ace. of thing; or. occ. oi person
with abl. of thing.)
Besprinkle, bespatter, adspergSre^d spers, spers.
Surround, circumdSre, dSd, dat.
Clothe oneself with, put on, induCre, indu, indut.
C ezuSre, ezu, exut {accua. of peraonj ab'
Strip off, } lot. of thing. With accus. onl^ < to
( throw off,' ' put off,' * divest oneself of,'
To cut off, prevent, obstruct, intercIudSre, interclus, interclus.
(Verbs with a difierent construction in different meanings.)
' cavere, cav, caut (cavfire aliquem ;♦ to
guard against; be on ow^s guard
against; cavSre alicui, to guard g
watch, over; cavSre or sibi cavere, to
be on one^s guard),
iconsuiere, sulu, suit (consulSre aliquemt
to consult; consulSre aUcuif to consuU
for a person ; to consuU Jus interest :
consulSre in aliquem, to proceed or
take measures against a man).
To wish well to, ciSpere« alicui ; cupSre, cupiv, cuplt.
To provide for the interests of ^ prospicere patriae,
one's country, t providdre patriie.
_ . c imponSre (aliquid alicui) ; with dai, only
To Uy upon, ^ "to impose upon.'
f incumbSre rei ; incumbere in rem, to ap-
To lean upon, < ply oneself vigorously ; to devote ono^
( seifto.
To beware.
c SOf impertire or impertlri. * <Sb, inspergCre.
• Also cavere ab aliquo, or ab allqui re. • So^ bene, male, Ac, velle alieoi.
§ 33. 234, 235.]
THB DATIVE.
87
Cruelly,
Almost, nearly,
Altar,
Sajsgage,
A camp,
A mound,
A ditch,
To prepare,
The state.
To take a camp, dc.
Humanity, human feeling.
Flight,
A wall.
A stone wall,
234. [C. XX.] ^^ In English,
other substantives, are
Latin by adjectives.
crudeliter.
prope ; p^ne or psene.
ara, ee,/".
impedimenta (p2ttr.)prop6rty Jdndnmce*,
castra (plur.),
agger, eris, m.
fossa, IB,/,
parire^i^ at.
{ respoblica, reipublicie, reipublicae, rem-
C publicam, dkc.
i exuCre ; i. e. ' to strip the enemy (ace.)
I of their camp ' {ablat.),
humanitas, £tis,y.
fuga, »,/.
' mums, i, m. (the general term ; mcenia,
from munlre, is the wall of a city for
protection against enemies; paries,
Stis, the wall of a building, allied to
pars, portio, Ac, ; maceria, allied to
margo, the wall of an enclosure, e. g.
of a garden or vineyard. D.)
mums lapideus.
substantives standing before and spoken of
used adjectivdy^ and must be translated into
Exercise 36.
235. I warned Caius whom to guard {sulj,) against. Tar-
quinius Priscus was preparing to surround the city with a stone
wall. There is no one who is not aware that Cicero is watching
over the state. He promised to consult^ my interests. He im-
posed on his own (men) that** he might the more easily impose
on the Gauls. They have proceeded cruelly against Caius. It
remains that {ut) we should consult our own interests. That
basest (person) has bespattered me with his praises. I have per-
suaded Caius to devote himself to the state. The Romans have
taken the camp of the Gauls. He hopes to take the baggage of
the Gauls. Do not divest yourself of your human-feeling^.
Caesar surrounded his camp with a mound and ditch. I pity the
old man (who is) now almost given-over. I will warn Balbus not
to throw off his human-feeling. Consult for yourselves : provide
for the interests of your country.
88 THE DATIVE. [§ 34. 236-241.
§ 34. Verhs that take a second Daime.
236. Sum, with several other verbs, may govern ttoo datives.
(a. h.) The second dative expresses (he purpose or some similar notion.
It is the common construction to express the purpose for which a man
comeSf or sends another.
237. (c) A second dative often stands afler sum, where we
should use the nominative. Such verbs as proxies, serves, &c.
may often be translated by sum with the dative ; and an adjective
after 'to he' may often be translated into Latin by the dot. of a
substantive.
238. (d) The English verb * have \ may often be translated by
sum with a dative.*"
{Eng.) I Juive a hat. I have two hats.
(Lai.) There is a hat to me. There are two hats to me.
It is obvious that the ace. after '^ve' will be the Tiom, before *tobe;'
the nom. before 'Aao«,' the dot. after ^tohe*
239. («) In ' est mihi nomeriy^ the name is either in the nom.f the dai.y or
(less commonly) the gen.
The construction with the dot. is even more common (in the case of
Roman names) than the regular construction with the nom.. It is an
instance of attraction^ the name being attracted into the case of
mihi. (K.)
240. (/) The dative of a personal pronoun is often used to point out, in an
animated way, the interest of the speaker, or the person addressed, in
what is said.
241. (a) Pausanias, rex LacedsemoniOrum, venit Atticis aux-
ilio, Pausanias, king of the LacedcBmordans, came
to the assistance of the Athenians.
(b) Pericles agros suos dono, reipublicsB dedit, Pericles
gave his estates as a present to the state.
(c) Magno mdlo est hominibus avaritia, Avarice is a great
evil (or, very hurtful) to men.
Ipse sibi odio (btii. He will he odious {or, an object of
dislike) to himself.
(d) Fuere Lydiis multi ante Croesum r^es. The Lydians
had many kings hefore Crcesus.
(e) C. Marcius, cui cognomen postea Coriolano fuit, Caius
f So* can have* may be translated by * potest esse.*
§ 34. 242.] THB DATIVE. 89
MareiuSf whose surname was afterwards Cariola^
nus, — Fonti nomen Arethusa est, The name of the
fountain is Arethusa. (Nomen Mercurii est mihii
My name is Mercury,)
{f) At tihi repente paucis post diebus venit ad me
Caninius, But, behold, a few days afterwards
Caninius comes to me,
242. YOCABULABY 34.
(Verbs that are often followed by keo datives.)
(1) With auxUio (assistance).
Come, venire, vfin, vent.
Send, mittSre, mis, miss.
Set out, proficisci, profectus.
(2) With eu/p«, vUiOi erimini.
To impute as a fiiult, culpss dare, dSd, dat (with ace. of thing).
To reckon as a feult, turn into a > vitioff vertSre, vert, vers (with oee. of
fiiult, ) tfUng),
(3) To give as a present, dono or muneri^ii dare (with ace, of thing).
To be a hindrance, impedimento esse.
To be a reproach, to be disgraceful, opprobrio i esse.
To be hateful, odio esse.
To be detrimental, detrimento esse.
To be an honour, to be honourable, honor! esse.
To be very advantageous, magnsB utilitati esse.
To mean,k i "" ^^^ ' "*< '**> *"•• to be used ac
c cording to the person meant.
To throw himself at any body's ( se i ad alicujus pedes, or alicui ad pedes
feet, c projicSre, jec, ject.
r VUium is any^w, hUmiah, or fault; whatever makes a thing tfnper/%el.
It may therefore be found in things as well as in aeUons and peraone, CtUpa
is fault; whatever is blamable; hence vUhan may be used for ctUpOt but culpa
not always for vitium, Scelua always implies a wicked intention; culpa not al-
ways, but often only a want of prudence, caution, Ac.
It AprcBTnium is given to reward, with reference to the merit of the receiver:
a donum, to produce joy, with reference to the graiwiouBneaa of the gift : a
munvB, to express affectum or favour, with reference to the sentiment of the
giver. (D.)
I PrObrum is ' what a person may be reproached with :' opprobrium is * what
he i» (or has been) reproached with ;' * a reproach^ actually made. (D.)
k That is, not what on^a miming is, but what one meana by such conduct.
1 Prcjicere ae alicui ad pedea, which Krebs formerly objected to, is quite
correct: (See Gic. Sest. U ; Cau. B. 0. 1, 31.)
90 THE ACCUSATIVE. [§ 35. 243-245.
[C. zzi.] i:^ * What ' is Bometimes used for * how * (quam) : sometimes for
'how great* (quantus).
Exercise 37.
243, He promises to come' to the assistance of the Helvetii.
Timotheus set out to the assistance of Ariobarzanes." It was
owing to you, that I did not throw myself at Caesar's feet. It is
the part of a wise man always to fear for himself. There is no
doubt that (86) he is going to consult the interests'" of Caius. I
fear that these things will not^' prove an honour to you. I don't
understand what he means (by it). It is very honourable" to
you, to have been engaged in such'°^ a battle. There *is no doubt
that superstition ought to be a reproach to a man. They turn my
greatest (see Index I) praise into a fault. I hope that men will
understand howP odious cruelty is to all men. I will warn Caius
howp advantageous it is to keep one's word. He says that he has
not many slaves. I will ask them what they mean. I will not
object (87. 91.) to their imputing this to me as a fault. He pro-
mised' to give them the island of Lemnos as a present. Might
you not have brought'*^ a charge of immorality against Caius ?»^
X.
§ 35. The Accusative.
244. (a) Many intransitive verbs become transitive when com-
pounded with a preposition that governs the accusative ; and a
few when compounded with a preposition that governs the abla-
tive.«
Of these, those that are not deponent have generally a passive voice.
245. (h) Neuter verbs may take a substantive of kindred
meaning or origin in the accusative ; and verbs of tasting or
smelling of take the thing in the accusative.
■» G. is.
n Part, in nu with the proper tense of sum.
• Say ; *It is for a great honour.*
P * How * must be translated by guarUua.
« With many of them the preposition is often repeated ; and with others the
§ 35. 246-249.] the accxtsatiyb. 91
246. (c) Other neuters are used transitively to express a tran-
sitive notion combined with their own proper notion.
Thus, aitire (to thirst) =: * to desire as a fkirsty man desires ;' Jtorrire
^ ' to fear J and express my fear by shvddering ;* properare mortem,
'to cause death, and to cause it in Aa^te.'— -This figurative use of neuter
verbs is common to all languages.
247. It has been already mentioned that the accusative of neuter pro-
nouns is found with verbs, with which the accusative of a substantive
would be whoUy inadmissible.
248. (a) Pythagdras Persarum Magos adiit, Pythagoras vis-
ited the Persian nu%i.
Pythag6ras multas regiOnes barbarOrum pedibus
obiit/ Pythagoras travelled over many countries of
the barbarians on foot,
Postumia tua me convenit, Your Postumia has been
with me,
(b) Somniare somnium, To dream a dream. Servire
servitutem, To suffer a slavery; to be a slave,
Ceram 6lere, To smell of wax.
(c) Sitire honOres, To thirst for honours.
Idem gloriatur, He makes the same boast. Idem pec-
cat, He commits the same sin. Multa peccat, He
commits many sins.
249. Vocabulary 35.
{TVaruitive compounds of Intransitive Verbs.)
Attack, aggrgdi, ior, aggressus.
Visit, adlre," adii, adxtum.
To enter into a partnership, coire societatem ; coeo.t
To stir out of the city, \ '"'^'" C*"' ^"^^ '"'* excSdere, cesa,
I
cess.
{Al is more common than the aee, ; excedere and egredi, in their proper mean-
ing of going outf should be foUowed by e or the abl. But Livy has urbem
excedere.
'' Obin oberrOf Ac, seems to be an abbreviation of amb, djju^t, (D.)
■ Visire is, to pay a visit as a friend or companion ; adire, to visit on bun-
ne88, or in consequence of some want; convenire, to visit, on business or nats
sahUarey to pay a complimentary visit. (D.)
t The compounds of eo have generally perf. u, not trt.
92 THE ACCUSATIVE. [§ 35. 250.
To exceed the bounds of mode- ) ^^^^ exc6dgre.
ration, >
To die, mortem oblre, obii, obitum; obeo.
To caU upon; have an interview j eonvSnlre, v6n, vent,
with ; hence, to speak to, S
To come to a determination ; to ^ consilium inire.
adopt a resolution, )
To encounter death, mortem opp6tSre, petivi, petii, petit.^
To smell of, dlere, olu et olev, ollt et olet.
To have a strong smell of; to ) jedblSre.^
smack of^ )
To taste of (i. e. have taste or ( sapSre, io (perf, rart^ sapiv et sapu.
flavor of), C saplt).
To thirst for, sitire, iv, it.
To boast o^ gloriari, atus.
To grieve for, dttlere, dolu, dolit.
To sail past or along, prsetervShi, vectus.
Hardly any body, nemo f^re (' almost nobody').
Coast, ora, ae,/.
Speech, oratio, dnis,./!
Antiquity, antiquitas, atis,/.
Citizens, civis, m. et/.
Wonderful, mirus, a, um.
To dream, somniare, av, at ; somnium, * dream.
Herb, herba, 8B,/.
Honey, mel, mellis, n.
Exercise 38.
[How must the infin. be translated after to persuade 7]
250. It cannot be denied that you have dreamt a wonderful
dream. He published-a-proclamation that nobody'* should stir
from the city. I won't object to your entering into a partner-
ship (87. 91) with me.*) Have you entered into a partnership
with Balbus or with Caius ? He has commissioned me to have
an interview with Caesar. The honey (pi.) smells of that herb.
His whole speech smacks of antiquity. Does not Caius's speech
tt Obire mortem^ or diem supremum (for which obire is used with the ace,
omitted), is only spoken of a natural death, which the mortem obiens simply
sufers ; oppetere mortem is, if not to seek it, yet at least to meet it with firmness
and a disregard of life. (D.)
▼ Re has in many compounds the meaning of forth; thus redoUre^ 'to
smell forth ;' 'to emit a smell.' It thus becomes a strengthening prefix : DodcT'
lein thinks that, as suehf it is possibly the Greek ^c.
§ 36. 251^54.] THB ACCUSATIVE. 98
smack of Athens ? It is the duty of a good citizen to encounter
death itself for the state. Ought he not to have enco.untered''^
death for the state ? Marcellus sailed past the coast of Sicily
(Sicilia). Three hundred of us*») have come to this determi-
nation. There is hardly any body who has not (44, (3) ) come
to this determination. I fear he wiil not*' choose to enter into
a partnership with me'. Ifear he mil enter into a partnership
with Caius. May a Christian thirst' for honours ? He makes
the same boast as*) Cicero. I canned but" grieve for the death
of Hortensius. It is a difficult (matter) to put off all (one's)
human -feeling/. Both you and Balbus have exceeded the bounds
of moderation. There are some who exceed the bounds of
moderation.
§ 36. The Accusative continued.
251. (a) Verbs of asking, teaching, and concealing, may have
two accusative, one of the person and another of the thing,
252. But very frequently (and with some verbs always) either
the person or the thing is governed by a preposition,
Obs. Thus doceOf to gwe information, prefers the ablative with de.
After peto, and sometinua after the other verbs of begging, the person
is put in the abl, with a : and after rogo, interrSgo, Ac, the thing often
stands in the ahl, with de.
253. (c) Transitive verbs that take two nominatives in the pas-
sive, take tvH) accusatives in the active, one being in a sort of
apposition to the other.
The appoaitum oeevsaHve completes the meaning of the verb, which
cannot form a complete predicate by itself.
Such verbs are verbs of caUing, appointing tb an office, oonaidering,
&c., together with facio, efficio, reddo, &c.
The second accusative is often an adjectvpe,
254. (d) With focio and efflcio a sentence with ut is often found
instead of the second accusative ; and when the accusative of the
first verb represents the same person or thing as the nom, of the
second, it is generally omitted.
{Eng.) The sun makes all things (to) flourish.
{Lot.) The sun makes that a2{ tA«f^« should flourish.
94 THE ACCUSATIVE. [§36.255-257.
(Eng.) He had Lysis for (or, cu) his master.
{Lot.) He had Lysis his master ( ^ a« his master).
255. [C. XXII.] (ttr * For ' and * cw ' are to be untranslated,
when the noun that follows can be placed in apposition to another
noun in the sentence.
256. (a) Racilius me primum sententiam rogdvit, RacUius asked
me my opinion first,
( Verres) parentes pretium pro sepulture liberOim pos-
cebaty Verres used to demand of parents a payment
for the burial of their children,
Qiiis musicam docuit Epaminondam ? Who taught
Epaminondas music ?
Nihil nos celat, He conceals nothing from us.
(h) Socrates totius mundi se incolam et civem arbitrabatur,
Socrates used to consider himself an inhabitant and
citizen of the whole world,
(c) Mesopotamiam fertilem efficit Euphrates, The Eu^
phrates makes Mesopotamia fertile.
Homines ccbcos reddit cupiditas et avaritia, Desire and
avarice render men blind,
(d) Fac ut sdam,^ or (with ut omitted) fac sciam, Let me
know,
Temperantia sSdat appetitiones, et efficit^ ut hcR rectse
ratiOni pareant, Temperance quiets the appetites^ and
causes them to obey right reason,
257. VOCABULABY 36.
Ask, rbgare,* Sv, at.
« J petgre, petiv, petii, petit ( person to be
C governed by ab,).
V In comic writers the ace. is often expressed : * Bum ita faciemua^ ut quod
viderit, non viderit.' * Ego tefaciamf ut miser sis.* * Neque potui Venerem
facercy ut propitiaesset mihi.*
* Petgre and rogare are the most general expressions of a wish to obtain^
whether in the way of a request or a demand ; thus standing between posc&e and
orarej but somewhat nearer to orare. Of the two, rogare relates immediately
to the person applied to, petere to the favour asked. PostvXUre and exIgBre
denote a simple demand (without any accessory notion to strengthen it) as a
quiet declaration of the wiU : but in postulare the stress lies on the vri^ and toiU
of the person making the demand ; in exigere on the Ugal obligation of the per-
$36,258.] THE ACCXrSATIVB. W>
^, , . J J 5 postulire, av, at ; posoSre, popotc, pos-
Claim, require, demand. T ctt ; fla^itare, ay, at.
Beseech, obsecrare, av, at.
Pf^y orare, av, at.
Adjure, obteatari, tatus.
Teach, d»cgre, docu, doct.
Unteach, dedttcere.
Conceal, celare, av, at.
To teach Socrates to play on the \ Socratem fidibus docere (i. e. 'to
]3rre, ( teach him with the strings').
To think = to imagine, putare, av, at.
To think, or to be of opinion := { censere* (the word for delivering an
to deliver it as my opinion, C opinion in the aencUe-fumse),
-, ^, . , , , . J r exi8timare=exoB8timare,*to pronounce
To thmk= to reckon, iudge,con-\ . . ^ _ i J T ui* -i
., >j e » J judgment after Evaluation;* arbltrari,
' ( * to decide as an arbiter.'
To think, as opposed to knoWf opinari, atus.
Not only, but also, \ °^'* «>lum-sed etiam ; or non solum
C — verum etiam.
To give much information about, multa docere de (the person in acmu,).
Again and again ^ most earnestly, etiam atque etiam.
Experience, usus, Qs, m.
Just ^ fair, right, equitable, SBquus, a, urn.
Discourse, sermo, onis, m.
Exercise 39.
258. Experience, the best master, has taught me roany^ things.
Who taught you to play upon the lyre ? I ask you' {thee) again
and again not to desert me. I will not conceal from you the dis-
course of Titus Ampius. I fear that he is preparing^^ to conceal
those things from his parents. He had warned Caius not to con-
ceal any thing^* from his parents'. These things I not only ask
of you, but also demand. Who taught you those^^ (bad) manners
(of yours) 1 I will unteach you those manners (of yours). The
Gauls have given me much information about their own affairs.
son against whom it is made. PoadHre and JIagitare denote an emphatic de-
mand : but the poscens only demands in a decided manner^ from a feeling of
right or power, the ^fiagitana with paasion and impetuosity under the influence
of a vehement desire. (D.) Hence^/Ko^ans may be ^ to demand importimately;'
* to importune.*
*■ Censere is followed by the ace, with infin. ; or, if the opinion is given to be
JoUowedi by vJt with the avbj. ; but the vt is often omitted.
7 late is the demonstrative of the second person * that qf yours,*
96 THE ABLATIVE. [§ 37. 25&-26I.
I feat that yoii will not consider yourselves citizens of the whole
world. Religion will make us obey the laws of virtue. He
thought ■ it just, that citizens (ace.) should'' spare citizens (p. 14,
15, a). There is hardly any body but thinks it just that you
should spare me.
259. VOCABULAKY 37.
(Imp^rsonals with aec.)
It escapes me, me fugit, ikllit ; prseterit^
Unless I am mistaken, nisi me fallit.
It is becoming, d8cet.
It is unbecoming, dedScet.
(Eng.) It is becoming (or unbecoming) to (or in) an orator to be angry.
(Lot.) It become (or mi^eseema) an orator to be angry.
Exercise 40.
[Of sanare and mediri^ which relates principaUy to the skill of the
physician? (222,1.)]
260. Three hundred of t«,'* unless I am mistaken, survive.
I do not forget (it does not escape me) to how many dangers we
are exposed. You, such is your temperance,^ have learned to rule
your mind. It is not every one who can^^ cure the mind. I will
ask Caius, whether he can cure the mind. All of us not only
ask you for peace', but even demand it (of you). It is your duty
to succour the citizens now almost despaired of. It becomes a
wise man not to be disturbed in adversity. It is becoming to a
boy to hear much, to speak little. It is not unbecoming in an
orator to pretend^ to be angry.' It does not escape me, how odi-
ous^^ impiety is to the good.
XI.
§ 37. The Ablative.
261. (a) The ablative expresses the means or instrument, and
often the cause or manner.
B Censebat. Censure should be used when the opinion is the e:rpTea$ion of a
settled conviction.
•> LStet me and UUet mihi^ though they occur In Jwiin^ Pliny^ &c., should be
avoided. (C.)
§ 37. 262-266.] the ablative. 07
262. (h) The price for which a thing is haughty sold, valued, or
done, is put in the ablative.
263. (c) The adjectives magna, pamo, 6^c., are generally put
by themselves, the substantive pretio being understood.
264. But some of these adjectives often stand alone in the geni-
tive, especially after verbs of valuing at such a price, with which
this is the regular construction.
(d) Tanti and quanti (with their compounds), plurU, minSrii^ always stand
in the genitive. With verbs of vahdng^ magni, parvif fiuurimt, mvnimi,
phirimif also stand in the gen. ; but magnOf permagnoy and parvoj are
found in the abl. also with <B8timare. With verbs of price, magno, per-
magnOf parvo, ininimOy plurimo^ nimWf vUif stand in the ablative.
(«) The 8ubstantive8,.;locci, nauci^ nUiiU^ piU, Ac, also stand in the geru
after verbs of valuing.
^^^"^ Itae not used, hut\^'"*e^^
Majoria^ > c pharit,
265. (a) Terra vestlta est florUms, herbis, arbdrilnu, frugibus,
The earth is clothed with flowers, herbs, trees,
fruits.
Comibus tauri se tutantur, Bulls defend themselves
with their horns.
{b) Viginti talentis unam oratiOnem Isocrates vendidit,
Isocrates sold one oration for twenty talents.
(c) VenditOri expedit rem venire quam plurimo. It is for
the interest of the seller that the thing should he sold
for as high a price as possible.
(d) Te quotidie pluris facia, I value you more every day.
(e) Totam rempublicam picd non facere. Not to care a
lock of wool (or, as toe should say, a straw, or
rush) for the whole state.
266. Vocabulary 38.
To value, SBStnnSre, av, at.
To hold cheap, parvi pendSre ; pSpend, pens.
_ _^ (stare, stSt; or constare (with dot. of
To sell (intrans.) ; to be sold, TSnire,e eo, vSniv, and vSnu,
b The passage in Phcdrus, 'Multo majarU alape mecum veneunt,' is per-
haps the only instance. (B.)
* Venire =: vfinum ire, to go to oalct from an old substantivo v9nu$. 8o, ve<
5
98 THE ABLATIVE. [§ 37. 267,
To sell, vendere, vendid, vendit.
To buy, emSre, em, empu
More highly, for more, dearer, pluris.
For less, minoris.
For as much— ^s, tanti—quanti.
For just as much as ; for no more ) tantidem-quanti.
than, )
For how much, quanti 7
Too dear, nimio.
To reckon or think nothing o^ . nihili £lcSre.
ivr/»* ♦« *.«,.« - -*«.«, *•«• 5 flocci facSre {lUeraUy^ to makt^ i. e.
Not to care a straw for, \ j t* t * i i ^ » \
C reckon it * tU a lock (ff wooP .)
Not to care that for it, non hujus &c6re.
Peck, mttdius, i, m.
Wheat, trittcum, i,n.
Sesterce,d sestertius, i, m.
Merchant, mercator, oris, m.
(Eng.) To cost a person much (or dear).
{Lot,) To stand to a person at much.
[C. 3uciii.] Sl3* When one, two, Ac, mean one, two, Ac, apiece or for each, they
must be translated by the diBtribtUive numerals, singuH, bini, Ac.
Exercise 41.
267. That victory cost the Carthaginians (Pani) much blood.
It cannot be denied that that victory cost us much blood. Mer-
chants do not sell for no more than they bought (at). He says
that he does not care a straw for my glory. I will ask him for
how much he bought these things. I sell my (goods) for as much
as Caius. The peck of wheat was at ttoo sesterces. For how
much does wheat sell ? Epicurus thinks nothing of pain. There
is hardly any body** who does not (44, (3) ) hold his own things
cheap. I do not care that for you. My life is valued at ten^
asses a day.* It is foolish to hold one's own (blessings) cheap.
He says that I have bought these things too dear. Merchants
never sell for less than they bought (at). I will ask what'*' com
is selling for.
nun-dSre, ven-d?re=: venum dSre. Tacitus has posiia veno, exposed for sale.
Vineo is conjugated like eo, having vinii rather than vanitfi for peif., and imperf.
veniebam as well as venibam. No imperat. ; no supines, gerunds or participles.
d A Roman coin, worth about three and a half cents Federal money. A thou-
sand BestertU made one sestertium, which was a surn^ not a coin.
* Ponis In diem assibus.
§ 38. 268-273.] the ablative. 99
^ 38. The Ablative continued.
268. (a) Verbs of abounding^ JUKng, loading, &c., and their
opposites, such as verbs of wanting^ depriving of, emptying of,
govern the ablative.
269. (6) But of these ggeo and indtgeo (especially Ihe latter) govern the genir
tioc also.
4J70. (c) Some verbs of freeing from, removing from, differing
from, being at a distance from, &c., are sometimes followed by the
ablative, but generally (in prose) by & preposition.^
271. (d) Fungor, fruor, tUor (with their compounds), potior,
vescor, dignor, glorior, take the ablative : as does also supersedeo.
But potior takes the geniHve^ when it means *to obtain mmereign
power over*
272. (a) Pericles florebat omni genere virtutis, Pericles tvas
eminent in every kind of virtue (i. e. admirable
quality).
(b) Res maxime necessariae non tam artis indigent, quam
Idboris, The most necessary things do not require
skill so much as labour.
(c) Athenienses beUoUberantur, The Athenians were res-
cued from the (threatened) war.
Leva me hoc onere. Relieve me from this burden.
(d) DivitOs, nobilitate, viribus, multi m&le utuntur. Many
men make a bad use of riches, noble birth, {and)
strength.
Augustus Alexandria hri^vi potltus esX, Augustus soon
gained possession of Alexandria.
273. VOCABULAKY 39.
(Verbs governing the ablative.)
To deprive of, privSre, Sv, at.
To bereave of, deprive of| orbare, av, at.
To rob of (by open violence as an > g^^^^^g j^^ gj.
enemy), >
To be without, J cai6re,h carul a cassus sum^ carite<
i cass.
f With defendHref exsolvBrc, exonerart^ levSre, the ablative alone is to be pre-
ferred. (Z.)
s ExpUarCi compildre are * to plunder^' as robbers,
k Carire is simply* to be imthmU .*' egerc is * to needf to want :' indig9re i» * to
100
THE ABLATIVE.
[^36. 273.
To make the same boast,
To rest or lean upon,
To rejoice,
Medicine,
Milk,
Flesh,
Cheese,
Fever,
Quite,
Debt,
A heavy debt,
Severity (of a disease).
Disease,
Perversely,
To stand in need o^ need, re- ( Sgere {pJtiUd. or gen.) or indigSre (tr^icA
quire, ( is stronger) egere, egui, .
To free from, set free from, re- ) ^^ .^
lieve from, > ' '
To use,
To discharge, perform,
To enjoy,
To feed on, live on, eat,
To boast o^
uti, usus.
fungi, functus ; perfungi (Btronger).
frui, fruitus, and fructus.
vescik (wo per/.).
{ gloriari ; also followed hy *de* and by
I Hn* when it signifies * to glory in.*
idem gloriari.
r niti, nisus and nixus ; in aliquo nlti, in
I ^to lean on a person for support,
' that iSf * to rest with' in the sense of
depending upon hia exertions^ &c.
gaudere, gavlsus.
medicina,! se, f,
lac, lactis, n.
caro, carnis,/!
caseuB, i, m.
febris, is,/, {abl, i.).
plane.
ses alienum, another man's money ;
8BS SBris, n. copper.
magnum ees alienum.
gravitas, atis,/.
morbus, i, m.
perverse.
{Eng.) Make a bad (perverse, &c.) use of it.
{Lot.) Use ill {perverseh/f &c.).
/eel that I want ;* the in expressing intra animum. With reference to an advan-
tage desired, carsre is simply, ' to be without a desirable good,' egeref * to be
without an indispensable good.' (D.) This seems to be the proper limitation of
Cicero's definition ; that carer« is * egere eo quod habire velisj
i Also with a, ab.
k Vesci is the most general expression for supporting life by foodf including
edere and bibere as the actions of menj pasci and potare as the actions of beasts.
When vesci relates, as it generally does, to eatings it denotes any manner of eat-
ing, chewing^ swallowing, Ac. : whereas edire, comedire supposes the manner in
which a man eats, by biting and chewing. In vesci the principal notion is the
purpose of eating, the support of life ; in edire, the means by which life is sup-
ported, the action of eating. (D.)
1 Medicam^ntum or medicam^n is a medicine with reference to its material
substance, asUis prepared by an apothecary : medicina, with reference to its heal-
ing power, aaitis prescribed by a physician ; rem>edium is a jpreventive, a remedy
against an Impending tvil. (D.)
§98. 274-276,] the ablative. 101
Exercise 42.
[Should 'everyday* be translated by vu^tw, or by ^uo^ie, when there
is no progre98vot increase from one day to another 1]
274. Do not deprive another of his praise^. I rejoice that
you are quite without fever. The hody, to he (ut) in good health,
requires many things.*^ Nature herself admonishes us every
day how few things we require. He promised to set me free from
my debt. Have I not set you free from a heavy debt ? Many
men make a perverse use of reason. They live on milk, cheese,
flesh. It was oioing to you^^ that I was not bereaved of my
children. BtU a little more^* and Caius would have been bereaved
of his children. It is not every man who can think nothing of
pain. It is a disgraceful thing (for a man) to boast of his vices.
May I not make the same boast as Cyrus ? I will exhort Caius
to discharge (75) all the duties of life. The safety of the state
depends upon you cdone (in te uno). Do men alone feed on flesh ?
[No.] The severity of disease makes us require'* medicine
(gen.).
275. The manner or cause, and any word that restricts the
meaning of another to a particular part of a thing spoken of, is
put in the ablative.
276. Vocabulary 40.
Lame of one foot, claudus altero pSde.
(Acyectives* followed by the abl.)
Worthy, deserving o^ dignus, a, um.
Unworthy, indignu8,>» a,mn.
Banished, extorris, is, com, gend. (from ex terrS),^
Relying on, frdtus, a, um.
Contented, contentua, a, mn.
Endued with, prsBditus, a, um.
To deserve, dignus, um, Ac, esse.
Censure, reprehensio, onis,/.
* Adjectives signifying waiU or freedom from (vacuus, liber, ^.), take the o&Z.,
or the abU with a, ah.
™ Dignus and indignus are (less commonly) followed by the genitioe.
^ Profngus is one who has fled from his country ; exstU and extorris imply
that the person is under sentence of banishment. Extorris relates rather to the
misery of the exile ; exsul, to his punishmeini and disgrace, (D.)
102 THE VOCATIVE. [§ 39. 277, 278.
Punishment, poena, bb,/.
Severe (of punishment, &c.), gravis, is, e.
Motion, motus, us, m. (what declens. 1 why 7)
Reality, res, rci, /.
Name, nomen, mis, n.
(Eng.) He deserves to be loved ^
{Lot.) He is a deserving (person) wkq Bhovld he loved (dignus est
qui amitur),
{Eng.) To inflict punishment on a person.
{Lai.) To affect ( =: visit) a man with punishment (aliquem
pcen^ afficSre).
Exercise 43.
277. Are they deserving of praise', who have done these
things ? [No.] I think this man deserving not of censure only,
but also of punishment. These things are unworthy of us. I
cannot hut think^^ these things unworthy of us. He has threat-
ened me toith** severe punishment. I have said this (p/.), relying on
your compassion. There is no doubt that he will inflict a severe
punishment upon you. Nature is Qontented with a little. Age-
silaus was lame of one foot. Had you rather be blind, or lame
of one foot 1 The mind is endued with perpetual motion. It
cannot he doubted that the mind is endued with perpetual motion.
It cannot be denied that he sold his country for gold. He is an
orator not in reality but in name. He is a boy in age. He
deserves to be praised by all. It is not every one who can heal
the diseases of the mind. It cannot be denied that he is banished
from his country. There are some who'*® deny that these things
are unworthy of us.
XII.
§ 39. 7%e Vocative. (Attraction of the Vocative.)
278. Sometimes, in poetry, a vocative is used instead of a nomi-
native cfter the verb.p
• So, he does not deserve to &«, <&c., ' indignus est, qui,' &c.
P Examples in poetry are Maiutine pater ^ sen Jane libenims audis. (Hor.)
Tune ilU Odrysus Phineus rex indytus orce ? 7\i Pfiaebi comes^ et nostra dilecte
pofrerdi? (Val. Flac.) So in Greek B\^u kCw yivoto ! (Theocr.) (K.)
§ 89. 279-281.] the vocative. * 108
Another vocative has generaUy preceded, and this second vocative is
attt acted into agreement with it ; but sometimes it merely refers to a
nominative of the second person.
(a) The phrase ' mactc virtute esto !' (a bUsnng on your valour ! or,
good luck to your valour !) is probably an example of this construction,
nuuUe being the voccUive of mactus from mag-er^ (to increase, enrich,
Ac). The only objection to this explanation is Livy's adverbial use
of macte with the infinitive. (See example : juberem macte virtute
eaae.) (K.)
279. (b) On the other hand, a nominative sometimes stands in
apposition to a vocative, or where a vocative would be the regular
construction.
This is especially the case with soltUy umUi primus,
280. (a) Macte virtute esto ! A blessijig on your valour ! or,
* Go on in your valour P
Macti virtute, milites Romani, este ! Good luck, O
Roman soldiers, to your valour f
Juberem macte virtute esse, &c. 1 would say, a bless-
ing on your valour ! &c.
{b) Audi tu, populus Albanus f Listen, ye people of
Alba!
Salve primus omnium parens patriae appellate ! Hail
thou, the very first who was ever called the father
of his country !
281. Vocabulary 41.
Dutiful affection, piety,' pietas, atis, /.
Towards, in (with accus.).
r ave, salve* (jmiptraivoes of the 2d conju-
Hail, farewell ! ? gation — ^vale, valeto is only fjeire-
i weU!).
The toga,» \ ^S^i «j /• (aa opposed to the milir
C tary cloaks it means the cvvil gown).
— I I r M J 1
^ The root mag (the Greek fuy) of this obsolete verb is still found in magnus
and mactdre (to present with ; to honour). (D.)
' Pietas is dutiful (iffection (towards the gods^ one's parents^ reUUionSf country,
and even ben^actors)^ arising from a naturalfeding : caritas (properly their c^r-
ness to us) is founded on reason and a Ju«^ appredaiion of their value.
■ That ave was a mjoming^ salve an evening salutation, does not appear to be
established. Suetonius makes saloe the mornings and volt the evening saluta-
tion. (See Habicht.)
t A woollen upper garment, covering the whole body, and forming the ordi-
nary dress of a Roman citizen. It was ViJIawing robe, covering the left arm,
but leaving the right at liberty.
104 THE PASSIVE. [§ 40. 282-286.
rtriumphuB, i, m. (a public procession
A triumph, < granted by a decree of the senate to a
' victorious general).
To gain a ttiumph for a vlctoiy ^^^^^ GalHstrlumphSre.
over the Grams, 3
To lead the captives in triumph, captivos per triumphum ducSre.
People,™ ptfpulus, 1, m. (the vocat. not in use).
Exercise 44.
282. A blessing on thy valour, Titus Manlius, and^ on thy
piety towards thy father and thy country ! Hail thou, the first
who has deserved a triumph in a civil gown ! Hear, O people
of Rome ! A blessing, O citizens, on your dutiful-affection
towards your country I A blessing, O boy, on your diligence !
You, such is your diligence,'^ will soon finish the business. His
diligence is as gr^at as'^ his abilities. It cannot be denied that
(86) his diligence is as great as his ability. There is no doubt
that he told many falsehoods about his age, that (63) he might
appear younger (than he is). It cannot be denied that he told
many falsehoods, that he might not be banished. I a>sk you again
and again to succour (75) me. There were some who*°' denied
that I had deserved a triumph.
§ 40. The Passive Voice.
283. (a) The agerit after a passive verb (which is regularly under the gov-
ernment of a or ab) is sometimes put in the daJtvet^ especially in poetry,
and after the participle in dus,
284. The accusative after the active verb (the cbjed) becomes the nomi-
native before the passive verb.
285. (h) But verbs that govern the dative in the active are
used impersonally in the passive ; so that the nominative before the
English verb becomes the dative after the Latin verb.
286. (c) VapHlOf vineOj JU)y having a paasvtt meaning, have also a pensive
amstarwctum.
" Not in the sense of folk oifolkSf as in English, but of ti people,
▼ Ac. (See 4, d.)
§ 40. 287-290.] the passive. 105
287. [C. XXIV.] 05" {d) To express the future suhjunctive
passive we must not use the participle in dus with sinij essem, &c.,
but futunan sit, esset, &c., followed by ut.
288. (e) The future infinitive passive is made up of the supine
in um with iri ; but when verbs have no supine, we must use
fore or futurum esse, &c.
This substitute for a future infinitive passive must be used even
when the verb has ampine, unless the event is to ^e described as being
about to haj^en.
In other words the supine with iriia a paulo-poat futurum.
289. (/) So also fore ut with the subjunctive should be used
for the future infinitive active, when the event is not to be described
as being now about to happen.
290. (a) Mihi consilium captum jam diu est, My resolution
has long been taken.
(b) Ghruz ttuB invidetur, Your ghry is envied.
Philosophise vituperatoribus satis responsum est, The
revilers of philosophy have been sufficiently answered.
(c) Rogatus est, an ab reo vapulasset. He was asked
whether he had been beaten by the prisoner. Ab
haste venire, To be sold by an enemy. A me fiSri,
To be doing by me.
{d) Nescio, quando futurum sit, ut epistola scribatur,'^ I
donH know when the letter will be written,
(e) Dixit ybre ut oppidum expugnaretur,' He said thai the
town would be taken.
Dixit oppidum expugnatum iri, He said thai the city
was about to be taken. (G.)
(/) Nunquam putavi fore ut supplex ad te venirem, I
never thought thai I should come to you as a sup^
pliant.
(Eng.) You are envied, favoured, spared, answered, Ac.
(Lot.) It is envied (favoured, spared, answered, Ac.) to you.
{Eng.) I don't know when it will be written.
(Lot.) 1 don't know when it will be (aubj.) that it be written.
V Of course mset and gcriberetur after a past tense.
< The tense of the subjunctive verb depends not on forej but on the preced-
ing verb. Spero fore ut oonvaletcat : sperabam fore ut convaUaceret,
6*
106 THE PASSIVE. [§ 40. 291, 292.
291. VocABTTLAay 42.
To be beaten, ^ vaptLIare, a7, St.
5 convaleBcSre,^ valu (see Tables for Re-
To recover (from a sickness), { ^^^^^^ j, ^j ^
To heal, to be healed of a wound, consanescCre, sann.
5 recnidescgre, crudu (properly to grow
To burst out, or bleed afresh, J ^^ again).
Wound, vulntts, Cris, n.
Priest, priestess, Sacerdos, dotis, m. etf.
A husband, * vir, viri, m. (a man).
{ persuasum est mihi, or persuasum ha-
I am persuaded, J y^^^^
A liar, mendax, acis (prop, an at2;*ec/.).
Faith, fidelity, fides, el,/.
J plerique {pUri declined and que append-
Most men, J ed ; but not found in the genU.),
' facere (with ahlai. ; abl. with de; or with
dot. De should be expressed before
To do any thing with a person, ^ the personal pronouns^ the ablatives
of which are of the same form as the
accusatives).
Exercise 45.
292. I will ask whether he has been beaten by his slave.
What will become of my Tulliola' ? I hope he will recover. I
hoped he would recover. I doubt not but that (86) you will be
praised by all. The wounds, which had been healed, bleed
afresh. I fear his wounds tmU^^ bleed afresh. These priest-
esses of Vesta are not permitted to marry a husband. Your virtue
is envied. Liars are not believed. The unwilling are not easily
persuaded of any thing.* There is bo doubt that your glory Will
be etivied. All my property has been sold by an enemy. I will
ask which^ of them is favoured by Csesar. That (ille) age is
not only not envied, but even favoured. I fear that these wounds
will not^* heal. What will become of me ? There are some
7 The disease/rom which a person recovers, must be governed by ex with
the obL
> Persuaaiaaimum habeo should never be used ; peraiuuiasimum est mihi does
not occur in Cicero, but in a letter of Brutus* s to Cicero. (Klotz.) lam per^
maded of (persuasum est mihi de, &c. with abl.).
^ Sojf : * to the unwilling nothing is easily persuaded.' b Of tito persons.
§41.298-297.] ' the passiyb. 107
who>^* believe that he has been beaten by his slave. There are
some who envy your glory. )
n ■
§ 41. The Passive continued.
293. (a) The verbs that govern two accusatives in the active,
sometimes govern one accusative (that of the object) in the passive.
Since even in the active it is only some verbs of cuikmgy Ac. that gov-
ern the two accuBatives, care must be taken not to extend the rule just
, given beyond the actual practice of good writers. — Rogari may take
this ace. It is found with indutus and edodua; with d4xtua or dedoehta
it is not common in prose : with cd&ri and mowtri very rare, except
with the neuter of pronouns, or such adjectives as mvlUi^ pauea. (Z.)
294. (b) Passive verbs and participles are sometimes followed
by an accusative of the part particularly referred to (accusativus
partis affectse).
Thus we may say, not only caput ferUur aUcuif or caput aUcuJuMfe-
ritur, but also dLiqmaferitur caput,
(c) In some particular constructions the part referred to is put in the^ot.
or ablatxoe,
296. An accusative also follows many other passive participles, especially
in the poets.
The peculiarity is this : the daivce of the act. is allowed to stand as
the nominative {avJbject) before the passive, or, which comes to the same
thing, with a passive participle in agreement with it ; and then the ac'
cuaaHve of the object is allowed to remain. This construction (which
is called the Greek accuaative), and that in 294, must not be imitated
by those who wish to write in Cicero's style. (G.)
296. In many general expressions the passive voice is used
impersonally where the active might be used in Latin, and is used
in English.
(Thus ambulatum est, It has been walked (by us) = we have
walked).
297. (d) With verbs of seeming, and passive verbs of declaring,
thinking, &c., the personal construction is far more common than
the impersonal.*
« In the past tenses, traditum eet, proditum est are very commonly used. The
passives of audire and ramtUlre are frequently, though not so exclusively, used
personally. (Z.)
108 THE PASSIVE. [§41. 298, 299.
(Eitg.) It siemsj ia said, Ac, that Caius has retired (or, as Lai,),
{Lat.) Caius aeemty is aaidf <&c., to have retired.
298. (a) Rogatus sententiam, Being asked his Opinion. Longam
indutus vestem. Clothed in a long garment,
(h) Oblitus*^ faciecn (smeared as to his face =), having
his face smeared or covered, Incensus animum
(kindled as to his mind ==), Having his mind agi-
tated, Adversum fdmur ictus (struck as to his
opposite thigh =), Wounded in the front part of
his thigh,
(c) Pendere animi or animo,' To be in anxious suspense.
Discrucior animi, My mind is on the rack ; I am
tortured in mind,
{d^ Lycurgi temporibus Homerus fuisse dicitur, Homer
ia said to have lived (or, it is said that Homer Uved)
in the time of Lycurgus,
Miltiades videbatur non posse esse privatus. It seemed
that Miltiades could not he a private man.
299. Vocabulary 43.
Blood f (when«^ecQ, cnior, Sris, m,
G|i . { tacitus, a, um (if actual, tacitnrnua, a,
i um if kabUttal silence is meant.)
To be silent, iiold one's tongue, silSre, sllu,
To be silent, hold one's tongue, > ^^^g ^^^ ^^.^
cease speaking, >
Silence, silentium, i, n.
Habit of silence, tacitumitas, atls, /.
About (qfUr to be silent), i ^« ^^^^ ^- »^^ ««?«• pramnms
i may stand in accus. without prepos.).
To set on fire, incendSre, cend, cens.
To light, kindle, accendSre, succendSre, cend, cens.h
< From cbtln»re.
• Often animisy if more than one person is spoken of. Cicero uses pendgre
animi and pemUre animU : not, 1 believe, pendere ammo,
t jSitin^iff inest venis, cruor est de corpore fusus. At the moment of ^ledding
sanguis should be used.
e SUire is, to emit no sound, to make no noise, to be still ; — tacire is, to utter
no word, to be silent ; especially, to pass over in silence. The opposites of
tUere are 8trepgre,fremire; of tOiCSre, die^e and Ufqui. (D.)
i> Incendire is to set the whole of a thing on fire ; accendttre and suocendltre, to
set a part of it on fire, that it may be consumed graduaUy, Aoetndert is to
§41.800.] THE PASSIVE. 109
Torch, > taeda, », /.
Lamp, lucema, se, f.
Funeral pUe, P3rre, rbgus, i, m.
To strike, hit, wound, ferire ; icSre,i ic, ict ; cedSre, cStid, ces.
Rod, virga, ae, /.
Spear, hasta, bb, /.
Arrow, sagitta, ae, /.
Lightning, fulmen, inis, n.
To be flogged, whipped with rods, virgis caedi.
Thigh, femur, ttris, n.
To walk, ambulare, av, &t.
Bight (opposite of ^), dexter, tra, tnj^n.
Exercise 46.
300. Cato was first asked his opinion. You with your usual
habit of silence' said nothing: Marcus, having his face covered
with his own blood, left the city. The laws ought not to be silent.
I am afraid that^' the laws are silent about these matters. Han-
nibal, having his mind agitated by silent care, was silent. I
warned the boy not to light the torch. By whom has the funeral
pile been lighted ? I will inquire by whom the funeral pile was
lighted. Caius, being struck by lightning, died.^ I foretell that
you tDill be flogged (288). Caius was wounded by an arrow' on
his right thigh. A league was made between the cities of '^
Rome and Lavinium. It cannot be denied that the lamp was
lighted by the boy. We have walked (pass.) enough. We have
come {pass.) to (ad) the town. It cannot he that^^ he is not tor-
tured in mind. It is said that Caius has been struck by a stone.
Was the funeral pile lighted by you or by Balbus ?
-
light it from above^ svecendere from bdow. Hence a torehf lampf &c., accendUur :
a funeral pile mecendUur, (D.) Animus accensua is merely an txcited mind,
amxnvus incensus an agitated mind. (D.)
i jPerire, to strike generally; ctsdHre is to strike with what ctUs (including
rodSf &c.) : te^e, to strike with what pierces (including lightnings stones^ &c.).
Ferire and icBre supply each other's deficiencies: thuB ferire is used for pres.,
imperf.f fut.^ which icere wants ; and icere supplies ferire with a perf and paH
participle for feriiyferituBj which are not in use. (D.) IcHre fosduB is to ratify
or make a treaty, league, Ac.
k Decessit.
110 EXPRESSIONS OF TIME. [§ 42. 301-307.
XIV.
§ 42. Expressions of Time.
301. (a) In answer to the question when ? the noun which
expresses time is put in the ablative : in answer to the question
how long ? in the accusative.
302. {b) In answer to the question in what time ? within what
time ? either a preposition {inter, ^ intra) is used : or the noun is
put in the ablative with a cardinal or ordinal numeral.
If a cardinal number is used, the noun will be in the plural ; if an
ordvruUy in the ringular.
(In ten years : in the tenth year.)
303. (c) In answer to the questions how long before ? how
long after ? the noun that expresses time is put in the ablative. —
Ante and jpost are here used as adverbs, unless there be another
noun or pronoun to be governed by them.
304. (d) A point or space of future time for which any
arrangement or provision is now made, is put in the accusative
with in : the exact time ai which a thing is to be done, in the ace,
with ad.
305. (e) Abhinc (ago) of past time is joined to the accusative
or the ablative .'"^ it must precede the numeral and its substantive,
one of which must be the next word to it.
306. (f) Natus (born) with the accusative of time = at such
an age ; so many years old. Major and minor with the genitive
or ablative of time = (respectively) ab&be or under such an age.
At auth an age may also be expressed by the genitive only (without
natua),
307. (a) Vere, In the spring. Auctumno, In the autumn.
Hibemis mensibus, In the winter months. Solis
occasu (at the setting of the sun =), At sunset.
1 Interfii the tohole duratian is spoken of: introy if aome point within that
space.
n Zumpt says the a4xu8ati»e for duration^ the ablative for a point of time.
This seems to be incorrect ; thus in * litem decidit ofrAtnc annoa quatuor * duration
is not meant. The ablative is more definite than the accusative, and should (I
think) be used when a definite point qf paat time is to be expressed ; the accu-
aatice when exact accuracy is not intended. Hence the accusative is the more
common.
^ 42. 307.] EXPRESSIONS OF TIME. Ill
Inediam hiduum aut triduum ferre (to endure absti-
nence from food =), To go vnthotU food for two,
or even three days.
Ager muUos annos quievit, The field has lain faUow
for many years.
{Jti) German! inter annos quaiuordecim tectum non subie-
rant, The Germans had not entered a house for
fourteen years together.
M ulti intra vicesimum diem dictaturd. se abdicaverunt.
Many persons have laid down their dictatorship
within twenty days.
Agamemnon cum universe Grsec^ vix decern annis
unam cepit urbem, Agamemnon with the whole of
Greece had great difficulty in taking a single city in
ten years.
Pompejus undequinquagesimo die ad imperium populi
Romani Ciliciam adjunxit, Pompeius in forty-nine
days added Cilicia to the empire of the Roman
people*
(c) Paucis post mensibus, A few months afterwards,
Paucis ante diebus, A few days hefore,
Hom€rus annis muUis fuit ante Romulum, Homer lived
many years before Romulus.
{d) Ad ccenam Canium invitavit in posterum diem^ He
invited Canius to supper for the next day.
Solvere ad Gracas KalenduSy^ To pay on the Greek
Kalends,
(e) Abhinc annos {or annis) quatuor, Four years ago.
(y ) Cato anw)s quinque et octoginta naius excessit e yit&,
Cato departed this life when he was eighty-five years
old {pry at the age of eighty-five).
" Minores annis triginta {Persons) under thirty years
old (or, of age).
Minores duorum et viginti annorum. Under the age
of two-and-ttoenty.
That is, necer ; there being no Kalends in the Greek Calendar.
112
EXPRESSIONS OF TIME. [§ 42. 308.
Civis major annis viginti, A citizen above twenty
years old,
Cato primum stipendium meruit annorum decern sep-
temque, Cato served Ms first campaign at the age
of seventeen (or, when he was seventeen years old).
308. Vocabulary 44.
To receive,
To succeed to = follow,
Swallow,
Winter (as adj,)^
Month,
Qo away,
To kill.
To kill (as a vioUrUy unjuatf cruel
acti hy poiaoTij 8tarv<Uum,8tran-
gling, Ac,),
To kill, slay (especially in hon-
ourable, open fight).
To slaughter, butcher.
To reign (neut.).
To lay down a magistracy,
Exactly (of a number),
Ephesian,
Temple,
To be burnt,
To serve a campaign.
To hold a magistracy.
accipSre, recip6re» excipere,^ cep, cept.
ezcipgre, cep, cept {accua.).
hirundo, inis,/.
hibernus, a, um.
mensis, is, m.
abire, abeo, iv, it (78, x.)-
r interf ic6re, fSc, feet (the most general
< term for killing, whether by atarva-
t tuMy poison, hanging, or the aword).
) necare ; or enScare (if by a process that
i takes up some time).
> occidSre, cid, cIs (it is used however of
> all kinds of kiUing).
( trucidare (according to Doderlein =
c tauricido, I cut down an ox).
regnare, av, at.
C abdicare magistratum, or abdxcare se
( magistratu.
ipse (in agreement with the noun).
Ephesius, i, m.
templum, i, n.
deflagrare, av, at (inirana.),
( stipendium merdre or mereri (i. e. to
C earn pay).
magistratum ger^re, gess, gest.
B Aecipimua oblata ; excipimua vagantia ; recijnmua fugientia. (D.) 7b receive
is accipere, when the thing is qfered or given : to receive a person fljring or wan-
dering is exdpere or redpere ; excipere being the act of a aervicabU friend, an
equal; redpere that of a benefactor, a auperior. Excipere is to atop a living
being in motUm, and either receive him in a friendly, or intercept him in a hoatile
manner. (D.) Accipere vtdnera is to receive wounds intended for me ; excipere
tulnera is to expose myself to wounds * that mayevery moment come in my
way.' {HiU.) Redpere is also distinguished from acdpere by denoting to receive
not merely for detenium, but for actual poaaeaaion. Accepta pecunia may be a
mere depodt : recepta pecunia is a formal taking into poaaeaaion, (D.)
§ 42. 309^ 310.] EXPBESSiONS of time. 118
[C. zxY.] i;^ After an expression of time, *ihiU* is often used for an wkUh.
V {Ii!ng.) To haiw reigned more than (or abovt) two years.
{Lot.) To be reigning his third year.
{Eng.) Before the eonnU^ipy censorahipy Ac, of Caius.
(Lai,) Before Caius (being consuly censor^ Ac, (ante Caium consulem).
Exercise 47.
309. I come to your epistles, six hundred of which' ^ I received
at one time. The swallows go away in the winter months. Do
not the swallows go away in the winter months ? Mithridates
slaughtered many Roman^ citizens in one' day. Mithridates, who
in one day hutchered so many Roman citizens, has already reigned
ahove two-and-twenty years from that (ah iUo) time. We dream
whole nights. Caius laid down his dictatorship within ten days.
Scipio<» died a year^ before my consulship. Cato died exactly
eighty p-three years before the consulship of Cicero. The
eclipses of the sun are foretold for many years. He published
an edict, that no one" under (306, f) nine-and-twenty years old
should command an army. On the same night that "i Alexander
was born, the temple of the Ephesian Diana was burnt-down. It
is certain that Caius served his first campaign at the age of
eighteen. He died at the age of thirty-three. King Archelaus
had been in possession of Cappadocia for about forty-nine years.
At the age of thirty he had already waged many wars. May
(then) a man under twenty-two years old hold a magistracy ?
He died three years ago. It is the part of a good citizen to
receive wounds for his country.
310. (a) (He did it) three years after he {had) returned,
(1) post tres annos {or tertium annum) ) quam redie-
(2) tertio anno' « « } rat.
o Scvpio the last word. p Annis octoginta et tribus ipsis,
4 Begin with the relative clause. 30 (c). 32 {d).
* It might be supposed that * tertio anno quam {or quo) redierat,' would mean,
114
EZPBESSIONS OF TIME.
[§42. 311.
(3) tribus annis (or tertio anno) postquam redierat.
(4) tertio anno quo redierat."
(h) Pfidie quam excessit e vit&, The day "before he died,
Postridie quam a vobis discessi, The day after I
left you,
Postero anno quam, &c., The year after y &c.
Priore anno quam, &c., The year before, &c. (Z.)
311. Vocabulary 45.
interdiu, or die^
noctu, or nocte.
( die ac nocte ; die noctuque ; nocte et
( interdiu.
vespgri, or vespSre.i
in tempttre, or tempore only.
ludifi Latinis.
< bello, as well OB in hello (especially if Join-
I ed with an adj. or genii.),
pugnll Cannensi (or with in).
paucis his diebus.
By day,
By night,
By day and by night,
In the evening,
In good time,
At the time of the Latin games,
In war,
In the battle of Cannae,
A few days ago.
A few days before (a past time > p^^^jg yjjg ^j^^^^
spoken of).
To found,
To invest, blockade,
To assault, storm,
Spain,
Supper (or rather, dinner),
Poison,
Starvation,
Hanging (* the rope '),
condSre, did, dit.
obsidere, sSd, sess.
oppugnare, ay, &t.
Hispania, ae,/.
coena,* 8B,/.
venenum, i, n.
fiCmes, is,y.
suspendium, i, n.
* after ^100 completed years from his return, and before the completion of the
third :' this however does not appear to be so. ' Octavo mense, quam cceptum
oppugnari,captum Saguntum, &c. {lAv.) h 6kt<o fuivi (Polyb.) ; * Tjmis aepHmo
mense capta est' (Curt.): woXtopKtav iirri nffvat (Plut.) 'after a siege of seven
months' {Clinton).
■ Nearly so with ante : * Ante triennium quam Carthago deleretur, M. Cato
mortem obiit.' The use of the suhjuncHve here will be spoken of below. Obs.
In this construction pottquam is oftener followed by the pluperfect than by the
perfect. (See 514.) The following is an example of the perfect : 'Nero natus
est post novem menses quam Tiberius exceasit.* {Suet.)
t From vesper, veeperis.
* From Koi¥6s, common : the principal meal of the day.
§ 43. 312-316.] PLACE. SPACB. 115
Exercise 48.
312. The city was taken hy storm three years after the siege
began." Hamilcar was slain nine years after he came (had
come) into Spain. Carthage was destroyed seven hundred years
after it was founded. He died the year after he was banished.
Why did he go out in the evening ? I will ask why he set out
in the evening. Canius came to supper in good time. Is this
said to have been done by night, or by day ? He died a few
years ago. He died the day after he had called upon me. He
was killed the year after Saguntum was taken. Was not he
killed in the battle of Cannse ? He set out at the time of the
Latin Games. The town was taken five ynonths after it began
to be blockaded. It is said*'' that Caius killed his slave by poi-
son. Did he kill his slave by poison or by starvation 1 Has he
not killed his enemy by the rope ? I am afraid that Balbus has
killed his slave by poison.
XV.
§ 43. Place. Space,
313. (a) If the town at which a thirig is done, is a singular noun
of the^r^ or second declension, it i^ut in the genitive : if not,
in the ablative .^
314. (i^) In answer to whither ? the place is put in the acctisa-
five : in answer to whence ? in the ablative.
These rules apply only to the names of towns and small idands. Be-
fore other words preposUums must be used ; and before thestj when the
name has an adjectvoey
315. UrbSf oppidum, 2oeu«, in apposition to the name of a town in the
genitive, stand in the ablative.
316. Such combinations as < school at CajmOj* * Carthage in Africa,* Ac,
are not admissible in Latin. But the name of the town must be gov-
« Say : * after it began to be assaulted.*
▼ Uoppidum or urbs come before the proper name, it must take & preposition,
(Z)
* In almost all the constructions of time and spaee the prepositions are occa*
sionally expressed. Thus ' ab Epidauro :' * per totam noctem :' <ftc.
116 PLACE. SPACE. [§43.317-319.
emed by the preceding rules, and the other nouns governed by a pre-
posUion. (C.)
{Eng.) Running to his mothtr at NapUs.
(Lai) i. ^^^°^^g 'o Naples to (prep.) his mother.
( Currens ad matrem Neapkim. (C.)
317. (c) Local space is expressed by the accusative : sometimes
by the ablative.
With distarCf exstarey ermneref ace. or ahl. is used (but not quite in-
differently) : with abesBCf ex- dU- cedBre^ ace. should be used j with con*
ndHre, eastrafacBre^ the ace. orahl. ;« sometimes with prep, a, db.
318. (a) Vixi RonuB, Tarenti, Athenis, Gahiis, Tibure, I have
lived at Romey Tarentuniy Athens, Gabii, Tibur.
(b) Legati Aihenas missi sunt : Ambassadors were sent to
Athens.
Fugit Tarquinios Corintho, He fled to Tarquinii from
Corinth.
(c) Tridui viam processit, He advanced a three days*
march.
Campus Marathon abest ab oppido Atheniensium cir-
citer millia passuum decem, Thefsld of Marathon
is about ten thousand paces from the city of Athens,
Bidui abest, It is a two days^ journey from us (iter
understood).
Milites aggerem latum pedes trecentos exstruxerunt,
The soldiers threw up a mound three hundred feet
broad (or, in breadth),
319. VOCABULAEY 46.
A pace, ' passus, fis =; 4 Eng. feet, 10.02 inches.
A Roman mile of a thoiuand paees, mille passus.
Miles, millia passuum (thousands of paces).
Two days, biduum, i, n.
Three days, triduum, i, n.
To be distant from ; to be at a > ^y^^^ distare,3r dlstit,
distance of, )
To be nearer ; not so far off, propius abesse.
To post himself; encamp, considSre, sed, sess.
^ Zumpt says, 'If not the distance is to be expressed, but only a place to be
designated by the circumstance of its distance, the abl. is used :' in the eighth
edit, of the original, he says, * in the acc.y but the abl. is also correct.' (Caes.
i. 4a)
y Distare generally takes a.
§ 44. 320-322.] gebunds and the pabticiflb in dus. 117
To depart a finger's breadth, tninsyersum digitum discMSre.
As they say, as the saying i9, ut aiiint.
Carthage, Carthago, inis,/.
Thebes, Thebae, irum.
Exercise 49.
(How must ' lam answered * be translated 1 269".)
320. He lived many years at Veii. The boy died at Carthage.
My father and mother died at Thebes. Why did he set out for
^lome in the evening ? I have lived several years at Carthage.
Might he not have lived at Rome ? I almost think it would have
been better for (dat) the Roman people to have been contented
with Sicily and Africa. They are building a wall two hundred
feet high. The town is five (Roman) miles from Carthage. He
has posted himself (at a distance of) four miles from Csesar.
Caius is nearer to Caesar than Labienus. - Are (then) you nearer
to me than Labienus (is) ? / have been informed that CsBsar is at
a distance of two days' march from us. There is no doubt that
the revilers of philosophy have been sufficiently answered. Does
he not deserve* * to be relieved from his debt ? From this rule I
may not depart a finger's breadth, as the saying is." *)
'[
XVI.
§ 44. On the Gerunds and the Participle in dus (Grerundive).
321. The Gerund is a verbal eubstaniivef but with the power of gaoerrCbng
what belongs to the other parts of the verb. Another peculiarity is,
that it cannot take an adjective in agreement with it.
The Gerund corresponds, as far as it goes, with the English * verbal
aubskmlwe^* or *particijnal mbstanUve in ingf* but its use is fiir less
extensive.*^
322. The Gerundive or participle in dtu is nearly allied to the Gerund :
■ Transversum, ut ajunt» digitum.
♦ The pupil cannot be taught too early or too carefully to distinguish the
* participial svbatantw^ from a participle. It may be compound as well as sim-
ple : every participle, except the simple past participle, having a substantive
use. < An affectation of being distinguished :* < the pretext of their having seized
some traders :' ' after his having been tumbling about in his mind one poor sen-
tence :' < an atonement for his having been betrayed into,* Ac.
118 GEBUNDS AND THE PABTICIPLE IN DUS. [§ 44. 323-327.
its meaning is pasaioe denoting ructaBtty^fJtneta^ or something inUnded;
what muBtj ahouldf or is to be done.
323. (a) When the participle in dua is in the neuter gender with the third per-
son sing, of esse, a whole conjugation may be formed to express what
one must, or should do. The person is put in the dative.
324. 0:^7* In the oblique cases the part, in dus in agreement
with a substantive, is nearly equivalent to a gerund governing
that substantive, in the case of its verb.
O/ writing a letter, \ ^^^^^} epistolam.
( scnbendse epistolae.
^pistolae.
325. A whole conjugation may be formed with the |>ar^ in dus
and sum.
Present J Amandus sum, lam to he loved.
C Amandus es, ihou art to he loved, Ac.
Imnerf ^ Amandus eram, / was to he loved.
\ Amandus eras, tiwu wast to he loved, Ac.
'■ Obs. Amandus eram oxfui is generally to be rendered should (or, ought
^ to) have been loved. The reason is this : a thing which was (then) a
.-^ thing to be loved, is (now) a thing which ought to have been loved.
326. (a) Pres. Scribendum est, 5 "^ "*^' ^'
C /, you, we, Ac, must write.
Sing, mihi scribendum est,* I must write,
tibi scribendum est, thou must write,
illl scribendum est, he must write.
Plur. nobis scribendum est, we must write.
vobis scribendum est, you must write.
iUis scribendum est, they must write.
Imperf. Scribendum erat \ f« •'^^"^ ^^« ^^' .
( J, thou, we should have written.
mihi scribendum erat, / ought to have written.
tibi scribendum erat, thou oughtest to have written^ Ac,
And so on for the other tenses.
327. (Part, in dus in agreement with a substantive.)
N. Epistola scribenda, a letter to be written,
G. epistolae scribendse, of writing a Utter.
D. epistoIsB scribendse, to or for writing a letter, '
Ace. (ad) epistolam scribendam, to write a Utter (or, to or for
writing a letter).
Abl. epistoU scribend&,b by writing a Utter,
* That is, * it is to he written by me,' according to the idiom by which the pas-
sive used impersonoUy is equivalent to the corresponding tenses of the active.
b It is not always that the gerund governing a case can be turned into the
gerundive (partic. in dus) ; but only when the substantive in the case corres-
ponding to the gerund would itself give a correct, though imperfect, meaning.
§44. 328-331.] gerunds and the participle in dus. 110
N, Auctores legendi, atUhora to be read.
G. auctorum legendorum, of reading authors,
D. auctoribus legendis, to or for reading atUhora.
Ace. (ad) auctores legendos, to read aiUhora (or, to or Jbr read*.
ing authors).
Abl. auctoribus legendis, by reading atUhora.
328. The part, in dua often appears to change its meaning, but it only
appears to do so.
Scribendum est mihi {it is to-be-written byme^=)l must write.
Consilium scribends epistolae (an intention tnth respect to a letter to-
be-written :=s) an intention of writing a letter.
329. {Eng.) We should all praise virtue.
(Lot.) Virtue is to-be-praised by all {dat.).
{Eng.) A time to play. Fit to carry burdens.
{Lot.) A time of playing. Fit for {dot.) burdens to-be-carried.
iJEng.) He is bom or inclined to act.
(ZdOt.) He is bom or inclined for {ad) acting.
330. [C. XXVI.] i:;^ What ia in form the present participle active is often *thB
participial substantive * or gerund. It is always so, when it governs or
is governed^ instead of merely agreeing.
?V What is in form the infin. pass, is often used as the partie. of
the fut. pass, implying possibiUtyf duty, or necessity.
Exercise 50.
331. Man is born to understand and act. Caius is skilled in
waging war. We learn by teaching. We should praise virtue
even in an enemy. He has snatched away from me the hope of
finishing the business. We are all of us desirous of seeing and
hearing many things. Water is good* for drinking. Demos-
thenes was eagerly-desirous of hearing Plato. Pericles was
admirably-skilled {peritissimus) in ruling the state. They adopt
the resolution of setting the town on fire. Ought not glory to be
Thus in, ' / bring the dead to my recollection by reading the tombstones,' here I
may use ^sep\dcris legendis^* because I bring them t6 my recollection by means
of the tombstoneSf though reading is the particular way by which I effect this.
But in, * Themistocles rendered the sea safe by chasing the pirates^ I must say,
'prsedones constctando^ not ^prtjcdonibus consectandiSi because he did not make
it safe by means of the pirates, but only by chasing them away. (G.) In the
construction with the gerund, the gerund is rnore emphatic than the gerundive
in the other construction. Whenever therefore the participial substantive in
ing is emphatic, the gerund should be used.
^ Utilis. Utilis, inutilis, are followed by the dative of the gerund, or by the
aec, with ad. Cicero generally uses ad.
120 GERUNDS AND THE PARTICIPLE IN DUS. [§ 44. 332-335.
preferred to riches 1 We must do this. Those persons are not
to be heard, who teach (prcBcipiunt) that we should be angry with
our enemies. We must all die. An orator must see what is be-
coming. We must take care to hurt (suhj.) nobody,^* We must
not take cruel measures even against Caius.<*
I
I
332. If a verb does not govern the ace, the part, in dus cannot
be used in agreement with its substantive.
In other words, such verbs have only an impermmal construction in
the passive : as we must say, ' mendad non credUur,^ so we must say,
* nundaci non credendum est,*
(a) Hence to express 'we must* do, Ac, with a verb that governs
the dot. we must use the part, in dua in the neuter gender, retaining
the object in the dative.
333. (b) EuXfruendus^fungendua^ potiwndus\ tUendtu^ are sometimes found
in agreement with their substantives, because these words formerly
governed the ace. When so used, they are generally in immediate
agreement with their substantives.
As, rea fruenda ; ad oJfficiuTn fan^endumy ^., but also *fruffnda
etiam sapientia eat.*
334. The gen. aing. maacuHne of the partic in dua is used with aui,( even
when it is plural or feminine aingylar :
i purgandi sui cauakf for the aake of clearing themselves. >
c plaeandi tui, qfappeaaing you (of a woman). 5
335. (a) Parcendumff est inimicis, We must spare our enemies
(our enemies are to be spared),
{h) £a quae utenda accepisti. Those things which you re^
ceived to be used.
Utendum est cuique suo judicio (ahh). Every man
must use his own judgment.
(c) (Peculiar constructions.)
Inter bibendum. Whilst they are drinking. Solven-
do esse (par, equal to, understood), To he ahh to
d iVis in Caium qyidem^ Ac.
* So also veacendu8j gloriandua^ medandua, pceniiendtia, pudendua.
t Other genitives plur. are found in the same way, ' diripiendi pomorum,' Ac,
In some other instances the gerund in di appears to have a passive meaning ;
* spes reatituendif* the hope of being reatored. (Z.)
c In a few passages the ace. of the object stands after this impersonal con-
■traction : * Canea potius paucoa et acrea habendum, quam muUoa.* (Varr.)
§ 44. 336-338.] gerunds and tab participle in dus. 121
pay, Oneri ferendo^ esse. To he equal to hearing
the burden. Conservandse libertatis esse, To tend
to the preservation of liberty,
336. [C. zxni.] f^ ' r?iave to do it ' must betrandated by the part, in dtu,
{Eng.) With whom we have to live.
(Lot.) With whom U is to-be-Uved (quibiucmn viyendum ett).
[C. xzYiii.] f;^ * It iff,* followed by the in/Sn. pass., generally expresaes
neceasUyyJUntaa^ or something intended; but sometimes mere poaaibilUyf
to be translated by poaaum,
[ < The passage ia tobe found in the fifth book ' = the passage may
or can be found in the fifth book.]
337. Vocabulary 47.
To overthrow, evertSre, vert, vers.
To occupy myself in ; to be an- > ^^^^ ^^^
gaged in, >
To preserve, conservSre, &v, it.
To study, devote oneself to, stttdsre, studu, (dot).
Literature, literas (pi. ; also, a letter = an epistle).
To spend his time in, tempus impendSre, pend, pens {dot,).
To make it my first object or HdagSre (* to declcm^ that' and nothing
business, ) else ;k agSre, 6g, act).
To plead a cause, agSre causam.
To feel thankM , to ret^ agrate- ) ji^ ^ j^ bjtj„
ful sense, >
To thank, return thanks, gratias agSre.
To repay a kindness, to prove > gratiam referre : f^ro, tti, lit (the per-
one's gratitude, ) son to wham must be in the dot.).
To clear = excuse, purgire, iv, it
Obs. ' Sffunddy^ which the pupil has been taught to translate by debto or oportd,
must now be translated by the part. indtUf whenever it is not emphaHes when-
ever it might be turned into *iti8to 6e,' Ac,
Exercise 51.
338. He is of opinion that these things tend (c) to the over-
h The dot. of the purpose is sometimes found instead of the ace. with ad : dis-
trahendo hosti, or ad distrahendum hostem. When the verb governs an object
in the dot,, the agent is sometimes expressed with a&, to avoid ambiguity :— >
Gives * qwUnis a vobia consulendum est.' —
Obs. Caius consulendus est (must be consulted^ : Calo consulendum est (the
inter esta of Caius must be consulted).
i Vacare (to have leisure for) is never used in this sense by the best writers.
(Hotting. Cic. Div. i. 6.)
k Followed by u< with subj.
6
122 GERUNDS AND THE PARTICIPLES IN DUS. [§ 44. 339*
throw of the state. Do these things tend to the preserve^tion or
the overthrow of the state ? There is no doubt that (86) the
state is not able to pay (c). Ijt is the part of a Christian to spend
his time in assisting! the-wretched. Let us consult the interests
of those with whom we lutve to Uve. I will inquire of Caius
whether Balbus should be consulted. We must consult the inte-
rests of Balbus. It was owing to you** that the interests of Caius
were not consulted. I made it my first object to (ut) preserve the
Roman territory. I cannot repay your kindness. There is no
doubt that he is going to thank you. I will inquire of Caius
whose cause he is going to plead. Every animal mtikes it its first
object to preserve itself. We must strive to conquer. Must we
not repay the kindness of those from (prep, a) whom we have
received benefits ? I persuaded Caius to devote himself to litera-
ture. They had come into the camp for the purpose of clearing
themselves (334). They had called upon Caius for the purpose
of clearing themselves. There were some who consulted the
interests of Caius.
339. Vocabulary 48.
(Words following the construction of proper names of places.)
At home, dtfmi.m
From home, dttmo.
Home, dtfmum.o
At my, your, another man's Ac. } ^^^j ^. ^
house, 5
On the eiound \ humi (which may follow a verb of either
C rest OT motion).
In the field, militise.o
Out of doors ; out, l ^^^ <"^^^ * ''^^^ ^^ motion) foris (after
5 other verbs).
To dine out, foras coenare.
I Sublecandia: as nibvmfre, swocurrltrt govern a da/., they cannot be put in
agreement with their object.
B Domua is partly of the second, partly of the fourth, and has both forms in
some cases. The following line gives the forms not in use :
Tolle me, mti, mi, mis, si declinare domus vis :
but it has domi for at home, Ac. ; though not for * of the house.'
^ Also ' to PomponiiLs^s house,^ Pomponii domum, toithout a preposition : ^ to
my house,* domum meam.
• Belli and mUtti^B are used only in connection with d9mi: bdlo however Is
VMd for in uar, (Z.)
§ 44. 340.] GERUNDS AND THE FAETIGIPLE IN DUS. 123
Into the coiintiy, tiis.
From the country, rure.
In the country, ruri (Uss eommonhh nire).
To return, redire, eo, iv, it.
To return, turn back, revertcre,vert, verp ; or reverti.P
To be reconciled to, in gratiam redire cum aliquo.
To confer an obligation on (i. e. > gratiam inire ab aliquo {Cie.), apud ali-
on a superior), 5 quem (Uv.) ineo.
Yq„*u S juventus utia, /. ; juventa, e, f, Juven-
' c tus, also * Uie youth.'^
To cast forth, projicSre, jec, ject.
To resolve, constituSre, stxtu, stitut.
Approved (of valor), tried, spectatus {Hi, seen).
Exercise 52.
340. Titus Manlius spent his youth in the country. When
Tullius returns (shall have returned) from the country, I will
send him to you. Quintus resolved to spend his life in the
country. On the day after lie returned from the country, he was
accused of treason. He is the same in the field that (45 (h) ) he
has always heen at home. He answered that Pomponia was sup-
ping out. Might he not have spent his life in the country ?
They (illi) kept their word both at home and in the field. He
set out into the country. There is no doubt that he set out for
the country in the evening. There is no doubt that he will cast
these things out of doors. Diodorus lived many' years at my
house. Balbus came to my house. , Had you not rather be in
your own house without^ danger', than in another-man's with'
danger^ ? There is no doubt that he was a person of most-ap- ,
proved^ merit (virtus) both at home and in the field (p. 14, 14).
It cannot be denied that he has resolved to turn hack home. There
is no doubt that you will confer an obligation upon Csesar. Bal-
P Redire properly expresses the continued action which intervenes between the
momentaneous actions of the turning back j[reverti), and the return or arrival
home (revenire). (D.) Redire is said of one who returns after having arrif ed
at his journey's end and finished his business ; reverti of one who turns back
before he has completed hiejoumey or business. (Emeati.)
^ JuventOf youth = the time of youth ; juventua (utis), youth = the gme of
youth J or, * the youth * = the young men : JuventaSy the goddess of youth.
Cicero does not use juventa; but lAvy and later writers use juventa for the time
of youth, juventus for the youth. (D.)
124 THE CONSTRUCTION OF PAETICIPLES. [§ 45. 341-345.
bus is already reconciled to Caius (perf.). We must succour
the miserable. There is no doubt that a Christian should succour
the miserable.* There is no doubt that he threw these things
(forth) on the ground against Ms will. The Roman youth were
of approved valour in war.
XVII.
m
§ 45. On the construction of Participles, {Ablative absolute.)
341. Every attributive word involves an assertion.
Thus ' a fine house* = a house whick ia afint one. ' Charles's hat'
s= the hat which belongs to Charlesj <&c.
342. Thus then every participle makes an assertion in an indirect man*
^ ner ; it assumes it attribiUivelyy instead of stating it predicatively ; that
is, as B, formal proposition,
343. Whenever therefore it is convenient to express by a complete sentence
the assertion assumed by a participle, we may do so, connecting it with
the principal sentence by a relative pronoun, or a conjunction (or con*
junctional adverb) of time^ cause^ limitation^ <&c.
344. On the other hand, subordinate sentences connected with a principal
one by relative pronouns or conjunctions (such as wheny ajter^ (f, «tnc^
hecav^ty aUhoughf &c.), may often be expressed by participles.
345. Since the use of the participle is far more extensive in Latin than in
English, such sentences must very frequently be translated into Latin
by participles. By this construction the Latin gains more compact-
ness and power of compression than the English possesses, but with
an occasional vagueness from which our language is free.'
* See page 121, note b.
' Since in the attributive combination no particle of connection is expressed,
its relation to the principal parts of the sentence must be gathered from the
general meaning of the author. An instructive example of the possibility of
misconnecting occurs in a late review of Tat^s Horace (Cluart. Rev. No. cxxiv.)
Speaking of the passage.
Causa fult pater his, qui macro pauper ageUo
Noluit in FlavS ludum me mittere, &c. (Sat. I. 6, 71.)
the reviewer, understanding the meaning to be, because the father's means were
slender, he would not send his son to a provincial school, but carried him to Rome —
proceeds to consider, Iww education could be cheaper in the capital than in the
country. If the critic had but construed the passage correctly, he would have
found no grounds in it for speculating about fowndaJtion schools, <&c. at Rome,
but have remained satisfied with the obvious meaning, that, < thouqh the father**
(1)
lU.
§ 45. 346-348.] the construction of participles. 125
346. When a participle does not refer to a noun or pronoun
already governed or governing in the sentence, it is put in the
ablative in agreement with its own noun.
(a) An ablative thus unconnected with the general structure of the
dause in which it stands, is called an oblatiDe abef^tUe,
. (fi) In turning a subordinate sentence into the participial construc-
tion, if the nominative of the subordinate sentence be not a noun occur'
ring in the principal sentence, or a pronoun representing such a noun^
the construction must be the ablative absolute.
347. Examples.
( Nobody teho coneidera this, will hesitate.
C Nobody considering ttoB, will hesitate.
(2) ( Nobody, if Caius considers this, will escape.
(o&L abs.) I Nobody, Cains considering this, will escape.
^.^ X Alexander, after hehad token Tyre, marched on, ^.
c Alexander, having taken Tyre, marched on, &c. .
(2) ( The King, when Alexander had taken Tyre, rethred, Ac. V
{abl, abs.) I The King, T)/re being takesn by Alexander, retired, Ac.
/jv { 1 desire joys whi^ will last for ever.
c I desire joys about-to-last for ever.
(2) ( I desire heaven, because its joys wiU last for ever.
{<M, abs.) \ I desire heaven, iXAJoys being about-to-last for ever.
(D i ^^ ™^ many things, though they stare us in the face.
c We miss many things staring us in the face. v tv
(2) ( We miss many things, though some truths stare us in the face.
{abl, abs.) J We miss many things, some truths staring us in the face.
848. Vocabulary 49. (Preposition a, db^ a^.)
A before consonants: ab before vowels and sometimes before the
consonants in M2ari« and J; abs is much less commonly used, except
before /«,■ and never except before t and qu.
The meanings of a are (1) from; (2) &y, governing the agent after
pass, verbs; (3) qJUr; (4) on or o^ of relative position ; (5) on ^ sids
ox part of ; (6) in point of; (7) the office held.
From a boy, a puero.
Immediately after the battle, confestim a prcBlio.t
In front, afronte(frons, tis,/. et m. * forehead*).
means were dender,* he neoerthdess would not send his son to a school that waa
thought good enough for the children of great centurums, <f«., but resolved to give
him the best education (he capital could ajford.
■ JButler says that it is found before all the consonants except 6.
t Pugna is any battle, from a single combat to the general engagement of large
armies : prtBlium is an engagement of troops. Doderlein seems to confine the
meaning of praelium too much, when he makes it only the * occasional engage-
ment of particular divisions of an army :' for Nepos says, ' illustrissimum est
prosUum apud Plataeas.' Acies when used of a buOtU is ^general sngagemeat.
126 THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. [§ 46. 349> 350.
In flank, a latere « (latus, eria, n. ' side ').
In the rear, a tergo.
At two miles distance ; two miles ) ^ ^^^^^ passuum duobus.
offj 5
So near home, tarn prope a dttmo.
To make for us, a nobis facSre.
To be on our side ; to stand on ) ^ ^^^y ^ ^^^^
< our side, )
To be of a man's party, ab aliquo senOre ; sens, sens.
An amanuensis, a mXnu servus J
Again from the beginning ; ^ I ^y, integro {integer, gn, gmm, wJuOe).
over again, >
/ ,, Exercise 53.
[Obs. a (p) prefixed to a clause, indicates that it is to be translated
participially.]
349.. Let us oppose the evils Pthat are coming'. Must we
spare even p those who resist (us) ? [No.] We must spare them
even p though they should resist (us). I must not despair p if
(but a) few^ stand on my side. Timotheus increased by (his)
many virtues the glory p which he had received from his father'.
Caius, p afler he was banished, lived many years at Athens. Tho
father, p afler his son MPas banished, lived many years at Carthage.
We do not believe^ a liar, even p when he speaks the truth. The
father turned back, p because he feared ybr his son (231). Caius,
p who was accused of treason, has been acquitted of the capital
charge.* * Why did you turn back so near home ? The Gauls
attack the Romans in the rear. Ariovistus posted himself at
about two miles off. He took Massilia p afler it had been block-
aded two years. A treaty was ratified p afler the city had been
besieged for two years. Do not these (arguments) make for us ?
Scipio immediately afler the battle returned to the sea. Almost
from a boy he has devoted himself to literature.
§ 46. The Participle continued,
350. (a) The participle of the future in rus oflen expresses
the purpose with which a person acts.
« On tfujlanks (a lateribus).
▼ So, ab epi^dis, a secretary : aratUmibua^ a steward cr accoimtant.
V We believe a liar, no< even, &c. (ne — quidem).
§ 46. 351-356.] the construction of paetioiples. 127
351. (h) The participle in dus often expresses the end or pur-
pose for which a thing is done.
(a) This is especially the case after curare (to cause a thing to be
done) and verbs of givingj receivings aendingf undertaking. In English
the irifin. active is often used where the in/in. passive would be allowable^
but less common.
(/?) He gave them the country to dwell in.
{Or) He gave them the country to be dwelt in (by them).
352. Of two connected sentences, one may often be got rid of
by turning its verb into a participle.
Of course the more emphatic should be retained : for instance that
which is the effect rather than that which is the cause; that which is
the consequence rather than that which is the condition ; that which is
posterior in point of time rather than that which precedes it.
353. It is a peculiarity of the English language, that we use a pre»eni par-
ticiple when, though two events are closely connectedy yet that repre-
sented by the participle must be over before the other begins.
[C. XXX.] O^A present participle must be translated by a
perfect participle (or its substitute, quum with perf, or pluperf.
suhj.) when the action expressed by it must be over, before that
expressed by the verb begins,
EXAWPLBS.
354. (a) I write to aid the student. > I
(part.) I write going-to-aid the student {adjuturus). )
{b) He gave them the country to dwell in. ) jj
(part.) He gave them the country to-be-dwelt-in (Judntandum). 5
355. He apprekended them and took them to Rome. > yh,
{part.) He took ikem apprehended to Rome. )
He took up the bundle and ran off. > jy
{abl. abs.) The bundle being taken up^ he ran off. )
{Eng.) Leaping from his horse, he embraced him.
{JLat.) Having leapt from his horse, he embraced him.
356. Vocabulary 50.
To cause to be done , to have a > ^j^^ fedendum curare,
thmg done, )
To contract to build, aliquid faciendum conducSre
To let a thing out to be bulh by ) ^^^ fedendum locire.
contract, )
A sentence, sententia, ce, /.
To corrupt, corrumpSre, rup, rupt.
To learn by heart, ediscSre, edidici (no tup.).
To repair, ref icSre, io, ftc, feet.
To pull down, diruSre, ru, riit.
Bridge, pons, pon^ in.
128 THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. [§ 47. 357-360.
Exercise 54.
357. Conon causes the walls p which had been pulled down by
Lysander,* p to be repaired. He undertook p to corrupt Epami-
nondas with money. For how much will you undertake p to cor-
rupt Balbus ? He had contracted p to build a bridge. He gave
Cyrus to Harpagus p to be killed. Carvilius, when^^ consul, had
let out the temple {cRdes^) of Fortune {Fortuna) Pto he buiU hy
contract. We give boys sentences Pto learn by heart (354, J).
He has set out for Rome p to free his son from deht. I cannot but
think" you corrupted by gold. Forgetting'*' the benefits which
he received from Caius, he took cruel measures against him. (Be-
gin with relat, clause ; 30, 31.) He says that it \%not^ necessary
to make haste. There are some who*°' have turned-back home.
§ 47. The Participle continued. The Supines.
358. (a) No Latin verb (except the deponents and neuter-
passives) has a participle of the perfect active. Hence this
participle must be translated by the (passive) past participle
put absolutely, or by quum with the perfect or pluperfect sub-
junctive.
359. (b) An English substantive may oflen be translated by a
participle.
It is very frequently necessary to translate abgtraet nouns expressing
a mode of action in this way ; as such nouns are comparatively seldom
used in Latin.
360. (c) So also the ^participial mtbstantiot? may often be translated not only
> O. lAfaandri.
y JEdes and ttrnplum are both a temple : but in the former it is considered as
the one principal bvilding which is the dwelling-place of the Qod ; in the latter
as the whole temple, with all its buildings, courts, Ac, jEdea in the sing, has
generally the adj. sacra with it, or the name of the Deity : JooiSf Mineroce, Ac.
Fanum is a spot consecrated for the erection of a temple by the augurs ; and
hence the temple itself, considered as a consecrated place, ' a sanctuan/.* Delu-
brum was either the temple itself^ as a place of expiation and purification ; or,
according to others, the part of the temple where the image of the Deity stood ;
the shrine, Templum is from r£/ivw, Ti/iwu {ciU)^ a portion *ciU ojp by the
augurs ; delubrum probably from de-tuOf to wash away : Dbderlein thinks that
fanum is the German J^onn, Engl. ban.
L
[§ 47. 361-364. the parttciple. 129
by the participle in c2u«, but by other participles. This is a common
way of translating it when it is under the government of * without J
361. After * to hear * and * to see* the present infin. aetvoe must be translated
into Latin by the present participle active,
362. When the participle of an ahl. dbsol. is ' heing,' it is
omitted in Latin, and two substantives^ or a substantive and ad-
jectwe, are put together in the ablative,
362.* The supine in um {act.) follows verbs of motion : the supine in u (vir-
tually, though not really pass.) follows a few adjectives (such as best,
diffieultj Ac.)f and the substantives/a«, nefas, &c.
a) The supine in um with ire means ' logo about to* Ac, implying ^fbrt
and exertion.
363. (a) {Eng.) Csesar, Jutoing crossed the Ridncony marched to Rome.
/£. V { Cssar, the Rubicon being crossed^ marched to Rome.
C OTy Csesar, uhen he had crossed the Rubicon^ marched to Rome.
(6) 1. Tarquinius, after his banishmerU from Rome, 4&c.
Tarquinius, being banished from Rome.
2. After the banishment of Tarquinius, consuls were elected.
iabl. abs.) Tariuinius being bani^ied, ) ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^j^^^^
{or) After Tarquinius banished, )
(Tarquinio expulso ; or, post Tarqulnium expulsum.)
{Eng.) From the foundation of Rome, ) ^ ^^^^ conditi. I II.
{Lat. ) From Romefaunded, ) }
(<Sb, ante Romam conditam, &c.)
(Eng^ By Ou practice of virtue, ) ,^^jg ^,^
\Liat.) By virtue practised, )
(Virtute colendtl, by practising virtue^
{Eng.) A reward for having despised the deity ; or, for contempt of the
deity.
{Lat. A reward of ( =: for) the deify despised {spreti numinis merces).
(e) {Eng.) He assists others without robbing himself.
{Lat.) He assists others, not robbing himself (se ipsum non spolians).
{Eng.) He goes away without your perceiving it.
{Lat.) He goes away, you not perceiving it {te non sentiente),
{Eng.) He goes away without saluting any body.
{Lot.) He goes away, nobody being saluted {nemine t sahUato).
{Eng.) He condemns him without hearing him.
{Lot.) He condemns him unheard {inawiitum),
864. VOCABULAKY 51.
At the suggestion of the Magi, Magis auctoribus {auctory an adviser).
Under your guidance, j ^ ^!"^ (you being our leader : dux, du-
( CIS, m, etf.)
In the reign of Herod, Her5de rege."
------- — *
t On neminis, nemine, see the index under * Nobody.*
« Or, Herode regnante. If the reign were that of a Roman Emperor, imper-
mUe must be used.
130 THE PARTICIPLE. [§4*7* 365,866.
Against the will of Caius, Gaio invito.
In the life-time of Augustus, Augusto yIyq.
I have completed the work, opus absoiutum habeo.*
I plainly see through his design, consilium ejus perspectum habeo.
It cannot be said without impiety, nSfas est dictu.
It may be said without impiety, fas est dictu.
Hard to find, difficilis inventu.
365. [C. zxxi.] 0:^^ The English present part. act. is gene-
rally translated by the Latin past partic. when the verb is
deponent.
This arises from the principle given in 353, and from this : that the
Romans spoke of a, feeling as ar«r, the moment t^ ?uul been felt ; and of
a mentcU operation as overf the moment it was performed; whereas we
should describe both as present; as now going on.
Exercise 55.
[Which word for to light should be used of a funeral pile 7 299, h.]
366. p If nature opposes, you will strive to no purpose. Pytha-
goras came into Italy p in the reign of Tarquinius Superbus.
p After Dion (G. Dionis) was killed at Syracuse, Dionysius
gained possession of the city, -^neas, p after the taking of Troy
by the Greeks, came into Italy. The slave, having lighted the
funeral pile, cast himself at his master's feet.** They returned
-=> to Veii p without waiting for the army of the Romans. They
could scarcely be restrained from'^ condemning you to death
without hearing you. At the suggestion of Caius, Balbus pre-
tended to be mad.' I am afraid that 1 do not* ' see through Balbus's
design. The son died p after the banishment of his father. He
pretends that he has finished the work. I have now finished the
work which I promised to perform* {Invert), p After the taking
of Massilia by storm, a league was made {Express post). Was
(then) man born p to drink wine ? You have recovered from a
severe disease p by drinking water. I heard Caius cry out, that it
vms all over mth the army. Is virtue hard to Jind ? [No.] You
will do what shall seem best to be done. Why do you go about to
•* destroy yourself? They sent to Delphi, to consult {sup.) what
should be done.
* From this idiom, which dwells more on the possession of the completed ac-
tion than on its mere completion^ arose the perfect with have in our own and other
modem languages.
§ 48. 367-873.] pronouns. 131
§48. Pronouns.
^-jA
367. (a) ^ Oton,' when it is to be more strongly expressed than
by meus, tuus, suuSf &c., must be translated by ipsius or ipsorum
(as one or more are meant) after those pronouns.
368. (h) Self J — selves, dsc, in an oblique case are often trans-
lated by ipse and a personal pronoun together ; the ipse being in
the nom. if the meaning is that that agent did it ; in the case of
the personal pronoun, if his doing it to himself is the stronger
notion.
369. Properly am relates to the nominatlTe caie of its own verb ; but it
may be used, in a dependent claase, for the nominative of the principal
verb, when either the grammar or the sense would prevent its being re-
ferred to the verb of its own clause.
370. (c) Hence in a dependent sentence, that expresses some
thought or purpose of the subject of the principal sentence —
His, Mnif her, their, denoting the nominative of the principal
sentence, should be translated by sui or suns, whenever (from the
grammar or the obvious sense) there would be no danger of under-
standing it to mean the nominative of its own verb.
*His, him, her, their, denoting the nominative of the principal
sentence, must be translated by ipse, when there would he danger
of understanding sui or suus to mean the nominative of its own
verb.
371. (d) Suus often refers to an oblique case, especially when
quisque or unusquisque is used.
372. Obs. NostHUm and vestrCkm are to be used (not noitri, vestn) when
* of uBy* ^of you.^ :=z*ouiqf u*/ *oui of you;* that is to say, utter partir
Hv9B (including numeralBj comparatioea^ and auperlatvocs).^
373. (a) Mea ipsius culpa, My own fault.
Nostra ipsorum culpa, Our own fault,
(h) Me* ipse consOlor, I console myself.
Se ipsos omnes natur^ dilligunt, All men naturally
love themselves.
b Nostriim and vestrCim are also used when they have omnium in agreement,
€mnmm noatHtmt Ac.
« The cases of the personal pronouns (except tu and the gmithea plural) ars
132 PRONOUNS. [§48. 374.
(c) Cicero effecerat, ut Q. Curius consilia Catilinae sUd
prpderet, Cicero had induced Q. Curius to betray
to him (Cicero) the designs of CatiUne.
(It being abviouab/ absurd to suppose that Curius was to betray them
to Ouriua.)
PerssB, mortuo Alexandro, non alium, qui imperaret
ipsiSf digniorem fuisse confitebantur, The Persians,
after the death of Alexander, confessed that nobody
had ever better deserved to rule over them.
{Qui imperat sibi, might have meant * aJUter person to govern himself.')
{d) Hannibalem svi cives e civitate ejecerunt, Hannibal
was banished by his feUow-citizens.
374. Vocabulary 52.
To befjoJl, happen, accidSre,<i cid, (dai^.
To happen, turn out, evenire, ven, vent.
To happen {of fortunate events), contingSre, tig, tact, {dot.).
It was this man's good fortune, huic contigit ut, Ac,
To restore liberty to his country, patriam in iibertatem vindicire.
To defend (a thing or P^^on ^ Uefend^re, fend Jena,
actuaUy attacked), >
To defend (a thing or person, if J
and whenevpr it is attacked ;) > tu§ri,* tuitus et tutus.
to take under one's protection, )
His own friends, or adherents, sui (plur.).
For its own sake, propter sese.
sometimes strengthened by ' met ' to signify adf, with or without ipse ; mihim>et
tpfft, sibim^ ipsis, nobismet ipsis, de m,emet ipso, &c, Se is also doubled into sese :
for tumet, tute is said. Matthise says, that Cic. never puts ipse in the nom. after
this appended met.
d Acc^ldire and eoenire are said of any occurrences whatever ; contvng)tre, ob-
venire, and obtingere, only of fortunate ones. But accidentia are occurrences
that take u« by surprise ; evenientia those that are expected. Accidentia are repre-
sented as the effects of chance; evenientia as the results of preceding actions or
events; contingentia as favours conferred upon us by good fortune ; obtingeniia
and obvenientia as advantages^/in^ to our lot. (D.) From the use of contingere
to describe the happening of fortunate occurrences, aceidere would come to be
generally used of unfortunate ones.
• Neither is in itself stronger than the other ; for as the defendens shows
more spirit and strength in resisting an actual danger, so the iuena shows more
care and qfectian in endeavouring to prevent an anticipated one. (D.)
§ 49. 375-377.] pbonotjns. 133
Exercise 56.
[How is ikrough to be translated, when it expresses the cauBe ? (261.)]
375. The mind is a part of me. The better part of you is
immortal. Let none of us doubt that it is expedient to obey the
laws of virtue. Which of you is believed ? Many evils have
befallen me through (ahl.) my own fault. Do not many evils
happen to us by our own fault ? All men favour themselves.
These evils may have happened to us (129 (a) ) through our own
fault. It cannot be denied that the mind is a part of ourselves
(of us), I will pray Caius to take my cause under his protection.
Ought he not to have commanded himself 1 Jtis not every man who
can command himself. He is an enemy to himself. We should
practise justice for its own sake. They prayed Artabazus to take
their ^ cause under his protection. He was called king by his
own adherents. Jt was this man^s good fortune to restore liberty
to his country. I fear that he will not be able to restore liberty
to his country. They ask to be allowed to take all their property
with them. There are some*'* who favour themselves.
§ 49. Pronouns continued, (Is, hie, iste, ille.)
376. (a) He, she, it ; they, are translated by is, ea, id, when
they merely stand for a person or thing either before mentioned or
about to be described by a relative clause.
* ISf^ is wholly without emphasis, or the power of didrngutshing one
object firam another. One of its main duties is to act as a mere ante-
cedent to the relative.^
377. When used to distinguish objects, hie denotes the nearest,
ille the most remote, iste that which is the nearest to the party
addressed.
(c) late may be considered as the demonstrative of the second person =
' that of yoursy * that which is knovon to (or coneema) youJ
( Ipaorum: for suam might mean, they prayed him to support ku own
cause.
s *I8 qui pugnat' means ^ihe comhaiant* or *a eombatofii^ (accordingly as
he has been mentioned, or not mentioned before) : while * hie qui pugnat,'
*iUe qui pugnat,' signify respectively *ihia combatant,* 'yonder combatant.'
184 PRONOUNS. [§^d- 876-384.
•»
378. From this power of denoting comparative nearness and rerhtfteness
(whether in space or iime)^ hie and tile are used to discriminate
hetween the different words that form the subject of discourse. Thus
then,
Of two things already mentioned, hie relates to the nearer, the
latter ; iUe to the more remote, the former,^
ERe, referring to what immediaiely precedes, must occupy a very
early, if not the first place in its sentence.
379. While hio refers to what has just come from the pen (or mouih),
UU may be exposed to it in another direction, and introduce some new
matter.
380. So also hie may refer to what follows^ but it must then descend from
its prominent place at the beginning of the sentence, to occupy one
equally emphatic either at, or very near, the end.
381. * lUe* from relating to the past^ may denote that w^icA has long been
known^ uheOierfoDourablyor unfacourably,
(b) Here illei =iffu weUknovm; the famous,
382. In Uttersy isle relates to the place where the person addressed is
residing, and to the things that concern him : in trials^ iste denotes the
opposite party f as long as he is directly addressed; but when the
speaker turns to the judges, he may use hie to denote the opposite
party. (G.)
As ille may mean 'whom all knowy so iste may mean *v^om you,
ktwwy whether for good or noLk So also hw may mean ' whom you or
I see before us.'
383. [£) * JJle ' is used before * quidem,' where we use * it is
true,* ' indeed,* to make some partial concession, to be followed by
884. (a) Dionysius servus mens aufilgit : m est in provincial
ink, Dionysius, a slave of mine, has run away : he
is in your province,
(h) Medea Ula, The famous Medea. Magnus iUe Alex-
ander, The celebrated Alexander the Great.
h Of the passages where fuc relates to the more remote word of a sentence, all
probably may be explained by one or other of these considerations : — (1) The
well-known order df the actual occurrence or existence of the things may be re-
versed in the sentence. (G.) (2) Hie may denote what is before our eyes. (3)
Or hie may denote ' id de quo potissimum agimus.' {Rasdag ad lAv. zziv. 29.)
i JUe can never perform the part of a mere antecedent to the relative ( := i«) ;
and the employment of hie for this purpose must be confined to those cases
where the relative clause precedes (see 30, (c) ), so that here too it supports its
ordinary character of referring to what has just been mentioned.
k In thiB way ufe is ofUn. used to express contempt, but by no means always.
§49. 885, ad6.] PRONOUNS. 185
(c) Ista^ civitas. That state of yours.
(d) Non sine ratione Ule quicLem, sed tamen, ^., Not
. without reason it is true, hit yet, &c.
885. VOCABULAHY 53.
And that too, et is ;i iaque ; et idem, idemque.
Nor that ; and that too not, nee is.
> is™ demum {that at lengthy as if the oth-
That only, ^ ers had been traveUed through before
C this was arrived at).
To know, 6cIre,o sciv, scit.
To know ::= to be acquainted ( nSvisse, nosse (per/*, of noscSre, to learn
with, ( to know, to make acquaintance with).
To know thoroughly by expo- J <=»"«"• "* (P«>P«''y. to b* hard, ^ a.
lience; tobeoonyeramtwitb, { ^'^ '*<=°'»«' •>? '"""'' °^"»> ■»-
J bour; ace.).
r adimSreo (of good things) eximCre (of
To take away, < had things) em, empt. They govern
( the dot. of that/rom which.
To make a beginning with, (acCre initium a.
Of a common kind, vulgaris, is, e.
Exercise 57.
386. He has killed both his father and his mother ; the former
by poison, the latter by starvation. What prevents him from
making a beginning vnth himself? This" only is true wisdom,
to command oneself. What" true wisdom is, the wise only know.
Do you know Caius ? I will ask what true wisdom is. At how
much is that state of yours to be valued, from which the good and
wise have been banished ? I doubt whether this is true happiness
or not, I have had an interview with Gains : he says that he has
1 Some scholars doubt the existence of the forms u and Hm, GrotefendgiveB
dat. eU (also iia) : Zumpt (in his eighth edit.) ii («i), iU (ets) ; adding that the
former are the more common, and generally written in MSS. with a single i.
^ When iSf hiCf or quij &c. stands as the subject of an ctppoBiHon-verb (150), it
generally agrees with the following noun, where we might suppose it to agree
with ' thing.* [" Ea demum est v^ra/rfirffci#."]
B Scire relates to a. proposition ; if followed by an accusative only, it is a neut,
pronowif or nihil. It expresses actually acquired knowtedgt. Nosse is to havo
become acquainted with the signs and marks by which a thing may be known t
it * describes therefore knowledge as the result of external or internal psrceptUm,*
(R.) Hence nosse is often followed by the accusative of a noun.
o Demitur quidtibet ; adimuniur bona ; eximuntur mala. (O.)
I
136 PRONOUNS. § 49. 887, 388.
not seen the man. Do not take away from me niy liberty. That
(famous) Plato has taken away from me all fear of death. Apollo
admonishes us to become acquainted with ourselves. It is not
every one who can^^ know himself. Those good things which
can be taken away, are not really good things.? Having set my
son^ at liberty, he has taken away all my^ care. I have been
praised by a good man it is true (d), but (one who is) unskilled
in these matters. Christians after death will enjoy a happy life,
and that loo an eternal one. He has always devoted himself to
literature, and that too of no®' common kind.
387. Vocabulary 54.
* Also, (may often be translated by) idem.'
This or that, as well as some other, et ipse.
Where you are ; in your neigh- > , ^
bourhood, 5
Even or very {loUh that), ipse ; illud ipsum* (* even that ').
To join battle with, to give bat- ) j.^^ committ5re cum.
tie to, )
To your neighbourhood ; to where > .^^ ^ jg^^^ ^
you are, 5
From your neighbourhood ; from > jgtinc
where you are, ) '
Proud, superbus, a, um.
Exercise 58.
[How must ^I ambdieved* be ti^slated? 285.]
388. Those whom we love, we also wish to be happy. Let
him who commands others, learn also to command himself. Are
(then) liars believed in your neighbourhood 1 Those who come
from your neighbourhood, say that you are proud. It is not
becoming for»^ a Christian to be proud. I had already set out to
P Say : * are not true good (things).'
1 Say : * all care.>^om me.*
' Nihil est liberate, quod non idem justum (which is not aho just).
• To justify the use of UU (to denote any thing, provided it did not immediately
precede) there must always be an intermediate object to which Jdc is applicable :
yet, not if the remote event be one of general notoriety, " Quid T. Albutius 1
nonne squissimo animo Athenis exsul philosophabatur 7 cui tamen Ulud ipsum
numquam accidisset si, Ac." {De JFHn. v. 108.)
t Adverbs of motion to a place end in o or uc; of mo^onjrornj in tnc, nde.
§50. 369-391.] PRONOxnis. 137
your neighbourhood. Even that would never have befallen me,
in your lifetime. A Christian may not be proud. Do 'not join
battle. I fear the Romans will not be willing to join battle with
the Gauls. It cannot be denied tluU justice should be practised
for its own sake. It remains, that I should give battle to the
Gauls. It follows, that it is a difficult thing to know oneself. I
know that in your neighbourhood you both are wise and seem
(so.) Such^') a war was imdertaken, as Rome had never before
seen.
§50. Pronouns continued. (On the translation of 'any.')
389. < Any ' when all are excluded is quisquam or uUus.
390. ' Any ' when all are included is quivis"^ or quilihet.
(a) All are excluded in sentences that are realty or virtually^ negative ;
and after vix {»xarcely\ sine i^mfhaut).
ifi) All are imduded when * any * means * any ycu pleage,* * every,*
(y) ' Q^uisquam * is used imthotU, ' ullus ' generally vnth a sabstantive.
Quigqutam may howeyer be used with designations of men {homo^
cioi8)y &c.
391. {h) * Any' afler si, nisi, num, ne, quo, quanto, is the in-
definite quis y^ of which the feminine singular and neut. plur. are
qua or qua, after si, num, ne (and ec).*
« In guwis (and tUervia) e deliberate and thoughifvl choice is supposed, in ^t-
libet (and lUerlibet) a blind and tnconsiderate one. — QuUtbet generally carries
with it some expression of contempt (D. after Lachmann.)
▼ Sentences that are virtually negative (that is, as good as negative) are (1)
such questions as expect the answer ' no,' and are asked not for information but
assent; thus, * can any man believe this 1* ^*no man surely can believe this ;*
(2) comparative sentences} * he was taller than any of his friends' = ^none of his
friends was so tall as he.' — ^With respect to «m«, aliquis should follow it in a
negative sentence (in which it is to be considered posilive)^ and uUua in a positive
sentence (in which it is to be considered negative). (G.)
w Quisquam sometimes follows «i, but it then generally implies that the exist-
ence of the exception is very doubtful. And even without «t it is used to ex-
press any single person or thing. " Quamdiu quisquam erit, qui te audeat
defendere, vives." Such expressions as ' sine omni curft' for 'sine uUa cura'
are only found in Plautus and Terence. In Cicero * sine omni curd ' would
mean * without all (imaginable) care.'
* Whether qtuB or qua should be preferred, is a disputed point. The poets
use qua with feio exceptions. (Z.) The form qui is also used in the sing. nom.
masc. : si qui, ecqui. Even aliqui ( := aliquis) is found in a few passages of
Cicero.
188 FR0N017NS. [§50. 892-396.
(But aliquia follows these particles when the any or some iBemp?uUie.)
392. ' Any ' is translated by aUquis'^ or quispiam, when it means
* gome one or other,' * some.^
393. (d) The indefinite article * a ' may sometimes be trans-
lated by -quidam, aliguis, or quispiamj^ when < a certain ' or < ^ome '
might be substituted for * a.'
394. (6) iVMn'o quM (the ^uis agreeing with the subst.) is sometimes used for
quidamt but it generally carries with it some notion of contempt or of
indifference at least.
(Eng.) HenTYf Charles and John.^
(LkU.) Henry, Charles, John. Or^ Henry and Charles and John.
895. (a) Solis candor illustrior est quam uUius ignis, The
brightness of the sun is more intense than that of any
fre.
An quisquam potest sine perturbatione mentis irasci ?
Can (then) any man he angry without some mental
agitation ?
(h) Num quis irascitur infantibus ? Is any body angry
with infants ?
(c) Quodlibet pro patri^, parentibus, amicis, adlre peri-
culum .... oportet, We ought to encounter any
danger for our country, our parents, and our
friends.
Mihi quidvis sat est, Any thing is enough for me.
(d) Agrioola quispiam, Some husbandman (any, or a, hus^
bandman). Pictor aliquis, Any, or a, painter.
(e) Prope me hie nescio quis loquitur. Some bocly or
other is talking here near me.
396. Vocabulary 55.
Everybody ?quisque,« qupeque, quodque; O. cu-
' 5 jttsque.
X If f some ' is emphatic =: some at Uaat^ though but lUtle^ or of a bad quality ^
aliquM should be used.
y When quidam expresses *aMt implies 'a certain* one, though it is unne-
cessary, perhaps impossible, to name it : quiapiam and aUquia do not imply an
allusion to a particular individual.
" Quiequ^ is a sort of encUtic, and therefore never stands at the beginning of
a sentence in prose, and seldom even in poetry. The corresponding emphatie
form is ' unuequiaquey* * each particular one,*
§ 60. S97.] PRONOUNS. 189
Every body who , whoever, \ 'i'^'^ 1"'^^"*'' (qiddqnld.
C every thing that; wfuUecer).
Whatever; every-that, \ quicunque,' quaecunque, quodcunque;
C G. cujuBCunque, Ac.
Why 7 quid?
Howl qull
Somebody = a person of conse- > ^^ ^ ^ ^^ . q aUcujiw.
quence, )
At once — and, idem — ^ldem.b
Any one man, . quivis unus.
Take care ; see that, vide ne.
Rashly ; inconsiderately ; without ) iqjj^xjq
sufficient reason, >
What 7 quidi
Some how or other, nescio quomOdo.
Exercise 59.
397. Can (then)® any man govern the seasons ? Take care
not to be angry with any body without sufficient reason. Take
care to do nothing incohsiderately. Can (then) any of you govern
the seasons ? Hardly any one can govern himself! Every man
ought to defend his own^ friends.** Will any man hesitate to shed
his blood for his country ? This might have happened to any
fiody. Shall (then) any thing deter me from encountering'* any
danger (whatever) for my country' and my parents^ ? Is not any
thing enough for Balbus ? He is braver than any (390, v) of the
Gauls. If any one breaks his word for the sake of his friend, he
sins^. Do you (then) believe that any Roman (you please) is
brav«r than any Greek ? You may say any thing (you .please)
here. Whatever things are in the whole (omnis) world, belong
to men. Some are the slaves of glory, others of money. How
does it happen that you (pi.) do not know this ? What ! do not
all understand this ? There are some who believe any body.
* Quicun^^is the adjective form of ^uM^ui*-.
b Fuere quidam qui iidem ornate, iidem versute dicerent. (Z.)
« Though num expects the answer nOf it does not imply that die answer 'yea*
cannot possibly be given, as * on ' does. * An quiaquam * is therefore more com-
mon than *ntim quisquam,' and stronger than *num quia J
d Quiaque should immediately follow cases of aui or auua, and rmmeralt
(decimus quiaqucj every tenth man).
140 PKONOUNS. [§ 51. 398-402.
§ 51. Pronouns continued. (On the prefixes and afiixes of
the interrogatives,)
398. (a) The syllable ec often appears as a prefic, and the syl-
lable nam as an affix, to interrogative pronouns and adverbs.
The *ec' is from en! em! hem! a particle calling for attention to
what is going to be said. * Nam ' is properly naTneh/j byname ; so that
quisnam is, who by name ; name or tell me, who. {Hdriung.)
The «n stands alone in, *En unquam cuiquam contumeliosius audistis
factam injuriam, Ac.1 * ( Ter. Phorm. ii. 3.) Nam is appended to ^utf,
quidi vbi^ num^ Ac.
399. (Jb) * Always ' after one superlative and before another,
may be translated by quisque, agreeing with the same substantive
that the superlatives agree with.
The singular is generally to be used, when a substantive is not to be
expressed in Latin.
400. (a) Ecquid* sentitis in quanto eontemtu vivatis ? Bo you
perceive at all (or, perchance) in what contempt you
are living ?
Num qvidnam novi accidit ? Has any thing fresh
occurred ?
{h) Optimum quidque rarissimum est, The best things are
always the rarest.
Altissima qiuzque flumina minimo sono labuntur, The
deepest rivers always J^i? wUh the least sound.
(c) Doctissimus quisque^ All the most learned men.
(d) Aliud alii natura iter ostendit, Nature points out one
path to one man, another to another.
Aliud alio fertur, One thing is home in one direction^
another in another.
401. {Eng.) One Balbus. {Lot.) A certain Balbus. (Quidom.)
{Eng,) One does one thing, another ahotherj
{Lot.) Another does another thing.
. 402. Vocabulary 56.
Little = but or too little, parum (with genii.).
* Ec ( = en) prefixed to quis^ quidy quandOf &c., puts a question douhtingly,
but intimates that the answer 'no ' is rather expected. It often gives a tone of
impatience to the inquiry.
f In a sentence of this kind, one — one must be translated by aliua^aliue
and another-^notherhe untrandated.
interdum.
§ 51. 402.] PRONOUNS. 141
A little ^ some, but not much, paulum, or paulttlum.
Acondderable quantity i ^'^\^^,aMam(vAihgcnit.).
considerable. ) v o /
In the mean time, interim.
Meanwhile ; all that time, interea.'
Sometimes = now and then {ajh
procuJimgf as compared with
nonnunquam, to the notion of f
but aeldom), j
Sometimes (approaching to the S "''.°''^*1"*™ ' *^^''*'*^°' ^^^^ *^* ^
notion of pretty qften). 5 *°S properly wme time or other, and
^ often therefore equivalent to at la9t)A
unquam (with tugcUives); aliquando
(when it means, at bojm oru time, be
Ever, ^ it when it may) ; quando (after m, nUi,
j n«, Ac, ^hen the ever is not em-
( phatic).k
In a different direction ; to some ) -t. ,^^ ^
other place, ) \ > /•
From a different direction, aliunde.
i usquam,! aliquo, quo (to be used accord-
Any where ^= any whither, < ing to the Rules for *■ cany .' See Any^
\ Index I).
Nowhere or whither, nusquam.
Strength, j vires, virium, Ac. (in ting, * force*;
, c * violence * ; vis, vim, vi). •
Hj* Rarius interdum quam rumnvnquam esse memento.
t Interea refers to an event continuing during the rrhole interval : interim to
one that occurs at some time or times within that interval. Hence, as DSderlein
observes, in negative sentences interea is the regular word, as the poeaibUity
and expectation of a thing's happening is always of some duration.
h The syllable alt, whether as prefix or termination, always denotes quality.
Thus * si aliquia adest,' is, * if there be any one present, be he who or what he may .**
whereas ' si quisquam adest ' would mean * if th§re be but one present, no matter
whether more or not.* (G.) Aliquando is properly ' at one time, whether near
or far ojf^ but as a thing's once happening may prove the poseibilify of its qften
happening, aliquando is often equivalent to aliquoties. But in the golden age it
is used by preference of things that had better happen never, (D.)
i It gets this meaning from its being implied by the nature of the sentence
that no early time remains. In this meaning it is often joined with tandem
( E= tarn demum. D.).
k Hence 'ever* z=s at any time, is translated by unquam, aliquando, or
quando, according as * any * would be translated under the same circumstances,
by ullus, aliquia, or quia. Si quia, ai quando are nearly equivalent to whoever,
whenever,
1 Uaquam is more regularly the * any where * of rest ; but is used after verbs
of motion, as we use t^iere.
143 coHPAHii^oNs. § 52. 403, 404.
Exercise 60.
[^Ever * after whether^ when marked as emphatic, is to be translated
by ecqvtmdo.
* Perchance^* aftei uhdker^ is to be translated by the addition of qwd
to en or num : ecquidj nwnquid.
When ' ever ' and ' any ' are marked as emphatic (in other cases) they
are not to be translated by quandOf quis.
* A * emphatic is to be translated by a pronounJ]
403. What prevents us from banishing every tenth man ? We
have lost some considerable time by playing. They say that they
shall never^ die. We shall all die some time or other. The best
men always (h) die with the most resignation. In the mean time
one Octavius called upon me at my own house. None of you
called upon me all that time'. There is no one but (44, (2) ) is
sometimes mistaken. Most' of us are pretty often, all of us are
sometimes deceived (p. 14, 15, b). Which is the wiser, Caius or
Balhus ? Does any man believe liars ? In the mean time a^
(393) greater fear seized upon the soldiers. I hear that there is
a' greater fear in the city. If you ever return (shall have
returned) home, you will understand these things. Have you
ever' heard this from any body 1 [No.] If you are setting out
any where, return in the evening. Are you going to set out to
some other place ? Nowhere. Some considerable time has been
lost (in) asking my friends. Some persons devote themselves to
one thing, others to another. Virtue is not of such"" strength a^
to defend herself.'* Have you perchance two countries ? Let
me know whether I shall ever' see you. There were some who
had two countries.
/
i
XIX.
§ 52. Comparison.
404. (a) The regular particle of comparison is ^uam (ihan). The things com*
pared will of course be in the aame ccue.
(a) When the same noun belongs to each member of the comparison, it
is omitted in one. In English we express it in the^r«^ clause, and use
the pronoun ' that ' for it in the second. This ' that ' is not to be trans-
lated into Latin.
§52. 405-409.] comparisons. 14$
405. (h) Sometimes qnam is omitted, and the following noun
put in the ablative."^
(a) As a rule, the dbkUioe should not be used in this way, except where
the same noun would follow guam in the nominaiive. Sometimes how-
ever the abUUive, especiaUy of pronouns, is used for the aoctiscUive after
quam. In the construction of the'ooc. with vnfn. this would be reg^ular.
(0) Moreover, the construction with the ablative should not be used, un-
less the object with which another is compared, actually posuetes the
property^ in question.
406. (c) Comparatives and superlatives are often accompanied
by ablatives, expressing hy how much one thing exceeds or falls
short of another. ~
407. (cO The English ffie^the ( = by how mwUv—by bo much) are expressed in
Latin by quanta— tanio ; quo — ro or Aoc.
A sentence of this kind may also be expressed by ut quUque with a
superlative, followed by ita with another.
408. ' Somewhat ' and * too ' with the positive are expressed by the eompa-
ratvot^ when those adverbs are not emphatic. And sometimes an em-
phatic positive is expressed by the comp<urative,
409. (a) Europa minor est, quam Asia, Europe is less than
Asia.
m
(h) Non ego hac nocte longiorem vidi, I have not seen a
longer night than this.
(c) Multo difficilius. Much more difficult.
(d) Eo minor est arcus, quo altior est sol. The higher the
sun is, the less is the arc.
Tanto brevius omne tempus, quanto felicius est. The
happier any time is, the shorter it is (i. e. appears),
TJt quisque est vir optimus, ita difficillime esse alios
imprdbos suspicatur. The better a man is, the more
diffieulty he has in suspecting that others are
wicked.
(e) Romani bella qusedam fortius quam felicius gesse-
runt. The Romans carried on some wars with more
courage than success.
Pestilentia ndnacior quam pemiciosior, A pestilence
■» If I say a person is ^sapienti&r Caio* I ascribe wisdom to Caius, though
less of it than to any other person. If I say he is * sapientior quam Caius,* I
do not necessarily ascribe to Caius any wisdom at all.
144 coifPAKisoNS. [§52. 410.
more alarming than (really) fatal (or, alarming
rather than destructive).
(y)Pr(Bliuin m4ijus quam pro numero hostium editur, A
severer battle is fought than could have been ex-
pected from the (small) number of the enemy, (Or,
a battle unusually severe for the number of the
enemy.)
Alexander consedit regi4 selldi multo excelsiore quam
pro habitu corporis, Alexander sat down on the
royal chair, which was far too high for his stature.
■ (g) Res graviores (important). Morbi graviores (s^.
vere).
410. Vocabulary 57.
Passionate, iracundus, a, um.
Angry, iratus, a, um.
Considerably more, aliquanto plus (see 402).
Many times as great, muitis partibus major.
Are hard to be avoided, or diffi- ) ^j^^-j^ vitantur.
cult to avoid, >
Hidden, occultus, a, um (pariie, ofocctA^re),
Snares, insidlae, arum,/.
Frequent, creber, bra, brum ; frequens,^ tis.
Loquacious, loquaz, ficis.
Old age, senectus, litis, /.
Difference, distantia, «,/.
Worse, P«!Jor, or, us {Itasgood ffuinj deterior).
(Words by which superlatives are strengthened).
As shortly as possible, quam^ brevissime.
Extremely flouiiBhlBg (In ^'>- \u>ug,> op^^tUamuB.
sources), )
Far; by fax, multo.
The very least, vel minimus.
"^heTrrir^"" ^'^''''' "^ *° I '«! InlqnfasimiM.
{Eng,) He is too proud to be a slave.
{Lot,) He is protider than that he should be a slave.
■ Crtber denotes cU»6 and crowded micctiaum, and ojlen implies censure : fre-
quern denotes a plentiful aujrphf^ and rather as an epithet of praise, FVequens
is also used of a place ' mvch resorted to,* and a *fitll * senate-house : in which
sense crcter is not used, but celebert which is related to it as KaXvitru to jcf)i»irrw.
(D.)
• Potest^ possuntf Ac, may be inserted after quam, 'Area nidos quam pos-
mmt mollissime substemunt ' =^ tarn moUUer, quam possunt mollissime. (O.)
§ 58. 411, 412.] REMARKS ON SOME OF THB TBNSB8. 145
(duam lit mancipiom sit, or poflait esse.)
{Eng.) I took the gretxUet pains / could.
(Lot.) I took pains (as great) as p ^ greatest I could (quam),
{JBng.) As great a difference aa there can possibly be,
(Lot,) A difference tu great-a» the greateat can be.
(Quanta maxima poteet esse distantia.)
Eixerctse 61.
411. That report was frequent rather than certain (c). The
better a man is, with the more resignation will he die. The
most hidden dangers are always the most difficult to avoid. The
more hidden a danger is, the more difficulty is there in avoiding
it.'* The more passionate a man is, the more difficulty has he**
in commanding himself. He is too angry to be able to command
himself. I prefer the most unjust peace m the world to the justest
war. Saguntum was an extremely flourishing state. I will say
as shortly as possible, what it seems to mp should be done.*^ T^^y
perceive the very least things. They worship Libera, whom they
also** call Proserpina. I have accomplished the longest journey
1 possibly could. I have finished the business with the greatest
care I possibly could. In important matters, there is need of delib-
eration.** Old age is by nature somewhat (408) loquacious. We
have lost considerably more gold than you. It is an allowed fact^
that the sun is many times eu great as the earth. There is the
greatest possible difference of character between them.
XX.
§ 53. Remarks on some of the Tenses.
412. The perfect definite (perf . with hate) is virtually a present tense, being
used of an action begun at some past time, and carried on up to^ or
nearly up to the present moment. Hence, as we have seen (40, cQ, it
may be followed by the present or perfect subjunctive.^
P Quam maximaa potui copias = tantas^ quam maximas. (G.)
4 Nevertheless the Roman ear was so accustomed to the imperf, subf. after
the perf.^ that they used it (even where the per/, is plainly equiyalent to our
perfect with * have '), provided * the action could be conceived as one advancing
gradually to its completion.' (Z.) * Dlu dubitavi {have long doubted) num melius
sit,' Ac, would sound strange to Roman ears : they preferred * num melius esset,'
even when they did not narrate, but were only stating the rtsuU, (K.)
7
146 KEIO.&KS ON SOME OF THE TENSES. [§ 53. 413—416.
413. (a) To express, * I have been doing a thing Jbr a long time/ the Romans
said ^lamdoingit for a long time already.'
(Jam pridem cupio, I have long been desiring.)
414. In animated narrative, the past is often described by the
present..
(6) The present when thus used (prcBseno hisioricum) may be followed
either by the present subj. (according to the general rule for the sequence
of tenses), or by the impetfed subj. (as being itself virtudUy a past
tense). The imperfect is, on the whole, the more common. (Z.)
415. (c) A present tense after relatives^ or, ' tohen,^ ^if^ 'as
Jong asy' ' before^' &c., is generally to be translated by a ftUurCj
when the action expressed by it is still future.
The action is generally still future, when the verb in the prin-
cipal clause is in a future tense or the imperative mood.'
If one action must be completed before the other begins, the
future perfect should be used. In this case the perfect definite is
sometimes (by no means aZu^aj^^) used in English.*
416. (1) {Eng.) Whensoever I take^ my journey into Spain I loiU come to you.
{Lot.) Whensoever I skaJl take my journey, Ac.
(2) {Eng.) When I have performed this, I will come, Ac. (Rom. xv. 28.)
{Lot.) When I shall have performed this, I vnll conu, Ac.
(3) {Eng.) When he is anne (perf. def.), he will teU us, &c. (John iv. 6.)
{Lot.) When h^ ahall have come, he wiU tell us, &c.
(4) {Eng.) (Saying) they would neither eai nor drink^ till they had killed
Paul (Acts xxiii. 12).
{hat.) (Sajring) they would neither eat nor drink, till they ihovld
haetkUledVwak.
' The subjunctive present used imperatively, is virtually an imperative.
■ The Roman, viewing the future action or event from his present, marked its
futurity, and, if necessary, its completion : the Englishman removes himself to
the ' when ' spoken of, and contemplates it as a state then existing. The Roman
considered it relativdy: the Englishman considers it absolutely. There are
some constructions, in which the completion of the action is not marked, even
in Latin ; for instance, in the use of the imperfect subjunctive in marking the
relative time of a iris^ request, or question : e. g. ' He answered vfhen he was
asked;* *quum interrogaretur,* not inierrogatus ewe^, though the question must
be completed before the answer is given.
t Even in Latin, the present (after n) is sometimes used, as in English, in
connection with a. future; but only when it is to intimate that the future event
de^ndB wpon Bome present circumstance or resolution. Examples are: *JPer-
Jldetur bellum, si non urgemus obsesses,' Ac. Lie. v. 4. ' Si vindmus, omnia
nobis tuta, Ac. . . . patebuntJ Sail. 68, 9. (O.) (On the syjbj. pres. after n,
436 (6) ).
§ 53. 417-419.] REMAKES ON SOME OF THE TENSES, 147
(5) {Eng.) As soon as they ?iear of me, they shall obey me (2 Sam.
zxii. 45).
{Lot.) As soon as they ^lall hear of me, they ehall obey me :
(or) Ab soon as they Aall have heardy Ac
417. (d) ' Should,' < would,' < could,' &c., when used to soften
an assertion by throwing into it an expression of doubtfulness, are
generally to be translated by putting the verb in the present or
perf. of the suhpincUve,
a. In thiet idiom the perfect does not appear to bear any reference to the
completion of the action. (See 428, note *.)
b. (e) VgHnij noUmf mcdim^ are often used in this manner, and often in
connection with the verb in the subjunctive governed hy^ut* omitted.
418. {f) After ut a consequence (but not a purpose) is often
put in the perf. subj., instead of the imperf,, after a past tense.
a. This occurs very frequently in Cornelius Nepos. The use of the
perf. gives more prominence and independence to the coneequ^nce, (K.)
b. The IMP. subj. marks (1) something past, (2) something amtem-
porary with another in past time, (3) something contemporary and
cofrUinuing.
c. The psBF. subj. is either the subj. of the aariet ('wrote') or of the
preeterUum in prceeenti (or per/, definite, * have written '). (K.)
419. (a) Jam pridem cupio, I have long desired.
Vocat me alio jam dudum tacita vestra ezspectatio,
Your silent expectation has for some time been
calling me to another point.
Copise, quas diu comparahant, Forces which they had
long been collecting.
(h) Subito edicunt Consules, ut ad suum vestitum Sena-
tores redirent. The Consuls suddenly published an
edict, that the Senators should return to their usual
dress.
(c) Quum Tullius rure redierit, mittam eum ad te, When
TuUius returns from the country, I will send him
to you. Facito hoc ubi voles. Do this when you
please. g
Si te rogavero aliquid, nonne respondebis ? ijT J put
any question to you, will you not answer ?
(cZ) Hoc sine v\\k dubitatione, confirmaverim,^ I would
assert this without any hesitation.
" The perf. subjunctive used in this manner to withhold a positive assertion,
occurs in negative sentences oftener than in positive ones. (G.)
148 REMABKS ON SOME OF THE TENSES. § 53. 420.
(e) De me sic velim judices, I would wish you to judge
thus of me,
Nolim factum, / could vnsh it not to be done. (Nol-
lent* factum, I could wish it had not been done.)
{/) Quo factum est, ut plus, quam collegae, Miltiades
vdhieritj The consequence of which was, that Mil-
tiades had more influence than his colleagues.
420. Vocabulary 58.
^ dudum, or jamdudum (applied to ahort
For some time» < preceding periods ; an hour or few
( hours; less, generally, than a day).
r diu, or jamdiu* (of an action continued
Long; for a long time, < suspended, or not occurring, through
( the whole period).
r pridem or jampridem (referring to a past
Long ago, < point of time; not, like diu, to a past
C period of time).
r cup{^re,« io (150), Iv, rt (this is of the in-
To desire, < wardfeeling : optare Is to desire s= to
(. express a voish for).
r avere {dtfect. verb) -this denotes a rest-
To long, < less impatient longing ; gestire, a d^
(. lighiedf joyous longing.
Not above two or three times, bis terve.
Two or three times ; several times, bis terque.
(The Preposition Ad.)
(1) Tb; (2) at; (3) up to^ until; to the amount of; (4) for^ Ac.
To a man, ad unnm.
▼ When a conceived case is to be expressed with the intimation that the fact
corresponds to it, or may so correspond, the pres, and perf. of the subj. are used :
but when it is to be intimated that the fact does noty or cannot correspond to it,
the imperf. or pluperf subj. must be used. (Z.)
V But pridem and diu are often interchanged, though only In constructions
where the notions of duration or of a distant point of beginning (respectively)
may easily be implied, though the exact word would require duration rather
than a point, or a point rather than duration. In 'jampridem cupio,* Ac, the
notioiii of continuance is plainly implied : in the corresponding English construc-
tion we have it expressed. Dudum = diu-dum (where dum restricts the mean-
ing as in vixdum, nonrfum) : pridem = rrplv Sfi (Hartung) or irpii* 6fiv. (D.)
X Velle, cupgre, denote the inward feeling ; optare, expeterej expression of
that feeling. Velle and optare denote, respectively, the calm feeling and its
expression , cupere and expetere the eager, excited feeling and its expression.
Avire expresses a restless^ impatient longing; gestire a delighted antidpa-
Oon. (D.)
§ 54. 421, 422.] bemarks on somb of the tenses. 149
To extreme old age, ad summam senectutem.
He is nothing to, = compared to, > ^ ^^ ^j^ ^^^
him, b
For a time, ad tempus (also, * at the proper time').
As many aa two hundred, ad ducentos.
Word for word, ad verbum.
At most, ad summum, or siimmnm only.
At least, ad minimum ; minimum.
At last, ad extremum.
(a) (Eng,) They do nothing but laugh.
(Lot.) They nothing else than laugh (nihil alind quam lident:
JaciurU omitted).
Exercise 62.
. [By what verb should to takeaway a had thing be translated'?]
421. I have for some time been desiring to take away from you
that care of yours. I have long desired to call upon Caius.
p After his soldiers had been slain to aunan, he himself returned
to Rome, p Having taken Marseilles by storm,'^ he returned
home. I am longing p to take Marseilles, and obtain a triumph
for a victory Over the Gauls. He was whipped with rods several
times. He was whipped with rods two' or three' times' at most.
There is no doubt that Caius is nothing (compared) to Balbus.
Time is wanting p for finishing that business (of yours). I would
wish you to pardon me. Caius to extreme old age learned some-
thing additional y every day. At last all held their tongues. I
am longing to return thanks to Caius. It cannot be denied that
death is a rest from labours.'* Do we not give boys sentences to
learn by heart 7'^^ He gives boys the longest sentences he can**
to be learned by heart, word for word. They do nothing but cry
out, that it is all over with Ceesar's army. His industry was
suchf^^^ that (418) he learned something additional every day.
§ 54. Remarks on some of the Tenses continued.
422. (a) The perfect subjunctive (as well as the present) is
used as an imperative.
y Addiscebat aliquid.
150 EEMASKS ON SOME OF THE TENSES. [§ 54. 423-427.
423. (b) The future is sometimes used, ^ in English^ for the
imperative ; in other words, we sometimes express a wish that a
person should act in a particular way, in the form of an assertion
that he toill so act.
424. (c) Questions that do not ask for information, but for
assent, are to be translated into Latin by the present or imperfect
of the subjunctive, according as a present or past time is refer-
red to.
The object of such questions is, to excite the aanu emotion or produce
the aanu conviction in the minds of the persons addressed,, that the
speaker liimseif feels or pretends to feel. If they are negative in form,
the answer or expression of assent will be affirmative ; and conversely,
if not.
425. These 'queationa of appeal ' (which usually express perjjlexUy or
some emotion) may be asked by auxiliary verbs in English in various
ways : the thing to be considered is, ' does the question require an an-
awerfor informatUmf or mere aaaent (or aympatky) V
a [Forms of ^queationa of appeal* in English.] (1) With Pbes. Subj.
What ahall I do? (when asked in perplexity, implying that nothing
aatiafactory can well be done.) What am I to do? What can I do?
Why akould I relate thia? (Ans. You need not.) (2) With Impebf.
Subj. What waa I to do? What ahoidd I have done? What ought I
to have done ?
426. (1) (Eng.) He taught the children of the principal men.
{Lat,) Principum liberos erudiebat. (Imperf. expresses a state con-
tvnued or an action often repeated in a paat space of time.)
(2) {Eng.) You would have thought. You would have believed.
(Lai.) Putares. Crederes.
(3) {Eng.) I remember reading that (or, to have read that).
{Lot.) I remember to read that {legere* memini).
(4) {Eng,) It tDould be tedious, endless, &c.
(Lot.) It ia tedious, endless, <&c. (longum, infinitum eat).
(5) {Eng.) It would have been better.
{Lot.) It waa bettefr (utilius/ui^^). So satius, par, idoneum, Acfmi,
427. (a) Quod dubitas, ne feceris, What you have doubts
about, don't do.
(5) Si quid accident novi, fades ut sciam, If any thing
new happens, you will let me know (= let me
know).
« But the inf. perf. follows m^fmini^ Ac, when the speaker does not carry him-
self back, as it were, having himself aeen^ heardy Ac. what he describes.
*■ Erat or fuerat must be used, if the tim^ requires those tenses : and the infn,
prea. follows these expressions. (See 130.)
§ 54. 428, 429.] eemabks on some of the tenses. 151
(c) Quid faciam ? What am I to do? What can I (or
shall I) do?
Quis neget, &c. ? Who can deny . . , ?
Quid facerem ? What was I to do? What ought I
to have done ? What should I have done ?
428. Vocabulary 59.
A banquet ; an entertainment, conviyium^b {, n.
If I may say so without offence, pace tuH dixerim.
Under favour, bona tua venid.
A favour ; pardon^ venia, sb, f.
To pardon (spoken of a «£;,er«^), \ veniam dftec (also « to grant a permis-
( sion ') .
To ask pardon for a fault, delictid veniam pStPre ; petiv, petit.
Look to that yourself, id ipse WdSris ; or tu videris.
Let Fortune look to, or see to, it, fortuna viderit.
I can scarcely believe, vix crediderim,*
(The Preposition Advebsum or ADVEasus.)
Adversus, or adversum, corresponds almost exactly with our against
in all its uses ; but has besides the meanings over-against ( = opposite)
and towards.
Exercise 63.
[Translate, * J am pardoned.*}
429. Who can deny that a banquet is preparing ?• There is
no one but wishes that a banquet should'^ be prepared. You
would have thought that a banquet was prepared. What was I
b EjndaBf arum is the most general notion, a mealf whether frugal or sump-
tuous, with only the members of the family or with guests, public or private :
convimum is a meal with gttests^ a dinner-party : ditpea a rdigiaua banquet, a
banquet after a sacrifice ; qnUUm a banquet in honour of some person, or on
some festive occasion ; comisaatio a riotous party, a drinking bout. (D.)
« The ignoscens pardons from his heart, forgives and forgets ; the veniam dant
passes over as & favour what he might justly resent or punish. The friend or
equal ignoscit ; the superior or more powerful person veniam dot. (D.)
d Doderlein thinks that delictum is not a sin qfonuseion as is generally thought,
but that it has the same extent of meaning as peccaium : both expressing sins
against prudence as well as those against morality ; errors as well as sins,
* Vix crediderim ^ vix credam = vix credo. But this perf. subj. does not
always stand for the present indie, but sometimes for the perf. * Tum vero ego
necquidquam Capitolium servaverim ' = servavi. (K.)
• In English we have no present or imperf. passive^ except in a few verbs that
form these tenses with what is inform the present participle of the active voice,
but is probably the participial substantive^ which used to be govemed by the
152 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. [§ 55. 430, 431.
to do ? — ^the banquet had been long preparing. The latter says
that a banquet is preparing : the former denies (it). He taught the
boys to play on the lyre. Do not prepare a banquet. It would he tedi-
ous (426) to relate all the evils that have happened to us by our
ovm fault. Under favour I would say, my brother, that opinion
of yours is' very often' (p. 13, 6.) prejudicial. Are they too to
be pardoned ? It cannot be denied that they have severed times
asked pardon for their fault. Let fortune see to this, since we
may not use reason and counsel. I remember their charging
Caius with immorality. They published an edict that no one^^
should be capitally condemned without being heard. Justice is
piety towards the gods. Would it not have been better, not to
have concealed those things from your father 1 They do nothing
but mock the poor (420, a). There are some who perceive the
very least things.
XXL
§ 65. On the principal kinds of Conditional Propositions.
430. In condUumtd (or hypoffietical) propositions, the clause with ' if* is the
eondition or conditional dauac ; the other, the consequence or consequent
dauae,
431. Sometimes the consequence is expressed in the indicative mood, no
doubt being intimated as to the existence or non-existence of the condi«
tion.
(If this is A, that is B.)
Here we have * possibility j or simple supposition^ without any expres-
sion of uncertainty*
preposition 'on' or 'on' shortened into *a.* Thus *the ark was a preparing*
(1 Pet. iii. 20). < Forty and six years waB this temple in building ' (John ii. 20).
There is no trusting the mere look of a form, as the following table will show : —
(1) He , . . is coming . . . (pres. actv)
(2) The hoQse . is building . . . (pres. pass.)
(3) This , , .is asking (too much) (' is,' with the participial substantive.)
(1) He . . is come .... (perf. act.)
(2) The house . is built .... (perf. pass )
(3) He . . . is loved (by all) . (pres. pass.)
f Indie. : pace tu& dizerim, dkc., being only parenthetical InBertioiiB.
§ 55. 432-435.J conditional propositions. 163
432. ' Sometimes, however, though the conBeqnence is expressed in the in-
dicative, micertainty i» expressed as to the existence or not of the
condition : it being implied however that this uncertainty will probably
be removed.
{*J[fI have any thing, / will ffive Ujovl;* and I will see whether I
have or not)
Here we have uncertainty with the prospect of decision,
433. Sometimes the consequence is itself expressed in a condiHimal form :
and then the condition is merely contemplated as a conceivabU case^ but
no hint is given as to its being likely actually to occur or not.
(If you iDere to do this, you would greatly oblige me.)
Here we have (according to Hermann and Buttman) * uncertainty
without any such accessary notion as the prospect of decision.*
434. Lastly, the consequence may express whaiwovldbe doings or tpould
have hem done, if a condition that is aduaUy unrealized^ had been real-
ized just now, or at some past time.
If I had it, I would now give it to you (but I have not)
If 1 had had it, I would have given it you.
Wl
(Forms of Conditional Propositions.)
435. (a) Si quid Jiahety datyS Ifhehaa any things he gives it.
(by Si quid habeam, dabo, If I have any things I will
give it.
(c) Si quid haberetf daret,^ If he should have any things
he would give it.
/i\ a- -J J. 7. * ^ . Sif^ ^^^ ^^y ^^*'^'
(1) Si quid haberet. daret. It. u . u
^ / ^ ' ' ( he would give tt.
'If he had had any
. (2) Si quid habuisset, dedisset, , thing, he would
have given it.
' The consequence may also be in the imperative or in the future. (See
437, i.)
h On this, see 445. It is, to say the least, very uncommon to find a proposi-
tion of this form, from which the notion of the possible realization of the con-
dition is not excluded. (See Zumpfs opinion, 419, v.) Kvhner says, 'si hoc
dicas ' = iav TovTo ^cyris and el roHro Xcyois : sometimes, however, the last rela-
tion is expressed as in Greek, 'si hoc diceretur, vere diceretur.^ (Vol. ii. p. 546.)
The same form of proposition is used in a different way, when the imp. svbj,
( ^ the Greek optat.) is used to express something frequently occurring in past
time.
' Cesar— Si peteret per amicitiam patris atque suam, non
Cluidquam prqficcretJ^Kor. Sat. i. 3, 4. (See HeindorfBd loo.)
7*
154 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. [§ 55. 436-441.
436. Here we see that the forms (c) and (</) (I) coincide. The form (c)
means, * if at any time he wert to have any thing, he would give it :'
but such a sentence, though not necessarily intimating the impossibility
of this case occurring, of course, does imply that it has md occurred.
It thus runs yery near to the meaning of \d) (1), which, besides imply-
ing that it has not^ implies that it tpill not occur.
These two cases are not distinguished in Latin : the context^ or our
previous knotoledgef must determine whether the case is contemplated
as possible^ or nt4.
437. (a) Possibility, or simple supposition, without any expres-
sion oi uncertainty : the indicative in both clauses.
(Jb) Uncertainty with the prospect of decision : ' si ' with
the subjunctive present (or perfect) ; the indicative,
commonly the future,' in the consequence.
{c) Uncertainty without any such accessary notion as the
^ prospect of decision : the imperfe zt subjunctive
c^i ^'^ ^"^i clauses.
(d) Impossibility, or belief that the thing is not so : the
subjunctive in both clauses, the imperfect for present
time, and a continuing consequence ; the pluperfect
for past time.
438. But the consequence may refer to present, the condition to
past time ; or vice versd,
' If I had received a letter (acc^nssem), 1 would now read it (recitarem),
' If I at this time wanted any thing (opus esset), I would have come
{venissem) myself.'
439. Since, * / wovldgive it you (now), if I had it (now)* comes to the
same thing as * I would have given it to you, if I had had any,' the im-
perfect subjunctive in Latin may often be translated by the forms * would
have * {could or should have)j whea it is implied that the condition will
not be realized.
440. (d) When the form ' would have * is in the consequence,
the pluperfect in the condition must be in the subjunctive in
Latin.
441. With the imperfect and pluperfect, ^si* alwitys governs
the subjunctive.
I The imperative may stand in the consequence. Of course the perf. or fu-
ture, both the simple und the periphrastic future, may stand in either clause, or
both : si illud mihi beneficium tribueiur (or tributum erit or fuerU)^ magnopere
gavdebo. In the second class, tribuium sit, or fuerity from fuerim.
§55. 442-444.] conditional pbopositions. 156
^2. ^^ Since tpe use the indicative condUionaUyt cure must be taken to
translate this by the subjunctive (436, &.) when ' ghould * might be used ;
when, that is, there is ^uncertainty with the prospect of deeinon.*
443. Vocabulary 60.
Happy, beatUB, a, um.k
Much less, i nfidumi (generally after a negatwe; If a
c verb follows it must be in the avbjvane).
Not to say, \ ^^ dicam (of what might probably fri
c said with truth).
I do not say, non dico.
I will not say, non dicam.
All, omnes {aU together^ cuncti, universi)."
Cautious, cautus, a, um.
All taken dne by one, each of > ^^, ^
them smgly, ^ » » #
For instance, verbi causi.
To rise, orior, oriri, ortus.
The Dog-star, Caniciila, s, f.
{Eng.) No painter. (-^^O Nemo pictor.
{Eng.) This does nolaiaU terrify me. (Lot,) This terrifies me not/iing.
Exercise 64.
[Obs, * If he toere to ' <fcc. =: < if he should* Ac,]
444. If a happy life can be lost', it cannot be happy'. He who
does not defend a friend, if he can, sins'. If all things are brought
about" by fate, nothing can admonish us to he more cautious.
Peleus, if he were to hear it, would lift up his hands. Pe-
k Jf^austus and prosper are said of things only, not of persons. * That which
is prosperum merely satisfies the hopes and wishes of men, like ^tpisked for^
* desired :' the faustum refers more to the gracumsness of the gods : thejortunoi'
tus is a Ivfiky person : the healus feels himself happy (as he is) and is contented.'
(D.) Felix expresses both that which it, and that which makes happy (peatits^
only what is * happy ^) : and relates principally 'to the obtaining, possessing, or
enjoying external goods, and supposes a man's omi co-operation,* This latter
circumstance distinguishes it firom fortunatus, which also relates more to par-
tisular events,
1 Nedum is sometimes followed by tU: *nedum vJt ulla vis fieret.'
{lAv, ill. 14.)
» Cuncti (opposed to dispersi) * all actually united;* tmiverai (opposed to sin-
guH or unusquisque) ' all taken together.' As meaning ' aU* * the whoUj* in the
sing., tottjts represents the thing as originally * a whole :' omnit, cunctus, vni-
versus, all repres^it it as originaUy made up of certain parts^ of which the aggre-
gate is taken. (D.)
• Fiunt.
156 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. [§56. 445.
leus, if he heard it (but he has not), would lift up his hands. ^
If any one were to do this he would lay the king under a great *
obligation. Even Caesar could not have done this ; much less
can you (443, note 1). The boy should be admonished, that he
may show himself the more cautious (63, h). All the wisest
men*' are aware that the interest of each and of all is the same'. U
I can scarcely think him equal to all of them taken one by one,
much less to all of them together. If you are equal to them all-
together, you will easily conquer them all-taken-one-by-one. If
Fabius, for instance, was born p at the rising of the dog-star, he
will not die in the sea. He is not equal* to them all taken one by
one, not to say to them all together. He is equal to them all
taken one by one, I do not say to them all together. No painter ^
would say this {perf. subj.). Know that I do not fear these
things at aU. There were some^^ who did not fear these things |
at all. L
(I
§ 56. Conditional Propositions continued,
445. (a) Such conditional sentences as would in English have
were to — , should, or tooaldy in both clauses, often take the verbs
of both clauses in the subjunctive present,
a. The conditional clause is here a coniemplaitd poasUnlUy (resem-
bling, in this, the third class ; si Jtaberety darti) ; but the thing contem-
plated is contemplated as occurring now, and therefore often agrees
with the second class (si habeom dabo), in implying a prospect of
decision.
Hence if a contemplated case is contemplated as occurring now, the
present subjunctive should be preferred to the imperfect : and when the
possibility of its occurring now is to be strongly intimatedy the present
is the only proper form.
(1) Tu si hie sis, aliter sentias.
ffyou were here, you would think difftrtidly,
(2) Tu si hie esses, aliter sentires.
If you. were here (which you neither are nor will be), you would think
differ tnJQ.y :
(pr) If you had been here, you would have thought differently.
ff. From the ambiguity of the form * si quid haberet, daret,* the subj.
jyres. should probably be preferred, when it is not intended to intimate
that the condition is improbable or impossible. The pres. subj. may b&
• Impar est.
§ 56. 446-450.] conditional propositions. 157
used of suppositions really impossible, if it is not the speaker's object
to intimate ttiis : ' Si exai^at hodie ab inferis Lycurgus gavdtai^ d^c.
{JUv. 39, 37.)
446. The three conditional tenses of the suhjuncUvey are scri-
herem, scripsissem, and scrvptums essem.
447. * Scripsissem ' and * scripturus essem ' are both used to
express our ^ would have written.' But <^cnp^«(;in' intimates
that the thing ivouid certainly have happened : scripturus essem,
that it would probably have happened, because it was so intended
or arranged,
(b) Thus, * he would have slept ( = he intended to have slept,
and therefore we may suppose would have slept) there, if he had
gone on,' should be translated by the part, in rus with esset.^
But the indicative {erai, fuit) is more common, .when the inten-
tion is to be positively expressed.
448. (c) The imperfect dXi^ pluperfect oi the indicative are often
used instead of the same tenses of the subjunctive, in the conse-
quent clause. (It is then better to let the consequent precede the
conditional clause.)
449. {d) The particle ai is occasionally omitted ; the verb of the conditional
clause should then iKigin the sentence.
450. (a) In quo si tantum eum prudentem dicam, minus quam
debeam prcedicem, In which if I were only to call
him prudent, I should commend him less highly than
I ought.
(b) Conclave, ubi erat mansurus, si ire p^rrexisset, TJie
chamber in which he would have lodged, if he had
continued his journey.
(c) Perieram, nisi tu a^currisses,^ I had perished ( =
should have perished) if you had not run to my
, assistance.
(d) Dedisses huic animo par corpus, fecisset quod opta-
' So also in the third class ' si quid Juxberet daturna taaet' is correct, where
daturus esset = * he would be prepared to give.* {KrUger: who quotes The. H.
ii. 77, ' cujus filium atioptabims eaaem^ si ipse imperarem.*)
4 A conditional clause often refers to a consequence impUed: ' Pons Sublicius
iter paene hostibus dedUj ni unus vir fuiaaet * = {et dedimfji ni unns yirjymit.
158
CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS.
[§56.451.
But If; if however,
But if not,
Unless ; if not,
Although; though,
bat, Had you given this mind a body like itself, he
would have done what he desired,
451. Vocabulary 61.
sin, sin autem.
sin minus.'
nisi.*
' etsi : etiamsit — followed by tamen, yet^
(sometimes tamen precedes etsi, when
the unexpected nature of the event to
be described is to be made more prom-
inent ; for tamen etsi^ tametsi is found,
and the tamen is sometimes repeated
in the principal clause. — Although
may also be translated by quamqtuan,^
quamvia and Vlcet.)
quamquam (suggested by a former
statement : it has no influence on the
mood).
nisi forte ; nisi vero.
{potestas, atis, /. (of mighi with rights
and therefore the proper word for
conceded power) i potentla, ffi,/! (of
actual inherent power),
res ita se habet.
potestatem sui facSre.
in nostra esse potestate.
Although indeed.
Unless indeed,
Power,
The thing is so,
To put himself in their power.
To be in our own power.
' Or, sin secus^ sin aliter.
■ * Your memory will be weakened nisi eam exerceas* implies that if you «ar-
erdse it, it will not be lessened. But from si mm you might not infer this, but
only draw the strict conclusion that if you do not exercise it, it will be lessened.
The «i, in si non, is the conjunction, the non belongs to the verb or other word
in the proposition.
t The compounds of '«' follow the same rule as si: With the pres.^ perf.^ and
fut, they take the vndicaiive unless the thing is to be asserted contingently and
doubtfully ; with the imperf. and pluperf they generally take the suJbj. ; though
here too the indicative comes in, when they introduce, not a suppo^ion^ but a
fact, " ^Tametsi a duce descrebantur^ (CeBS.) ^Si^ like our * if* ia sometimes
used for * whether;* ' Tentata res est, si primo impetu capi Ardea posset.'
« Quamquam (quam *how* strengthened by doubling) is * however much^* but
expresses * however much a thing realty exists* or can, or must exist. It there-
fore takes the indie, when the thing is not to be represented as doubtful. Quavn-
ms (or qttantumvis) is ' however much a thing may be conceived possible^* and
therefore takes the subj, lAcet is no particle, but an impersonal verb, and may
occur in any tense. ' Licet recte agas, tamen, &c* *Act as right as you please,
yet, Ac.* * Detrahai .... fortuna Hcebit.* — Cluamvis =: * although * (as in Nep.
quamvis earebat nomine ; with indie,) belongs, generally speaking, to a later
age.
§ 56. 452.] CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. 159
(Eng.) Even this is not just vnlesa it is voluntary.
(Lat.) Even this Is so (only) just, if it is voluntary.
{Ita justum est .... n est voluDtariam :▼ ita here ^ on
that condition or supposition.)
[C. zxzii.] *Byt* ( =:txceptf unless) after a negative is ntn, or (if it stands
before a substantive) the prepos. prater.
Exercise 65.
[How iB'Oiat* translated after ' Ufolhws'1 (83)]
452. If you were to ask me what is the nature of the gods, I
should perhaps answer nothing (445). If the thing were so, I
should rejoice (445). If there be nothing in our own power, let
us go away. If they had remained, he would have put himself
in their power. We must cultivate eloquence, though some make
a perverse use of it. Nothing would be in our own power, if the
thing were so. The Stoics say that no man is divine, hut the wise
man. Who can deny (424) that the most hidden snares are
always the most difficult to avoid ? 1 love my enemy, more than
you envy your friend. Caius is more brave than prudent.'' I
don't know whether" any thing better than friendship' has been
given to man by the immortal gods. Though these things are
contrary to each other, we must nevertheless use them. Who
will deny (424) that these things are of importance to us ? Though
the thing were so, yet this could not be said vnthout impiety. I
almost think that these things are not in our own power. If this
be true, I shall rejoice : but if not, I must bear it with resignation.
This itself is not just unless it is voluntary.
▼ So, ' Patres decreverunt ut, quum populusregem jusaisset, id «icratum esset
si Patres auctores fierent. (Ldv. i. 17.)
"f Grotefend distinguishes between three forms of comparison, thus : —
Caius fortior est, quam prudentior = Caius is, indeed, both brave and prur
dent J but yet more brave than prudent.
Gains magis fortis est, quam prudens = Caius is just as brave, as he is not
prudent.
Gains fortis est, qu^Fkn prudens = Caius is brave, but not at aU prudent (where
potius may be supplied). The last two forms belong to late writers,
especially Tacitus.
160 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. [§ 57. 453.
^ 57. Conditional Propositions in dependent sentences.
453. (a) Possibility without any expression of uncertainty,
(Caius, A quid habet, dat.)
Dicebant Caium, si quid haheret (or, si quid habeat)^
dare.
(h) Uncertainty with the prospect of decision,
(Si quid habeam, dabo.)
Dicebat, si quid habeat (or haheret), se dattlrum.*
(c) Uncertainty without any such accessary notion.
(Si quid habtret^ daret.)
Dicebat, si quid haheret, se datarum esse.
{Or daturum forcy if the independent proposition would be datunu
cMsem, See 447.)
(d) Impossibility, or belief that the thing is not so,
(1) (Si quid habtrd, daret.)
This form in a dependent sentence coincides with form (c).
(2) (Si quid habuisset, dedisset.)
Dicebat, si quid habuisset, se daturum fuisse.
(3) When the verb of the conditional clause is in the
pluperf,, that of the consequent clause is in the im-
perfect,
.(Si quid accepisset, daret.)
Dicebat, si quid accepisset, se daturum esse.^
(4) The verb of the conditional clause in the imperf,, that
of the consequent clause in the pluperfect.
(Si quid opus esset, yenisset.)
Dicebat se, si quid haberet, daturum fuisse.
Dicebat se, si quid haberet, daturum.
(or) Dicebat se, si quid habeat, daturum.
X Obs. The conditional forms of the infinitive are scripturum esse {prts.) ;
scripturum fuisse {perf.) ; scripturum fore ifut.). Of these acripturuvi case is
aiso a mere future infinitive ; the two others are only conditional forms.
3^ Obs. The form daturum esse cannot be used to express ' impossibility or
belief that the thing ia not so^ unless the verb of the conditional clause is of the
pluperf. subj. ' Dicebat si patris iiteras accepisset^ se eas cum fratre communi-
caturum esse.' The form ' si Iiteras aeciperet se communicaturum esse,' would
not imply thisy but only express the receiving of a letter as a contemplated case
(belonging to class (c) ).
§57. 454-457.] condition-a,l pkopositiqns. 161
454. Hence, when we have to make these sentences dependent,
we must put
for dat, dabit, daret, dedisset :
darCy daiurum esse, daturum esse, daiurumfuisse :
for daturus esset,
daturum fore.
455. We also see that the first two classes (when the verb is
in the future) are no longer distinguished.
Si quid habet, dabit. ' >
Si quid habeat, dabit. )
* Dicehat se, si quid hdberet, daturum ;' or, 'si quid
hdbeat ;'■ for where the perfect subjunctive would regu-
larly be expected after a past tense like dicehat, the
present is often found with apparently no difference
of meaning ; but not the imperfett for the present,
Kruger.)
456. Vocabulary 62.
To remain, remanSre, mans, mans.
To confer benefits upon, conferre, conttil, collit (in, with ace,)
To be intimate with, familiariter uti ; usus.
To draw up an army, instruSre aciem ; instruz, insthict.
To draw up his army in three lines, triplicem aciem instruCre.
To engage, confiigSre, fliz, flict.
Either — or, aut» — aut ; vel — vel ; sive — sire.
Or, aut ; vel ; or ^ enditic ve.
457. lljr> < Aty* when the thing was done not in but ruavy should be translated
by aptid, or ad with ace.
(The battle apud Salamina. ' Apud* is found in later writers eren for * in J)
> Grotefend observes, that Cceaar generally retains the subj. pres. or perf,
(after a past tense) when those tenses would stand in direct narration : but that
Cic, and Liv. generally turn them into the imperf. or pluperf, (See 418.)
*■ ^AtU* expresses a difference in the things; ^veV a. diiSerence in the expre^-
aum. (Z.) Vd is the imperative from velle^ as fer from ferre: its proper
meaning therefore is, * if you please .** so that * A re2 B ' was originally ' A or,
ifyoulikej B;' that is, * A or B: one or the other, no matter which.' Hence,
its meaning ^even:^ vel maximus, ' the very greatest, if you please.' ^Aut* is
used in the case of opposite notions, when if one is, the other is ntri, * Vel'
should be used when the notions are not opjtosUe in themselves; especially when
only some of the possible suppositions are mentioned. It very often evidently
retains its original meaning, of expressing indifference as to which notion is
taken ; and should always be used when such indifference is to be expressed.
Thus ' The nobles can either corrupt or correct the morals of a state^' vel cor-
162 ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. [§ 58. 458, 459.
Exercise 66.
[How is can deny to be translated in a question of appeal ? (445.) ]
458. He saidf that if a happy life could be lost, it could not be
happy. He has long appeared to me somewhat disturbed.^'
Who can deny, that some are home one way, same another ? He
answered that Peleus, if he had heard it, would have lifted up his
hands. He answered that he could have*'' no friendship with
these, if they remained in Gaul. It is certain, that if any one
had done this, he would have laid the king under a great obligation.
It is certain that, if any one does this, he will lay the king under
a great obligation. If any one does this,*® he will have deserved
well of the state. I fear that nobody will be permitted to be neu-
tral. I fear that he has not concealed from you the discourse of
T. Ampius. (As to) what is best to be done {sup*) do you^ see
to that (428). I will strive to prove myself grateful {mentor) for
the benefits, of which you have conferred very many^^ upon me.
They say^ that the rule of expediency is not the same a* that of
honour. * ^^ Having drawn up his army in three lines, he engaged
with M ardonius. p He drew up his army, and engaged with the
Gauls at Geneva. There were some*®* who lifted up their hands.
/ r
XXII.
§ 58. On oblique narration.
459. When one person has to report the speech of another, he may do this
in two ways. He may either introduce him as speaking, and put in
his mouth the exact words used ; or he may only state the gubetance o£
what he said under a change of form,
(a) In the first way of narrating, the speaker uses the Jirst person, *-* Ce-
sar said : * / am of opinion,' " — and so on.
rumpere, vel corrigere, for they can do tohich ihey please. It sometimes = both
— and. ' He was his equal, vel moribus vel fortund.* Ve (abridged from vel)
commonly unites single words, not propojsitions : it is often appended to si, n<
{sive =r seu : neve ^ neu). Sive — sive ; seu — seu ^ * either— or* * whether — or*
when it is to be left doubtful which of two statements is correct, or which of
two terms is applicable (the second being an alias of the first). Crombie
observes that sive^sive should generally be used when * either {or whether) — or'
may be turned into ' be U — or be it.*
§ 58. 460-462. on oblique narration. 163
(fr) In the second way, the substance of what he said is given in the
tlurd person. " Ciesar said, that he was of opinion," — and so on. This
second way, in which the speech of another is reported in the third per-
son, is called obliqiu or indirect narration.
460. (a) In oblique narraUorty the principal verb or verbs will
be of the infinitive mood.
{li) All the subordinate clauses that express the original
speaker^ 8 words or opinions will have their verbs in
the subjunctive mood.
^^ Hence conjunctions and adverbs that go with the indicative in dined
narration, go with the subjunctive in indirect or oblique narration. b
(Thus in the example (453, a), ' Si quid ?iabet doty* becomes, when re-
ported, ' Dicebant Caium, si quid habereiy dare.')
(c) When a speech is reported in oblique narration, (1) the
verb or participle on which the infinitive depends
is oflen omitted : (2) questions for an answer are
asked in the subjunctive : questions of appeal gene-
rally* in the infinitive (with interrogative pronouns
and adverbs) : (.3) the imperative in direct becomes
the subjunctive in indirect narration.
461. (cQ The subjunctive being thus employed to express the speech or sen,'
Hmentf not of the speaker or writer, but of the person c^nnit whom he is
speaking or writing, naturally came to be used in constructions where
the sentiments of another were less formally reported. Thus in the
fiible : * The vulture invited the little birds to a party,* ' qtud Ulia dtUu-
Tus erat ' would mean that he really was going to give them the party ;
but ' qiu)d Hits datvrvM esset ' would only mean that he said he was
going to give them a party. So with the verbs of aamaing, the charge
stands with qiutd in the aubjunetvoey because, the aocuaers aaserted that
the crime had been committed : the indicative would make the histo-
rian or speaker assert the truth of the charge.
462. [Direct.^
(a) (b) Quantum possum, te ac tua vestigia sequar, As
far as I can, I vnll follow you and your footsteps.
b Obs. f^ As the subjunctive has no future, ihefuhtre und future perfect be-
come the pres. and perfect of the subjvnct. respectively. Senties— quum ages :
sensurum esse, quum agaa. — Faciemus, quum imperaveris : facturos esse, quss
imperaverit (from imperavgrim). If the speech is narrated in past time (is intro-
duced, that is, by a past tense) the fut. and fui. perf, will become the imperf.
and ptupeif. in the oblique narration.
* Not quite always : thus Ces. B. G. 5, 29. podremo quia hoe aibi peraua*
deret? &c.
164 ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. [§ 58. 468, 464.
[Oblique, 1
Clamavit se, quantum posset j eum atque ejus vestigia
secuturum, He cried out that he, as far ai he could,
would follow him and his footsteps,
(c) (1) Legates ad Caesarem mittunt : ^^ sese paraios esse
portas aperire, &c." They send ambassadors
to C<Bsar : (saying) that they are ready to open
the gates, &c.
^ (2) Interrogabat : ' cur - paucis centurionibus pau-
cioribus tribunis . . . obedirent?* Quando
ausuros (esse) exposcere remedia, nisi, &c. ? '
He asked, * why they obeyed a few centurions
and still fewer tribunes ? When {said he)
will you dare to demand redress, if, &c. ? '
(3) (Hirri necessarii fidem Pompeii implorarunt :)
prcMtaret quod proficiscenti recepisset, Make
good (said they) what you promised him when
he was setting out,
(d) Socrates accusatus est, quod corrumperet juventutem,
Socrates was accused of corrupting the young men.
463. Vocabulary 63.
(The Prepositioh Apud governing aee.)
(1) With = in the house of^ in the mind or estimation of; amongst :
(2) In the presence of : (3) In =: in an author's writings : (4) At, of
place (see 457).
He was wiffi me, apud me.
To have great influence with, multum valSre apud.
Gyrus in Xenophony apud Xenophontem.
To speak In the presence of the ) ^ ^ ^^ popnlum.
people, )
Yesterday, h6ri.
To-morrow, eras.
Exercise 67.
464. Must we not all die ? He cried out, ' that he was ready
to shed his blood for his country; must we* not all die (he
« As ' questions for answer ' may be of a very objurgatory character, it is often
indifferent whether the question be put in the injin, or the aubjtmct. Thus in
lAv. vii. 15. ' Ubi illi clamores sint arma poscentium 1 Ac.* *ubi illos clamores
cue . . . .* might have stood equally well.
* * TTe,' *you,* must be turned into *they.*
§ 59. 465-467.] on oblique narration. 165
asked) ? should not an honourable death be preferred to a dis-
graceful life ? ' — Almost all (of them) visited Balbus ; * Keep (said
they) your word :** finish the business which you undertook to
finish.' — * What is this,'* said he, * O Tribunes ? are you going
to overthrow the state under the guidance of Appius^ Herdo-
nius' I ' — ^P. Valerius came to the Tribunes, crying out, * What
is this ? Are you going to overthrow the state under the guidance
of App. .Herdonius' ? ' — He cried out, * that he called the Quirites
to arms : that he would dare against the tribunes what the founder
of his family had dared against the kings.' — What was I to do ?
all were crying out, that it was all over with the army. The
Roman people had not'^ the same fortune at home that (they had)
in the field. My (friend) Balbus has more influence with me
than any other pejson. Socrates in Plato says that the soul is
not mortal.
§ 59. Oblique narration continued. (Mood in subordinate clauses.
Dependence on an infinitive.)
465. {a, In the oratio ohliqua, even when dependent on a p€ist
tense, the present (and perfect) suhj. are used when the clause
expresses a general truth, independent of the judgment of the
speaker, and when tJte reporter of the speech wishes to make the
sentiment his ovmJ
466. (b) Remarks that are really the reporter's (i. e. were not
made by the speaker) are, of course, in the indicative. The
Indicative is also used by the Historians, when the writer wishes
to intimate that what is said is really so, and not merely so stated
by the speaker.
467. (c) The subordinate clauses inserted in propositions whose
verbs are in the infin. or subjunctive, must have their verbs in the
d Compare [462, c, (3)]
• Ctuid hoc rei est 7 — This sentence is to be in direct narration.
f « Potest quia aliorum sententiam vel ita referre, ut tota ex eonim etiamnum
pendeat mente, vel etiam tanquam tritam proponere at que usu eoTifirmatam,
quamque ipse jam fecerit suam. Prior si tocum habet ratio, imperfecium con-
junctivi poni solet: si posterior, propsens" {Wagner, ap. Kruger.)
166 ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. [§ 59. 468, 469.
subjunctive, when they form a part of the wlioJe meaning of the
proposition. i
If such a clause only limits or describes a particular term of the
proposition, without fairiy making apart qf Uf the verb will be in the
indicative.
468. (d) In sentences dependent on an infinitive, the pres. or
perf. suhj. are found, where the general rule requires the imperf.
or pluperf. ; but not vice versl.
In other words, the prea. and perf. aubj. may stand (instead of the
imptrf, or pluperf.) after the per/, infinitive ; and also after the prea. or
fut. infinitive when they depend on a past tense.
469. (a) Cicero dicehat : tria esse omnino genera quae in dis-
ceptationem cadere possint : quid fiat, factum,
futurumve sit, Cicero used to say that there toere
only three kinds of questions that could fall into
controversy : what was doing, what had been done,
and what would happen.
(h) Themistocles certiorem eum fecit, id agi ut pons,
quem ille in Hellesponto fecerat, dissolveretur,
Themistocles sent him word, that it wa^ intended to
break dovm the bridge which he had made over the
Hellespont.
(c) Indignum videbatur populum Romanum ab iisdem
Etruscis obsideri, quorum saepe exercitus fuderit,
Jt seemed an indignity that the Roman people should
be besieged by those very Etruscans, whose armies
they had often routed.
Certum est hominum caus& factum esse mundum quse-
que in eo sint ^ omnia, // is certain, that the world
and every thing in it wa^ made for man.
(rf) With infin. pres. or Jut.
(I) Dixit (he said) ; dieebat; dixerat; dicturua erat,
s If, that is, they form an essential part of the leading proposition, being
included in the object, the purpose, or the circumstance supposed. (Z.)
h *Tantam rerum ubertatem natura largitaest, ut ea, qiuB gignuntur, donate
consulto nobis videantur.' Here ea quue gignvnivr are the actual produdiona of
nature. (Z.)
§ 59. 470-472.] on oblique nabbition. 167
"* i inteUectumm esse ] I""** ^S^" <<" ««^) »«>'*^ .„ , .
( quid aeturus esaet (or acturvM ni) nostls.
(2) And (after any tense of fUco, &c.)
r quid og'tfre/ (or aga£) hOBti&
86 inteUtxiaat < quid egissct (or tgerit) hostis.
C quid ac<aru« e«9c^ (or aeturus sU) hostis.
470. Vocabulary 64.
(Prepositions Erqa, Inteb, Ob, Per.)
Eroa, ace, : Towards {of/ixvorabU dispositions). k
Inter, 1 ace^: Between; among; in the midst otf during.
On the journey, inter viam.
They love me and eat^ others et nos et inter ae amant.
Ob, accus. ; on account of.
Before my eyes, ob ocaios.
Per, ace. Through (of place, time, and means). By (of the sec-
ondary agent™ by whom we do any thing ; and in adjuraHonSt in which
it is separated from its noun by pronouns—^ per ego te,' Ac), By the
leave of (digladientur per me licet : for any thing I care).
Per se ^ by him, &c., alone (ipse per se),ybr iteoten sake ; naturaUy;
of itself, &c.
Per in permagnus, pergraius, Ac, is often separated from the affec-
tive ; ' per mihi .... gratum feceris.'
471. (a) {Eng.) To make a bridge over a river (See Ex. 469 (6) ).
(La/.) To make a bridge in a river.
(6) {Eng.) The town in question,
{Lot,) The town de quo agitur.
Exercise 68.
[Translate the clauses marked thus (t) both as the speaker's^ and as the
narrator's.]
472. Catilina informs (them) that he had sent forward Man-
lius to the great bo.ly of men" f whom he had prepared to take
arms.^* They warn them to depart from all the islandsf which
i Kriiger : who observes, that the use of the present, &c, may often be explained
by the purpose of the writer, to intimate that what is said, still and generally
holds good: and that sometimes there may be what Hermann calls a *mutatio
inca^tarum sententiarum in certas i* but that in many other passages no reason
can be discovered for the employment of the pres. and perf, rather than the imr
perf. and pluperf.
k Rarely of Aotf^t/e dispositions. (Z.)
I Irder sometimes stands between two substantives : ' Fiesulas inter Arre-
tiumque.'
■» For instance, to send a letter ' by a slave' (per servum).
" Ad earn multitodinem.
168 ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. [§ 59. 473, 474.
are between Italy (Italia) and Africa. He had contracted to
build'^' a bridge oyer the river° Danube {Ister, tri, p. 14, 9, a).
He answered, that custom, f which is a second nature, toas on
our side. Let them go away for any thing I care. He answered
that he feared the waves, f which were such as he had never seen
before. He answered that you, f such is your temperance,? were
already well. He said that he was the first who® accomplished
that journey. They cry out, * Why are these (questions) asked ?
(460, c.) who is so powerful as to be able to perform all he
wishes?' (68, rf.)
/?
473. (a) The ace. and infin, with ne in the oblique narration
resembles, but must be distinguished from, its use
to express emotion in direct narration. i
(a) Adeone hominem infelicem esse quemquam, ut ego
sum ! That any man living should be so unfortu*
nate as J am/
* Exercise 69.
[In what mood are qtiestions qf appeal asked in oblique narration 7 460, c]
474. That you should be able (inf. pres.) to bear this ! That
you should say this ! He said that we ought not to learn many
things, but much. They cried out, * Could any man bear this 1
Would she never see them without calling them betrayers of
their country (88, c) ? Let her learn (they said) to govern her
tongue.' — I fear that nobody will prefer a capital charge against
him. They say that Caius has been accused of bribery ; which
(36, b) I shall not easily be induced to believe.' He says that
• *RivTi8* brook; *fluviufl* river; ^amnis' hbroad, deep river. *Flunien'
(properly the ^atrearn^^ flu-imen)i8 also used as a general term for ^ river* (being
used here of the Danube) ; especially when there is reference to its stream.
P In a sentence of this kind, consider whether the reporter of the answer
should be represented as making U his ovm ; if so, the subj. present should be
used by 465 (a).
<» For which u^ with the subj. is also found : TVnc tU vUa res frangat?-^
TSn ego vJt adverser 7
' Obs. CredOf which takes a dot. of the person believed, takes an ace. of the
§ 60. 475-477.] qui with subjunctive. 169
he has not received the letters which I sent him (32, c). Who
will deny that it is the duty of a Christian to keep his word ?
Who will deny that it is wise'* to have death always before one's
eyes i They replied, that they sent the letter hy a slave. They
answer, that the town in question is two hundred (Roman) mOes
from Rome. I had perished, if you hadno^ succoured me.
XXIII.
§ 60. < Qui ' with Subjunctive.
47&. ' Qui ' takes the indicativo, only when it refers to a particular object in
the most dear and direct way ; when there is no vagueness or indefinite-
ness whatever in the reference.
But when its reference ia at all vague or indefinite, it governs the
subjunctive.
476. Qui therefore governs the eubjunctive whenever the object described
by the relative could not, as it were, be aeen and taudiecL Whenever it
does not describe an individiuU objecty but only refers it (or them) to a
particular doss by a mark common toaUthe ctaaa^ it governs the subjunc-
tive. When therefore for ^who* ^tphick,' we might substitute 'of sudi
a kind as to^ ' suck thaJt^ &c., qui governs the subjunctive.
(a) Qui with the indicative may refer an object to a class, but
it then describes it (or them) in the most definite way. ' Qui non
defendit amicum, quum potest.' ' A man who actually does not
defend his friend when he can.'
477. Vocabulary 65.
(Phrases after which qui is generally indefinUe, and therefore takes
the subjunctive.)
Some men ; or there are some who, sunt qui.
There are not wanting men who, non desunt qui.
(Negatives and virtually negatives.)
Who is there*? , quis esti
How few there are 1 quotusquisque est 1
Q,uofusquisque est is used interrogatively and in the singular; i. e.,
how many does each man who belongs to the class make 1 Q,uotu8
esti being 'how many does he make?* So, too, nemof nihil est; an
uUuSf &c.
ffiing bdieved: and though '/ am bdieved* is *mihi crtdiJbir^ it i|iust be *ego
credor* (tu crederis, Ac.) when an infm, immediate^ follows (/ am bdieved to
hope done this).
8
We haye reason to rejoice,
170 <iui WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. [§ 60. 478, 479.
(Reperio, xntenio, habeo.)
There are found persons who, reperiuntur, inyeniuntur, qui."
You may find, reperias, inyenias qui, &c.
(Nihil est avoD, &c. Nihil habeo quod, dc.)
' est quod gaudeamus = ' there is some-
thing of such a kind that we should
rejoice on account of it.* ' Quod* as
an ace. netU. pron, (195, f.) going
with gaudeo.
What is there that you can com- > . j * j „„-^ ,»^«„«„ o
, , -- ' I quid est quod qugri possis 1
plain oil J
We haye no reason to desire, non est quod desideremus.
You have no reason to hurry, nitiil est quod festines.
478. (a) {Eng.) I haye nothing to accuse old age qf.
(Lot.) I haye nothing tohich I may accuse old age (quod incusem
senectutem).
(6) (Eng.) A pen to write witk.
{Lai.) A pen wUh which one may write.
(c) (Eng.) Men who abound in silyer, in gold (and), in estates.
{Lat.) Men who abound in silver, who in gold, who in estates.
(d) (Eng.) Men who abound neither in silver, nor gold, nor estates.
{Lat,) Men who do not abound in silver, not in gold, not in estates.
479. VOCABULAEY 66.
To drive away, abigSre, eg, act.
Stick, bacillum,t i, n.
Bird, avis," is, /.
Put ; lay down, or aside, pdngre,^ ptfsu, pbsit.
To cross over, trtgicere, jec, ject.
To allow it to happen, commictCre (ut, with suhj.).
■ Obs. With aunif reperio^ habeo^ dc, qui with the indicative is found, when
it expresses particular objects in the most definite way. This is naturally
oftener the case when qm relates to the subject^ which is mostly a particular
object (or objects)^ than when it relates to the predicate^ which is generally Mrnie
doM in which the subject is contained. Turn primum reperta suntj qtus per
tot annos rempublicam exedere : not ' there were found evils which preyed on,
dc' but ' the evils which have actually preyed on the state for so many years,
were then found for the first time.*
t A diminutive of baculum.
V Volucres are all ' winged creatures,* insects included. Avis is the general
name for * bird :* ' ales ' is the word in poetry and the language of the caigura for
the larger birds, especially the eagle. In augury, aUtes M[ere the birds wlK>8e
flight, oscines the birds whose song or cry, was prophetic (D.)
* Pomre aliquid, * to lay down * a thing ; * to get it out of our hands ;* * to get
rid of it.* Locare and coUocare are * to put a thing in its right place :' * to place '
advisedly for some purpose.
§61.480,481.] QUI WITH SUB JTTNCTIVB. ' 171
To be on the point oj^ ineo esse (ut, with mbj.).
Jewel, gemma, bb, /.
Unburied, inhumatus, a, um.
Exercise 70.
480. Diogenes ordered himself to be cast forth unburied.
Then'' his friend said: * To the birds and beasts?' *By no
means/ said he, ,* but put* a stick by me, to drive them away
with (478).'-^TAere are same tcho think that Caius is pretending.
There were some, who thought that Caius was pretending. There
are not wanting persons, who deny that the rule of expediency is
the same as thai of honour. There are found some, who say
that we should not cultivate virtue. It is incredible how weary
I am of life. We must cross over that sea which (48) you call
ocean. There are some who think, that the best thing we have
(53) will be lost. They cry out, that we shall lose the best thing
we have. We have no reason to hurry. I have nothing to
accuse you of (478). You have reason to rejoice, that you have
concealed these things from your father. You will scarcely find
any one to believe this. He was on the point of being killed.
Had you rather be like one^ (212, x) of these persons who abound
in gold, in silver, in jewels, or (like) C. Fabricius, who had none
(nihil) of those things ? How few there are, who have death
always before their eyes ! /p
§ 61. 'Qui' wUh the subjunctive continued.
481. Qui takes the subjunctive, when it introduces the ground
of the assertion in the antecedent clause.
(a) Here there is some difficulty in determining whether ^ is used
^ szat that timey tum.
Then < = after thai, inde, deinde.
( zrz therefore, igitur, itaque.
X Poniiote. The fonns of the imperative in to, tote, nto, are used in solemn
commands and prohibitions, such as laws, vnlls, &c.
J [C. xxziv.] i;;^ ' On«' often means *aoine one' (aliquis), or *a eerioan one*
(quidam).
172 QUI WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. [§ 61. 4d2-485.
definitely or not. *He waa laughed dt by all tht rest, who did not ac-
knowledge these faults to belong to Socrates;' this seems definite
enough, but it is in the Latin, ' qui non agnoscerent.'
(fi) When therefore for *who^ may be substituted ^for he {ahey i/, Ac.«)*
the verb should be the subjunctive.
4B2. For qui alone, utpote qui, qui^e qid,* tU qui are also used,
generally with the subjunctive.
483. Qui takes the subjunctive, when it has the force of t*^ with
a personal or possessive pronoun.^
It has this force after (1) dignuSj indignuSj idoneuSy &c,
(2) tarriy talis, ejuamodi, w (attch), <&c.
(3) comparatives with quam.
(4) is sum^ ( := talis sum), '/ am a man tooJ
(5) quis sum?
(6) when it expresses a purpose.
(a) When qui = ut is, and introduces a canseqttence, the perf. subj. may
be used for the imperfect by 418. Zeno nullo modo is erat^ qui, ut
Theophrastus, nervos virtutis inciderU. Cic. Acad. i. 10, 35. [al.
indderet.'l
484. Qui governs the subjunctive, when we may substitute for
it, * although,' * since^ * because,' * seeing that,' &c. with a personal
pronoun.
(a) Qui takes the subjunctive afler unu^ and solus , signifying
^ alone y' *only,'
485. Qui, in narrative, is followed by the subj. of the imperfect
and pluperfect, to express a repeated action taking place in past
time,^
The relative adverbs (u&t, qua, <&c.) govern the subjunctive of these
tenses in the same way ; and as far as they can be substituted for the
relative, they follow the rules above given.
■ This of course will not apply to the use of qui to introduce a new sentence,
where we use *for he^ <&c.
• Utpote qui, quippe qui = * inasmuch as they ;' ^for they.* Grotefend re-
marks that utpote, quippe may generally be translated by * namely,* 'that is.'
Our * as being * will often give the force of them still better ; they often stand
before attributives only. * (Democrito) quippe homini erudite, Ac*
b Thus qui^= ut ego, ut tu, ut ille j ut iws, ut vos, ut Uli; through all their
cases. So, cujus = ut meus, tuus, <&c. : quorum =z ui noster, veater, <&c.
<^ But *ut* is sometimes used after ' is es,* &c. * Neque enim is es, Catilina,
t^ te . . . . ratio a furore revocarit.' i^Cic. Cat. i. 9, 22.) Te is here emphatic.
d Examples of qui and relative adverbs used of repeated actions are : ' Nee
quisquam Pyrrhum, qua tutisset impetum, sustinere valuit.' ' Semper babiti
sunt fortissimi, qui summam imperii potireniur.* (Z.)
§61. 486.] qui with subjunctive. 173
486. The kind of sentences in which the relative may be thus
introduced in Latin, will be best learned by examples.
(a) {Eng,) He was despised by them, jfb}* they saw through him.
r He was despised by them, irAo saw through him (jmbj.),
(Lot J) < He was demised by them, oB-heing uko saw through him'
(&) {Eng.) He deserves {pr^ does not deserve) to be loved.
{Lot.) He is worthy, (or, unworthy) \ ^I*° '^"^ ^* ^f^'*
^ - ^> V » - ^i I whom you «Adu^ toi>«.
. (c) (£771^.) He is not a "proper person to ht received.
(Lot.) He is not a proper person j ^^J*' *^^«*^ ?* ^«^"'^«^;
( whom you mould receive,
{d) {Eng.) None are so good as never to sin.
{Lot.) None are so good, who never sin (ni&;.).
(e) (JE77i^.) None are so great, as to be independent.
(Lot.) None are so great, who are independent (jmbj.).
(/) {Eng.) Of such a kind (or, such) that we can neglect duties for their
sake.
{Lat.) Of such a kind, for the sake of which we can neglect duties.
(g) {Eng.) Too short to be the whole life of man.
{Lat.) Shorter than wJUch can be f the whole life of man.
(h) lEne ) \ ^^^^^^^ greater than I can requite.
C Benefits too great to be requited.
{Lot.) Benefits greater than whichs I can requite.
r I am not a man to believe this,
(i) {Eng.) < I am not sofoolishy simple, &c., as to believe this.
C I am not one who believe b this.
{Lot.) I am not he {ja) who would believe (^t putem),
{j) {Eng.) Who am I, that my writings should be honoured thus?
{Lai.) Who am I, whose writings should be honoured thus 1
{k) {Eng.) They sent ambassadors, to sue for peace.
{Lat.) They sent ambassadors, who should sue for peace.
(/) {Eng.) He deserves praise {or blame) for having done this.
{Lot) He deserves praise {or blame) who did this {subj.).
(m) {Eng.) Wretched man that I i am, who thought, Ac.
{Lot.) O me miserable, who thought, Stc. {qui with«tt^'.).
* Dignus {or indignus) qui ametur.
f duam qu89 sit, oxpossit ease. (See Difierenceof Idiom 94.)
ff duam quibus gratiam referre possim.
b Obs. The verb after qui takes the person of ego, iu, Ac, not of ' m ' or main^
person.
' I am not one who much or oft delight
To season my fireside with personal talk,' &c.
{ Wordsvforih.)
1 < O me misemm I' or <me miserum !' The interjections O, heu, prohl take
the ace. ; hei andvistbe daiive; en and eoce the nom. or the ace, (the latter
174 QUUM WITH INDICATIVE. [§ 62. 487, 488-
Eaercise 71.
[Translate ' / am not one who think.* 486. t.]
487. We must take care to use such (is) a liberality as (qui)
may be of service to our friends, (and) hurt nobody. There i^
no doubt, that the Gauls are too brave to be conquered (486, g)
in one battle. Those eternal fires, which (48) we call stars, are
too many to be numbered. He is a proper person to be received
(486, c) into your friendship. Nothing is so valuable,* that we
should barter for it our faith and our liberty. No one can be
so great, ds (483, (2) ) never to require the services of his friends.
The benefits, of which" you have conferred upon me very many,
are greater than I can repay (486, A). I am not one who think
that this world and every thing that is in it, was made by chance.
There are some who believe, that this most beautiful world and
all that is in it, was made by some chance or other. Who am I,
that all men should Qonsult my interest (486, j) ? Who will deny,
that this life is too short to be the whole life of man ? You are
the only person (484, a) on whom the safety of the state depends,
p If Cato had died, Cicero would have been the only person on
whom the safety of the state depended. I am not so simple (486, i)
as to deny this.
XXIV.
§ 62. Quum with the Indicative,
488. Since quum with the indicative^ is far less common than
with the subjunctive, it is important to get a clear notion when it
should take the indicative.
chiefly in Comedy. Z.) The ace, of personal pronouns may stand in the ace.
without the interjection^ and even other words are so used.
k Tanti, . . . quo vendamus = ut eo vendamus.
1 When^uum, anteqtiamf priusquam, <&c., take the indicative^ either (I) the oc-
currence is connected with a state that presents itself vividly to the speaker^ s
recollection^ or with a fixed and definitely marked point of time : or (2) it falls
without preparation or notice into the middle of another action (which is sus-
pended or broken off by it), and thus is naturally described in an unconnected
and abrupt manner. {Hartungj Partikellehre, ii. 336.)
§ 62. 489, 490.] quum with indicative. 175
(a) Quum takes the indicative when it simply marks the time,
without carrying with it any notion of a cause or occasion,
^ When ' marks the time in this definite way, and is to be translated
by quum with the mdicaJtioe^ when ' Ihen ' might be substituted for it.
' It was night token, he left the room,' =: * it was night : then he left
the room.
{b) Quum takes the indicative when, though it does introduce a
cause or occasion of what is stated in the principal sentence, it
nevertheless describes the time in a very marked manner, refer-
ring to turn, nuncy &c., or some noun of Ume expressed or under-
stood in the principal clause.
(c) Quum takes the indicative, when what is said in the prin-
cipal clause is not only contemporaneov>s with the action expressed
in the quum clause, but is actually included in it.
When a *tphen* clause stands in this kind of close relation to its
principal clause, the parUdpial aub^antive under the government of ' m '
may generally be substituted for it.
* Wien you censure them, you censure me.'
* In censuring them, you censure me.'
(d) There are two less common meanings in which quum goes
with the indicative :
(1) When it means * since ' of time."
(2) When it is equivalent to quody afler gaudeo, gratulor, &;c.
489. The meanings in which * quum ' always takes the subjunctive, are
since, inoBmuch, as, although, whereas. In the sense of * wfien ' it takes
the subjunctive, when the statement introduced by 'wJun* is also the
cause or occasion of what is asserted in the principal clause.
With the imperf. and pluperf. quum generally takes the subjunctive,
though the notion of a cattire, or even of an occasion^ is hardly, if at all,
perceptible. *Quum Agesilaus rever^«re^ur . . . decessit.'* {Com,
Nep. I. 8, 6.)
490. (a) Jam ver appetebat, quum Hannibal ex hibemis mxmty
The spring was already drawing on when Hannibal
moyed from his winter quarters,
(h) Ager quum multos annos quievit, uberiores efferre
fructus solet, Afield, when it has lain fallow many
years, generally produces more abundant crops.
■n Ex eo tempore quo. Obs. That the pres. is used. (See 490, d.)
* Or quum with the mdic, of imperf. and pluperf.
176 QUUM WITH INDICATIVE. [§ 62. 491, 492.
(c) Quum in portum dico, in urhem dico, When I say
into the port, I say into the city, (In saying . into
the port, I say, &c.)
(d) Nondum centum et decern anni sunt, quum de pecu-
niis repetundis a L. Pisone lata lex est. It is not
yet a hundred and ten years since the law about ex-
tortion was carried by L, Piso,
Gratulor, quum tantum vales apud Dolahellum, I con-
gratulate you on your influence with Dolabella,
491. (a) {Eng.) In attacking one, you attack all.
{Lai.) When you attack one, you attack all {quum with indie.).
(6) {Eng.) It is many years since he was first in my debt.^
{Liot.) There are many years, when he ia in my debt,
(c) {Eng.) I congratulate you on your influence with Calus.
{Lai.) I congratulate you, when you avail so much with {apud) Caius.
{d) {Eng.) I do not Wee to be abused.
{Lot.) 1 am not abused willingb/ {libenler).
492. V0CABTJ;.ARY 67.
This being so ; this being the case, quie quum ita sint.
{quum (to denote the ground on which a
judgment is formed) ; quoniam =
quum, jam (used when the ground is
an acknowledged fact^).
Not that ^but \ ^^^ quod^sed : non quod p (with «i6-
( jund.).
To be spoken ill of, m^e audire {* to hear ill ').
f quia; quod (with indie. ^ except where
I the subjunc. is required for some other
Because, < reason. — Quia introduces a «^ric^catcM
of the eff'ect : quod the eonceived eatiae
or ground of an action).
I don't at all doubt, nuUus dubito.<i
How insignificant, quam nullus.
To congratulate, gratttlari, gfatulatus.
■ Multi sunt anni quum ille in sere meo est.
o Quando is sometimes used in this sense ; and also quvm. * Itaque, quando
yestree cautiones infirmae mmt Grsculam tibi niisi cautionem.' (C. Fam. vii.
18.) ' Tu quum inetUuxati^ .... scribe ad me.* (C. Fam. vii. 32.)~ Ut has
sometimes the meaning of though : * ut deaint vires, tamen est laudanda
voluntas.*
P For non quod, we often find non eo or ideo quod : but al90 non quo : all with
tyjbj. * Not as if not ' is ' non quin*
*> This expression belongs to the language of common converaaUon^ not to
books.
§62. 493, 494.] quum with indicative. 177
To take \ sumere, sumps, suznpt.; cSpSre, io,«" c€p,
c capt.
To take hold of^ prehendPre, prehend, prehens.
To do well, praBclare facere.
f[^ The subject of con^ahUation stands in the ace. or in the abL with
de or inj or in the incUc, with quod^ for which quum is sometimes used.
(See 491, c.)
Exercise 72.
[With what mood may ifUerrogaHves be used In obliqtu appeals ? (460, e}]
493. This being the case, I am unwilling to leave the city.
Caesar, when he had conquered the Gauls (= having conquered
the Gauls), returned to Rome. We know how insignificant the
strength of men is. Who, when he sees this (= seeing, or on
seeing this), would not make merry (perf, suhj,) with you ?
Phocion was constantly poor, though he might have been very
rich. Is it not several years since Caius was (first) in your debt ?
Is there any man who can be compared with Balbus ? You do
well in loving the boy (491, a). When I assert the one, I deny
the other. He says that, if I had conquered the Gauls, he should
have congratulated me on my victory. I congratulate you on
your having recovered (that you have recovered). Does any man
Uke to be ill spoken of? I will hold my tongue, not that I believe
the man, but because it makes no difference to me. They cried
out, * Why did he advise this ? might they depart a finger^ s
breadth from the rule of honour ? ' They asked, * Was not Caius
nearer Rome than Labienus ? ' (question for information). They
answer that we ought to consult the interests of those with whom
we have to live,^''^
494. Vocabulary 68.
(Conjunctions that go with subjunct. only.)
C quasi =: quam si (relating to manntr),
As i^ j tanquam* =: tarn quam (relating to de-
^ gree ; 'just asif ').
' Sumimus quo utamur : capimua quod habeamus ; prdienditma quod tenea •
muB. (D.) Sumere (to tcike of my own free toiU and choice) is generally spoken
of something that we may appropriate : capere {seize upon) often denotes the
taking what does not belong to us. (H.)
■ Also velut si| velut, ac si (and sometimes sicut ; poeticaliy ceu). After tan-
quam, si is often expressed, and may always be understood.
8»
178 quuM WITH INDICATIVE. [§ 62. 495-497.
Would that, utinam.
Othatl Osi!
r dummbdo (for which dum, modo are
Provided only, < used separately — * rurf,* after these
C words is * ng ').
It Is nearly the same thing as ii^ perinde fSre est ac si.
A s if forsoothj quasi vero.
Perhaps, forsitan (often with peif. subj.),
495. OCr With these words the general rule for the sequence
of tenses (40) is to be observed. The English would mislead us.
Pugnaty quasi contendat, He fghts as if he contended,
or were contending, &c.
Pugnavit, quasi contenderet, He fought as if he had
been contending, &c.
496. With utinam the pres, and perf. are used, if the thing
wished is not to be represented (whatever it may fte),as impossible
to be realized. The imperf. and pluperf, express wishes that are
(in the speaker's opinion) impossible, or unlikely, to be realized.
* Not^ after utinam is regularly ne, but very often non.
Exercise 73.
(Obs. In the principal clause the Ua or «tc,t to which quasi or tati"
quam refers, is often expressed.) a
497. They saluted Caius^ (j^st) as it he had been consul'.
Many, not to say all, saluted Caius, as if he had been consul.
Would that you were consul ! Would that I had been engaged
in that battle ! Would that I had been able to avoid suspicion !
Provided your word be kept, 7 donH care a straw for all the rest.
Provided you do not break your word, I donH care this for all the
rest. Would that the letter had not been written ! Live with
men as if the immortal gods saw you. (Insert * «c' in the princ.
clause.) Speak with your friends, as if all men heard you. All
men are calling upon me, as if forsooth it were my business to
assist all men. Would that Varro himself would apply vigorously
to my cause ! Perhaps some one may say, that these things are
too small to be seen with the naked eye (pi.). How few are
there, who apply- vigorously to another man's cause !
t Sic relates more to something preceding and actually ^ven : ita to something
foUowing and supposed, (R. and H.)
§ 63. 498-503.] ante(%uam and friuisquam. 179
XXV.
§ 63. Antequam and Priusquam.
498. (a) When the principal verb is in the present tense, the
verb in the clause with antequam or priusquam may be in the
pres. indicative or subjunctive.
499. (h) When the principal verb is in the future, the de-
pendent verb may be in the future perfect, or the present sub-
junctive ; sometimes also it is found in the present indicative.
500. (c) When the principal verb is in a pa^t tense, the de-
pendent verb is either in the perfect indicative or in the imperfect
subjunctive : — in the perfect indicative, if there is no closer con-
nectixm between the two occurrences than precedence in point of
time, what is stated in the subordinate clause being stated as an
actual occurrence : — in the imperfect (or, if necessary, the pluper-
fect) subjunctive, when there is a closer connection between the
two occurrences than that of mere precedence in point of time.
501. And, generally, whenever there is a closer connection be-
tween the two clauses than that of mere priority (whenever, for
instance, it is stated or implied to be necessary, proper, or designed
with a view to some purpose,^ that the one action or event should
precede the other) ; and whenever the two are contemplated as
forming a connected sequence, the subjunctive should be used.
502. 0b8. When the stress is on the before, ante or priua stands in the prin-
cipal clause ; either early in it (which is their most emphatic position),
or just before the quanij but not forming one word with it. When they
are thus emphatic, the verb being in past time, the peif. indicative is
commonly used (rather than the imp. ntbj.) : especially when a negct-
Uve accompanies them : non ante, nee ante, nonprivs.
503. (a) Ante rorat quam pluit. It drops before it rains.
t In the following passage Livy uses the preB, where we should rather have
expected the ^ubj. * Sed ante quam opprimit lux majoraque hostium agmlna
obaepiunt iter . . . erumpamus' (xxii. 50). So too in Virgil: *Sed mihi vel
tellus, optem, prius ima dehiscat, | Ante, pudor, quam te violo,* &c. {Ma. iv.
25.) In Nep. iii. 2, the imp, aubj. is used where there seems to be only the
simple relation of precedence in point of time. * Aristides interfuit pugns navali
apud Salamina, quas facta est prius quam ille poeni (exsilii) UberareturJ
180 * ANTEQUAM AND PRIUSQUAM. [§ 63. 504-506.
Tempestas minatur antequam surgat, A tempest
threatens before it gets up,
(b) Antequam aliquo loco consedero, longas a me literas
non exspectabis, Till T settle somewhere, you will
not expect long letters from me,
Antequam de republicSi dicam, exponam vobis bre-
viter, &c.
Priusquam respondeo , . . dicam, &c., (Phil. ii. 3.)
Priusquam conor proponam, ,&c., (iii. de
Orat. 25.)
(c) HsBc omnia ante facta sunt, quam Verres Italiam
attigit, All these things were done before Verres
reached Italy,
Ducentis annis ante quam Romam caper ent, in Italiam
Gain transcenderunt, The Gauls crossed over into
Italy two hundred years before they took Rome,
604. (1) (Eng.) A mortal body must necessarily die.
{Lot.) It is necessary^ that a mortal body should die (Corpus mor-
tals interire Decease est ; or intereat neces^ est ; ths subj.
being governed by ut omitted),
(2) {Eng.) There 19 7u>2tptn^ pleasantly.
{Lot,) It amnot be lived pleasantly ( jucunde vivi non potest).
505. VpCABULARY 69.
(The Prepositions Pbjbteb, Secundum )
PsjBTEB, beside i beyond^ abooe (of degree); covUrary to; besides; to
say wdhing ofj except^ btU,
Contrary to expectation, prster expectationem.
Contrary to your custom , prsBter consuetudxnem tuam.
Secundum {from sequi), 'following.* Along; qfler (of time);
after, next to; according to; in favour ^(with verbs of judging, Ac).
He made a decree in your favour, secundum te decrevit.
Exercise 74.
[How are questions of appeal to be translated in oblique narration 1]
506. I will not leave the city before I have had an interview
with Caius (b). Before I set out, I had an interview with Balbus
(c). He answered that, before he set out, he had an interview
with CsBsar. There is no living pleasantly, unless you live
{impers. pass,) according to nature. Under the guidance of na-
ture there is no going wrong. Contrary to expectation, the
§ 64- 507-511.] DUM, DONEC, QUOAD, &c. . 181
Prgetor lias made a decree in favour of Caius, They exclaim,
^ Are not hidden dangers always the most difficult to avoid ? '
Who can deny, that the Praetor has made a decree in your favour ?
This being the case, I have no doubt that the Preetor will make a
decree in your favour. This being the case, the world must
necessarily be governed by some wise mind. Virtue must neces-
sarily' hate vice. / am not so foolish as to deny (486, i) that
virtue and vice are contrary to each other. If I had not believed
Caius, I should never have put myself in their power. Who is
there who denies this ?
XXVI.
§ 64. Dum, Donee, Quoad, &c.
507. (a) Dum, donee, quoad (= until, tUX) take the indicative,
when they merely mark the time up to which the action or state
is to be continued.
508. (Jb) Dum, donee, quoad (== until, (t7Z)take the subjunctive,
when that up to which the action or state is to be continued, is to
be represented, not as a fact, but only as what may possibly occur ;
especially when it is itself the object pursued.
509. (c) Dum, whilst, takes a present indicative even when the
principal verb is in a pa^t tense.
This arose from an endeavour to represent duration in a vivid man-
ner. A past tense is occasionally found, e. g. ' qui dum verUua tetj non
vidit.' {Cic. ad. Att. i. 16.) * Qus divina res dum conficiebatur, que-
sivit,' &c, {Nep. Hann, ii.)
510. Dum, donee, quamdiu, quoad ** (= as long as) take the indi-
cative.
511. (a) Epaminondas ferrum in corpore retinuit, quoad renun-
Hatum est vicisse Boeotlos, Epaminondas retained
« In the sense of 'iohUst,* * as long aa^* doTue always denotes a space of time
carried on to such a termination t dum denotes this, but more with reference to
the space itself^ than to its termination. Quoad marks the continuance of the
time quite up to the point mentioned : it relate* to a demonstrative expressed or
understood in the principal clause. When the statement introduced by loAiM
is the cause or occasion of what follows, dum should be used.
182 DUM, DdNEC, QUOAD, &c. [§ 64. 512-514«
the syear in his body, till it was reported to him thai
the Boeotians had conquered,
(b) Differant, donee defervescat ira, Let them put off (the
purpose of taking revenge) till their anger cools.
(c) Dum Romani ea parant . . . jam Saguntum oppugna^
hatur^ Whilst the Romans were making these prepa^
rations^ Saguntum was already besieged.
512. Vocabulary 70.
After, postquam; sometimea poBteaqnam.
Before, antequam
. ^ ut primum ; quum primum ; simul ac,
C or atque : (with indie.)
When =r as soon as, ubi ; ut ; (with indie,)
(Adverbs of place with genit.)
Where in the world are you? ubi terrarum esl
Where in the world are we 7 ubi gentium sumus 1
To such a height of insolence, eo insolentise.
To what a degree of madness, quo amentis.
r quoad ejus facere possum (where the
As far as I can, 5 genit, *ejus* relates to the preceding
V proposition).
As far as can be done ; as for as ) ^^^^^^j ^j^g gg^j ^^^^^
possible. )
_ ^ ( obviam (with the dot : obviam, from ob,
To meet, ) • x
i via).
To march against the enemy, obviam ire hostibus.
( prttpius (with dot. or aee. (see 211) So
nearer. i , ^
C proxime).
(Adverbs of quantity with genit.)
f sat, or satis/ of what is realty enough ;
aiFatim of what a given person thinks
or feels enough. Affatim = ad fatim,
* to satiety ;' fatls an old substantive
from the same root as fotisco, fiitigo,
and fastidium. (D.)
Abundantly, abunde.
Abundance of timber, abunde materiae.
513. {ETig.) In addition to (hxa, he was blind.
\ljaJt.) There was added to this, that he was blind (Hue acceddxUj ut
caecus easet. With a prea. tense, accedit).
514. t^ With the adverbs meaning * aa aoon aa^ the English yZupw/*^ should
be translated by the perfecL In thia sense, postquam * after ' is usually
Enough,
▼£bt before polysyllables, M<w before dissyllables. {Bavmgarten Crtuiutad
Sueton.)
§ 65. 515, 516.] quoD. 183
Allowed by the perfect indicative. (See note", page 114.) When the
pluperf. is used, the succeeding action is generally not represented as
JoUowing the other immediatdy : e. g. P, Africanua, poateaquambia
consul et censor fu erat, L. CoUam in judicium vocavU (Cic. Div. in
CsBC. 21) : this however is not always .the case : e. g. Nep. Lysand. 4
{end) ipoatq uamdesiUsrebus — dixeraty — librum—traiUdit. When
continued states or repeated actions are described, the principal verb
being in the imperfedf the imp. or pluperf . is used. * Simulac se re-
miserat .... reperiebcUur.* {Nep. Alcib, 1.) (Z.)
»
Exercise 75.
[How are questions of appeal to be translated in direct narration 7 427, c]
515. As long as he was in the city, I opposed his designs.
Men, whilst they teach, learn. Who can deny that men learn
whilst they teach ? As soon as the business is finished,'^ I shall
wait upon Caius. As soon as the business was finished satisfac-
iorily, he waited upon Caius. Wait till Caius returns.*® Let me
know where in the world you are. Men have now arrived
(impers, pass,) at such a height of madness, that p whilst all men
consult their oton interests, no man provides for the interests of his
country. It is the part of a wise man, as long as he lives, to
prefer virtue to all things. In addition to this, he was lame of one
leg. How few are there who provide-for-the-interests of their
country ! He persuaded the Athenians to march against the
enemy. Wait at Rome till you recover. The business is too
difficult to he finished by any body. It is not every body who can
finish such'"> a business in a few days. We learn many things
whilst we are playing. Have we {then) need of some Greek master
to teach us^^^ to play upon the lyre ? Let us neither ask what is
disgraceful, nor do it p when we are asked.
XXVII.
§ 65. Quod.
516. * Thai ' is expressed by * quod, when it introduces the
ground of a former statement, or the explanaJtion of a term in a
former proposition ; especially when it refers to a demonstrative
pronoun or adverb expressed or implied.
^ Show the an^lnguiby of this sentence by translating it in two ways.
184 QUOD. [§65. 517--521.
Such pronouns and adverbs are id^ hoc, iUud: do, idco, idcireOf prop-
terea, inierea, UOy tarn, He, 4^,
517. Verbs of the afTections (rejoice, grieve, wonder, &c.,) ate
followed by quod, or by the accusative with the infinitive.*
518. Quod takes the indicative, except when it introduces the
ground of another person^s judgment or conduct ; when it takes
the subjunctive (by 461).
Of course it must be followed by the subjunctive in oblique narrution :
and it must be remembered that when an occ. with infin. follows a verb
of eaymgy &c., the narration w oblique.
519. The ground of an accusation is, of course, in the sub.
junctive (by 461); so also the reason for which another person
praises or blames any body.
520. ' Quod ' with a verb is often the proper way of translating the parti-
cipial aubstantive under the government of a preposition.
(1) {Eng.) He accused him qf hamng betrayed the king.
( Lot. ) He accused him, (hat he had betrayed the king (quod with
avhj).
(2) {Eng.) His having spared the conquered, is a great thing.
( Liot. ) That he spared the conquered, is a great thing.
(or) That (or, (his) that he spared the conquered, is a great
thing. 3^
(3) {Eng,) He praised (or blamed) him,^r having done this.
( Lot. ) He praised (or blamed) him, Viat he had done this.
{Qwod with subj. : the indicative would intimate that the narrator
believed him to have actually done it.)
(4) {Eng.) Many persons admire poems without understanding them.
( Lai. ) Many persons admire poems, nor understand them.
(neque intelligunt.)
(5) (Eng.) Toil cannot be ruined inihout ruining others.
( Lai. ) Tou cannot be ruined so as not to ruin others.
{ut non » with subj.)
521. Vocabulary 71.
To be praised; grieve for, j ^"^^ff .^v^"' ^""^^^ ^"^^ "^ ''" "**•
C with de),
X Quodf introducing the statement as ufactf is naturally better suited to the
past than to the present. * Ghiudeo quod ocripsisti ' is better than ' te scripsisse,*
(Z.) With verbs that express an emotion or feeling {gaudeOy doleoy miror)^ the
aec. with inf. is the more common : with those that express the man^esttUion
of an emotion or feeling {laudo, reprehendOf accuso^ misereoTy graiias ago, grat"
tdew, cansoUir)y quod is preferred. (Z., 8th ed.)
y Magnum est Aoc, qux^ victor victis pepercit.
> Or ' qvxn* if the sentence is of a negative character.
* IMert is iofed pain ox sorrow ; magrere is to show it by outward signs that
§ 65. 522.] QUOD. 185
Grieve ; grieve for, mcerSre, moBstus (with wk. or aU.).
To mourn ; bewail, lugere, lux, luct.
To be glad, Istari, Istatus.
To rejoice, gauddre,b givisufl sum.
Exceedingly, vehementer.
To recruit oneself, ae ref ic6re.
(The Preposition db.)
Db, coTicemingf about; dovm from; from (Cicero has, audite de ali«
quo : so Smere, conducere de allquo) : of, with partitives : by or accord-
ing to, of advice (de consilio meo) ; with words of time ; Ac,
In the middle of the night, medi& de nocte.
By night, de nocte.
Late at night, multi de nocte.
On purpose, de industriH.
To know a man by fieice, de facie nosse.
Unexpectedly, de improviso.
Exercise 76.
[In sentences dependent on an infin., what tenses are sometimes found instead
of the imperf and pluperf. subj.l 469, d.]
522. Knaw that I do not know the man even by face. I am
exceedingly glad that you have finished the business to your
satisfaction. I rejoice that you have obtained a triumph for a
victory over the Gauls, 1 shall wait at Rome till I recruit myself.
He answered that he was going to remain at Rome till he had
recruited himself. I will not leave Rome before I have recruited
myself Caius praises the greatest poets witJumt understanding
them. I had rather be a good man without seeming (one), than
seem one without being (so) [Translate with tt<]. Would you
prefer being wise without seeming (so), or seeming wise without
being so ? I did not fear that any one would grieve for the death
of abandoned citizens. No one ever grieved more for the death
are invohmtary^ arising from an irresistible feeling (and thus mcBrere and
mceror rise above dolere and ddor) ; lugere is to show it by conventional signs ;
to mourn. (D.)
b Gaudere is to feel joy j ketari is to aAotr it by joyful looks, Ac. (D.) Doder-
lein thinks Cicero mistaken when he makes Uetari express an exuUing, triumph'
ant joy, gaudere a more temperate delight. But could Cicero be mistaken on
such a point, involving no principle of etymology, but only a correct perception of
the relative force of two words in common use 7 At all events, according to
Doderlein's own explanation, Icetari, expressing the manifestation of joy in con-
sequence of an irresisHbUfeeling, might be expected to rise above gaudere, just
OS mcBrere above dolere.
186 THE ROMAN CALEMDAB. [§ 66. 523-528.
of his only son, than he grieved for that of his father. Why
should V now bewail the life of men ? This being the case, what
reason have we*'* for bewailing the death of abandoned citizens?
How few are there^ who would bewail the death of Caius ?
They p set upon the enemy unexpectedly, and put them to flight.
He did it in such a manner {itd) that it seemed to be done on
purpose.
XXVIII.
§ 66. The Roman Calendar.
523. The Roman months were of the same number of days as
the English months, but were differently divided.
524. The first day of the month was called the Kalends (Ka-
lendae) : the Nones (Nonse) fell on the fifth or seventh : the Ides
(Idus, uum, f ) were always eight days after the Nones, that is,
on the thirteenth or fifteenth,
525. In March, July, October, May,
The Nones were on the seventh day.
(And therefore the Jdes on the fifteenth.)
526. Days between the Kalends and the Nones were reckoned
by their distance from the Nones : those between the Nones
and the Ides by their distance from the Ides : those after the
Ides by their distance from the Kalends of the following month.
Hence a day after the fifteenth of Mayy would be euch a day before
the Kalends of June,
527. Suppose we take the third of March; this is a day before the Nones of
March, which happens on the seventh. Now 7 — 3 ^ 4 : but the Ro-
mans reckoned both days tn, so that they woiidd Call the third of March
not tfu fourth^ but the Jlfth day before the Nones.
528. To suit this Roman way of reckoning, we must subtract
the given day from the number of the day on which the Nones or
Ides fall increased by one. If the day be one before the Kalends,
we must subtract from the last day of the month increased by two.
If the remainder be two, the day will be pridie ; because the day
the Romans would call the second day before, was ' the day be-
fore,' as we speak.
§66. 529-531.] the boman calendar. 187
529. Thus take the 3rd, 9th, 23rd of June :
(1) In June the Nones are on the fifth : therefore three must be sub-
tracted from (5 i- \ =) six; and the remainder being 3, the day is
* the third day before the Nones of June.*
(2) In June the Nones being on the fifth, the Ides are on the thirteenth^
and the subtraction must be from fourteen. Hence subtract 9 from
14 : the remainder being 6, the day is the fifth day before the Ides of
June.
(3) Since June has ^irty days, we must subtract from thirty-two.
Hence subatract 23 from 32 ; the remainder being 9, the day is the
ninth day before the Kalends of July,
OCT (The adjective forms are used with the months,* and Idus
is fern.)
530. To express when ?
<0n the third before the Kalends of March* is by rule *die feWioante
Kalendas Martias,' which was shortened by the omission of die and
ante into ' teriio Kalendas Martias ' or ' iii. Kal. Mart.*
But another form is used (almost exclusively) by Cicero and
Ldvy t this form is ' amie-dieftn tertium Kalendas Martias * shortened
into ' a. d. iii. Kal, Mari,^ a form which cannot be explained gram'
matically.
This ante-diem came to be treated as an indeclinable substantive, and
the prepositions ad, tn, ejr, were prefixed to it, asto other substantives
of time.
631. [Whenl an what day?]
Natus est Augustus ix. Kalendas Octohres, Augustus
was horn on the twenty-third of September (32 —
9=23.)
Claudius natus est Kalendis Augustis, Claudius was
horn on the first of August.
Claudius ohiit (or excessit) iii. Idus Octohres, Claudius
died on the thirteenth of October (16 — 3=13.)
Meministine me ante diem (a. d.)xii. Kalendas Novem-
hres dicere in Scnatu ? Do you remember that I spoke
in the Senate on the 2Ut of October ? (33 — 12=21.)
[Against or by such a day : for such a day.]
Consul comitia in ante diem tertium Nonas Sextihs
e These forms are, Januarius, Februarius, Martius, Aprilis, Mains, Junius,
QuintiUs (or Julius), Sextilis (or Augustus), Septem-, Octo-, Novem-, Decem-
bris.
188 THB ROMAN CALENDAS. [§ 66. 53^-535.
( =3 Augustus**) edixit, The Constd fixed the elections
hy an edict for the third of August (6 — 3=3.)
In ante dies octavum et sepUmum Kalendas Octohres
comitiis dicta dies, . The time of the elections is fixed
for the twentyfourih and twenty fifth of September
(32—8=24).
Capuam venire jussi sumus ad Nonas FebruariaSf
We are ordered to come to Capua by the fifth of
February.
532. VOCABULAKY 72.
C comitia, Onim (properly,' the assembling
Elections, i of the people ' for the purpose of elect-
{ ing the consuls, <&c. <&c.).
To my election \ ^^ ™®* comitia (i. e. to the meeting at
c which I am to be elected or rejected).
To suffer, sinSre,* siv, sit; pSti, ior, passus.
To lose flesh, corpus amittSre.
To stay (in a place), commorari.
To compel, cogSre, co€g, coact.
The day before the Ides, prldie Idus : or pridie Iduum.
To fix by edict, edicere (with ace.).
It is worth while, operas pretium est.
533. (a) (Eng.) Instead of readings he is at play.
{LaL) He is at play, whereoM he ought to read (quum debeai),
(b) {Eng.) Instead of growing rich, he is growing poor.
{Lai.) He is growing poor, whereas he might grow rich (quum posset).
634. (c) {Eng.) Far from thinking this, I hold, &c.
{Lai.) It is so far off thai I should think this, that I hold, &c. (tan-
tum abest ut — ut,« Ac.)
Exercise 77.
535. Tiberius died on the sixteenth of March. Nero was bom
d The months of July and August were called QuintiUs, Sextilis respectively,
( = the Jtfth and sixth month, reckoning from March, the old beginning of the
V year,) till those names were exchanged for Julius and Augusttis in honour of the
"^'first two CsBsars.
♦ Sinere is properly * to let go,* * not to stop,* pati is, * not to prohibit :* sinere has
for its immediate object the person acting, pati the action itself: sinere is com-
mmUy, though not exclusively, followed by ut with the subj. : pati by the ace.
with infn. (D.)
" Tantum abest ut nostra miremur, ut . . . . nobis ipse non satisfaciat Demos-
thenes. Sometimes the second ut is omitted, the clause having vix or etiam :
'tantum abfuit ut inflammares nostros animos : somnum vix tenebamus.'
(Cic. Brut. 80.)
S'
§ 67. 536-539.] connection op propositions, &c. 189
on, the fifteenth of December. Caius was born on the fifteenth
of October. Balbus died on the twelfth of August. Vitellius
was born on the 24th of September ; or, as some (say), on the
seventh of September, The Consul has fixed (by edict) the elec-
tions for the 21st of July. I believe that the elections will be
fixed for the ninth of April. Say that I shall not be angry with
him, if he does not come"^ to my election. I am compelled to
stay here till I recruit myself: for I have lost both flesh and
strength. There are some who think that the elections will be
fixed for the ninth and tenth of July. Instead of being with me,
he is at his own house. Instead of being very rich (as he might
have been), he is very poor. Instead of applying vigorously to
the affair, he is gone into the country. I am so far from praising,
that I can scarcely restrain myself from calling you a betrayer
of your country. I am so far from believing any body (no mat-
ter who he may be), that I scarcely believe you. I was so far
from being ill spoken of, that all men praised me. There were
some who laughed. >- 1
XXIX.
§ 67. Connection of Propositions hy the Relative.
Imperative form^,
536. Any relative pronoun or adverb may be used for the cor-
responding demonstrative with tlie conjunction and (and some-
times, hut, for, therefore, &c.)
537. When in English such a clause as * they say,' * as — says,'
&c., is inserted parenthetically in a relative sentence, the verb of
this clause should generally be made the principal verb of the
relative clause in Latin, the other verb being put in the infini-
live.
538. When in English the relative pronoun is separated from
its verb by another clause, which contains a demonstrative pro-
noun, the relative should be expressed in tfiat clause in Latin, and
the demonstrative be expressed or understood in the other.
539. The imperative may be expressed by several circumlo-
cutions :
190 CONNECTION OF PROPOSITIONS f § 67. 540-542.
(1) The imperat. of command by cura tU (take care, to),
fac ut {prfac only) with sulj,
(2) The imperat. of prohibition by cave with suhj.
(governed by ut omitted), or noli with infinJ
640. (a) (Eng.) Two and two make four : and if thU is granted, &c.
(Z«a/.) Two and two make four : if w/i.ic/i is granted, &c.
{b) (Eng.) Caius, who, they say^ was killed at Lugdunum.
{Lot.) Caius, whom they report to hove been killed, &c, \
(c) {Eng.) Crassus, who, as Lucilius tells us, never laughed but once. I
{Lot.) Crassus, whom Lucilius reports to have never laughed but
once.
(d) (Eng.) Narratives, by which^ when we read them^ we are affected.
{Lot ) Narratives, which when we read, we are affected.
(e) {Eng.) Success with which^ if it should fall to our lot, we should be
dissatisfied.
(Lot.) Success, if which^ should fall to our lot, we should be dis-
satisfied.
if) {Eng.) I did this ; and if you had not thwarted me, &c.
{Lai) I did this; whom if you had not thwarted, &c,
541. [C. XXXV.] i:^ ' TFi/i' and 'vwdd^* * will not * and 'woiddnot* are often
principal verbs, to be translated by vdte and ndle respectively.
They are to be translated when for
willy tDouldf we may substitute
18 (are, &c.) tnllingf w<i8 (were, &c.) ipilling.
542. Vocabulary 73.
(Phrases with b, ex ; pra, pbo, is.)
To have a pain in my feet, ex pedibus laborare, or dolSre.
To cook with water, ex aqui cbqugre ; cox, coct.
From a wall, ex muro.
Opposite, over-against, e, not ex, regione.*
To be tired with a journey, e vi& languere.
To live according to nature, e natura ylvSre.
From the heart, ex animo (in sincerity).
It is for my interest, e re meft est.h
(To place) on a table, hi mensS.
For = owing to, especlaUy of ob- ) p^ ^„n^,M.).
siacies, J
In comparison with him, prse illo.
Safe, salvus, a, um ; incolumis, is, e.i
f Cura vt quam primum veniaa. Fac animo forti, magnoque sis. Cave
putes, or noli putare.— Such forms in English are, ' take care to,' ' he sure you^*
* mind you,* <&c.
t In Latin, the relative must stand before si.
* Another noun will, of course, follow regione in the gen.
fa So, e republics est.
1 A person is tutus when he is in safety ; securus when he beUevea himself to
§ 67. 543. BY THE RELATIVE. 101
Pro virili parte, according to one's duty or pow^r as an indiTidual (iif.t
* with all one's might') ; as fur as an individual can.
Pro re nat^ (according to the thing that has arisen) ^ according to
ctrcumstancea.
Pro eo ac mereoTy according to my deserts.
Exercise 78.
543. I for my part wished this: and if Pompejus had not
envied me, the republic would now be safe. Philosophy teaches
that the world, moves ; and if iJus be true, we also must neces-
sarily move. Who can deny that this is for my interest ? The
gods will requite me according to my deserts. Is it not certain,
that the gods will requite you according to yaur deserts ? I am
sorry that you have a pain in your head. If you had done this,
I should have praised you from my heart. You will not be able
to see the sun for the multitude of our javelins. Caius, being
tired of his journey, was killed by his slave. They answered
that they would receive us. Did he not answer that he would
not receive us? Do not think that the soul is mortal. Take care
to finish the business to my satisfaction. Do not think that every
man can command himself. Be sure to come to my assistance
as soon as possible. Who will deny that these things are for the
interests of the republic ? I cannot speak for sorrow. Be sure
not to impute this to me as a fault. Be sure not to hurry. Be
sure not to believe that it is necessary to make haste ; for, if you
believe this, it is all over with us. The moon is eclipsed, when
it is opposite to the sun. May I not determine what should be
done according to circumstances ? It is the part of a good citizen
to defend the republic as far as an individual can. Benefits, for
which, if you confer them up#n me, I will prove myself grateful
(memor). You may eat the food p which is placed on the table.
He says that he will not eat the cheese p which is placed on the
be 80, and is without care (se-cunis) or anxiety on the subject. Hence ' Ne sit
securusy qui non est tidiis ab hoste.' Of aalvusy sospes^ incolumiSf — salvua says
the least (as it properly relates only to {existence); sospes more, as it points to
the protection of a higher power ; incolumis the most of all, as it excludes not
only armikUaiionf but even the supposition of any injury or attack.
192 ROMAN WAY OF RECKONING MONEY. [§ 68. 544-54
table. I shall do what appears®^ best to be done according to
circumstances. There were some who could not speak for
sorrow.
XXX.
§ 68. On the Roman way of reckoning money.
544. The Romans reckoned their money by sesterces : and by,
nummus, when it means a coin, sestertius is always meant.
d.q.
645. A sestertius (=: 1 3| or 3^ cents) was not quite equal to twopence
English money.
A sestertiurh = a thousand sestertii : it was the name of a«u7n, not
of a coin.
546. Sestertii and sestertia are used quite regularly with nu-
meral adjectives : but sestertium in the singular is used in a very
peculiar way with numeral adverbs.
547. (Kr With numeral adverbs sestertium means so many
* hundred thousand sesterces,^
Hence Sestertium semel * = < a hundred thousand sesterces.'
Sestertium decies = ten ' hundred thousand sesterces * = a
million sesterces.
Sestertium vioes = 20 ' hundred thousand sesterces ' = two
million sesterces. Ac &c.
Obs. With numeral adverbs bdow *ten times^^ so msxij hundred thou-
sand sesterces are meant.
With numeral adverbs above and multiples of ' ten times,' throw away
the cipher from the units' place, and you have the number of ' miliums
of sesterces.'
Thus, if * sestertium sexcenties ' were the sum ; throwing away
from the units' place of 600, we have ' 60 millions of sesterces* for the
sum.
£, s, d.
♦ A sestertium = 8 1 54 = $38 68.
Sestertium semel = 807 5 10 = $3873 60.
Sestertium decies^ centies^ milHeSj &c. (that is, the multiples of sem^ by lO) are
got approximately by this rule :— For every cipher in the proposed multiple add
to the right hand of 807 one figure taken (successively) from the left hand of the
series 291666 continued ad inftnitum. Thus to get sestertium miUies^ since 1000
has 3 ciphers, I must add 3 figures (291) taken from the left hand of the given
series to the right hand of 807. Hence miUies sestertium = 807291 = nearly
#4,000,000 in whoU numbers.
§68. 548-512.] eoman way of reckoning money. 198
With intermediate numerals, the sum is easily obtained by these
rules : Sestertium ter vicies = ' 2 million, 3 hundred thousand sea-
tercts.*
548. In this construction sestertium is declined :
Sestertium vicies, two million sesterces.
Sestertii vicies, of two million sesterces, &c.
^9. In turning the number of sesterces into Latin, remember that to the
numeral before * miUiona * I must add a cipher in the urUts^ place (in
other words, multiply it by 10) to get the numeral adverb, that is to go
with testertium. Thus in * 2 million sesterces,' by adding a cipher in
the units' place to 2, I get 20, and vicies is the adverb required.
650. (a) Sex millibus sedes conduxit, He hired a house for six
thousand (sesterces).
(J) Sex sestertia persolvit, He paid six thousand sesterces,
(c) In sesterUo vicies (splendide se gerens), On a fortune
of two million sesterces.
551. VOCABULAEY 74.
Inheritance, hsreditas, atis, f.
To keep up a certain state, splendide se gerCre ; gess, gest.
iliberHnus, i, m. (but if spoken in rtfer^
ence to his master, Jibertus. Thus
Brutus's Uberttts ia one <f the doM
libertini).
foriundus: — ^nati CarthagYne, sed ori.
I undi ab Syracusis ; * born at Carthage,
Descended from, < but of Syracusan extraction ;' or * de-
scended from a family that had for-
merly lived at Syracuse.'
Meanly, sordide.
Exercise 79.
552. He kept up a certain state with a fortune of three million
sesterces. With a fortune of two millions of sesterces he kept
up more state than Caius,> who had received 10 millions from his
father. Caius, the freedman of Brutus, left more than^ 15 thou-
sand sesterces. That you, with a fortune of 10 millions, should
live so meanly ! Caius, who was of Syracusan extraction, sent
Brutus two hundred thousand sesterces as a present. On the
k With amplius, jilus, minus, &c. qaam is often omitted ; the noun standing
in the case it would have stood in, if quam had been expressed. Sam^met
however the abUU, follows these adverbs.
9
194
ROMAN WAY OF RECKONING MONEY. [§ 69. 553-555.
23rd of November, Balbus sent me as a present twenty thousand
sesterces. He gave them three thousand sesterces a-piece. From
this inheritance Atticus received about ten million sesterces.
§69.
663.
On the division of the As : the method of reckoning fraC'
turns, interest, &c.
As
Deunx
Dextans
Dodransi
Bes (bessis)
Septunx I o
Semis (semissls) (.i^7 = ) 1
13 g2
»1
(A-=) *
ft
y of an Aa,
Quincunx
Triens
Quadrans
Sextans
Uncia
IT
(iS=) t
(A=) t
h
554. These words were used to express the fracOjons set down
opposite to their names.
555. The same division was used in reckoning the interest of
money, which was due monthly. Asses usura = one As per
month for the use of a hundred. This was also called centesinuB
usurse, because in 100 months a sum equal to the whole principal
would have been paid.
Asses or centesimsB usurse = 12 per cent.
Deunces
r ^^
Dextantes
10
Dodrantes
9
Besses
8
Septunces
7
Semisses
* usursB *
6
Qulncunces
6
Trientes
4
Ctuadrantes
3
Sextantes
2
UncisB
1
BiruB centesimsB = 24 per cent, and so on.
1 Podrans = de-quadrans.
§69.556,557.] Roman way of reckoning money. 195
556. (a) Statura ejus quinque pedum et dodrantis fuit, His
height was jive feet and three-fourths {jive feet
nine).
(Bum) hseredem fecit ex dodrante. He left him heir
to three- fourths of his estate.
(li) Assibus usufis grand em pecuniam collocavit, He
invested a large sum of money at 1^ per cent.
Exercise 80.
557. Caius, the freedman of Balbus, has been made heir to
one half of his estate. He has left one Caius, of Carthagini^in
extraction, the heir to seven-twelfths of his estate ; from which
inheritance he will receive, I think, about six hundred thousand
sesterces. The freedman of Brutus, who died at Rome on the
third of August, has left nearly fifteen million sesterces ; and it
is thought that Caius has been left heir to half his estate. He
is said to have lodged a large sum of money in the hands of ■■
Balbus at 9 per cent.
n Apud aliquem coUocare.
TABLES FOR REFERENCE.
TABLE I.— GENDERS.
Oba.—Mas. exceptions are in capitals ;fem. in the common type ; runj. in Ualica.
(Third Declension.)
Mas, terminations.
ER, OB, OS,
ES increasing^
o, when not ao, go, io.
Principal Exceptions.
er) cadlkver
iter
papdver
tuber
or) arbor
teqwoT
marmor
cor
es) compes
merces
merges
quies
09) cos
dos
OS fossis)
OS (oris)
fckaos
fepos
fmelos
o) caro
techo ^
vher
ver
verher
reqmes
seges
teges
cbs
First Decl. Fern,
except names of men.
Sec. Decl. (us, eb) §
Mas. — except
alvuB
domus
humus
vannus
pdagvjB
virus
vtUgus (also m.)
Fern, terminations.
do, po, io,*
as, IS, aus,
es not increasing
s impure
us in hypermon.
Principal Exceptions.
do { °*^^
~^J CABDO
^. S LIGO
*^UABGO(f)t
is) AMNIS LAPIS
ANGUIs(f ) MENSIS
AXIS OBBIS
CAS8Is(i8) PANI8
COLLIS PI8CIS
CINIS POSTlS
CBINI8 PULVIS
ENSIS SANGUIS
FA8CIS TOBRIS
FINIS (f ) UNGUIS
FOLLIS VBCTIS
FUNIS VEBMIS
IGNIS
x) OAtlX
CODEX
COBTEX
QBEX
POLLEX
8ILEX (f )
tTHOBAX
VEBTEX
"' l^' \ acInXces.
BiDENS {hoe),
s im,- J MONs
pure\ pons
FONS
DENS RUDENS
tHYDROPS
as) AS ELEPHAS
tas {vasis)
fas
nefae
Neut. terminations*
c, a, t, «, Z, n,
ar^ ur, ti«,
US monosyll.
Principal Exceptions.
t) SAL
SOL
n) LIEN
REN
6PLEN
PECTEN
ur) FUB
FURFUR
TUBTUR
VULTUR
Us) pecus (udis)
LEPUS
V grtts (m)
^*'?7T"^8U8(m)
Fourth Decl. (us)
Mas. except
acus
idus (pi.)
manus
portions
tribus
Fifth Decl.
Fern, except
DIES (also Fern.
in sing,)
HERIDIES.
* Words in io that are not abstract nouns are mas. e. g. papilio, pugio^
BciPio, septentrio, stelliq, unio (pearl), with the numeral nouns ternio,
QUATEHNio, Ac. t Propcrfy Greek words.
T Those with (f), (m), are sometimes fem. and mas. respectively.
S Greek nowna in odus (exodus, methodus, 4'C.) with dialectus, dipthongua,
<f^. are £em.
FORMATION OF THE PERFECT AND SUPINE. 197
These rules depend on the t«nninations ; but some words haye a
particular gender from their meaning. ^•
A. The names of male persons and vdndsy are masculine.
B. The names of female peraonsy couniriesj iaUxnds^ towns^ plarUay and
trees y are fern,
(a) But of Uncnsy these are mas,
(1) Some in o (croto, hippo, nasbo, sulho, pbusXMo) : and
(2) AH plurals in t; veii, dxlphi.
These are neuter :
(1) All in um^ or plur. a ; (2) Those in e or vr of the third ; Pr<s-
neste, TVmr.
(&) Of trees and plaints ;
(1) Those in er (and many in us) of the second are mas. :
(2) Those in er, ur of the third are nevit. : acer, siler^ rdbur^ (fn:.
C. Several are common : comes^ conjuXj custos^ dux^ hospes^fwenisj parens,
. princepSf sacerdos^ c^c.
TABLE II.— Formation of the Perfect and Supine.
I. fi^The first syllable of dissyllable perfects and supines is Umgi if the next
syllable begins with a consonant.
(a) But seven perfects have «Aor/ penult: bibi, dedi, fidi, scidi, stffti, stiti, tfiU.
(b) Nine dissyllable supines have short penult : datum, citum,* Itum, litum,
quxtum, ratum, rQtum, satum, situm.
(c) Statum from sto is long, but from sisto short ; and the compounds of sto
that niake stitum have i : as prcestxtunij from prcestare. Though nosco has notum,
its compounds that have Uum have I (cognosco, cognXtum).
N. B. Verbs in italics have no supine,
II. First Conjugation [properly a contracted conjugation ; ama-Of amo"].
(1) Most verbs of this conjugation form roots of perfect and supine, by
adding v, ty respectively to the proper root.
[amo (ama-o) ; amav-i ; ama^-um.]
(2) Others change a into u; and form the sup. in Xtum, after rejecting a.
^Gr6po, crSpui, crepitum. So ciibo, dtfmo, frico (also fricatum), mico,
sbno, tttno, vsto, sSco (sectum)— jttvo, juvi, jutum 1 jfivStum'?
(3) Others form perf. in both of these ways.
Discr^po, discrep&vi and discrepui, discrepatum (?). So incrSpo (ui, itum
prtferred) ; the compounds of neco^ and the obsolete plico (fold).
{But suppHco, duplico, multipli6o, (mZy avl, atum : ezplico, explain,
reg. ; unfoldj ui, itum.)
(4) Irregular (with r&luplication).
Do, dSdi, datum {wi^ a in dare, dabo, dabam, &c.) ; sto, steti, stat^im : but
stare, &c.
* From eieo, to excite. Of the compounds several have drdf cUuMf from tfa«
obsol. do.
198 FORMATION OF THE
III. Second Conjugation. «
Properly a contracted conjugation, but with the vowels open in the first
pers. singular of the present tense. (Mone-o ; mone-is s= monSs, Ac.)
(1) Most reject e, and form perfect and supine in ui, Jtian,
(Mon-eo, mon-tit,.mon-{/um.)
(2) But some retain e, and add v, in the perf.^-eo, evi, Stum.
Deleo, delevi, delStum. Fleo, neo, and verbs formed from oleo* {make
to grow), pleo (JUl), and sueo {am accustomed).
(3) Others form perf. from root of present^ lengthening the voioel (if
short), when pres. ends in a single consonant.
Caveo, cavi, cautum : faveo.
Pttveo, fovi, fotum : mbveo, voveo : pHveo, fsrveo (and ferbui) ; Con-
niveo, nivi and nixi.
Prandeo (pransum), video (visum), sedeo (sessum), strideo.h
(4) Others form perf. in si.
(•) p sounds. {Any p^ sound with s^ps; but bs sometimes =: ss.)
Jubeo, jussi, jussum ; sorbeo, sorpsi, sorptum.
(/?) k sounds. (The k sound, if impure^ is thrown away before s. Any
k sound with « = or : gu is to be treated as a A: sound.)
Mulceo, mulsi, mulsum. Algeo, indulgeo (indultum), ftUgeo, mulgeo,
tergeo, turgeo, urgeo, torqueo (tortum).
Augeo, auxi, auctum : luceOffrigeOf lugeo.
(y) t sounds. (/ sound thrown away before «.)
Ardeo, arsl, arsum ; rideo^ suadeo.
(3) Liquid verbs, (r thrown away before «.)
Maneo, mansi, mansum : heereo.
(c) With reduplication, {t sound thrown away before s.)
Mordeo, mbmordi, morsum : pendeo, spondeo, tondeo.
(^) Neuter passives : audeo, ausus sum ; gaudeo, gavisus sum ; soleo,
solitus sum.
(i}) The following have perf. in ui, but do not form their supines in itum,
Doceo, doctum ; teneo, tentum ; misoeo, mixtum and mistum ; torreo,
tostum ; censeo, censum ; recenseo, recensum and recensltum.
IV. Third Conjugation.
(1) Perfect in i, added to root of present,
(o) Acuo, acui, acCrtum : arguo, congruo^ imbuo, induo, luo (luimrus),
metuo^ minuo, pZuo, ruo (riitum, ruitum), spuo, statuo, stemuoy suo,
tribuo. Volvo, volvi, volutum. So solvo.
(/?) t sound thrown away before s in sup.
Mando, mandi, mansum; pando (passum, pansum rare)y prehendo,
<^ Some of which have diesoo in pres. Aboleo, sup. aboUtum : adolesco,
aduUum.
b langueOf Umgui} Kqueo, liqui and licui.
smooth, mid. asp.
« Mutes with a p sound, p b (ph).
k c g (oh).
t t d (th).
FEKFECT AND SUPINE. 199
BCando ; and compounds of o^do (Art7u2Z<), fando {ihrust)^ in eenda,
fendo.
(y) Bibo (bibi, bibitum) ; cudo (cusum), cteg'd, lambo^ psaUot acdbo (scabi),
sidoy vello (vulsum : o^ vulsi), verro (versumd), verto (versum), vlao
(visum). y'
{(S) (Short vowel of root lengthened — ei changed into e in perf.)
Cap-io, cepi, captum : fsucio, jScio, ago, edo (esum), emo (emptum), iSgo
(lectum), fodio (fossum), fugio (fugitum).
(<) (n or m, by which the present has been lengthened from a simpUr
rootf rejected.)
(retaining aJuyrt vowel) findo (fid), f Tdi, fissum : scindo (scxd).
(lengthening the vowel : a changed into e.)
Frango, frag, fregi (fractum) ; fundo, fud (f usum) ; linquo, liqo, lie
(llqui, lictum) ; rumpo, rup (ruptum) ; vinco, vie (victum).
Percello, percdli, perculstmi ; sisto, stiti, stitum.
(^) With reduplication.
Cado, cScidi, casum ; caedo, cScidi, caesum ; cano, cecini, cantum ; crSdo,
credidi, creditum ; pango (pag), pSplgi, pactum : parco, pSperci, par-
citumorparsum ; pario, pepSri, partum ; pello, pSpuli, pulsum ; pendo
pSpendi, pensum ; pungo, pupugi, punctum ; poscOf ptfposci ; tango
(tag), tetigi, tactum ; tendo, tStendi, tensum and tentum ; tundo
tutudi, tusum. So the compounds of do ; condo^ abdOj reddOj Ac.
amdfdi, condttumj &c.
(2) Perfect in at.
(17) p sounds, (f;^ Any p sound with a is pa ; with t, pt.)
Olubo, glupsi, gluptum : nubo, scribo, carpo, rSpo, scalpo, sculpo.
(6) k Aounds, Including those in \ qu^ and ct. {Any k sound with aisx;
with <, d.)
Cingo, cinxi, cinctum ; sugo, tSgo, fingo (fictum), tingo, ungo : ango
figo (fixum), jungo, lingo, mingo, mungo, ningo^ pingo (pictum),
plango, Btringo (strictimi), r6go, dlco, duco, coquo, triho," vSho. Add
compounds of stinguo ; exstinguo, restinguo.
Flecto, Hexi, flexum, nexo {also nexui), pecto.
(») Liquid Verbs (assuming a p before s)
Gomo, compsi, comptum ; demo, promo, sumo, contemno.
(«) t sounds. (/ sound thrown away before a ; vowel, if akort^ lengthened.)
Claudo, clausi, clausum ; divido, divlsi, divisum : laedo, ludo, plaudo,
rado, rodo, trudo : mitto (misi, missum). —CompoMnd* qf vado.
(X) k sounds, (the k sound thrown away.)
Spargo, sparsi, sparsum ; mergo, tergo.
(/<) t sounds, {da changed into aa ;) cgdo, cessi, cessum.
(jr) Liquid verbs, (r, m changed into a before *.)
Gr6ro, gessi, gestum : uro, prSmo (pressum)
(1) Ompounda of specio {behold) ending in spicio makeBpeJi, spectum.
d verri^veraum poetical. Z.
• h seems to have had originally a hard sound. Thus hiema for x^^F^*'* ^^
ha s^x {vehr»i =3 text).
200 FORMATION OF THE
Those in licio^roTTi lacio (dfUice) except elicio, mcJce lexi, lectum.
Diligo, dilexi, dilectum : intelligo, neghgo.
Col-,>e-, di-, se-, ligo, with perlego, praBltgo, haveperf. legi.
(3) Verbs with perf. in ui.
(o) Without change of root.
alo, alui, Slitum {and altum) : colo (cultum), consiilo (consultum),
molo ; occulo (occultum), ifdlOj nolo^ malo ; compounds of cdlo (rush ;
shoot forth) ; fremo, gemo, trgmo, vomo, gigno, (gen, gSnui, g8ni-
tum) ; rapio, rapui, raptum ; sSpiOy elicio, compescOf diepeacoy depso
{also depstum), pinso {also pinsi, pistum) ; aterto {also sterti). — Com-
pounds of sero {to connect)^ serui, sertum.
(ir) With change of root.
MS to, messui, messum; pono, pbsui, pUsTtum; cemo,f crevi, erS-
tum ; lino, levi (livi rare)^ litum ; sino, sivi, situm ; sperno, sprevi,
spretum; stemo, stravi, stratum; 86ro, sevi, sStum; tero, trivi,
tritum.
Cresco (ere), crevi, cretum ; nosco.
Pasco (pastum) ; quiesco, suesco.
(p) Verbs forming perf. in xi, as if they had roots ending in k sound or A.
Fluo, fluxi, fluxum ; struo, structum ; vivo (victum).
(4) Perfect in ivi.
{o) Peto> pSflvi, p^titum * ctlpio, arcesso, capesso, lacesso, incesso.
(5) Neuter Verb.
(r) Fido, f iaus sum (coniido, diffido).
Fero, tiili, latum.
Tollo, sustiHi, sublatum.
V. FouBTH Conjugation.
(1) Perfect in i.
(a) Venio, veni, ventnm; compSrio, comp8ri, compertum. /Sbreperio.
(2) Perfect in ui.
{/!) Salio, salui, saltum ; apSrio, bpSrio, Smicio (amicui ?).
(3) Perfect in si.
Farcio, farsi, fartum ; fulcio, haurio (hausi, haustom), raucio (rausum) ;
sarcio, sepio ; sancio, sanxi, sanctum ; vincio ; sentio, sens!, sensum.
VI. Deponents.
Second Conjugation. Fateor, fassus ; liceor, licitus ; m6reor, me-
riius: misSreor, miseritus, misertus; reor, rStus; tueor, tuitus;
vSreor, veritus.
Third Conjugation. Adipiscor, adeptus : amplector^ amplexus ; com-
plector, compiexus; divertor, diversus; {so praevertor, rSvertor;)
expergiscor, experrectus ; fruor, fruitus and fructus ; fungor, functus ;
grSdior, gressus: invShor, invectus; iraseor, iratus; labor, lapsus;
])$quor, l)$cutus ; mbrior, mortuus ; nanciscor, nactus ; nascor, natus :
t Properly, to separate. In the sense of to Me, it has neither perf. nor sap.
PERFECT AND SUPINE. ' 201
nltor, nisus, nixus; obliviscor, oblltus; paciscor, pactus; pascor,
pastus; pStior, passus; prttficiscor, profectus; quSror, questus*
sSquor, secutus : ulciscor, ultus ; tltor, usus.
Fourth Conjugation. Adsentior, adsensus: ezpSrior, expertUB;
metior, mensus ; oppCrior, oppertus ; ordior, orsus ; ^rior, ortus^
VII. (O* ^ ill verbs denotes the htginmng of aD action or state.)
Inchoaiivea in sco have no perfect, but that (in ui) of the root. This
would hardly be considered (heir perfect, did not some of those formed
from nouns take a perfect in ut, though no verb in eo occurs.
YIIl. In compound verbs (I) a, (s, of the root often become i, sometimes
e: (2) e of the root often becomes i: (3) the rMftfp/ico/um. ef the root is
^ dropt, except in prscurro and the compounds of yoaco and disco.
t T)ie^eB€7U follows the third ; but 2 sing. oriHa or orHrU,
9*
TABLE
OF
DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM,
^c.
English.
1. You and I, )
Balbus and I. )
2. Says that he has not*' sinned.
Says that he has neverj &c,
3. He promises to come.
He hopes to live.
He undertakes to do U.
He pretends to be mad (16).
4. To have a prosperous voyage.
6. To my, his, Ac. satisfaction : satis-
factorily; successfully.
6. To fight on horseback.
6*. It is a hreack of duty.
7. He sends the most faithful slave. he
has.
8. He was Oie first to do this, >
{Or) He was the first who did this, )
iSb, He was the only one who did It.
9. Stu^ is your temperance,
Or, WiUi your usual Xeav^nxice,
Latin.
( I and you,
2^1 and Balbus. \
Denies (negat) thatlid has sinned.
Denies that he has e^er, &c.
He promises that he will come {ace. with
inf.)
He hopes that he shall live {ace. with
inf.)
He undertakes that he ivill do it {ace,
with inf.)
He pretends that, he is mad {ace, with
in/:; pron. expressed).
To sail from ( = cuxording to) one's
thought or intention {ex sententid
namgare.)
Ex sententul.
To fight from {ex) a horse, b
It is against (contra) duty.
He sends the slave^^vAom he has the
most faithful.
He the first (person) did this (55).
He aUme did it {solus fecit),
( Which is your temperance.
I Of which temperance you are.
\ Por ( = in proportion to) your tem
I perance (56).
* Obs. Says not should not be translated by n«^o unless it is in answer to aA
actual or virtual question. When the not is closely connected with the following
▼erb, it should be translated by non.
b Ex equiSf if more persons than one are spoken of.
TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM.
203
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
45.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
English.
As far as I know.
It's all over with . . .
r To make the same boast.
1 To maJce the same promise.
j To makt many promises.
[ To utter many lalsehoods.
To take by storm.
That nothing . . .
That nobody . . .
That never ...
[This is only when * that ' intro-
duces a purpose.]
No food is so heavy as not to be di-
gested, <&c.
He is so foolish as to think, <&c.
She never saw him tnthout calling
him, <&c.
He could scarcely be restrained
from throvying, Ac.
I left nothing undone to appease
him.
I cannot but, <&c.
I vnll not object to your doing it.
It cannot be that the soul is not
immortal (89).
f Nothing psevents him from do-
ing it.
jSmo, nothing deters him from do-
ing it.
It was owing to you that I did not
succeed.
I
i
By sea and land.
J To be within a very little of . . .
( Ory But a little more and . . .
Not to be &r from.
I almost think,c ) «
I don't know whether, j * *
To take away any one's life.
The city qf Rome, the island of
Cyprus.
He did this as (or when) Consul.
J I may go.
2 I am permitted to go.
I ought to do it.
I ought to have done it.
Latin.
Which I may know (quod secum).
It is done concerning iactwm est de). . .
To boast the same thing (59).
To promise the same thing (69).
Togn,mise | „a„y ,hi^,.
To fghi a place out by force (per vim
ezpugnare).
I<est any thing {ne quid).
Lest any body (ne quis).
Lest ever {ne unquam).
No food is so heavy but (guin) it may
be digested^ &c.
So fboiish that he thinks (uO, 66, d.
She never saw him, but (qnin) ^e
called him, <&c.
He could scarcely be restrained but that
(quin) he should throw (88).
I left undone {prtBtermis^ nothing
thai I should not (quin) appease him.
I cannot do (any thing) but that (ya-
cere non possum, qmn)^ &c.
I will not object but that (reeusabo
quin) you should do it.
It cannot be (fert) but that (quirC^ the
soul is immortal.
Nothing prevents (dbstai) by vAidi he
should the less do it (^uomtnu^faciat).
Nothing deters him by which he should
/^^« do it (99).
It stood througn you by which I should
the less succeed (per ic stetit quomi'
nusj 4&C., 99).
By land and sea.
To be a very little distlBint but that . .
[minimum abesse (impers,) quin.J
Haud multum > -bpsse
Haud procul J ^^^^e.
Haud scio an ; nescio an, Ac.
To snatch away life to ( =: from) any
one (vitam ancui eripere. 132).
The city Rome ; the island Cyprus.
He Consul ( = being Codsul) did this.
( To me it-is-permitted (licet) to go
i (124).
It benoveth me (oportet me) to do it.
It behovethme (oportuit) to do it (126).
« ffaiud scio an, nescio an, dubito an, may be followed by the negatives, nemo,
nihil, nuUus, nunquam, or by the forms that follow negatives, quisqwmi, quie-
quam, vUus, vnquam. Haud scio an nemo approaches nearer to a denial than
haud scio an quisquam. (G.)— But Cicero and his contemporaries never omit
the negative. (Matthid, Hand, &c.)
204
TABLE OF
English.
29. I am at leisure to read.
30. I have need of food.
C making-haste.
ThereI.needofJ^««,-„.
I tion.
31. How many are there of you?
How many are there qftta?
Three hundred oftis are come.
Qf whom there are \ ^^^L ^„„^
•^ I very many.
Very many of which . . .
32. 8o7ne mock, o^rs approve.
33. One was a Greek ; ffu other a Ro-
man.
34. Such a lover of truth.
35. To take in good part.
36. He was condemned in hia ab-
sence.
37. To prefer a capital charge against >
Caius. 5
To hring an action against a )
man for bribery. )
To prefer a charge of immoral!*
ty against Caius.
To inform a man oi a plan.
38. Without any danger . . .
39. It is characteri^ic of . . .
It is incumbent on . . .
It ia for . . .
It demands, or requires^ firmness.
It showsj or betraysj weakness.
Any man may do it.
It is not every man who can, &c.
It is wise.
40. To reduce to subjection.
To bring under his dominion.
41. To be capitally condemned.
To be acquitted of a capital charge
42. Common to me and you.
43. To compare things together.
44. To threaten a man with death.
45. To prefer death to edavery.
There is
need of
(Opus est)
Latin.
There-is-leisure {vacat) to me to read
(154V
(1) There is to me a business with
food {prep, omitted).
(2) Food is a business to me.
C (the matter) being hasteru-
ed.
(the matter) being con-
suited.
(the matter) promptly
, done (177).
How many are ye ? {quot estis?)
How many are we 1 (quot sumus?)
We (being) three huncired are come.
(Trecenti venimus.)
Who are \ ^^ ^ „„
( very many.
Which very many (quae plurima) . . .
Others mock; others approve (alii —
alii).
The other was a Greek ; the other a
Roman (alter— alter).
So (adeo) loving of, Ac.
Boni consulere.t (See 185.*)
He being absent was condemned.
To make Caius an accused-person
(reus) of a capital matter (187).
To make a man an accused-person of
bribery (gen.) ; or, about bribery {de).
To maKe Caius an accused-person
(reus) about morals (de morihus:
187).
To make a man surer of a plan (certio-
rem facere).
Without (expers^ adj.) aU danger .
It is (a mark) of . . .
It is (the duty) of . . .
It is (the character, privilege, &c.) of. .
It is (a thing) of ( = for) firmness.
It is (a mArk) of v^eakness.
It is any man's (task) to do it.
It is not every man's (task) to do it
(non cujvsvis est), &c.
It IS (the conduct) of a wise man.
IIjT Words in brackets to be omitted
To make of his own dominion (siub
ditionis facere).
To be condemned qfthe head.
To be acquitted qfthe head
Common to me tuith you.
To compare things amongst (or be-
tween) themselves (inter se) 221 (c).
To threaten death to a man (222).
To reckon slavery after death (servitu-
tem moTtl posthabere, 227).
(or, as in Eng., with anteponere).
t JEqui boni facere : in bonam partem acdpere.
DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM.
205
English.
46. To surround the city with a wall.
To besprinkle a man with praises.
To put on a garment.
To take the enemy's camp, bag-
gage, &c.
To obstruct {or cut off) the ene-
my's flight.
To cut off the supplies of the
Gauls.
47. I have a book.
I have two books.
48. To come
To send
To set out
to the assistance of
Caesar.
49. To give as a present.
To impute as a fault.
'' 50. To be a reproachf or disgraceful.
To be very advantageous.
To be od;ou8 ; hateful.
Obs. 'jHoit- before the adj. must
be ' qiumtus ' in agreement with
subst.
[51. To throw himself at Geesar's feet.]
52. Caius would say . . .
Calus used to say . . .
53. I fear that he vnU come.
I fear that he teill not come.
54. The war against Pyrrhus.
Connection with Pompey.
Rfest^rom labours.
Wrongs done to Caius.
65. He did it thai he might the more
. easily escape.
56. To make Csesar retire.
67. It is becoming to (or iri) an orator
to be angry, &c.
fib, it is unbecoming to (or in) an
orator ...
58. This victory cost them many
wounds.
69. Hardly any body.
Latik.
To give-round (circumdSre) a wall to
the city [or as in Eng.].
To besprinkle {aspergere) praises to
man [or as in Eng.f
To clothe (induere) myself with a gar-
ment ; or to put-on {induere) a gar-
ment to myself.
To strip (exuere) the enemy of their
camp, baggage, &c. (abU 233.
To shut-up (intercliuUre) flight to the
enemy (233).
To shut-up {intercludere) the Gauls
from their supplies (abl. commeatu).
There is a book to me.
There are two books to me (238).
To come ) ._ «_ ^ . ^
To send ( *° Cmsarfor an assist-
To set out. S '*^ce(dai.).
(Auxilio venire, mittere, proficisci.)
To give /or a present (dono dare).
To furn 11 i>- ««'»'»(*>'.)•
(CulpSB, or vitio dare, or vertere.)
To be for a reproach (opprobrio esse).
To be for a great advantage (magnsB
utilitati esse).
To be for a hatred (odio esse).
(So impedimento, honori^ Ac, esse.)
Quanto odio est ! {how odious it is !)
[Se Caesari ad pedes prcjicere ; or lite-
rally.] See p. 89, note 1.
Dicebat.
I fear lest he come (ne veniat).
I fear that he come (ut veniat*).
The war of Pyrrhus ")
Connection q/* Pompey ( ^ ...
Rest of labours ( ^^^^v^-
Wrongs of Caius J
He did this, by which {quo) he might
more easily escape.
To make that Csesar should retire (fa-
cer e, or ejlcere ut^ Ac).
It become an orator to be angry, <ftc.
{orator em decet).
{Oratorem dedecet . . .) 259.
This victory stood d to them at many
wounds {abl.). 266.
[Compare the Eng. < this stood me in
a large sum.'-]
Almost nobody {neTno fvre) 249.
♦ Chy ne Don yeniat.
d This notion is probably that of a debt standing against a man in his credi-
tor's books.
206 TABLE OF
English. Latin.
60. Make a bad, &c. use of| &c. Uw bodlv (273^.
61. He deserves to be loved. He is a aeserying person, who should
be loved (dignus est qui ametur).
276.
62. To inflict punishment on a man. To affect a man with punishment (276)
(aliquem poen& afficere).
63. To gain a triumph for a victory To triumph concerning {de) the Gauls.
over the Grauls.
64. A blessing on > your Be thou increased in valour (macte
Good luck, or success to 5 valour. virhUe tato : voc. for nom, 280).
Go on in your valour I {Plur. macti eate .0
66. You are envied, spared, favoured, It ia envied (spared, favoured,an8wered,
answered, Ac. &c.) to you (290).
66. I don't know when the letter will I don't know when it will be {quando
be written. futurum sit) that (tt<) the letter be
written (290).
67. It aeemSf is acad, Ac. that Caius has Caixu aeevna^ ia aaidy <&c. to have reUred
retired. (nearly always).
68. We have walked, come, &c. It naa been walked, come, &c. (that is,
by U8 : ambulatum, ventum est).
[This is only an occajsiorud and poaaibU
construction.]
69. To have reigned above six years. To be reigning bis seventh year.
70. Before the Consulship of Caius. Before Caiua Consul (ante Caium con-
sulem).
71. He went to a achool at Naplea, He went to Naples to (vrep.) a school.
72. We should all praise virtue. Virtue is to-be-praiaed by all (laudan-
da).
A time to play. A time of playing.
Fit to carry burdens. Fit for burdens to be carried {oneribits
geatandia idoneus).
He is bom (or indined) to act. He is born (or inclined) for acting {ad
agendum).
Prepared to take up arma. Prepared for {ad) arma-to-be-taken-up.
73. Whilst they are drinking, playing. During drinking, playing, &c. {inter
Ac. bibendum, ludUnaum, &c.)
To be able to pay. To be for paying (solvendo esse).
To be equal to bearing the burden. To be for bearing the burden (oneri
ferendo esse).
Tb tend to the preservation of lib- To be of liberty to-be-preaerved {con-
erty. aervandce libertatia eaae).
74. I have to do another page. Another page is to-be-done.
I will have U done. I will cause it-to-be-done (curabo faci-
endum).
75. He gave them the country to dwell He gave them the country to be dwdi
in. in (habitandam). 354.
76. I go to conauU Apollo. I go intending-to-consuU (consulturua)
ApoUo (35^.
C Balbus, Lavmium beine left, Ac.
77. Balbus haoing l^ Lavinium, <ftc. < Balbus, when he had left Lavinium,
i Ac.
(Relicto Lavinio ; or quum reliquis-
set Lavinium : 363, a.)
78. From the foundation of Rome. From Romefounded (a Rom& condit&).
From the deatrwAion of Jerusalem. From Jerusalem destroyed (363).
The honour of having aaved the The honour of the aaved king {aervati
king (of the king* s preservation). regis decus) .
79. He does it without robbing others. He does it, not robbing others.
He ^oes away without your per- He goes away, you not perceiving U {te
cetving it. non sentiente).
DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM.
207
Ekolish.
They condemn him wWumJt hearing
him.
80. I have completed the work.
I see plainly through his design.
81. I heard YAisfsing.
I saw him walk,
82. Thai only.
And that too.
By a good man U ia tmte, but an
unlearned one.
Literature, and that too of no com-
mon kind.
83. A slave of mine,
84. He took away all my care.
85. That famous Medea.
86. Those whom we love we alao wish
happy.
87. Somethingor other obscure.
Some chance or other.
Somewhat disturbed.
88. Henry, Charles, and John.
89. Every opinion thatf &c.
Every man who.
90. On^Balbus.
91. One runs otM way, onot^ono^
tr.
Different men run different ways.
Some run one way, others another.
92. The htst men alwaiysy &c.
Hidden snares are alwayg, Ac.
All the wisest men.
93. These are hard to aivoid. 1
There ia difficulty in avoiding f
these. J
He has the greateat difficulty in aua-
jMctingi •
94. He is too proud to steal.
96. I aimed HugrtaUai forces J could.
Latin.
They condemn him unheard {vunuU-
tum).
I have the work completed {opua abao-
httwn habeo), 364.
I have his desien aeen through (per-
spectum habeo). 364.
I heard him singing.
I saw him toaUnng (361).
That at length (is demum).
Et ia^ taque, uiemque.
By a good man that indeed, but an un-
learned oue (a bono illoauidem viro,
sed — , or sed tamen, 383).
Literature, nor that of-a-common-kind
(nee eee vulgares).
v' My slave :' or * a certain one out of
(quidam ex) my slaves.'
He took Awayfrom me (miht) all care.
That Medea (Medea ilia).
Those whom we love, tA« aame (eos-
dem) we wish happy.
I know not what of obscure {neacia
ifuidobacurt).
J know not whnt chance (neacio quia ca-
sus).
Disturbed I know not what {^uadoquid
conturbatus).
^ Henry, Charles, John.
jHenry, arui Charles, and John.
VPhatever opinion {quaecunque opinio).
Whoever {qtdaquia).
(More commonly than in English, as
we seldom use whoever, when the
notion of every is emphatic).
A certain (quidam) Balbus.
Another man runs another way.
Other men run another way (or other
ways).
[alius — alius (or some adv. derived
from alius). \
Eath best man, &c. (optimusquisque).
EUuh hidden snare, &c. (but quisque
may be used in the plur. when a subs.
is expressed iD this construction : oc-
cuUissinuB qtuegue insidiae).
Each wisest man {dodissimua quiaque.)
These are avoided with difficulty (diffi-
cile^.
(Difficiliuay d^fficiUimey when requir-
He auapeda with the greateat difficulty
(dlfficiUime)
He is prouder than that he (quam ut or
guam qui with subj.) should steal.
I armed forces (as great) aathegreateat
I could (quam maximas potui co-
pias).
208
TABLE OF
Ekolish.
96. Aa great a difference a« Qitrt can
possibly be.
The greatest possible difference.
97. I have been long desiring.
They had long been preparing.
98. When I take ray journey, I will
come.
When I have performed this, I will
come.
When he is come, he will tell us.
When you wish to play, rem.em-
her to play fair.
As you «nr, so will you reap.
I will do it, if I can.
99. They do nothing but laugh.
100. What shaU I do 7
What am I to do 7
What can I do 7
yf\\y shmdd I relaJte?
What was I to do 7
What should 1 have done 7
What ought I to have done 7
101. You would have thought.
You would have believed.
You would have said.
102. I remember to haxe read,
103. It would have been better.
104. iVb painter.
This does w^ at oil terrify me.
105. Even this is not just, unUss it be
voluntary.
106. He was more prudent than brave,
107. To make a bridge over a river.
The thing in question.
108. I have nothing to accuse old age
of.
I have found Bcarcehf any tiling to
censure.'
Men who abound in silver, in
gold, in estates.
Men who abound neither in sil-
ver, nor in gold, nor in estates.
A pen to write with.
109. [Constructions with the relative.]
(1) Some persons think: or there
are some who think, &,c.
(2) You have no reason {caustt occor
9ion, neodf Ac.) to hurry.
Latin.
A difference at^great-aa the greatest can
be {quanta maxima potest esse).
I am a long time already desiring (jam-
pridem cupio).
They were a long time already prepar-
ing (413).
When I shall take my journey, I will
come.
When I shall have performed this, I
will come.
When he shall fiave come, he will tell us.
When you shall wish to play, remem-
ber to play fair.
As you shall sow, so will you reap.
IwiUdoit, ifla^iaZZ&eable.
They nothing else than laugh {nihil
alvud quam rident),
Q,uid faciam 7
Cur hsBC narrem ?
Q,uid faeerem ? (426.)
Putares.
Crederes.
Diceres.
Memini me legere.
It teas better (utilius or satius fuit «).
(Often) nemo pictor.
This terrifies me nothing (nihil me ter-
ret).
Even this is so just, if it is voluntary
{ita justum . . . . «i est, &c.).
He was more prudent than braver (pru-
dentior quBinfortior). 452, w.
To make a bridge in a river.
The thing de quo agitur.
I have nothing whwh I may accuse old
age (nihil habeo quod incusem sen-
ectutem). 478.
I have found scarcely any thing, whkh
I may censure.
Men who abound in silver, who in
gold, who in estates.
Men who do not abound in silver, not
in gold, not in estates (478).
A pen, with which one may write (478).
There are some who think {syJbj,:
Sunt qui putent, &c.).
There is nothing (on account of)
which you should hurry {nihil est
quod festines),
(or) There is not (any thing, for) which
you should hurry [non est quod, dkc).
• So, aatiSf par, reOum, justum, idoneum, optimum, consentaneum, melius,
aquibus, rectius, soHus erat— fuit— fuerat.
DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM.
209
Ekglish.
(3) He was despieed by them, for
they saw through him.
(4) He desenres to be loved.
(5) He is not a proper person to be
received.
(6) None are so good <u never to
sin.
(7) Of such akind thatwe can neg-
lect duties for their sake.
(8) Too short to be the whole life
of man.
(9) I am not a man (or, am not so
joolish, siTrvpUf credulous^ &c.) as
to believe tnis.
(10) Who am I that my writings
shquld be honoured thus?
(11) They sent ambassadors to sue
for peace.
(12) He deserves praise (blame, Ac.)
for having done this.
(13) Wretched man that I am, who
thought, &c.
(14) How few there are who, Ac.
110. In censuring them you censure
me.
111. It is many years since he was first
in my debt.
I congratulate you on your influ-
ence with Gaius.
1 don't like to be abused.
112. A mortal body must necessarily
perish.
TJiere is no living pleasantly.
113. In addition to thts^ he is blind.
1 14. He accused him of having betrayed
the king.
His having spared the conquered,
is a great thing.
He praised {or blamed him)ybr
lutving done this.
115. Many persons admire poems wiih-
out understanding them.
You cannot be ruined without
ruining others.
1 16. Instead of reading, he is at play.
Latin.
He was despised by them, who saw
through him {qui with subj.).
He is a worthy person who should be
loved. (Dignusest, aui ameiur; or
quern, ames. So, maignus est, qui
ametur: Or, quem ames.)
He is not a proper person who should
be received {or, whom you should re-
ceiyej.
No one is so good who never sins
{subj.).
Of such a kind /or the sake of which we
can neglect duties.
Shorter than which can be (quam quae
sit or possit esse) the whole life of
man.
I am not that (person) who can believe
{is qui credam).
Who am I whose writings should bfe
honoured thus?
They sent ambassadors who should sue
for peace {qui pacem petererU).
He deserves praise, &c. who aid this
{subj.),
me rtiiserable, who thought, Ac. {qui
with subj.)
duotusquisque est qui . . 7 (with suJ^.)
When you censure them, you censure
me {quum with indie.).
There are many years when he is in
my debt {quum in meo eere est).
1 congratulate you, when you avail so
much with Caius {quum, generally
quod, tantum vales apud Caium).
I am not abused wiUingly {libenter,
491).
It is necessary that a mortal body
should perisn.
[Mortale corpus interire {or interest)
necessef est.]
It cannot be lived pleasantly f504).
Hither is added, that he is olind (hue
acced-it, ebat, Ac. ute). 513.
He accused him that (quod) h^ had be-
trayed the king (subj.).
It for 'this,* 'that^) is a great thing,
that (quod) he spared the conquered
{indic^.
He praised (or blamed^ him that (quod)
he had done this {suhj.). 520.
Many persons admire poems, nor un-
derstahd them (520^.
You cannot be ruined so as not to ruin
others {ut non with subj.). 521.
He is at play, whereas he ought to be
reading {quum debeat).
f This necesse is an old adj. used in the neut, gender only,
ff More commonly quod.
210
TABLE OF DIFFBBENCES OF IDIOM.
English.
Instead of growing rick (as he
might) ne is ^rowing poor.
Far from ihiwdng ikUf I hold,
&c.
117. And (hut, ^.) it this is granted.
WhOf iheywy, was killed.
Who, as B« says, was killed.
By which, when we read them, we
are aiTected.
Do not think.
Take care to do it.
Be aurt to he ; or mind you are.
Latin.
He is growing poor, whereas ht might
ff ro w rich (guum posset) .
It is so far o^j that 1 should think thiai,
that, <&c.
(Tantum abest ut ut). 533.
If whiai is granted.
Whom they report to have been killed.
Whom B. reports to have been killed.
Which when we read, we are affected.
k Beware of thinking, cavemUes.
I Be tmtnlUng to thiiuc, noU puiare.
Gura ut fincias.
Ihc utsis! or, fac sis.
PERFECT AND SUPIN^. 211
QUESTIONS ON THE CAUTIONS.
1. When must ^m, Aer, them {hct she^ (hty\ be translated by aui 7 and Aw, Aer,
ifo, t/ieir«, by. suua? (When the pronoun and the nom. of the verb stand
for the same person. C. i. 12.)
2. When is the ptrf. in a sentence with ^(hat^ to be translated by ihe present
ii^finitive 1 (When the action or state expressed by the perf. is not to
be described as mer before the time referred to by the principal verb.
C. II. 13 )
3. When must ' should ' be translated by the present Infinitive 7 (When it does
not express duty or a future event.* C. m. 13.)
4. When are wouldy shmtld^ signs of the future 7 (After past tenses. C.
IV. 16.)
5. When should ' thing ' be expressed 7 (When the mas. and the neut. of the
adjec. are of the same form. C. v. 21.)
6. Where is cum placed with the ablatives of the personal pronouns 1 (After,
and as one word with, them. G. vi. 25.)
7. When a preposition foUowd a verb, how may you help your judgment in
determining, whether the preposition giyes a transitive sense to the verb^ and
is prdbahly to be translated by the inseparable preposition of a compound
verb 7 (By tr3ring whether the preposition clings to the verb in the passive
voice. C. VII. 32.)
8. Is ^for ' before a noun and the injin. to be translated 1 (No.) What is the
construction 1 (Accus. with infin. C. viii. 38.)
9. What are 'a«' and *bui* often equivalent to 7 (Relatives. C. ix. 45, and
43 (a).)
10. How is *siuh^ often used in English 1 (To express size.) How is it then
to be translated 1 (By tantus. C. x. 45.)
11. When *that^ stands for a substantive that has been expressed in a former
clause, is it to be translated into Latin 7 (No. C. xi. 47, note.)
12. What tense is '/ am come ' 7 (Perf. definite of the active voice.)— what, * /
Kxw coTTie * 7 (Pluperf. of act.) What verb forms the perf. active with am 7
(Intrans. verbs of motion. C. xii. 57, note.)
13. - When a verb seems to govern two accusatives, by what prqwwi^um is one of
them often governed 7 (By 'to.* C. xiii. 60.)
14. When must ' that — iwt ' be translated by rd non instead of ne 7 and thai no-
body ^ that nothings <&c., by i^ nemo^ ut nihilj respectively 7 (When that
introduces a consequence, not a purpose : whenever, therefore, a ' «o' or
*such* goes before it. C. xxv. 77.)
15. How must the Ejag.fut, be translated after verbs o{fearvng7 (By the prea.
subj, C. XV. 96.)
* To judge of this, try whether you can turn the verb with should into the
participial substantive. "It is strange that you slundd say so." What is
strange 7 Your saying so.
212 QUESTIONS ON THE CAUTIONS.
16. When are *who* and ^uhick* dependent interrogatives 7 (After words of
askings hwwingj douhting^ teUing^ &c. G. xvi. 112.)
17. Does *may* ever stand for can? *might^ for cotdd? (Yes. C. xvii. 131.)
18. When is the per/, injin. to be translated by the jrres, injin,? (After might,
coiddf ovgfUy &c.f when the action is not to be described as over before the
time referred to. C. xviii; 131.)
19. When are • of you^^ ' of us* «fec., not to be translated after numerals, super-
latives, &C.1 (When aU are spoken of. C. xix. 175.)
20. Is an English substantive ever used adjecUvdy 7 (Yes.) Where does it then
stand ? (Before a substantive.) How must it be translated 1 (Grene-
rally by an adj.: sometimes by ex^ de with a suhst. C. xx. 234.)
21. For what does ^what* sometimes stand 7 (For how^ or hxnv-great.) When
must ' what ' be translated by * quam * ? (When it stands for * how ') — when
by ' qiiantus 7 (When it stands for how-great, C. xxi. 242.)
22. When are '/w' and *a«' to be untranslated ? (When the noun that follows
can be placed in apposition to another noun in the sentence. G. xxii.
255.)
23. When must ^one^^ Hwo^ &c., be translated hy dw<H6w/irc numerals! (When
they stand for ' one a-piece^ &c. C xxiii. 267.)
24. What is the substitute for a future subjunctive in the passive verb ? (futurum
sit, esset, &c.., ut . . . with the proper tense of the verb.) What must we
take care not to use for iti (The part, in dus, with sim^ essem, &c. C.
xxiv. 287.)
25. What is ^that* often used for after an expression of time? (For on which;
the abl. of relat. C. xxv. 308.)
26. Is that which is inform the presemi participle act. in ing^ always a participle?
(No.) What else may it be 1 (The participial substantive.) When is it
always the participial substantive ? (When it governs, or is governed, in-
stead of merely agreeing.) To what parts of the Latin verb does the
participial substantive correspond 7 (The Infin. and Gerund.) Can the
participial substantive ever be translated into Latin by a participle 7 and
ifsoy by what participle 7 — (Yes, by the participle in dus: but the part,
in dus must not govern the substantive, but agree with it, both being put
into the case that corresponds to the preposition governing the participial
substantive, C. xxvi . 330.)
27. Into what construction must ' have ' before an infinitive be turned for trans-
lation into Latin 7 (Into the form ' is, or are, to be — .')
(I have to do three more pages = Three more pages are to be done by me.
C. xxvii. 336.)
28. What does ^ is to be done ' generally mean 7 (Necessity, fitness, or intention.
Does ^ is to be done ' always mean necessUy^ fitness, or intention?^ (No.
C. xxviii. 336.)
29. What does ' is to be,* &c., mean, when it does not signify necessity, fitness, or
intention? {Ans, Possibility.)
b This is what is to be done by all who wish to please the king. (Necessity.)
This is to be done to-morrow. (Intention,)
This is to be done, if you set about it in the right way. (PossibUity,)
QUESTIONS ON THE CAUTIONS. 213
30. When must a present partic. active be translated by a perfect participle^ or
its substitute quum with the perf. or plupcrf. subjunctive ? (When the
action expressed by it must be over, before that expressed by the verb be-
gins. • C. XXX. 353.)
31. By what participle of a deponeni verb is the preia. participle often translated 7
(By the perf. partic. G. xxxi. 365.)
32. How ia *but^ { = except, unless) to be translated after a negative 1 (By nisi
oxprceter. C. xxxi. 451.)
33. When is *at b. town' not to be translated by the gm. or ablat.? (When
the action was not done in but near the town or place : e. g. * a
battle at Mantinea.) How is *at* to be then translated') (By apud
OT ad,)
34. What does one often stand for? {Some oruy alYquls; or a certain one,
quidam.)
35. When an English word is followed by a preposition, what should you always
remember 1 (To consider whether the Latin word to be used is followed
by a preposition or by a case : and then by what preposition, or what
case.)
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX.
In what respect does a verb agree with its nominative easel an adjective
with its substantive 1 What verbs take a substantive or adjective after them in
the nominative 1
[Verbs of btooming^ beings aeemingy
With passive verbs of makingj caUingf deeming.]
In what case does the thing by which stand 1 In what case does the agerdt or
person by vhom^ standi When should the pronoun that is the nom. to the
verb be expressed"}
§ I. When two or more nom. cases sing, come together, in which number should
the verb be put 1 in what person 7
With et — ety quum—tum^ in which number is the verb generally put? (a).
Which of the Latin words for and is confined to the office of connecting
rimilar notions 1 {d),
% 2. What case does the infin. take before it ? What Eng. conjunct, is some-
times to be untranslated 1 When ' that ' is to be untranslated, in what
case do you put the nom. and in what mood the verb 7
Mention some verbs, &c. that are followed by ace. with infin.
(1) Verbs BentieTidiet dedarandi:
Of feeling, wishing, knowing, ^ with which ace. with infin. stands as
Believing, saying, trowing, \ the object,
(2) Nearly all impersonal forms^ (with which ace. with infin. stands as
the aubject)f except
Contlngit, eyenit. and accidi^ ) ^^^^ ^ f^y^^^ ^ ^
With restat, reliquum est and fit,b > -^ •
Do any verbs of the class eeniiendi admit of any other construction 1
[Yes, those that express emotion are often followed by guod: those
that express teiahingf especially optOy by vi.]
% 4. When an adjective belongs to more than one substantive or pronoun, with
which should it agree in gender? and in which number should it stand,
even when the substantives, &c., are all sing. ? When the substantives
are things that have not life^ in what gender is the adj. generally put 9
What substantives are seldom to be translated "i*^
§ 5. What are respectively the demonstratioea or aniecedent pronouns to qui^
qucdiSf quantuSf quot ?
» That is, where in English we use *i^' as the representative of the true
nominative.
b And sometimes sequUur.
c But when ^man^ is coupled with an epithet of jn-oiaef it should generally
be translated (by vir) ; especially if it is an apponOon,
QUESTION* ON THE SYNTAX. 215
Is the relative ever governed in case by a word that is not in its own
clause 1
In what respects does the relative agree with its antecedent 7 [In gemr
dcTf number^ and person,] When the antecedent is expressed in the
relative, and omitted in the principal clause, where is the relative
clause often placed 1 what pronoun often represents it in the princi-
pal clause 1
What is the relative * what ' equivalent to 1 [' That whidiJ]
When the relat, agrees with some case of a sub^. expressed in its own,
but not in the principal clause, what must be done 1 [Some case of
that subst. must be supplied in the principal clause.]
S 6. For what does an infin. sometimes stand ? When an adj. or rel. is to agree
with an infin. mood or sentence, in what gender must it be put 1 When
the rel. has a sentence for its antecedent, what do we often find instead
of the rel. only 1 [Id quod, or qu<B res : id or res being in apposition to
the sentence.]
S 7. What is the great rule for the sequence of tenses 1 (40.) Is the perf. with
have considered a past tense? [No.] Is the Jut. perf. a«u6;. tense?
[No.] How should ' huJt^ or a rdative with ' not^ generally be translated
after nobody, nothing, &c. 7d
9 8. In such a sentence as ' Thebes, which is a town,* &c., should which agree
with TTiebes or with toton 7 When does which, in such a sentence, agree
with its proper antecedent?
§ 9. When the antecedent has a superUdive with it, in which clause does the
superlative generally stand 7 He was the fibst febson who did it.
§ 10. How is ' that* to be translated when it is followed by may or might? what
does it then express 1 [A purpose.] How is ' that* expressing a purpose,
to be translated, when it is followed by not or any negative word 1
§ II. How is Hhat* to be translated after so, swch? what doesitt then express 7
[A consequence.] How is * that ' to be translated when the sentence has a
comparative in it 7 What is quo equivalent to, and what is its force with
the comparative? [Q,uo is equivalent to uteo; with the comparative
' that by this 7 ' *4hat the.*] Does quo ever stand for ' that * when there is
no comparative in the sentence 7 [Yes ;" it is then equivalent to < thai by
this means.'] How is 'no^' to be translated before the imperative or subj,
used imperatively 7 How is ^a«' before the infin, and after so, 8uch,t to
be translated.
d Qutn cannot stand for cujus non, cut non ; but either these forms must be
used or the demonstrative expressed {cujus ille vitia -non videat ; or, quin ille
ejus vitia videat). In the nom. or ace. qui non may be used, and should be
when the non belongs especially to the verb. It is compounded of the old abl.
qut, and ru, not. It does not therefore itself contain the pronoun ; but the nom.
or ace. of the demonstrative is understood.
" " In funeribus Atheniensium sublata erat celebritas virorum ac mulierum,
quo lamentatio minueretur." (Ci^.)
f Qutn must be used, if it is, ' as no^ to .. . Ac.,' after a lugaiive sentence.
St
216 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX.
S 12. What does the Latin irif. never express is When the English inf. ex-
presses a purposct how must it be translated ?h After what verbs is the
ivf. to be translated by tU i with the subjunctive 7
§ 13. Give the forms for that nobody ; thai nothings that no ; thai never. When
must that nobody ; that nothings <&c., be translated by ut nemo; ut nihU^
Ac. 7
§ 14. How must * as not to . . . i&c.' after a negative be translated 7 After what
verbs when used negativelyf must quin be used 1 Is non dvhito ever fol-
lowed by ace. with infin. 7 [Nearly always, when dubitare means to hesi-
tate ; when it means to doubt^ the ace, with in/in. never follows it in Cicero,
but does in Corn. Nepos.J]
§ 15. By what conjunction are verbs of hindering followed 7 [By quominus,
which is equivalent to tU eo minus.] Are verbs of hindering followed by
any other conjunctions 7 [Yes ; they may be followed by n?^ when the
thing is so entirely prevented as not to have been begun ; by quin after a
negative sentence : and sometimes by ace. with infin.k] How must that
not be translated after verbs oi fearing? how must that be translated after
vexhsoi fearing?
S 16. Which interrogative particle asks simply for information 7 1 [N5.] Which
expects the answer ^yes?^ [Nonne.] Which the answer *no?' [Num.]
^ 17. When are questions dependent ? [When they follow and depend on such
verbs as ask^ dovbt^ knoWf examine^ try: it is doubtful^ uncertain^^ &c.]
In what mood does the verb stand in a dependent question 7 In what
r Except in poetry.
h The various ways of expressing a purpose are given in the following table
Eo ut ludos spectem, 1
^ ^ ludorum spectandorum > ^^^^
i ludos spectandi 5 I ^ ^^ . ^ ^ ^^e
Ea ludos spectaturus, '
Eo ad ludos spectandos,
Eo ludos spectatum {sup.)
1 The general rule for the use of uty is that it may be used :
(1) To express every request; commoTid (except after jubeo); advice ;
effect; decree.
(2) To introduce the conditions of an agreement or treaty.
(3) It is used after all irdensivt words, such as such^ so {tantis^ talis, tot^ itct^
adeoy sic).
(4) All purposes may be expressed by ut, (Crombie.;
Obs. Mmeo and persuadeo will not be followed by ut (but by aix, and in/*.),
when the person is not warned or persuaded to do something, but merely that
something is so.
J Thus his prefece begins with " non dnhito fore plerosque," &c.
k " Nostros navibus egredi prohibebant." (C8bs.)
1 But m appears sometimes to be used as equivaletit to nmme. * Eatne hoc ilti
dicto atque facto Fimbriano simillimum 7 ' (Cic. pro Sext. Rose. Am. 33.)
™ Obs. If you have any doubt whether iMo, whichj what, is a reZ. or an inter'
rog.f ask a question with the clause, and see whether the sentence before you
games.
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 217
mood must the verb be put in sentences that stand as the aec, to a pr^
ceding verb 1
f 19. How must 'tofuther* be transfated in double questions? how *or?* If
^whdher^ is untranslated, how may * or' be translated? Does an ever
stand before a single question 1 [ Ves : it then implies, with something of
impatience, that the answer must be * no.'] By what must * or ' not be
translated in double questions ?
S 20. Go through 1 ntay go, <&c. / migfU hgivt gvnty &c. Icon doit; I could Jiavc
done it; I oitght to do it; I ought to fiave dont^U. Translate, / ought to do
ity omitting ut. I mat be deceived. How is the per/, injrn, generaUy
to be translated after mighty anUdj ought ?
S 21. How is the case of a substantive in apposition determined? When urbt
or oppidum stands in apposition to the name of a town^ does the verb
agree with urbs^ oppidum^ or with the name of the town ?
§ 22. He wishes to be the fibst. He says that he is ready.
§ 23. They may be happy. We may be neutral.
§ 24. When may a substantive and preposition generally be translated by the
gnn. ? [Ans, When the prepos. joins it to another substantive.] How
MCTCH pleasure; much good ; SOMETIME.
f 25. What do you mean by a partitive adj. ? What case follows partitive adjec-
tives? With what does the partitive adj. generally agree in gender?
In what gender does a superlative (or solus) stand when it governs &genit.
and also refers to another subst. ? In what case does a substantive of
description stand when it has an adjective agruing tviih it? By what case
is opus est followed ? What other construction is there with opus est?
There is no need. What need is there? The top of the mountain.
The middle of the way. The rest of the work. The whole o^
Greece.
§ 26. What case do adjectives that signify desire^ &c., govern ? What case do
participles used adjectively and verbals in ax govern ?
i 28. What substantives are omitted after to be? It is Cicero's part. It is
YOUR part. What case do verbs of accusing^ &c., take of the charge?
What case do satago^ Ac, govern ? What case do verbs of remembering
KoA forgetting govern ? In what case may a neui. pron. stand with occu-
sarCf admoneref &.c, ?
§ 29. With interest and refert in what case is the person to whom it is of import-
ance put ? [In the genitive when the person is expressed by a substan-
tive : in the abl.fem. when a possessive pronoun Is used.] How is the degree
of importance expressed ? how is the thing that is of importance express-
ed ? what case of the person feeling do pvdet^ «&c., take ? what case of what
causes the feeling ?
§ 30. What adjectives govern the dot. ? Mention some adjectives that are fol-
lowed by ad. What cases may follow propvor^ proMmus ? When should
similis take the gen. ? (w.)
§ 31. In what case do you put the person tOffor^ or against wham the action is
readily and obviously answers it. * I don't know who did It.' * Who did it ? *
* I don' t know who did It.' Therefore who is here an interrogative.
10
218 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX.
done, or the feeling entertained 7 Mention the classes of verbs that take
the dot. [Verba comparand! ; dandi et reddendl ; promittendi ac solvendi ;
imperandi et nuntiandi; fidendi; mlnandi et irascendl; obsequendi et
repugnandi, regunt dativum : qulbus addas^
IrwideOf nudo,^aveoque, indulgeOf pareOy
Graivlor^ auxUior, stvdeo^ mecicorque, vocoque.J
Do any of these take the ace, also 7 By what prepositions may verbs of
comparing be followed 7 [By cum or ad.\ How is togdher to be trans-
lated after compare ?
■ [* Together ' may translated be,
After comparej by ' inter §e.*]
What verbs of advantage and disadvantage govern the ace. ? Hs thbeat^
SKB MB WITH DEATH.
[He threatens me with death should be,
In Latin, threatens death to me.]
Of verbs of commanding^ which govern the ace. only 7 which the dot. or
ace. 7
f 32. What case do sum and its cQmpounds govern 7 What exception is there 7
Mention the compound verbs that generally govern the dot.
[Most of these compounded with
Prae, con, sub,
Ad, in, inter, ob :
Many of those compounded with
Ab, post, ante, de.
Re, pro, super, e.]
f 33. Hb surrounds the citt with a wall. He presents me with a
GARLAND."
S 34. What verbs govern two datives 7 What case often follows sum where toe
should put the noni.7 How is have often translated 7 Mt nams is
Gaius (239). I HAVE A cow. I have BIX cows.
f 35. Do neuter verbs ever take the ace. 7 Explain, sitire honores.
S 36. What verbs take two accusatives 7 Do oU the verbs that have any of these
meanings take two accusatives 7 What transitive verbs take two accusa-
tives, one in a sort of apposition to the other 7
§ 37. What does the abl. express 7 In what case is the price put 7 What ad-
jectives stand in the abl. to express the price, pretio being understood 7
What adjectives always express price in the gen.? What substantives
stand in the gen. after verbs of valuing 7 What should be used instead of
multi and majoris 7
f 38. What case do verbs of abounding^ &c. govern 7 What case may egeo and
indigeo govern 7 What case do verbs of freeing fromj &c., take 7 What
is their more general construction in prose 7 What case do fungoTy Ac.
govern 1^ In what case is the manner^ causey dc, put 7
% 39. How is a voc. sometimes used in poetry 7 What casie sometimes stands
In apposition to the roc. 7
^ Mihi coronam, or me coronft donat.
• In the phrase ^potiri rerum^ (to become a ruling power) the gen. only ia
found.
QTTESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 219
f 40. In what ca»e is the agent expressed after the pass, verb, when a, a&, is not
used? ^fter what part of the verb is this the regular construction 7
What verbs cannot be used personally in the pass, voice 7 Go through
/ am believed.^ Mention some verbs that have a pass.' construction (286).
What is the substitute for a fut. inf. pass.f when the verb has no supine
to form it with iri? 1 hope he will becoves (use fort lU),
§ 41. What verbs can govern an ace. in ihe pass. ? Can a pass, verb or partici-
ple take an ace. of the part affected 7 We have walkep enough (trans,
by the pass.). Which is the more common in Lat. ' Cams videtur,
dicitur, i&c., esse* or ^tiddur^ dicitur, &c. Caium, esseV
% 42. How is a noun of time put in answer to when ? in answer to ybr Aow long ?
How do you express the time in or within which ? How do you express
time in answer to how long before or after? How are antCf post^ used in
this construction 7 How do you express a point or space oi future time
for which any arrangement is now made 7 How do you express the exact
time by or against which a thing is to be done 7 Three tears ago.
Three tears old. Above twentt tears old* (307, /) Three
years after he had returned (310 (a) ).
f 43. In what case is the town at which a thing is done, to be piit 7 In what
case is the name of a town to be put in answer to whither? in answer to
whence ? To what proper names do these rules apply 7 In what case do
vrbs and oppidum stand in apposition to the name of a town In the gen.
(315) 7 How is local space expressed 7
§ 44. Decline * grieving*^ throughout. Of writing a letter. I am to bb
LOVED. Go through, I must write. Go through episiola scribenda.
When must the part, in dus not be used in agreement with its substan-
tive (332) 7 We must spare our enemies. At home. From home.
P Mihi creditur, / can believed.
Tibi creditur, thou art believed,
Illi creditur, he is believed. •
Nobis creditur, we are believed.
Vobis creditur, you are believed,
Illis creditur, they are believed.
* These constructions admit of many variations by the introduction of natus
and quam — " Above thirty-three years old"
major annos tres et triginta natus ;
major quam annos tres et triginta natus ;
major quam annorum trium et triginta ;
major quam tribus et triginta annis. (Z.)
«» N.
Dolere,
grieving.
G.
dolendi,
of grieving.
D.
dolendo,
to grieving.
Ace.
dolere,
grieving.
Abl.
dolendo.
by grieving.
The ace. is dolendum only when governed by a preposition. * Se peccati insi"
mulant quod dolire intermiserint ' (hav3 intermitted grieving).
•
220 (QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX.
HoMS (after a verb of motion). Into the country. Fkom the couir*
THY. In the country. On the ground.
§ 45. What kind Of sentences may be translated by participles (344)7 In what
case do a noun (or pronoun) and participle stand when the noun or pro^
noun is not governed by any other word 1 What is this cjUed 7
§ 46. He gave t||em the country to dwell in. What does the part, in ru»
often express 7 What does the part, in dus often express 7 Express * to
have a thing inadt^ in the sense of causing it to be |;Dade. [Faciendum
curare.]
§ 47. What participle is wanting in all but deponents and neuter-passives 7
Having left his brother. [Relicto fratre, or quum reliquisset fra-
trem.]
S 48. My own fault. Their own fault (373, a). When — selfy — eelvca are to
be translated by ipse and a personal pronoun, in what case may ipse
stand 7 [In the nom. or in the case of suit according to the meaning.*]
When may kinij his, her^ itSj theirs in a dependent sentence, be translated
by sui or suvSf even when they denote the nom. not of their oirn, but of
the principal sentence 7 By what pronoun must him, her, dLc, be
translated, when sui or suus would be understood to mean the nom. of
its own verb 7 Does suus ever relate to the accusative ? With what pron.
is this very common 7 Which gen. pi. (fim or t) Is used after partitives
(372) 7
S 49. W hat is the difference between ' is qui pugnat,' and ' hie or Ule qui pugnat '
(376, g) 7 W hich of these three pronouns i^ to be used when Ae, him^ Ac,
is without emphasis, simply describing a person or thing before mentioned
or about to be described by a rel. clause 7 By what case only of ' iff ' can
his, her^ their^ be translated 7 [Ans. By the gen.] Of two things already
mentioned, what pron. means the latter? what tlu former 7 Which pron.
means that of yours? Medea illa. Distinguish between Aic, iff^e, t//«,
referring to different objects.
§ 50. When is *any* to be translated hy quisquam or vllvs ? v/hen hy quis?
when hy quivisj quilibet? when hy aliquis quispiam,? Does quisquam
ever folI(^ si (note w) 7 By what pronoun may 'a' sometimes be
translated 7
§ 51. What prefx do interrogatives often take 7 what ajix? How should *a/-
ways ' with two superlatives be translated 7
S 52. W^hen are the pronouns that^ those^ not to be translated 7 When they
stand in the second member of a comparative sentence for a sub-
stantive expressed in the first.] When quam is omitted, in what case is
the following subst. put 7 What case goes with comparatives and super-
latives to express the measure of excess or defect ? How are the Eng. ths
— the {^^by how much — by so much) to be translated 7
§ 53. Is the present ever followed by the impetf. subj,? When 7 When is the
♦ * He wounded himself;' se ipse vulneravit ( ^ ipse, non aliust sc vulneravit) :
se ipsum vulneravit ( = se, non a/i«m, vulneravit). Hence ipse is to be in the
nom. or in the oblique case, according as the notion to which it is opposed, or
with which it is contrasted, is in the nom. or in an oblique case.
QUESTIONS Olf THE SYNTAX. 221
, Eng. pre*, generally translated by the Lat. future ? By what tense is the
per/, definite often translated 1 [Ana. by the fttture perfect.] How are
assertions softened in Latin 7 What subjunctives are very frequently used
in this way 1 What conjunction is often omitted after veUm^ Ac. I hatx
LONO DEEIBED (410, o).
§ 54. Is the per/, subj. ever used as an impercU. ? What other tense is some-
times used as an imperat. ? By what tense are questions of appeal, or
questions for oBserU, to be translated 1 If hb has ant thing, he oiyxb
IT. [Si quid habet, dat.'] If I have ant thing, I will give it. [Si
quid habeam, dabo.] If he should have ant thing he would giye it.
[Si quid haberet, daret : Imt much more commarUyj si quid habeat, det.]
If he had ant thing he would give it. [Si quid haberet, daret] If
HE had had ant thing, HE WOULD HAVE GIVEN IT. [Si quId habuissct,
dedisset) How is 'possUnUly without any expression of uncertainty*
translated! How is * uncertainty ynth. the prospect of decieion* trans-
lated? How is ' uncertoinfy without any such occeMory notion ' trans-
lated 7 How is < impoasUnUty or belief that the thmg is not m,' translated 7
May the consequence and the condition refer, the one to paat, the other
to present time 7 When the consequence has ' vjould hace,* how must
you translate the jduperf indie, in the conditional clause 7 With what
, tenses may n take the indic.7 With what tenses does at always govern
the subjunctive 7
§ 56. In conditional sentences are the verbs of both clauses ever in the subj.
pres, 7 [Yes ; *Si quid habeaty det,* should be always preferred to *Si quid
haberet daret,* unless it is to be intimated that the supposition wiU not be
realized.'] What are the conditional forms of the svJbj. 7 When should
acripiurus easem be used for ' ^lould have written* 7 What tenses of the
indie, are used for the subj. in conditional sentences 7 Is m ever omitted 7
where should the verb of the sentence then stand 7 What are the con-
junctions for aUhough7 [Etsi, tametsi, quamquam ■ with tncfu;. ; licet
with avbj. What is quamvis, and what mood does it govern in Cicero 7
[However much, howeoer ; with subj.] What is etiamsi, and what mood
does it govern 7 [Even if; even though; withimftc. or subj.] Do any
other conjunctt. express '/Aou^A 7 [Yes; sometimes, quum, ut, with
subj.]
f 67. In a dependent conditional sentence, the verb of the consequent clause
will be in the infin. : what infinitives vrill take the place (respectively of
dot. 7 of dabit 7 daret 7 dediaaet 7 daturua eaaet 7
% 68. Explain the meaning of oblique narration 7 In oblique narration, in what
mood will the principal verbs stand 7 [In the infin.] In what mood will
the verbs of the aubordinate cUsuaea stand, provided they express the
words and opinions, not of the liarraior, but of the speaker 7 [In the
' Either the conditien or the canaequence, or both, may refer to a paid, or future
time.
■ When these conjunctions take the subj. the sentence is generally in the
obUqua oratio, taken in its widest sense. (See § 68 ) This, however, does not
hold good of the later writers. (Billroth.)
222 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX.
Bubj.] In oblique narration what is oft€ n omitted 1 [The verb or partic.
on which the infinitives depend.] In what mood are queHionsfor armeer
asked 1 [The subj.] In what mood are questiana of appeal asked 1 [In
the infin.] When questions are thus asked in the iri/In., may inUrroga'
Uvea be used with the injin.l [Yes.] In what mood is the charge ex
pressed with qxwd 7
§ 59. When may the prea. and perf> subjunct. be used in oblique narration,
even when dependent on a past tense 7 In what mood will remarks
stand that are the reporter* a not the apeaker*a? In what mood do the
verbs of subordinate clauses stand, when the principal verb of the propo-
sition Is in infin, or avbj, 7 With what limitation is this rule to be ap-
plied 1 When may the prea. and per/, avbj, be used, although fhe gen-
eral rule would require the imp. or plvperf. May the imp. or pluperf. be
ever used, when the general rule would require the prea. or perf.7 How
are the ace. and infin. used with nM in direct narration (473) 7
f 60. Mention some words ^ phrases, &c., with which qui takes the subj.
[Ana, After aum^ in 'sunt qui/-' erant qui/ &c., and after negative and
inierrogcUioe sentences, nemo, nihil, Ac, eat : quia eat 7 an quiaquam e^ ?
quohiaqutaque eat 7 Ac. Also after adaunt qui, rum deaurU qui, Ac, and
similar phrases with reperio, invenio (to find).]
$ 61. Whut mood does qui govern, when it introduces the ground of an asser-
tion ? What mood does qui take after quippe, utpote 7 alwaya or gene-
rally 1 What mood does qui takewhen|it is equivalent to ut with a
peraonal or poaaeaavoe pronoun? Mention some phrases with which
qui has this force. In what other cases does qui govern the subj. (484,
485)7
S 62. When does quum take the indie. 7 What mood does quum generally
govern, when the verb of the sentence is in the imperf or pluperf. 1
[The subj.t] How is the subject of .congratulation expressed (492) 7
Mention some conjunctions that always govern the subjunctive. (Vocab.
G8.) When are the prea. ^nd per/, aubj. used with utinam7 when the
imperf. and pluperf. 7 How is * not * generally expressed after utinanif
dummjoda, Ac.
S 63. When the principal verb is in the present tense, in what mood is the verb
after antequam or priuaqwan expressed 7 When the principal verb is in
the/u^., in what mood or moods may the dependent verb be 7 When
the principal verb is in a paat tense, in what mood or moods may the de-
pendent verb be 7 When should the avJ^. alwjays be used after antequam^
priuaquam 7
9 64. When do dum, donee, quoad ( = untH^ take the indieaiipe7 when the aub-
funcHve? What mood do they and ouamdiu always take, In the sense of
aa long oat With the adverbs meaning aa aoon aa, how should the Eng-
lish pluperf generally be translated (514) 7
f 65. When is that expressed by quod7 What class of verbs are followed by
quod7 What mood does 9v«i take 7 with what exception?
f 66. What was the/r«^ of the month called by the Romans? on what day did
t But the indie, of repeaUd actions.
QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 223
the Norus fall 7 on what day the IdUa 7 In what months were the Nc/nta
on the seventh? How were the days between the Kalends and Nonea
reckoned 7 days between the Nonea and the Idea? days after the Idea?
Give the rules for each case.
S 67. What may be used instead of a conjunction and personal or demonatraitM
pronoun 7 Mention some circumlocutions for the imperatiee.
S 68. Was a aeaUrtium a coin 7 How many sesterces made a sestertitan^ What
is the meaning of seateriium with numeral adverbs ? Is sestertium de-
clinable in this construction 7 How may the value of sestertium deeiea,
eenticay dc, be got approximately (547, note *) 7
S 69. Give the division of the aa. Explain aaaea uaura. By what other name
was this rate of interest exprbssed 7
PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION
TO
LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION.
PART n.
PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION
TO
LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION.
PART n.
OONTAINIRO A F1TU. TIBW OF
THE ORDER OF WORDS IN LATIN.
AND
LONGER LATIN EXERCISES.
BY
THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M. A.,
BXOTOB OF LTKDOir,
.AXD ULTB FBLLOW OF TBOnTT OOUSCn, OAMBBXDtfS.
CASEFULLT RBYISBD AHD BB-ABXA1I«XD
BY REV. J. A. SPENCER, A.M.
NEW-YORK :
D. APPLBTON & COMPANY, 200 BROADWAY.
PHILADELPHIA:
O. 8. APFLETON, 148 GHESNUT STREET.
1846.
EIntered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846,
By D. APPLETON A COMPANY,
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the Southern District of New- York
ADVERTISEMENT.
The object of ^ the following Work is to supply boys with an easy
collection of short passages, as an Exercise-book for those who
have gone once, at least, through the First Part of the Author's
' Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition.'
T. K. A.
Lyndon,
April 6, 1844.
[Consult the Preface to Part h, at the beginning of the vol.
ume.l
J. A. S.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PART n.
'AGS.
I. On THE Obdek OF W0BD8 IN Latin • 233
§ 1. Posiaon of AttributlYes • •. .. 236
2. Dependent G^itive ••..... 239
3. Participial Clauses ^....\... 240
4. Proper Names •• • ••••• • 241
5. Antithetical Words • 242
m
6. Secondary Emphasis; position of words occurring in two )
clauses $"' ^43
7« On tiie position of Sum • 245
8. Pronouns 246
9. Pronouns (continued) 247
10. The Relative 249
11. The Relative (continued) .•... 250
12. Interrogatives • ^ 262
13. Prepositions 252
14. Coiijunctions • 254
15; Conjunctions; ftutem, enim, igitur with ttwe « 265
16. Non. Hand 257
17. Comparatives, ^c. ••*»•• •• • -..•••• ^ ••••••••••••••••••• * 268
II. LoNosK Latin ExxxciBxs ••••••. .r.... ••.... 26r
Cautions • 301
DtffetBnoes of Idiom • •••... ..i...^.*..*. 3O6
Memorial Lines • • 310
Versus MemoiialeB *...-.•.-* «••••.. .....v.. 311
Extracts from the *<Antibarbaru8" ••«••,.•«•«;.•• 313*
Index I.— English • 316
Index II.— Latin and Critical Remarks 334
EXPLANATION OF MARKS, Ac.
Words in [ ] are to be omitted in tranfllation.'
II Words in italics, to which this mark is prefixed, are to stand at the head of
their clause. If the word that follows II is not in italics, the mark applies
to that word only.
* This mark denotes, that the word to which it is prefixed is to be looked for in
the Extracts firom the ' Antibarbarus,' appended to the Yolnme.
t This mark means, that the clause to which it is prefixed is to precede the
whole or part of that which stands before it in English.
t This mark means, that the acHve voice is to be turned into the pa$rioe, or vice
vtrsd.
Numerals followed by a cunre refer to the Cautions at the end of the volume.
Numerals without a cunre refer to the I^ifierences of Idiom at the end of the
volume.
C. and Df. refer, respectively, to the Cautions and Difierences of Idiom in Prac-
tical Introduction, Part I.
V. H refer to the Venus MemoriaUt at the end of the volume.
H. L. refer to the Memorial Idmt at the end of the volume.
Numerical refinenoes in the notes refer to the First Part of the 'Practical
Introduction to Latin Prose Composition.'
Words in the notes marked by single inverted commas, are the liieral trans-
lation of the Latin to be used.
1 In the fint five Ezerdaei, words to be omitted areinarked by ^ prefixed to
woids InigMCttf pilnttiig.
PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION
TO
LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION.
I.
ON THE ORDER OF WORDS IN LATIN.
1. In the usual arrangement of a Latin sentence, the subject,
as the most important word, stands first ; and words which modify
the meaning of another, precede the word whose meaning they
modify.
1. Ratio pneest ; appetUw obtemperat. — 2, Ommutudo est altera natunu—
3. Habent opinionem, ApdOxnem morbos depeUeie.
2. Hence (a) oblique cases mostly precede the verb (or other
word) on which they depend ; {h) adjectives and dependent geni-
tives precede the substantives to which they belong ; and (c) ad-
verbs precede their verbs or adjectives.
(a) Corporis gravUatem et dolorem animo judicamus.
lb) 1. Mamertina ciyitas.— 2. SyracuahtM Philistus.— 3. ReUqua vita in-
stituta. .
(c) 1. Sui negotli fr«n« gerens.— 2. Sapientia prop« singularis.
3. With respect to the usual order of oblique cases ; —
The nearer object precedes the more remote : e. g., the accus.
afler the transitive verb precedes an abl. of manner or instru-
ment, dz;c.
Helvetii Itgatoa ad CcBsarem mittunt. Ccw. [8u aUo txx. tmdtr 2 (a).]
Descriptions of a place precede the mention of things existing,
or actions done in it.
Caesar a Laeu Lemano ad moniem Juram miUia passuum decern murum Jn§^
mm^ue perducit. Gm.
234 ON THE OKD£R OF WORDS. [§ 1. 4—9.
The cause precedes the effect.
Veniebant ad Eumenem, qui propter odivm fructum oculis ex ejus casu
capere vellent. C. Nep,
Exercise 1.
4. [Does mena or animu» denote tfu m^ with all its passions, emotions,
^c. 1 (92, note c.)]
We do not feel a disease of the mind by ^ any bodily sensa-
tion.' Caius is going to send a copy* of the letter to his father.
There is no doubt that the plea of necessity is a valid excuse for
Dionysius. It cannot be denied, that he employed an advocate at
Carthage. It cannot be doubted that they lived in affluence at
Rome. We have been impatient for your arrival. There were
some who* looked forward with impatience to your arrival. The
Gauls attack the Romans, before they have disencumbered them-
selves of their haggage. The Athenians are going to recall BaU
bus from banishment. It would have been better* never to have
returned from banishment. It is one* thing to sin, another to
throw the \\blame upon another. There is no doubt that Philistus
the Syracusan (c) lived many years at Rome. It cannot be de-
nied, that you are connected with Scipio by the ties of blood.
1 'By the body.' a See Ezampub. * Df. 109. < 9aHuafuU, 426, (5).
» 38.
5. 0:^ Unusualness of position calls attention to a word so
placed, and thus renders it emphatic.
6. Hence in a language which, like the Latin, admits of considerable vari-
ety in the collocation of words, what we efiect by printing a word in
Italics, is accomplished by placing it in an unusual position.
7. This unusualness of position is the great principle on which the emphasis
or prominence of a word depends.
8. The beginning and the end of a clause are positions favorable to empha-
sis because " by the former our attention is excited, and on the latter it
rests." But of course the 'beginning of the clause is not an emphatic
position for the subject, noj the end for the predicate ; but vice versft.
9. (a) The subject receives emphasis by being placed at or
near the end of the clause : {b) the predicate by being placed at
or near the beginning of the clause.
(a) 1. Sensit in se iri Brutus. — 2. Semper oratorum eloquentiae moderatrix
fuit auditorum prudtntia. C,
(6) Disce* tu quidem quamdiu voles : tamdiu autem veUe debebis, quoad te^
quantum proficias, non poBnitebit. C.
§ 1. 10-15.] ON THE ORDER OF WORDS. 235
10. An emphatic subject oflen stands just before a verb which
closes the sentence.
Eonim, qui exacts state moriuntur, Jbrtuna laudatur. C.
11. A verb stands at the head of its clause without emphasis,
when it is used with autem to explain a previous assertion.
In English we should insert such an explanation parenthetically.
1. Amicum sgrotantem visere volebam : habitat autem ille in parte urbis
remotissiml.— 2. [Cato] objecit ut probnim M. Nobiliori, quod is in pro-
vinciam poetas duxisset : duxerat autem consul ille in iEtoliam, ut sci-
mus, Ennium. C.
12. The verb or adjective precedes its oblique cases when its
comparative importance to the whole meaning of the sentence is
greater than theirs.
1. Qusritur an is, qui frqfuU ncbUy si postea nocult, nos debito solverit. C
2. Qus pei;spicuam omnibus veritatem continet propositio, nihU indiget
approbationia. C. — 3. Iris nunquam non adversa «oZ» est. Sen.— 4. Sim'
ilea parerUibiia ac majoribtu auia filii plerumque creduntur. C.
13. Oblique cases and adverbs receive emphasis by being
placed at or near the beginning or end of the clause.
1. Semper oratonim eloquentiae moderatrix fiiit auditonim pmdentia. C. —
2. Arbores serit diligens agricola, quanim adspiciet baccam ipse nun-
quam, C.—3. Erudito funnini esse ^go iratus, ne si cupiam quidem, non
possum. C— 4. Ne vitaiionem quidem doloria ipsam per se quisquam
in rebus expetendis putavit. C.
14. Of words standing close together, the reversing their usual order gives
promidence (I think) to the first rather than to the second. Thus when
a h becomes 6 a, it is 6 rather than a that receives prominence.
MirabUe videtur, quod non rideat haruspex, qunm haruspicem viderit C.
Exercise 2.
15. It cannot be denied, that Hortensius* is going to follow ihe
example of Cato. Let Hortensius defend himself from this charge
by the plea of °bad health. Brutus felt 'that he was invited to a
share. He exclaims : " What^ advantage will the Carthaginians
derive from so great a wrong ? " Let good examples^ for imita-
tion be proposed' to boys.^ There is no doubt that the plea of
necessity is a valid excuse for you. I' will follow* the advice of
Cato. The examples of those who die* for their country are
quoted-with-approbation.' We are looking impatiently 'for the
arrivtU of Cibero. I feat that he will not* undergo the danger
236 POSITION OF ATTRIBUTIVES. [§ 1. 16—18.
willingly.* I could not follow* such an example, even if I wished
it (f, 3). He is always* bringing me into danger. I fear that*
Hortensius* will not ward off the danger from me. I fear that
Hortensius will die by his own hands. How few there are who*
have altogether' satisfied the expectations^ of men l^
^ How are questions of appeal asked in oblique narration 1 [460, (e) (2).]
' Pro patrid mortem or morte occumbere. > Laudare, < Df. 53.
» Df. 109, (14). « Ex omni parU.
§ 1 . Position of Attributives.
16. (a) An attributive receives, perhaps, a slight emphasis from
being placed after its substantive ; but (h) it receives more by
separation from it, especially if it be placed near the beginning
or end of the sentence.*
(a) 1. Sedebat in rostris collega tuus, amictus togi purptwedt in selU aureS^
coronatus. C— 2. Jacet inter saltus satis clausus in medio campus
herbidui aquosusgue. JL.
(b) 1. In miseriam nascimur sempitemam, C— 2. JEdui equites ad Ciesareiii
omnta revertuntur. C«m.
17. If the attention is to rest on a substantive having an attri-
butive with it, it is placed after the attributive, and separated
from it, so as to be thrown as near the end of the sentence as
possible.
1. Cimon harharorum nno concursu vim maximam prostravit. C. Nep. —
2. In lis perniciosus est error, qui ezistimant lUndinum peccatorumque omr-
nium patSre in amicitii licentiam. C— 3. Miles quidam parum ahfiiit,
quin Varum interficeret ; quod ille periculum^ sublato ad ejus conatunt
scuto, vitavit. Ccbs.
18. If an attributive belongs to two substantives, it either pre-
cedes both, or follows both, or follows the first.
^ (]?ry«ar makes the position q/]f6i* its substantive the u^uaZ position of an attri-
butive ; that before its substantive the more emphatic one. This opinion seems
to me utterly untenable ; e. g. in the example, " sedebat in rostris collega tuus,
amictus tog& purpure^ in selUl aured^ coronatus," (Gic. Phil. ii. 34.) who can
doubt that the adjectives purple and golden are here more important notions than
the substantives toga and diatr? — ^In this sentence, however, purpwred and aw
re& gain a little emphasis from their being followed by a slight pause.
§ 1. 19-22.] POSITION OF ATTBIBUTIVES. 237
{Prom fur dwiru birth and origin.)
(1) A divino ortu et progenie. . ^
(2) Ab ortu et progenie divind. > Noif ab ortu et divind progenie.'
(3) Ab ortu divino et progenie. J
19. Zumpt confines the position after the first to the * familiar style;' but it
occurs even in the Orations of Cicero, and is, 1 think, the best position,
when the second substantive is an emphatic addition : e. g. Cic. Phil. 11.
33. " Sed arrogantiam ho minis inaoUntiamqut cognoacite?*
20. Of two adjectives or other words joined by ^and^ (or some
other co-ordinate conjunction) that which is to arrest the attention
most is often placed towards the end of the sentence, and sepa-
rated from the other by one or more of the words that belong
equally to both.
Ohs. The pronouns, and other small unaccented words, are
very frequently used for the separation of connected words.
1. Insula est Melita, satis lato ab Sicilia man pericu/woque disjuncta. C. —
2. Omnibus officiis diligenter a^ne aancUque servatis, &c. — 3. Et d(^ori
fortiter ac Jerlunce resistere. — 4 Dominoa esse omnium rerum et mode-
raiorcs deos.
21 . Ohs. This separation of co-ordinate notions is conveniently
employed in dividing a long sentence into portions, and thus giving
symmetry and strength .to the style by ^eventing the accumula-
tion of unaccented words. For instance, Wolf writes : * nunc
tandem jucundum fructum mihi capere licet variarum curarum : '
jucundum and fructum are here emphatic, mihi capere licet wholly
unemphatic. By arranging the sentence thus, ^nunc tandem licet
I jucundum mihi \ variarum curarum \ fructum capere,^ we have
a nearly regular alternation of the rising and falling of the voice ;
or what Cicero calls iniervalla cequalia, (Reisig.)
Exercise 3.
[An accented pronoun is emphatic, and to be expressed.]
22. Is it the part of a Christian to yield basely to pain' and
fortune* (e) ? Thick" clouds* are covering the whole sky. (Turn
into pass, voice.) It is a great thing to be able to endure cold* and
3 This sentence {eic) is in Cic. Tusc. i. 12 (26), and Wolf improperly refers
divind to both substantives : a supposition which Orelli appears to counte«
nance by not condemning it.
238 POSITION OF ATTRIBUTIVES. [§ 1. 28-25.
hunger.* They believe that they shall derive great* advantage^
from this injury. He' gave me advice boldly* and rashly.* Fired
with anger* and ambition,* he^ heaped every kind of abuse upon
me. It cannot be doubted, that he is easily accessible to flattery.^
Which^ advice* they' received with acclamations. He' did many*
and rash* ° actions by the advice of Caius. There is no doubt
that he is living by alms, Caius has made this question very
dark. He has followed a bold' and rash' advice. Deliver me
from the yoke* of slavery.* You see {pL) the anger and ambi-
tion of the man (21) !
1 ' that flatterers" have easy* acceas* to his ears.'
23. When a substantive, with a notion joined to it attributively,
is more nearly defined by some other words, those words are usu-
ally placed between the substantive and its attributive.
Tua trga Ijucceium benignitas. C. Tanta fuit m castris capiendia cderiiae,
<&c. Caia. Halesini pro multis et magnis suis majorumque suorum in
rcmpublicam meritis atque beneficiis, <&c. C. Pro hac, quam conspicitis,
ad conaervandam remptd)Ueam diligentil, i^c. C. [Ob». the itwerfton €>f
the relative clause.]
(a) A deviation from this rule occurs, C. Nep. Miitiad. 3, 3, * hortatus est
poDtis custodes ne afortund datam oocajtionem liberandi Graecie dimit-
terent.' Herefortuna is emphatic.
(/9) A notion joined attributively to a substantive may be expressed either
by an adjective, or a participle, or a genitive case.
24. (a) A participle generally follows its substantive, as con-
taining a predicate assumed attributively ; but (b) where the
predicate would precede the subject, if the clause were resolved,
there the participle should precede the substantive.
(a) RBitihuBJunetis trajectus. L. Consuies — ^regibus txacU* creati sunt.
(6) Ingratus est, qui, remotis testibus, agit gratiam. Sen. Caesar pulsus, non
instante PompejOy negavlt eum vincere scire. Suet.
25. In other words, the participle should precede, when atten-
tion is to be called to it rather than to the substantive ; and also
when the participle and substantive together form one complex
notion.
Temeritas est videlicet jIore7Ui»«fo/i*. C. It&que bene adhibita ratio cemit,
quid optimum sit. C.
§ 2. 26-29.] DEPENDENT GENITIVE. 280
Exercise 4.
26. It was decreed, that for his so-great merit towards' the
state,! he should be called^ king by the senate. Caius behaved
with such courtesy' towards all,' that no man was so humble
as not* to have access to him. I will strive to satisfy* men's great
expectations o f m e . i I fear that I shall not' satisfy yourgreat*
expectations of me.i If (Ego, si, &c.) such an opportunity of
successi' were oiiered me, V would eagerly seize it [I. 445, a,
(1). ] The Gauls, having lost their baggage, all' Jled, The
troops of Lentulus p restore the fortune of the day," and rout the
enemy. Are you' the man* to lose such**^ an opportunity of suc-
cess^ by your-own laziness?" I fear that I shall not*' be able
to recompense •• you for your so-great benefits towards** me.i
There were some, who looked forward to your arrival with impa-
tience.
^ in with ace. ' appdlare. 8 Say ; * was ofaiuh courtes^ (abl.). See
D. humanitds. Choose the word that is nearly ^ affabilUy. * Use ^t
non. See Pt. I. p. 215, note d. 6 I. 75. « Df. 53. ^ rti gerendtB.
« See BATTLE. • Df. 109, (9). " tarn pneelarua, " SeeD.^a-
via. »2 D£ 53. ^^ gratiam* rtftrrt* " tn.
§ 2. Dependent Genitive.
27. When * gen. depends on two substantives it generally pre-
cedes both.
Hujus autem orationia difficilius est ezitum quam piincipium invenire. C.
28. When a gen. depends on a substantive that has another
genitive dependent upon it, with which it forms one complex
notion, it is generally placed before it.
The gen. that forms, as it were, one notion with the qubstantive, gen-
erally follows 1 it : it is very often an objective genitive.
1. Fortisnmi viri magnitudinem animi desideras. C— 2. ThemidoclU
vitia iruuntis tetatia magnis sunt emendata virtutibus. C. Nep,r-^-
Cupio ab hac hominum satietate noatri discedere. C.~-4. Hujua vos
animi monumenta retinebitis corporis in ItaliA nullum vestigium esse
patieminil C
^ Not always : e. g. hufua rex animi magnitvdinem admirans. C. Nq>, U. IQ j
I
I
240 PARTICIPIAL CLAUSES. [§ 3. 30-32.
Exercise 5.
29. It is more difficult to avoid the snares of these men,*
than to endure ' ° their arms. Nearly all men's' youthful*
opinions are gradually weakened.' Who would not praise othis
great philosopher's contempt* for" external things ? I am not the
man' to laugh at the Christian's contempt* for^ the things of this
life.^ I have very often admired both* the courtesy and the
benevolence of Cimon. Extreme* cheapness^ followed •" that
year's* dearness of provisions. I don't doubt that extreme
dearness will follow** this year's chesLjiness of procisions. My
Tullia's weak state'* kills*' me with © anxiety.
1 suatinere. 3 Say ; * opinions of commencing life.' Sliould it be inienM
<Bia»f or cetaa inienal (Sec 25.) ^ Dod. paulalim. * detpicieniia.
» Pt. I. 156. « Df. 109 (9). 7 Say; 'of human things.' » qaum-^
turn. Summits. ^o conaequL " Pt. I. 290 (cQ- *' imbeciUi"
tcLs corporis. ^^ txanimart.
§ 3. Participial Clauses.
30. When a participial clause is equivalent to an apposition or
relative sentence, it stands as near as possible to the word it
modifies.
1. Pisistratus primus Homeri librosj eonfusoa anteoy sic disposuisse dicitur,
ut nunc habemus. C. — 2, Siepe homines rotumemj bono consilioa dHs
immortalihus datam^ in fraudem malitiamque convertunt. C.
31. But when a participial clause is equivalent to a sentence
beginning with a conjunction, it is sometimes inserted in the prin-
cipal sentence, sometimes placed before it, sometimes after it, as
its relation to the principal sentence requires.
1. Eg3rptii et Babylonii, in camporum paten tium eequoribus habUanUs,
( = qvum hab.) omnem curam in siderum cognitione posuenint. C. —
2. PerdUis ( = licet perd.) rebus omnibus, tamen ipsa virtus se sustentare
potest. C. — 3. Brutus Consul ita proelio uno accldit Yestinorum res,
ut dilaberentur in oppida, se defensuri ( = ut defend.). L»
Exercise 6.
[P means that the sentence is to be turned into a participial clause.]
32. ° My reputation being lost, nothing* remains* but that I
[§4. 88-85. PROPER NAMES. 241
should die by my own hands. I gladly receive the honours^
offered to me for' having saved the state. They all^^y ta the
town to defend themselvesP ©there. Be sure* not to
neglect your AeaZ^^, which is now re-established. p Can
any one cure a body, that is wora-outP by such*' labours?
Who doubts, that such* opinionsy so deeply* iinplanted, so long
entertained/ are very hard to root up ?^ The exafnple of a man
p who makes gloiy his first object^ is not to be followed.
1 nihil • alitid *—ni8i, > See i. 83. ^ ob. Say ; ^ on account of the
republic saved.' *air«. See Df. (1), 118. ^ C (1), 10. « tampmitus,
7 vetxiatus : the word for (M which refers to the superiority of age. Ddd. anii'
yww. 8 Df. (1), 93.
§ 4. Proper Names.
33. A proper name generally precedes its apposition.
1. Ex prsepositio : tis syilaba : flitera. — 2. Cato^ vir clarissimus. — Z.Lemru^
insula.
34. But if the attention is to rest upon the apposition, or if it
has a nearer relation to some preceding notion, it stands first.
1. Ejus doctor Plato triplicem finxit animum. C (because the ejus refers
to XenocraUs in the former sentence.) — 2, Homo mirificus, Dionysius
{that wonderfvX person^ Dumyaiua),
Exercise 7.
35. I will make no objection' to your hissing off the stage
othat very bad actor' Balbus. I remember that Pamphilus, my
host, said' that he would not come. You (sing,) have heard Q.
IVfinucius Rufiis say, that king Antiochus lodged^ athishouse'
«> w h e n at Syracuse.* Verres || invited Antiochus, king of Syria,
to supper. I hear that the excellent Lucilius,^ a friend of mine,
is suffering from a disease that must end fatally. I am vexed that
Rutilius, a man p who has deserved well of me, should be living
on such con£jied means. I fear that Satureius, an excellent man,
a.nd oone who has deserved extremely. well of the state, will
l>e brought into danger of his life. It is your ° business to be-
seech the conqueror to spare the l^e of Pamphilus, your host.
342 ANTITHETICAL WORDS. [§ 5. 36-40.
Your connectXon' Rutilius swore that he owed his Ufe to me : his
father' Numantius^ would j;iot beg Caesar to spare mine.
^ Df. (1), 19. ^ hiatrio ( = ' atagt^layer ') implies something of depreciation.
» Df. (1), 2. 4 dtDeraari. s Df. 9. • ajinis,
7 The accent oyer father shows that it is to precede the proper name.
§ 5. Antithetical Wards,
36. From 7, it follows that antithetical words or notions will
naturally often stand, the one at the beginning, the other at the
end of the clause.
1. Necesaiiaiia inventa antiquiora sunt, quam voluptatia. C. — 2. Errart
mehercule malo cum Platone, quam cum istis vera aenHre, C.
37. If the antithetical notions consist of more than one word
(each answering to one of the other set), the order of the first set
is very oflen reversed in the second.
38. If the antithetical notions are in different sentences, they
stand,
(a) Either both at the beginning ? > ^t • .- ^
) ' ^ , , , , ^ ^ > of their respective clauses :
(b) Or both at the end ) ^
(c) Or the one at the end of its clause, the other at the begin-
ning ; tha order of the first being generally reversed in the second,
if they consist of several words.
(a) ShUti malorum memoria torquentur ; aapientea bona preeteriUij grata re-
cordatione renovata, delectant. C. (ab — ab.)
(a, 5)Multi in arnicia parandia adhibent curam : in arnvda d^endia negUgentet
auni. C (ab — a 6.)
(c) t. Ut cupidUatibtta principum etvitiia infici solet tota civitas : sic emendari
et corrigi cantinentid. C. — 2. Metuo ne aceUraf-e dlcam in te, quod pro
Milone dicam pU. C,{aby^b a.)
39. When a substantive is repeated in a sentence, the two
cases generally stand close together.
Oba, Not always : e. g nihil aemper JUrrtt : cetaa awxedit <Btatu C. in
sentences of the kind to which .this rule applies, the pron. 'another'
might generally be substituted for the second substantive, *one* being
added to the first. * Man kills man* := * one man kills another,*
1. Fir virum legit— 2. Ex domo in domum migrare.— 3. Diem ex die ex-
spectare.— 4. Arma armia propulsare.
40. These forms will be indicated thus :
ah—a b will indicate that the order is to be retained ; a b X 6a that it is to be
reversed.
§6. 41,42.] SECONDARY EMPHASIS. 243
Obs. The inverted order is called Chiasmus, and is thefavouriU form fbr an-
tithetical sentences.
Ohs, These rules are not invariably observed : e, g, Rerum
copia verborum copiam gignit. C Pausanias magnam belli
gloriam turpi morte maculavit. Nep, Iniqu i ss imam pacem
justissimo bello antefero. C.
Exercise 8.
[Obs, When ' o n e ' is to be omitted (» o n e), 'another' must be translated
by a case of the substantive that follows one.->oThen indicates that
the question is to be asked by an.]
41. I don't see, how past pleasures* can assuage' present evils
(abxba). I confess that the judgment of the generality* differs'
from my judgment. Laws* punish^ the wicked, defend and pro-
tect* the good. The opinion* which* you' are implanting in my
mind, Rutilius is rooting up.' The opportunity* which* you are
seizing, Caius has let slip.' The more difficult it is to acquire a
knowledge of heavenly things,' the more do they kindle ^ i n u s
the desire of knowing' o them. It is one' thing to be unanimously
acquitted, another to escape by a sentence^^ purchased by bribery
{ab — ab). Do you o t h e n believe, that the mind is strengthened
by pleasure, o a n d weakened by continence 1* (abxba). Arms
must be resisted by arms (39, 4). Is it « t h e n true that •one poet
always envies ^another? I by Hercules had rather be
condemned* than acquitted* by a sentence^^ purchased by bribery.
' Sedare. 3 vulgug, 8 dissentvrt (a quH re). ^ supplicuj^ <iffictrtK
Dod. tueri: or I. 374. ^ Invert. I. 30 (cQ. 7 < heavenly things, the
more difficult knowledge they admit of (haJberU),' <&c. ^ cognosccre,
» I. 38. i*> See Judgment.
§ 6. Secondary Emphasis : position of words occurring in two
clauses,
4^. In a sentence of some considerable length a word receives
a slight emphasis or prominence by being placed just before or
afler a pause.
For instance, ju^t after an apposition clause that belongs to the subject. In
fact, the beginning or end of enj group of words is a slightly emphatic
position.
244 SECONDARY EMPHASIS. [§ 6. 43-45.
1. Oratoris nomen apud antiques in Grscia | majori quadam vel copi&, vel
glori& floruit. C. — 2. Ccelius talis tribunus plebis fait, ut nemo contra
civium perditorum popidarem turbulentamqtie denuntiam | a senatu et a
bonorum causa stieterit libentius. C.
43. A word that is the subject or object of two sentences should
generally precede both.
1. Hoatea^ ubi primum nostros equites conspexerunt, impetu facto, celeriter
nostros perturbaverunt. C<b8.~2. Qutm^ ut barbari incendium efifugisse
Yiderunt, telis eminus missis, interfecerunt. Nep.
The position of a subject at the head of a sentence before the conjunction
of an accessory sentence is so common, that it is often found there, even
when it ia not the subject of the principal sentence also.-
1. Hie etsi crimine Pario est accusatus, tamen alia fuit causa damnationis.
Ncp, — 2. Romani postquam Garthaginem venerunt tum ex Cartha-
giniensibus unus, &c.
44. A word that is the subject of one sentence and the object
of another, should generally stand before both (as belonging to
the principal sentence) and be represented in the accessory sen-
tence by the proper case of w, eo, id.
1. Rex Prusias, quum Hannibali apud eum exsulanti depugnari placeret,
negabat se audere. ( When Hannibal^ who tpas residing at an exile with.
King Prusias, vnshed^ &c. he said — — &c.) C— 2. BoioSy petentibua
^duis, quod egregii virtute erant cogniti, ut in finibus suis collocarent
concessit. Ccbs.
Exercise 9.
45. If the Boii* had sued for peace^ they would have obtained
it. If Caius does' this, he will endanger his reputation. Dio-
nysius* having seen me at Rome, left nothing undone* to
bring me into odium. Could" my favourite, your connection,'
Rutilius, upon hearing this< (P^-) a^lmost die with laughter 1
When your fa vourite' Saufeius was staying with* my friend
Lucilius,* othelatter used to get an appetite by walking
(44). When Metellus* was at Athens, he * used to devour litera-
ture with ^that wonder ful" person' Dionysius.
1 * ShaU have done. ' « Df. Pt. I. 18. » affinis, < Abl. Absol.
s ajmd qtiem deversari, to stay with any body for a time as a guest. < funno
nUrifiicua, ^
§ 7. 46-51.] ON THE POSITION OF SUM. 245
§ 7. On the position of Sum.
46. Sum, as the mere logical copula, stands either between the
subject and predicate, or after them both.
Homo est mortalis : or homo mortaliB est
47. Sum, when it precedes both subject and predicate, is more
than the mere copula, and expresses existence emphatically [=
* exists :' * there w.']
Est homo mortalis {man U undoubtedly vnortal).
In est necesfe thereat* is emphatic {=*i8 abadlvtdy necessary .*') or ' mitff «n-
falliblyJ
1. Non vident id se cupere, quod fiigitivo alicui aut gladiatori concedi tU
necesse. C— 2. Se esse tertium ilium Comelium, ad quern regnum hviva
urbis pervenire esset necesse. C,
48. Sum, when uneihphatic, should generally be placed after
an emphatic word.
Hence is it hot placed after enimf auUmf Ac, except when it is em-
phatic.
1. Postquam divitisB honor! esse ccspere, &c. C — 2. Haec conficta arbitror a
poetLaesse, C— 3. Ut a te paulo e«< ante dictum. C-^. Natura est ipsa
fabricata. C. — 5. In eoque colendo sita yits est honestas omnis. C.
49. On this principle esse is often placed after its governing
verb ; especially after such verbs as affirm or deny existence,
such as credo, nego, ajo, volo, veto.^
1. Is igitur versum in oratione vetat esse, C, — 2. Defensum neget esse. C. —
3. Ctuos equidem credo esse, Ac C,—4. Ut socios honore auctiores vdit
esse. C.
50. Esse in compound infinitives very frequently precedes a
hyperdtssyllable participle ; the participle often standing at the
end of its clause. ^
Abs te esse liberatas: per te esse recreatas; latrocinia esse dqmlisa: esse
adepios: operam esse ponendam (but, prorogaius esse videatur) — ^all in a
small portion df one letter (Epp. ad Quint. Frair. lib. i. 1).
51. The est of a compound tense often stands after its parti-
ciple, at the end of a clause.
1. Nihil amplius desiderarem hoc statu, qui mihi Jam partus est. €.—2.
Quae tamen (ut in mails) acerbitati aanUiponmda est. C.
^ By no means always : omniradone tueare, ut etM qnam beatissimos veKib
Spp. ad Qrnnf. Frair. lib. i. 1.
246 PRONOUNS. [§ 6. 52-^5.
Exercise 10.
52. Dionysius, who says that virtue is not productive of plea-
sure, is blamejd^ by many. Caius denies that gain should be
pursued as a first olject. He says that this should be the first
object with those who are placed over others,' that those who are
under their command' should be as happy ^as possible.^ I
believe that the boy is a liar.* He says that pleasure is not to
be our first object. All cry -out, that this very false* man
^is not to be believed upon his oath. He promised that he would
° place no obstacle ^in the way of accomplishing so
great an. object.''^ Are you' o t h e n going to feel affrovited at
this ? They teach ° us, that that opinion should be given up.
^ Dod. reprehendere. ^ To be placed over others, praeeaae aliis. Indie
B To be under any body's command, in cujua imperio ease. * I. 410. p. 144.
s mendaXj adj. < mendacUnmua. 7 rea.
a
1. Tuae suavissimsB littersB
2. Tuae littersB suavissimse
3. Litterse tuae suavissimas
§ 8. Pronouns.
58. When a substantive has both an adjective and adjective
pronoun with it, there are six possible positions, without sepa.
ration.
b
4. Suavissimas tuae litteras
5. Suavissimae litterae tuas
6. LittersB suavissimie tuae.
(a) If both the predicates are emphatic, the forms 2. 5. should probably he
pr^erred.
0?) There may be two adjective pronouns and an ac^ectiYe : e. g. <uum hoc
Buburbanuni Gymnasium. C De, Orat. i. 1, 21 {end).
(a) ExampUa qfform l(tDhu^.xa the Engliah order) are : in hac nostrfi actione
(C. De Orat, iii. 59) : suis lenissimis postulatis {Ceea. B. C. i. 5) : in
meo gr&vissimo casu (C ad Fam. iv. 6, 1) : in hac praeciarft epistolk (C.
dc i^Yn. ii. 31).
54. If the substantive ha» a demonstrative pronoun and two
adjectives joined by et, ^c, the most usual place of the pronoun
is after the first adjective.
CroMiw Aic et concre^tM aer. C
Exercise 11.
55. Do not pester o t h a t excellent man with your threatening
§ 9. 56-59.] PRONOUNS. 247
letters. He never answered a single word* to my very kindly
expressed^ letters, *^ I cannot but^ return some answer to
your very acceptable letters. Those wrong opinions oofyours
must be rooted-up out of your mind. Is it <>the part of a
Christian to spend all his life in making gain ? You must strive
to retain* that great reputation ^of yours. You must take
care* lest your so-great repiUution should be endangered. No
obstacle shall be placed by me (°in the way of a c com-
plishing) this so great and difficult an object.^
Is it then the part of a Christian to increase this unpopu-
larity* of mine ?
^ Nullum unquam verbum, ^ humaniasimuB, ^ Df. Pt. 1. 18.
* Pt. I. 75. 5 cavirc • See Odium.
§ 9. Pronouns continued,
56. Quisque with a superlative or ordinal numeral follows the
adjective.
Optimua guisqtie : altissimaTtuBgue.flumina: quinto ^uo^u^ verbo.
Quisque is generally placed immediately after a case of sui or
suus referring to it.
Placet Stoicis suo guamque rem nomine appellare. C.
57. (a) Quidam generally follows its noun, whether substantive
or adjective : but
58. (h) Quidam precedes its noun, when there is an opposition
between the quidam and some others : and in other cases where
the quidam is very emphatic.
(c) For instance, where the quidam means *8ome thai leouldrunne^ * some
we know of*
(a) 1. interim Agyllius quidam yincula lazavit. Nep.-^2. Sed audio mt^tm
quendam in urbe timorem esse. C,
(b) Clamor iste indicat esse quosdam cives imperitos, sed non muUos. C.
(c) Otium prsestaturi videntur, si quidam homines patientius eorum poten-
tiam ferre potuerint. C.
59. The ille of celebrity follows its substantive, if there is no
adjective with it : if there is, it generally stands between the two.
Oba. Not always : e. g. illam acerbUsimam ministram Prsetorum avari-
tiae calumniam. C. Ep. ad Q. Fratr. i. 1, 8. Herculem Xenophontium
iUumi. C. Xenophon Socraticus ille. C.
1. Habetur vir egregius L. PauUus UU, qui, &c. C— 2. Omnis ilia vis et
quasi flamma oratoris, &c. C— 3. Antipater ilU Sidonius. C, — 4. Mne-
.larchus, auditor Panaetii illiua tui. C.
248 PBONOUNS. [§9. 60-r64.
60. AUquis in connection with another adjective generally
takes the second place.'
Bene dicere non habet definUam aliquam^ regionem. ,
61. (a) When its substantive has no other adjective or pronoun
with it, aliquis generally follows the substantive, when both are
unemphatic ; but (h) precedes it, when either is to receive promi-
nence or emphasis.
Obs, Aliquia is emphatic and precedes the substantiye, when it means
' 8onu at all events* ' some if not much :* e. g. qui seduHtatem mali poete
duxerit aliguo taraen prsemio dignam, &c. C.
(a) 1. Aut de pingendo pictor aliquis diserte dizerit aut Bcripseiit. C. — 2. Si
hujusce rei ralio aliqua, Ac. C.
(5) 1. Ejus facti, si non bonam, at aliguam rationem afierre. C.~2. Quid
mihi — tamquam alicui GrtBcuU^ otioao etloquaci — quasstiuncuiam^— poni-
tisl C.~3. Timide tamquam ad o/iguem scopulum' libidinis, sic tuam
mentem ad philosophiam appulisti. C.
62. Two pronouns, or an adverb with the pron. from which it
is derived, are generally brought close together.
Obs. Not always : even when the pronouns relate to the some person :
e. g. "cum quibus te non tuum judicium aed temporum vinda eonjimxe-
runt." C. Fam. x. 6.
Equites, sine duce relictii aUi a^in civitates suas dilapsi sunt. L,
63. (a) When ipse with a case of sui stands for Mmseff'y &c., it
generally follows the case of sui : but (h) when there is to be
particular emphasis on the subject^ ipse precedes, and is used in
the nominative, even though the opposition intended is between
oneself and somebody else,
(a) 1. Deforme est, de se ip«um pnedicare, falsa prsesertim. C— 2. Non egeo
medicini ; me ipse consolor. C. — 3. Lentulum mihi ipsi antepono. C.
(6) 1. Si quis ipse sibi inimicus est, Ac, — 2. Jpsi se curare non possunt.
[Sometimes, however, the ipse follows : si te ipse contineas. C]
64. In other words? : whenever what is asserted of the agent
with respect to himself is a strange thing, ipse is to be in the nom.
and precede sui, even when the meaning is himself, opposed to
others (of whom the assertion might be expected to be made).
^ For ^any others* alius ullus is more common (I think) than ullus
alius^ but this depends, of course, on the relative emphasis of * any * or ' other J
To express it strongly, separate the adjectives, as : non ullam rem aliam
txtimescens nisif &c. C,
^ In unus aliquis this order should be observed, unless there is another a4i*
(e. g. aliquis tmus pluresve), or the aliquis is emphatic.
§ 10. 65, 66,] TH£ RELATIVE. 249
Eaiercise 12.
['The ° famous,' 'the ^greaV <^c., to be translated by iOe.]
65. I far prefer* this suburban gymnasium ^of yours (53, /9)
to the o famous Academy and Lycseum. Every body loves
himself.* Every one is dear to himself. The longest letters are
o always' the most agreeable. To each virtue its o w n • pecu-
Iiar7 praise is due.* Does it ^ t h e n become an orator almost to
die with laughing every third word ? They cry-out, that each
man must abide by his own judgment. Would you^ dare to
refuse to abide by the judgment of the ^ g r e a t Plato ? I must
explain, what* was the opinion of that god © o f mine, Plato.
That Epicurus ^ o f yours boasts that he had no master. Epicu-
rus says that he attended' ^the lectures of. a certain
Pamphilus at Samos. It cannot be denied, that some^ corpuscles
are smooth, others rough, othersround (ab X ha). Do
you ^ t h e n believe, that this immense and most beautiful world
was made* of* certain corpuscles, by no natural compul-
sion , ^'^ but by a certain fortuitous concourse ? Let us honour
this Oman's* diligence with some reward, if not a great
o o n e . * * Do you o t h e n compare me to some Scythian (61, h) ?
Isit^then like a philosopher^' to defend pugnaciously some
doubtful opinion ©or other?
1 Longt anteponere. > I. 363. Begin with ipse, > I. 399, b,
* peculiar, propriua. To be due, deberi, ^ quisnam, < to attend a person's
lectures, audirt aliquem. Turn the verb into the passive, ' tocis heard by him,*
f quidam. ^ ejfficert. * ex. i'' 'no nature compelling.' "if
with no {rum) great, yet (oQ with some reward.* (See Ex. 61, 6.) is Say :
'of a philosopher.'
§ 10. The Relative.
66. (a) The relative (except when it refers to w, ea, id) should
stand as near as possible to its antecedent : {h) the place of the
antecedent being often determined with this view.
(o) Xerxem per literas certiorem fecit id agi, ut pons, qxtem iUe in Hellesponto
fecerat, dissolveretur. Nep,
(6) Bellum grave et periculosum vestris vectigalibus atque sociis a duobus
potentisslmis regibus infertur, MUkridate et THgrane; quorum alter, Ac,
C,
11*
250 THE RELATIVE. [§11.67-71.
67. This applies only to strictly relative clauses : not to qui =
the demonstr. is, with et, nam, igUur, autem, dz;c.
68. Appositions, and even single adjectives (especially super.
latives), that in English precede the relative clause, are in Latin
generally placed in that clause.
Hence 'the very celebrated general Epaminondas, in whose house' tpould
be : Epaminondas, cujus eeleberrimi imperatoria in domo, <&c. * The im-
mortal glory which the Greeks acquired,' gloria, quam immortalein Grseci
retulerunt. So : ' a city tohicht* quae urbs, &c. — ' the city ke first visited^*
quam urbeni primam adiit. — ' an opinion which^* quae sententia, &c.y {city
pnd opinion being in apposition to something preceding.)
~ Exercise 13.
69. In the same year Cumse, a city* which* the Greeks were
then in possession of,^ is taken by the Campanians. The Amanus
divides Syria from Cilicia, a mountain which was full of ^our
constant* enemies." I hope that you will' recover from the very
severe disease, with which you are now afflicted. I hope that
you will' keep the many* and veiy beautiful* promises, which you
made me. The very great* and beautiful* reward, with which I
have been presented, wonderfully* delights me. That Athena-
goras of Cyme,* who had dared to export corn in a f a m i n e ,*»
was scourged* with rods.®
^ To be in possession of, tenere. ^ Constant, sempitemus : to end the
sentence. ^fore id . , . * mirifice, * Cynueufi. ^ virgia etedL
§ 11. The Relative continued.
70. (a) When the subject is defined by ille and a relative
clause, it is often placed in, and at the end of, the relative claiise :
so, (V) when a relative clause stands before the principal clause
(the relative being in the nominative), the antecedent often ter-
minates the relative clause.
(a) Ille, qui in TimsBo mundum sedificavit Platonis deu9.
(6) QuBB perspicuam omnibus veritatem continet proposition nihil indiget ap-
probationls. C
71. When the relative clause precedes the principal one, the
rel. may give up its usual place (as the first wbrd) in favour of a
notion that is to be made prominent.
§11.72-75. THE UELATIVE. 251
Tributa vix, infoBmiB Pompeii quod satis sit, efficiunt. C.
72. Of two cases of qui, aa oblique case precedes a nomi-
native.
Senatus ille, qttem qui ex regibus constare dixit, unus vcram speciem Ranuad
senattis cepit. £#.
73. When qui refers to something preceding, no conjunctions
can go with it but sedy et (before), tamen,qiudem, que (after).
1. Perturbat me, C. Ceesar, illnd interdum : quod tamerij quiUn te penitus
recognovi, timere desino. C. — ^2. Morositas senum habet aliquid excusa-
tionis, non illius quidem justee, sed quoB probari posse vldeatur. C.
74. Other conjunctions, such as autem, t)era, enim, igitur,
cannot stand with qui, unless its reference is to something that
follows.
1. QutB autem secundum naturam essent, ea sumenda et quadam aestima-
tione dignanda docebat. C. — 2. Qui igitur adolescens, nondum tantft
glorlE prsBditus, nihil unquam nisi severissime et gravissime fecerit, ia eft
ezistiniatione, eaque aetatesaltaviti C— 3. Quorum verv patres aut ma-
jores aliquS gloriH prsstiterunt, it student plerumque eodem in genere
laudis excellere. C— 4. QutB ergo ad vitam tuendam pertinent, partim
sunt in animo, <&c. C.
Exercise U.
[r.Jl means that the rel. clause is to stand first (see Part I. 30) : a. v. that the
sentence is to be translated by the active voice.]
75. That opinion^ ^of yours, which is injurious^ to us, must
be rooted-up out of your mind. That Rupilius,i who for so many
years had sat at the helm of the state, had Jled away secretly,
(r. f.) Let those therefore, to whom we all owe our lives, be
buried with military honours, (r.y.) Will therefbrei that Lu-
cilius,* who is prepared for his fate, whatever it may he, fly
away secretly? (^'/O You are therefore « driving from the
helm of the state those, to whom both you and 1 owe our Uves.
{r.f,) The General who had so often saved the state, was suf-
fered by his fellow-citizens to be deprived of burial, (a* v.)
We have scarcely corn* enough* for a month. Let <) those
therefore i who have kept back their com, be fined a sum-of-
money.3 Peace must be sued for ; which those who sue for it
(yw^), will obtain.
1 LKBdere, « Say : * which may be enoogh for (*^*) a mon th.* • Se«
example (71). ^ ptiewdd. abl.
252 IlfTEREOGATIVES. PREPOSITIONS. [§ 12, 13. 76-79*
^ 12. InterrogeUives.
76. (a) Interrogatives, except ne, take the first place in an indi-
rect question that follows the principal sentence : but,
77. (b) In direct questions, or indirect questions that precede
the principal sentence, the interrogative sometimes yields the first
place to an emphatic notion.
(a) Queritur, cur doctissimi homines de mazimis rebus dissentiant. C.
(6) 1. DU utrum sint, necne sint, quBsritur. C— 2. Quidl Alexaandrvm
PA<r«Bum gtio animo vixisse arbitramur 7 C,
Exercise 15.
78. What ? is not nearly i thewholeheaven* filled* with
the human race ? But whether these numbers* are poetical,
or of* some other kind, must be seen next.' When Socrates*
was asked,* whether he did not think Archelaus,* the son of
Perdiccas, happy ; I don't know, said he, for I have never con-
versed with him.' What ? did not the ° f a m o u s Cato of Utica*
die by his own hands ? What 1 with what feelings do we think
that Lucilius of Ariminum saw his mistake {V)? I wish to
remark^ ° h e r e , what® a calamity over-confidence* usually^" is.
1 Ramshom says : compUrCj to fill completely ; impure^ to fill what is hollow,
empty; opplere^ to fill to the brim, to fill to OTerflowing, to cover a surface by
filling. Nearly so Jentzen.: plenum quod eat ad satietatem dicUur c o mplet u m,
expletuta: r epletum est, quod exhaustum eratj ut fossa: oppletusadsu-
perficienij refertua^ differ tu «, confertuBadspatiuminieriuspertinent.
3 ear. B deincepa. * * Socrates, when it had been inquired of him * (aubj.),
&c., qtuerere ex aliquo. ^ coUoqui cum aUquo. ^ UOeenaia, adj. — so
Ariminenaia below. 7 XAbet interponere, ^ C. (1), 21. Df. (1), 50.
» nimiafducia, *" ' is wont, to be.*
§13. Prepositions.
79. Prepositions (except versus and tenus) generally stand be-
fore their nouns, (a) When the substantive has an attributive
with it, the preposition stands between the attributive and its sub-
stantive, when either of them is emphatic, (b) When the attrib-
utive is a rel. pron., the preposition generally stands between the
pron. and its substantive.
§ 13. 80-84.] PREPOSITIONS. 253
(a) 1. Magnd cum cur& atque diligentU scripsit. C— 2. Romani Uoratium
accipiunt eo rmajore cum gaudio^ quo prope metum res fuerat.
(6) In some expressions the preposition nearly always takes the middle place .
e. g. qiL& in re ; quam o& rem s eddt cautd,
80. Even when the relative has no substantive with it, the pre-
position often follows it.
1. Senatus, qwa ad sbleret, referendam censuit. C. — 2. Homo disertus iion
intelligit eum, quern, contra dicit, iaudari a se, Ac. C. — 3. Socii putandi
sunt, quo8 inter res communicata est. C. — 4. Res, qud de agitur. C.
81. Cum is always appended to me, te, se, nobis, vohis, qui
(= quo) : and also to quo, qua, quihus, when the cum is entirely
unemphatic.
1. Maxime cavendum est, ut eos, quibuaeum sermonem conferimus, et
vereri et diUgere videamur. C.~2. Ira procul absit, cum (emphatic) qu&
nihil recte fieri, nihil considerate potest. C. — 3. NoU adversum eos me
velle ducere, cum quibus {ppp. to adversum eos^ ne contra te arma
ferrem, Italiam reliqui. Nep. 25, 4.
82. When a substantive governed by a preposition has other
words attached to it, these words are often placed between the
preposition and its noun.
1. Erat olim mos ut faciles essenttn mum cuique tribuendo. C— 2. Honors
digni cum ignominid dignia non sunt comparand!. C.
A preposition is sometimes separated from its noun by que, ve,
vero, aviem, tamen, quidem, enim.
1. Senaim hanc consuetudinem et disciplinam jam antea minuebamus ; poot
vero Sullse victoriam penitus amisimus. C — 2. So : poat autem Alexan-
dri mortem. iVcp.^S. Post enim Chrysippum. C.
83. Even in prose, per in adjurations is separated from its case
by the ace. pronoun of the person addressed, the verb adjure,
beseech, implore being omitted.
Nolite, judices, per Yosfortunas^ per liberos vestros, inimicis meis, lis prsB-
sertlm quos ego pro vestrd salute suscepi, dare Isetitiam. C»
Exercise 16.
84. On these matters I would wish* you (pi.) to deliberate*
with Pomponius, with Camillus, with whomsoever' it shalt seem
ogood to you. As to* him, in whose o hands* all" power*
is <)lodged, I see nothing to fear.' Epicurus showed himself
a sufficiently apt ^ s c h o 1 a r in <> r ac e i v i n g • this nerveless^
and effeminate" opinion ; after him Philonymus the Rhodian ||
254 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 14. 85-89.
asserted that to be without pain is the summum bonum. They fix
a certain limit,' beyond which, ^they say, we ought not to
advance. Neither in those who frame constitutions,*^ nor in
those who wage wars, is the desire of oratorical power** wont to
arise. I believe that a limit in sepulchres is properly*' required :
for to what expenses that ipatter'^ has already advanced, you see
in the tomb of C. Figulus. Pomponius is going to set out for Sicily :
a matteri concerning which I have || fished out agreat deaP^
from Hortensius.
1 Fe/im with subj. {vi omitted). ^ The dimple relative. 8 dt.
< To be in any body's hands, penea aliquem. tsat, ^ Df. (1), 108. ' ad
aliquid aatia docilem at prcehere. 7 enervatua. B muLicbria, > mo-
dumadhibere, ^° conatUtLere remjmblicam, ^^ dicendi. ^^ rede.
13 rea. i* multa.
§ 14. Conjunctions.
85. A conjunction stands at the head of the clause to which it
belongs.
86. But the relative or demonstrative pronoun, and any em-
phatic notion, may precede any but the co-ordinate conjunctions,
ety ac, afque ; vel, aut ; sed ; at, verum ; nam, namque, etenim ;
quamohrem, quapropter ; ita, itaque, sic, &c.
I. Id ille ut audivit, domum reverti noluit. Nep. — 2, Huie ai paucos puta-
tis affines esse, vehementer erratis. — 3. CommMitarioaqitoadcmiAri^otelia
yen! tU auferrem. C. — {So in aubordinate aerUencea.) 4. Atilias Regulus
aenierUiam tu diceret, recusavit. C. — ^5. Grorgise Leontino tantus
honos habitus est a Greecis, aoli ut ex omnibus Delphis non inaurata
Btatua, sed aurea statueretur. C.
87. When two conjunctions come together, the conjunction of
the principal precedes that of the subordinate sentence.
Itaqucy ai aut requietem natura non quaereret, aut earn posset ali& quadam
catione consequi, facile pateremur. C.
88. Quam (Jwio) with an adjective is often separated from the
adjective, for the purpose of adding emphasis to it.
Ut credam ita esse, quam est id eonguum? C.
Exercise 17.
89. When he^ heard this,* he sufiered nobody to rest, I am
come to recompense you with some reward, if not a great <' o n e
§ 15. 90-92.] CONJUNCTIONS. 255
{a, Ex, 3). When he heard this,* he uttered the name of Quinc-
tilius in a very pathetic manner. I will call upon Caius, whom,*
though I think he will kee^ his promises, I will nevertheless bind
by an oath. Do you ^ t h e n think those evils are to be feared,
which are over in a moment of || time ? || Listen to what that
Caius (of) yours* has done. If Demetrius has an || audience,
it will be all over* with the army. Though Caius* owes his Ufe
to me, yet he endeavours to bring me into odium. If therefore
(87, h) they think that they owe their lives to me, I should be
honoured °by tJiem with some* reward.* If therefore (87, h)
they have derived any advantage from my care, let them confer
some*, reward* upon me.
^ Actum 6986 de.
§ 15. Conjunctions, — Autem, enim, igitur, with esse.
90. Obs. IgUurj tamen, ergo^ deinde, prtettreOf Uaqiu^ take the first place,
i^hen they modify the whole clause, and not merely any particular notion
of it. When they modify a particular notion, only or especially, they
follow that notion, or the first and most important of the words by which
it is expressed. In Cicero, however, Uaque always takes the first place,
igitvT never.
91. If esse or the subject begins the sentence, autem, enim,
igitur, take the second place.
1. E^st enim efTectrix multarum et magnarum voluptatum. C — 2. ISunt au-
tem clariora indicia naturae. C.~3. Id atUem est perfectum offi-
cium. C.
92. If the sentence begins with the predicate or non, num, nemo,
nihil quis ;^ or if esse is emphatic; esse (generally) takes the
second, and the particle the third place.
1 Q^^s enim 6st, dkc, occurs Tuac, iv. 2, and elsewhere. The thing to be con-
sidered is ; whether the question or assertion relates to the existence of the
thing or to its nature. " Q,uo minus recte dicatur quid enim est^ nihil enim
eat, nulla obstat ratio. — Discrimen proficiscitur ex naturfi verbi ease, quod, quum
non plenam significationem praestet, cum nomine conjungitur in unam notion-
em, et eneliticorum more comprehenditur uno accentu : sed ubi significat tere
esse, ex8tare, attrahit inteirogandi particulam. — Qui quaerit, quid eat enim? aut
exspectat responsionem nihil ease, yel nihil cdiudeaae; aut anreavere ait, dubitat,
etui interrogat, quid enim eat? de certo genere rei quaerit, vel, interrogatioiiifl
256 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 15. 93-99.
1. Dieendum eat enim quod sentio. C— 2. Nihil est enim aliud, quamobrem,
Ac. C. — 3. Quitf eat emm qui, dc. 7 — 4. Nemo eat igUur^ qui
93. (a) A preposition throws these particles into the third
place, unless it is emphatic ; (j^) when they may stand between
the preposition and its noun.
(a) Ex fuLc igtiur illud efficitur. C.
(6) 1. Post vero Sullas victoriam (hanc consuetudinem) penitus amlaimus.
C. — 2, Heril)u6 jam pridem est rejectus : poet emm Chryaippum non est
disputatum. C.
94. Sometimes est follows a preposition and its case^ and thus
the particle is thrown forward to the fourth place.
Ab ed eat enim interfectus. C.
95. Qtuyque, quidem (which always follow the word they belong
to) also throw autem, enim, igitur to the third place.
Ei quoque enim proconsuli imperium in annum prorogabatur. L.
96. A partial exception to what is here said of quidem, arises
from the affection of the pronominal p&Tiicle^ quidem for a pronoun.
Thus in tibique persuade esse te quidem mihi ca7:issimumy sed
mutto fore cariorem, si, &c., the quidem, which properly belongs
to carissimum, has deserted to the pronoun.
97. So with other verbs the particle takes the third place, when
the verb has a word with it, from which it cannot well be sepa-
rated.
Non video atUem^ Ac. Num via igitur audire, Ac. 1
98. The post-positive conjunctions may separate a praenomen
from a cognomen, and even such a compound word as jusjuran-
dum, plebiscitum,
1. L, quidem PhiUppua gloriari solebat. C— 2. Rem vero pubUcam, — 3.
Juriaquejurcaidi. — 4. KogaXionihuB, pUbiave aeitia» r
Exercise 18.
99. For I must say how salutary^ re%ion is to men. For
some reason must be given of this, as it appears to you at least,*
strange counsel. For who is there, whose eats tliat report has
vi intentd, non hoc eaae^ vel proraua nihil eaae. Nam tota vis continetar nno
verbo quid, — Hoc ad alias quoque fonnas perUnet, quae verbum eat encliticum
nomini coDJunctum habent." {Band* Twra, ii. 400.)
§ 16. 100-103.] NQN. HAUD. 257
not reached ? I approve of that:^ for there is nothing from which
you can derive greater advantage. Be of good" courage :* for
there is nobody to eject you from possession. Do you wish there-
fore to listen to what that Pomponius* has done ? You see what
prudence, and how firm" a mind" there is need of; for o w e must
take the helm of the state. For who is there who denies, that you
both sit at the helm, as the saying is, and aboveall others^
watch over* the state ? ^W e waver'' and change ^ o u r opinion
even in clearer tMngs : for in these there is some obscurity. I
approve of that :^ for there is no rapidity^ which can come-into-
competition' with that*" of the mind.
^ To be salutary, aakUi esse 3 quideni, 8 laudo id quidem,
^ cmimus. 1 unum ex omnibus maxime. * prospieere with dat.
1 labare. * ceUriias. * contendere, ^^ The subst. must be repeated.
§ 16. Non. Hand.
100. (a) Non (or havd) generally stands before the word whose
notion it denies : thus when there is an (^position, it is always
prefixed to one of the antithetical words : but,
101. {h) Non (haud) takes the first place in negative senten-
ces that express a consequence, (hence so frequently with ergo,
igitur,) and (c) in hypothetical couclusions, when nisi is the con-
ditional particle.
(a) 1. Nan paranda nobis solum sapientia sed fruenda etiam. C. — 2. Otli
fructus est non contentio animi, sed relaxatio. C.
(6) Non igUur de improbo, s^ed de calUde improbo qusrimus. C.
(c) Non jam Troicis temporibus tantum laudis in dicendo TJlyssi tribuissei
Homerus, nm jam turn honos essct eloquentias. C.
102. Non (haud) mBy also take the first place, when the denial
is to be very emphatic ; especially in negative questions.
1. Non ego jam Epaminondse, non Leonidae mortem hujus morti antepono.
C.— 2. Quid bestis T non pro suo partu ita propugnant, ut vulnera reci-
piantl C.
103. The place of non in the case of e«/, &c., with a participle,
or of an auxiliary verb (with infin.) is next before est or the
auxiliary verb (when there is no antithesis).
258 COMPARATIVES, ETC. [§ 17. 104-106.
1. Hi ¥08, quoniam libere nan licet, tacite rogant, Ac, C— 2. Regolo run
fuU Jupiter metnendus, ne, &c. C — [When there is cmtitheaia^ the non
precedee the antithetical ieord.\ 3. Non modo— non detenitus, sed —
concitatuB est.— 4. Hanc epistolam cur non ecvndi vellm, causa nulla
est C
104. The place of non is optional, when it belongs to a pre-
dicate {esse being the copula), or when it belongs to a umversal
negative proposition with quis or qui.
1. Jove tonante cum populo agi non est fas. C. — 2. Nihil est, quod Dens
efficere rum possit. C — ^3. Nihil est enim, quod non alicubi esse cogatur.
C.
Exercise 19.
105. P should not have risked all' my fortunes,' unless I had
made you take an oath in words prescribed by me. 1' should not
have been hanishedy unless you had brought me into odium. You
shall not therefore receive any reward of your improbity from me.
I do not therefore consider myself to be ° t o o richly rewarded
for my great* labour. What therefore ©did Caius°do? did
not* he' receive from you the reward of his crimes ?" I shall not
therefore place much reliance on your promises. I know that
you favour me : 1 will not therefore bind you by an oath. Caius
would not have fallen into so great* a calamity* unless he had
ceased to be in favor with you. There is hardly any thing which
does not admit of the excuse of ignorance.
^ Say : 'for my so-great labour.' s Ask the question with non, which is
often used for nonne in Vehement interrogations. « ' See Dod. delictum.
§ 17. Comparatives, ^c.
106. In comparisons with quam, both the substantives connected
by quam often precede the comparative.
I. Adyentus hostium fuit eigris, quam urbi, terribUior. L. — 2. Maris aubita
tempeatas, quam ante proviso, terret navigantes vehementitis. C. — 3. Ex
multis judicari potest virtviis esse, quam cetatis^ cursum cderiorem. C. —
' 4. ThemistocUs nomen, quam SoUmis, est illustrius. C. — 5. Pompejusfuit
restiiuertdi mei, quam retinendi, studiosior. C. — 6. I^acere, quam sanaref
wmnem facilius est. Q.
§ 17. 107-112. COMPARATIVES, ETC. 259
107. A vocative is inserted after some words of the sentence.
Quum in omnibus causis gravibus, C. Ctewr, initio dicendi commoveri so-
leam vehementius. C.
108. Inquam also is inserted after some words ; as ait is, when
not followed bv an mfin. or sic^ ita, &c.
1. Te, inquU^ Appi, tuumque caput, Ac. L. — 2. Hoc te uno quo possum^ aii^
modo, fillia, in libertatem vindico. L,
109. If inquam has a nom., the verb generally stands first.
110. So with ut ait; ut narrat ; &c., the verb precedes its
nominative.
I. Sed dum palato quid sit optimum judicat, coeli, palatum (tU ait Ennitu)
non suspezit. C. — 2. Pacideianus aliquishoc animOf ut narrat JjueUiuSj
&c,
111. So miM crede (usually in this order), credo, opinor, puto,
esUistimo, (all four with or without ut,) qiuBso, ohsecro, are often
thrown parenthetically into the middle of a sentence.
1. Rubeo, mihi crede, sed jam scripseramf C— 2. Tranquillatis autem rebus
Romanis, remigravit Romam, ut opinor, L. Gottft et L. Torquato Goss. —
3. Nolite, chaecro vos, pati, mihi acerbiorem reditum esse, quam fuerit^
ille ipse discessus. C.
Obs. Crede mihi is by no means uneomnum in Cicero : the * believe* is
then emphatic. Thus, Jam enim dico meum ; antea, crede. nUM, subdubi-
tabam. — Cic ad AU, xiv. 5, 2. Crede may (hen stand at the head of its
clause; as, Crede, igUurmiki, Plance, omnea, &c. — Cic. Pam. x. 6.
Exercise 20.
112. It is easier to tie a knot, than to untie ©it. ©My return
was more bitter to me, than that departure itself.^ Lucilius was
honoured with a more splendid funeral than Demetrius. The
Boii fled to ° t h e i r camp in more complete disorder than the
iEdui. It is easier to make & promise than to perform it. Is it
not sometimes' a harder ©thing to perform a promise than to
make it I You ought to blush (111) believe me ; for you have
wrested these things from my hands. Do not, I beseech you, allow
this lucky opportunity to slip through your flngers,^ These
things, as I imagine, would not be in our power,* if you had not
let this lucky opportunity slip through your fingers* Terrour,
260 COMPARATIVES, ETC. [§''7. 112.
as Ennius says, banishes^ all* wisdom* from my mind. Separate*
yourself at length,* 1 beseech © y o u , from those, with whom not
your ^o w n judgment, but the || circumstances of the times have
united' you.
^ Rarius inUrdum quam tumnunquam esse memento. ^ See Hand.
> qnidmihiex animo expectorare. For ex animo others read exanitiuU9
Terror, pavor. * aejttngere, * aliquando, < conjungere.
PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION
TO
LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION.
II.
LONGER LATIN EXERCISES.
(On connecting propositions hy the relaUve pronoun, where in
English tpe should use a demonstrative.)
1. Propositions are in Latin often connected by the relative
quif qtuz, quod, where in English we should use and, for, hut,
now, &c., with the demonstrative.
2. (a) Nam et prsBtor pedestribus ezercitibus prsefuit, et prsfecttis classis res
magnas mari gessit. Qvxu ob catisas ( s= atque ob eas causas, ' and
for these reasons ') prsecipuus ei honos est habitus.
(&) Namque omnibus anus insolis pnefuit. ^In qud ( = nam in ed) po-
testate Pheras cepit, coloniamque Lacedeemoniorum. {Nep. ix. 1.)
3. The relative in these propositions is equivalent to the linem-
phatic is, ea, id, with et, autem, igitur ; or even nam, tamen, sed,
vero. If the demonstrative pronoun required is the more stroijgly
demonstrative hie, ille, or even if there would be any emphasis
on * is,^ the relative must not be used : nor if the conjunction
would be emphatic, e. g. Hague, ^rgo, at, verum, nempe, nimt"
rum, dec.
4. Whether is should be retained, or this construction "with the relative used,
depends on various considerations. Thus in Cic. Claent. 7 : Poetremo
tmiM, qui erat reliqutia DinetB fliija On. Magius est moriuus, . Is fecit
heredem ilium adolescentem Oppianicum. Here the * w V is retained
because a qui had so lately preceded.
5. The connection by the relative is very often used, when
there is a dependent or subordinate sentence, which is then placed
immediately after the relative : hence this qui very often precedes
a quum, postquam, ut, ubi.
262 EXERCISE I. I
6. Reddita indusarum ex spelundt bourn vox Herculem convertit. Qjum f
quum vadentem ad speluncam Cacus vi prohibere conatus esset, ictus
clavi fidem pastorum nequidquam invocans morte pccubuit ,{ImO')
7. When an English relative clause is followed by a subordi-
nate clause containing a demonstrative, or has such a clause
inserted in it, the relative is, in Latin, placed in this subordinate
clause (which then stands first), and either *is' is used in the
other clause or (if the pronoun is in the same case in both \
clauses) the pronoun is omitted.
8. An example or two will make this clear.
(a) ' A man {whom I should have spoken to), {if I had seen fttm).'
In Latin this would be :
* A man {wham if I had seen), (I should have, spoken to).'
(6) * A man by whose treachery I should have been ruined, if I had not dis-
covered U in time.*
In Latin :
' A man {whose treachery if I had not discovered in time), (I should have
been ruined by Uy ^
{e) Thus instead of
'Non vident id se cupere, quod (ai adepti sunt id) fugitive alicui ant
gladiatori concedi sit necesse,'
A Roman would haye written : '
' Non vident id se cupere, {qiuxi si adepti sunt) fugitive alicui aut giadia- ,
tori concedi sit necesse.* {Cic.) '
9. Hence never write qui, quum is, ^c, qui, quum ejus, &c.,
qui, quum ei, dz;c. ; but qui, quum — ; cujusquum — ; cm quum,
&c. So not qui, si ejus, &c., but cujus si, &c.
Exercise 1.
[See Pract. Intr. Part I. 441.]
Alexander died at Babylon, ° a m an who, if his life had been
a longer ° one, would have subdued the whole world.* Alexan-
der died at Babylon, ^ a m a n who, if a longer life had fallen-to-
his-lot,^ would have subdued the whole world. Alexander died
at Babylon, ^ a m a n who, if fate had kept'' him alive ° for a
longer ©time, would have suhdued the whole world. Alexander
died at Babylon, a man who, unless fate had taken from him his
life prematurely,* would have subdued the whole world. — His
death was the ruin of^allhis fellow-citizens, ' by whom he
was slain* because he wished to save them. I have very often
read that there is no evil** in death, o for that if any sense remains
ON RHETORICAL FIGURES. 263
afler it,i it ought to be considered immortality rather than death.
The powerj of conscience is great, and those who neglect itf be-
tray'' themselves. Philosophy contains the doctrine J both of duty
and of morality :™ those ^therefore who profess it seem to me
to support a very important character." King Eucratides reduced
India under his dominion, « but when he was returning thence, p
was slain on his march by his son.
* WoRij) should not be translated by mvndua except when the meaning !■
tmvDerst, Y^hen the earth or its countries are meant, orbia terras or terrarum
should be used ; the latter especially when there is reference to different coun-
tries, b Should you use contingU^ or accidit 7 ^ reacrvare. d immature,
• perdere, t civis. B Dod. inttrficere, h Part I. 161, 06«., and
end of 162. i ' in it.' The verb in the next clause should be subj., it being
the speech or sentiment of the person or persons from whom the narrator had
heard the opinion. Pt. I. 460 (6). J via, k indicare. Express
both ipse and miua.. Pt. I. 368. i diaciplina. ™ Say, ' of living well.'
" personam auatinire. <> in poteatatem redigere, P Use rel. adverb.-
recipert^
{On Rhetorical Figures,)
1. Geminatio, or the doubling of an emphatic word,
(a) CruXy cruse inquam misero et erumnoso parabatur. (C.)
2. Repetitio {iitavaq^oQa), when several clauses or members of
a sentence begin with the same word.
(a) NihUne te noctumam praesidium Palatii, nihil urbis vigilisB, nihil timor
populi, nihil consensus bonorum omnium, nihil hie munitissimus habendi
senatiis locus, nihil horum ora vultusque moverunti (C.)
3. Conversio {artiffjQoq>rj\ when several clauses or members of
a sentence end with the same word.
(a) Urbis vigilie nihil te movenint, timor populi nihil, consensus bonorum
omnium nihil, <&c.
4. Complexio is when several clauses or members of a sentence
both begin with the same word and end with the same word.
(a) Q^ia legem tulit 1 Rulhia, Quia majorem partem populi sufiraglis pro-
hibuit 7 Rullua. Qtna comitiis prsefuit 1 RxdLua. Quia decemviroB
quos voluit renuntiavit 7 RvUua. (C.)
5. Tradwcfeo,' when a word occurring in a clause, occurs again
(intentionally and as an ornament) in one or more subsequent
clauses.
264 ON BHETORICAL FIGUBES.
(a) Eum tu hjomirum appellas, qui si fuisset funnOf nunquam tarn crudelitei
vitam hominia petisset.
(6) Q,ui nihil habet in iriid jucundiofi vUdf is cum virtute vitam non potest
tollere. (C.) •
6. Polysyndeton (nolvirvydsTovjy the using many conjunctions,
1. e. one between each pair of words or notions.
(a) Et inimico proderas, et amioum ledebas, et tibi ipsi non consuiebas. {€.)
7. AnnominaUo (nagovofiaaUt) is the antithesis of words of
nearly the same sound.
a) — ^ut eum non facile non modo extra teeturHy sed ne extra." lectum quidem
quisquam videret. (C)
(6) Hanc reipublicse pestem non paulisper reprimij sed in perpetuum eom-
primivolo. (C.)
(c) Expetenda magis est decemendi ratio, quam decertandi fortuna. (C)
8. ' Ofioiontanovy when the members of a sentence are of par-
allel construction, having the same cases, or the same persons of
the same tense. When they end with the corresponding case or
tense, it makes o/ioiorBXivtov, — ^Both occur in the following ex-
ample :
(a) Vicit pudorem libido, timorem audacia, rationem amentia. (C.)
9. 'laoxaXov, when the clauses are very nearly of equal length,
(a) Alii fortuna felicitatem dedit : huic industria virtutem comparavit.
10. 'Avxid-sTov (antithesis) requires this equality of length in the
antithetical portions.
(a) Est igitur heec, judices, non scripta sed nata lex ; quam non didiciihus,
accepimus, legimus, verum ex natur& ipsA arripuimtis, hausimus, expres-
simus ; ad quam non docti, sed facti, non imbuti, sed instituti sumus ut,
&c. (C.)
11. Commutatio {avtifiBtapoXrj) is when the antithesis consists in
the conversion of a proposition.
(a) Cluia stultus es, ea re taces; non tamen quia taces, eft re stultus es: si
poemn loquens pictura est, pictura tacitum poema debet esse.
12. Regressio {snotvodog) is when this kind of conversion is a
conversion of a part only of a proposition.
(a) Ut eloquentium juris peritissimus Crassus, juris peritorum eloquentissi-
mus Scaevola haberetur. (C.)
13. Gradatio (xil7^a|) is the mounting up as it were from one
word to another, the preceding word being repeated.
(a)Imperium Greci«e fuit penes Athenienses; Atheniensium potiti sunt
f
EXERCISE 2. 26 p
SpartiatJB ; Spartiatas stiperavere Thebani ; Thebanos Macedbnes vice-
runt, qtii imperium Grsciae brevi tempore adjunzenint Asiam bello 6ub-
actam. {^dHereniu)
14. 'jttoaidmTiaig is the purposely breaking off the discourse,
and suppressing a statement one was about to make.
(a) De nostro enim omnium — non audeo totum dicere. (C)
15. BissoluUo (^oiavvdsTov), the omission of the copulative con-
junction.
(a) Clui indicabantur, eos vocari, custodiri, ad senatum adduci jussit. (C.)
16. Correctio (Inavog&tatng) is the correcting an expression pre-
viously used.
(a) Hie tamen vivit Vivit? immo vero etiam in Senatum venit. (C.)
IT. Diibitatio is the purposely expressing a doubt ; under which
intentional forgetting and remembering may be reckoned.
(a) Tu istud ausus es dicere, homo omnium mortalium — ^nam quo te digno
moribus tuis appellem nomine? (C.) (Here is also aposiopesis.)
Exercise 2. (On Rhetorical Figures,)
(Litter is delector,)
[Geminatio.] Literature, literature alone, I say, delights* me,
[Repetitio.] Literature nourished me when a boy ; literature
preserved me when a young man** from the infamy of lust : litera-
ture assisted me when I was a man, in the administration*' of the
republic : literature will comfort the weakness of my old age.**
[CONVERSio.] Literature delights us with the most dignified®
pleasure ; it delights us with the discovery of what is new;*
it delights us with the most certain hope of immortality. [CoM-
PLEXio.] Do you think him' a bad citizen, who is delighted with
literature ? who is delighted with the discovery of truth ? who is
delighted with the diffusion of learning ? [Traductio.] What
do you mean ? Are you' delighted with literature, who hate
°what is the foundation (pi.) of ^all literature? [Polysyn-
deton.] Literature both instructs, and delights, and adorns, and
consoles. [^OfMLOTttoixov, ofioiotslevjov.^ Do you think it possible,
that one who is devoted to the pursuit of literature, should be
bound by the chains of lust ? ['j^Tl&stov,] Do you, who say
that you are delighted with literature, allow yourself to be en-
12
266 EXERCISE 3.
tangled by pleasure? ['AyTifiBtaPoXi^,^ I do not cultivate
literature because I am delighted with it, but am delighted with
it because I cultivate it. [Gradatio.] The pursuit of literature
has acquired for me learning : learning ^has acquired for
me glory : glory °has drawn upon me envy and malevolent
depreciation. [Aposiopesis.] What? do you: do you charge
me' with this, <) a m a n who have never In my life pursued^ any
thing but virtue and learning? — What you have pursued ;
but I am silent, lest I i^ould seem to have brought against
you a railmg-accusation.^ [^AavvdstoK] What shall I say
about the use of literature ? it instructs, adorns, delights, ° and
comforts o a m a n . [Cobrectio.] Literature delights me : why
do I say delights ? nay,' it comforts me, and affords me my only
refuge fromJ these annoyances of my laborious life ! [Dubitatio.]
Literature instructs, or delights, or comforts me ; for which of
these words I should use rather than the others, I do not know.
» obUdare. Comp, Dod. obUetatio. b Ded. puer. « 359. d Dod.
vetua (2). « honestiaavnms. f * of new things.' Should < things ' be ex-
pressed? C. 5. s expetere. 483, (2). h conmcium facere, » immo
vero. J ' amongst.'
Exercise 3.
Pausanias tells ^^ us in his b o 6 k o n A 1 1 i c a *, that the Athenians,
having been praised** by Pindar in one of his Odes*, set
so high a value** upon the testimony of that* great and sublime
poet, that they not only' sent him many presents in return* for
it, but also raised*^ a statue' to his honour* at Athens. No
wonder*, that in those times there were many great poets, when"
those who were endowed with the poetic faculty" both re-
ceived the most magnificent presents, and were rewarded' with
the most splendid honours.
* AtHcoy Oram. b < because (I. 516) they had been praised.' Since this
clause is here quaUd from Pausanias, in what mood should the verb stand 1
Why 1 (I. 460, a.) * * in a certain ode ' {carmen). When ' a certain * means
a particular one that we do not, however, think it necessary to name, it should
be tranriated by quidam. When certus is so used, it implies that one ha^ good
reasons for not being more explicit : Q;uoties ego eum et qtumlo cum ddtore vidi
inaoUntiam certorum hominum — extimeKentent (Cic. Marc, 6.) A practical
rule may be, not to use certus^ unless the meaning is, * a certain orUy — you know
pretty well which (or wJiom) I rnean,* d < To set a high value on,' magni /t^
BXBBCISES 4, 5. 267
cer6. Adapt this phrase to mean, * so h£^h a value.' * Which pronoun
should be used for the * that ' of celebrity 1 (I. 381, 6.) f Not only— but also :
here simply, et — et (both — and). e ob, h To place or erect (a statue),
simulaerum or statuam ponerCf locare, staiuere^ or {Nep.) constUuere. i What
words express whde-Ungth sculptured images 7 With what distinction 7 (Dod.
imagQ.) k < to him.' i This imperfect sentence must be x^ompleted :
* it is not therefore wonderful :* for *that' use *i^* «. » * When.* Does
the ' uhen ' do more than simply daie the time 7 (See 1. 489.) » edfaciUtate,
o received — and loere rewarded. Of two connected verbs having the same nom-
inative ease, it is better, as a general rule, that they should both be in the same
voice. Alter this accordingly, by turning received into the passive voice : this
must be done by choosing such a phrase as * to be loaded^ presented^ Ac, with
gifts.' 'ihonaribua maetari. {Cic.) On the derivation of this word see
Part I. p. 103. (278, a) and note %
Exercise 4.
To destroy** the credit* of Socrates's speech, and cause the
judges to listen to it with suspicion, ^his || accusers* had
warned them beforehand** to be oil their guard,* <^ telling' them
that he was very powerfuU in speaking, and possessed such*>
ability I and dexterity, that he could make the worse cause ^appear
the better.
» To destroy the credit of any thing; prevent it from being believed ; aliadf
or alicui ret, fdem derogare or abrogare. b < render it suspected to the
judges.' • Obs. When an English sentence begins with a secondary clause,
and a word which occurs in the principal clause occurs also in this, it is better to
begin with such a portion of the principal clause as will contain this word, and
then use a pronoun for it in the secondary clause. Thus, instead of * Socra-
tes* 8 speech,' — ^his accusers,* let ithe: * the accusers of So era tes^* and — *his
speech, ;' placing * the accusers of Socrates ' first. d Ta warn beforehand, pree-
monsre. (I. 75.) * To be on one's guard, sibi cavere. ( (1. 460, c, 1.)
Express a */or.' «r Tbfcc very powerful, plurimum posse. h Such, is,
ea, id : repeat it before ' dexterity,' calliditas. i vis.
Exercise 5.
[(p) prefixed means that the verb is to be turned into a participle : (r) after a
word, that the rel. pronoun is to be used.]
Periboea, or Phylonome,* as others call her, being rejected
with disdain,** accused® Tennes to** his father, in exactly* the
same manner as Phsedra ^ accused Hippolytus. The credulous
father (p) shut up his son in^ a chest, ° and cast him into the sea.
Neptune ||came to the assistance'ofhis innocent grand-
son ; and the chest jfloated*» to the island of i Leucophrys. WhenJ
268 EXERCISES 6, 7.
the inhabitants of the island opened^ it (r), and learned what had
happened,! they not only offered Tennes the thrope," but even
named the island Tenedos after him.o Nay, they even" wor-
shipped him as a god ^^ a f t e r his (p) death.
* Since it is Uft doubtful which was her right name, what word should be
used for ' or ? * (Pt. I. p. 161, note a.) b « being rejected and refused.* Take
the word for ^refusey* that means to refuse a pUaaurt^ whether a sinful one. or
not. Dod. negate (end). « Which is the Jbest word for to accuse falsely 1
(I. 201.) d ajmd, * plane. C. 9. f inclvdere^ implying to put into,
and there shut up, often takes the ace. with in : but also the abl. Antonius ar-
meUoein c e II d Concordue inchisU. — paneorationem in epistolam inclusi:
includere aliquem in custodias. (Cic.) . Eferre opem. h deferri (ad),
i I. 140, J I. 489. k Dod. aperire. i res. « To offer any body
the throne, deferre regnum alicuL » ' from (de) his own name.' • Nay
— even: quinet.
Exercise 6.
When* Ulysses, according to fabulous history,^ might have lived*
with* Calypso* in all [possible] luxury, he yet preferred^ even
to immortality that* rough and rocky country [of his] : (p) which
he would [surely] not have done^^ if he had approved-of > that
opinion'' of Teucer*s, [that] * every man's' country is" wherever
he is"" well of.' *"
* Not, guum Ulysses^ but Ulyssesy quum, &c. I. 489. b < as it is in the
fables.' c I. 128, 130. d apud. * ' Feminines in o (as echo.
Calypso^ Dido, Sappho) have generally the Greek gen. in ^ {et^us^ Didus^ Sap'
phu^\ the Latin gen. onis being less common. The dat. and ace. end in o, or
in oni, onem respectively.' {Zumpt.) Ramshom adds, that Ceesar preferred the
regular Latin declension, onis, oni, onem, one. ( I. 227. el, 381 (b).
h nonitafa^turus. i I. 441. ^ Dod. senientia. i quisque,
n I. 460 (a). n I. 460 (b). o < I am well off,' bene est miM.
Exercise 7.
Xenophon has given us a very* sound^ opinion* of Gobryas's,
and [one] which every day's** experience® confirms,^ namely,*
* that it is more difficult toJind> men who [bear] prosperity [well],
than [men] who bear adversity well.' For in prosperity a great
manyi men grow insolent,'' and are puffed up [with pride] : but
in adversity all are recalled to temperance and moderation.
* Adm^uvn. (ad-modum, * to a degree') is * very ' with adjectives, participles,
and adverbs. b gravis (weighty). c Dod. sententia. d Adj. gita
EZEBCISES 8, 9. 269
tidianus; but see the next note. « Eixptrieniia in the best piose writers is
trial: ^knowledge gained by experience' is usttBj or usua rerum; res; tempuSf
&c. [m Tac. also experientia.'] Henee experientia doedy and the like, should not
be used, YmXtenvpua or rerum. uaua doctt. With rerwm usua the adj. qu<^idianuB
should be left out. [Virgil has * apUnu quanta experientia parciaj Geor.
i. 4.] t * declares to be true.* e videlicet as the second word,
h DifT. 93. Dod. invenire. i Dod. plerique. k Insolescere was used by
Saliust (after the old Cato), and was followed by Tacitus and Justin : it is better,
however, to use vnaalentemJUri ; se insolaUer efftrre oigerere^ &c, (Krebs.)
Exercise 8.
{On the Theogony of Hesiod,)
Of all* the remains^ of Greek literature that are now extant,*
none in my opinion** is more remarkable than the The6gony« of
Hesiod. For although || this^ poem cannot? be compared to the
works of Homer and other famous poets in size, or in the magnifi-
cence of its subject, •» and of its particular portions ^^ or in the va*
riety and beauty of its diction, yet it has another recommendati(»i,
and that'' [one] peculiar [to itself], [so] that on this ground^ it
appears even to deserve the preference'^ over those poems."
b *AU — which* is expressed strongly by using quotquot instead of the simple
relative. (For *of* seel. 165, h.) b monumenta. <^ auperesse: 'now,*
hodie. d Dod. aententia. * Theogonia, t Relative pron. cr Omit
* not :' using naque — neque with the ablatives. h argumentum. i rw, pi.
k I. 385. 1 cauaa. » * to be to-be-preferred.' part, in du^, » Greek
neuter plurals in a make dat. and abl. in ia^ not ibua. poemata, poematum, poe-
matis (not poematibua).
Exercise 9.
That* ancient philosopher, whom Hesiod followed, said that first
of all Chaos existed : by*' which he meant, not, as very many*
subsequent** [authors], a rude and undigested mass* of matter, but
[according] to the proper meaning^ of the word, * space ' in which
no matter is contained,^ For he says that 'matter' was not
created iiU afterwards,^ To Chaos he added a connective*" power,
because without such a power* matter would have lain inactive,
and nothing) would have been created.
*■ I. 381, h, b In this idiom the ace. is used in Latin. Thus : 'whom do
you understand (or mean) by a wise mani ' quern tu intelligia (or intelligi via)
aapientem 7 « Dod. plerique, d Simply poatea, • (See the first
lines of Ovid's Metamorphoses.) r aignifcatio, ff* which is empty
270 EXERCISES 10, 11.
(vacuus) of all xnateer J ii copulairiXf few. i Where we repeat the
■ubstantiye in this way, the Romans (being richer in demonstrative pronouns
than we are, and able to give them more prominence) generally used a pronoun
only. So also when we use another substantive with ' «ucA,' or a demonstrative
pronoun, in reference to a preceding substantive. Thus if ' tfda prince * were
used in reference to * Alexander* which had been mentioned in a preceding
sentence, it would be better to leave the word * prince* untranslated, and say
^Jirrhe.* J <nor any thing.' What word for any (thing)? Pt. I. §50.
p. 137.
Exercise 10.
1. With* the ancient philosophers it is an intricate^ and per-
plexed" inquiry, whether the soul remains** ( j?) when it is freed
from the chains of the body, or whether the death of cmr bodies is
also the death of our souls. * Epicurus thinks that our souls perish,
deeming it wrong' that, having so many points of agreement with
swiney^ he should differ from them in this single respect,^
2. The Stoics allow i to them a long life, as [they do also] to
crows, but not an eternal J one. But Pythagoras is indeed a
pleasant [personage], for he teaches, that they remain indeed
[alive], but migrate from [their own] bodies into others, so that
he' may perchance'' be a cock to-day, who in the time of the
Trojan war wasi Agamemnon.
\, ^ Apud. ^ perturbatus, ^ implicatus. ^permanfre, •* whether
[that] which [is the death] of [our] bodies is also (1. 387) the death of [our] souls.'
f nef(u, 8 * since {quu7Hf I. 489) so many things agree to him (I. 370) with
swine.'' ^ ' by this one thing.'
2. i trUmere. 1 Dod. conimuus, k Forte is * accidentaUt/f' except after
eif nieiy num, n^, ecquid, where it is the regular word for ' perdumceJ Here use
fortaase. i* had been.'
Exercise 11.
1. I am well again !• I know for a certainty,^ that I could
not find" a beginning** for my letter [that would be] more agreeable
to you II than this, or one that you would more desire to receive,*
[My disease] was a tertian fever, like that tohich^ you cured for
mes three years ago'> at Ferrara :•» except that> this was £of ] a
milder J [character.]
2.' Accordingly it left me'' on the eighth day (ifter my seizure.^
I was cured not only by medicine," but also by bleeding," by «» the
advice of my [friend] Angelus Juistinianus, who not only pre-
EXERCISE 12. 271
scribed p for ine himself, but also made up<i a great part of the
medicines with his own hand.
1. ^ OmoaUacere. By what tense should * lam wdl ' be translated 7 b * cer-
tainly A ^thcertescioBndcerto ado octUT. The difference is thus given by
Hand: certe acio means, ' t^ iff certain that I know :* certo aciOf * I have a
certain knowledge of the thing stated.* Which should be used here ? ^ Dod.
invenire. dprincipium, • more wished {optaiiua) by you.* f qualis.
f * drove away from me,'^e6Hm abigere^ diseutere, h Ferraria, » niai
quod. J * Mild^' mUis et remiasua.
2. k * A fever leaves anybody,* decedit. {C) : aft aliquo diacedii. Krebs warns
against reliquit or deaeruU quern. Doletus quotes a fdbre rdvnqui from Cic. ad
Att., but I cannot find the passage, i 'After it had seized me/ corrijieTe. (Pt.
I. p. 114, 310, note*.) ™ medicamentai pi. >* initio aanguinia. ° de,
P ' To prescribe ' (of a physician), remedid^ medtcamenta, Ac, prcBacriberCf prcB-
cipere ( Cela.) ; prcescribere^ or morho proponere (Nep.). ^ Muretus uses conficere
ac concinnare {of which the latter is not found in Cicero) ; better pardre (Cic).
Columella has componere^ Curtius tn jdocuZo <2i/uer6, which of course Expresses
only a particular kind of preparation. *
Exercise 12.
*
1. When it was the general opinion,*^ that a brave man should'*
die by his own hands'^ rather than endure** any* great and bitter
evil^ Aristotle wisely perceived that the opinion^ was false ; [and]
asserted, ff that they who acted thus,^ ^ar^om heing considered
brave, should be looked-upon^ as cowards,! and men of a mean and
abject spirit.
2. For such men prove J that they are not able to endure what
they fly from, and are too weak to support the calamHy,^ on account
of which they give up their lives. Nowi this argues effeminacy,"
rather than any greatness of soul.
1. • *it was commonly {vulgo) believed.* b I. 191. « *To die by one's
own hands,* necem or mortem aibi conaciacere^ mortem or vim aibiinferre ; manua
aibi afferre, Act d Dod. ferrt : choose the verb that means * to endure
heroically.' • I. 392. f ' that that opinion of men.* - e prommtiare'
h 'were not only Tiot [to-be-considered] brave, but [were] to-be-considered
cowards,' &c. H^ Non rnxxio is sometimes used for non modo non^ but only
* Scribon. Larg. has temperare.
t ^^ ae interficercj ae occidere^ are generally rejected ; but they do occur, though
less commonly, (1) aeipsum in terfieere (Sulpicius in Cic. Epp. Fam.4, 12,
2) : Craaaum auapte manu irderfectum^ Cic. Or. 3, 3, 10; and Liv. 31, 18, 7, se
qui ipsi i n t e r f i c i u n t. (2) QuintiL (5, 10, 69) quotes from a lost oration
of Cicero's, cum ipae seat eonaretur occidere. (Krebs.)
272 EXERCISES 13, 14.
when the following clause is negative, or equivalent to a negative, and botW
clauses have a common verb expressed in the second. Thus
Not only not but not even ; or^ but scarcely.
ruminodo ^Bedru-quidtm,
( aeavtx.
Should the *not* be inserted or omitted here? > ignavua. (Dod. p. 234, 4.^
2. J docirt. This passage in the original is given as a statement by the writer,
and therefore in the indicative. It will be a useful exercise to translate it both
ways : i. e. first as the writer's opinion, and then as AristotU'a view stated bp
the writer J and therefore in orat. obliq. (See I. 460.) k < and not {neque)
equal to bearing that calamity,' <&c. Should equal be translated by (tqunSf
aqtuUiSy or par ? (Dod. <sqtau.) i autem, ^ ' an effeminate weakness
{moUities) of soul.'
Exercise 13.
It is an acknowledged fact, that || Cicero in his Orations bor-
rowed much from the Greek orators : and that, besides being* an
eager^ and diligent imitator of the artifices,* which he perceived**
them to have employed* for^ moving«f and governing the minds
of their hearers, he not seldom transferred whole enthymemes'»
of theirs to his own orations.
» * and not {neqtu) only was — ^but also introduced.' b aeer, ^ sing,
d {. e. not of any particular artifice or artifices, but indefinitely^ such aa
he observed in them. What mood should be uaedl I. 475, 476. * uti,
f in. s veraari^ h entkymemaf atis.
Exercise 14.
1. Oh [this] sad and bitter* news about the King of Navarre!**
We had indeed heard it (r) here from others ; but* nevertheless
were supported by some hope, till your letters arrived. •* I (p) re-
ceived both of them yesterday evening,* and communicated [their
contents] to all our [friends] : nor was there one amongst themy^
who did not declare it as his firm beliefs that, when you', wrote in
such language,^ the recovery* of this excellent and religious prince
must be 3 quite given up a* hopeless.^
2. I fear that in a few days we shall feel to our sorrow^ what a
blow [both] France and the cause of religion" have received by
the death of this (r) [prince]. Behold, what fruits f are born" by
civil wars ! Miserable France wanted but this one^ [affliction^, to
see'^ those old Theban calamities renewed in her own blood !
1. » * sad» and bitter" to us.' (See p. 237, 20.) b Navarra, c < which
EXEBCtSES 15, 16. 278
although, ftc. — ^yet.' d < To arriye ' (of a letter), ajftni^ It being always
brought to the receiver.—* Till.* What mood T 1. 607, 508. • heri vtaperi
(yesterday in the evening). f 'any (single one) of them.' I. 389, 390, 391.
f ' To declare one's conviction ' (or firm belief), atatutn often with sic or Ua,
Ego atUem sine ulld dubikUionesic statuo et judicoy neminem habuissef
&c. (Clc. de Or. 2, 28. 122 ; nisi hoc it a statuisse 9, — tt—fodAuruTn.) b ita.
i 8glu6, J * that it could not be but that (Diff. 2P.) the recovery, &c.*
k ' To give^ a thing up as lost or hopeless,' deplorare quid. — the e f f e c t {weeping)
for the c a u s e (a persuasion that the thing is hopeless <&c.). But this use, though
found in Ovid, Livy, &c,, does not occur in Cicero or Caesar. Perhaps it is bet-
ter therefore to use desperare, desperatur quid or (seld. in Cic.) de aliqud re.
2. 1 ' with our great evil.* »» * how great a blow France, how great [a
blow] religion, Ac, has received.' »» Active Yoice.—^ructus par)hre. » * This
one thing remained to — France,' Ac.
Exercise 15.
It is said by the ancient* poets, that there are in the ocean cer-
tain** islands, to which the souls of those who h&ye led a holy and
religious life^ are borne after their death : that there they dwell
together** most delightfully and pleasantly, in a« most beautiful'
meadow, which is enamelled? with perpetual flowers : that the sun
is ever bright •» in that happy region^^ the trees green, the flowers
and herbs in bloom : that [there all nature j] smiles, and the gentlest
zephyrs perpetually breathe, by whose fanning'' the leaves of the
trees {p) are softly stirred, i and delight" the ear with the softest
[possible] murmur.
*■ Dod. antiquus. The distinction at the bottom of the page (in Dod.) should
be translated thus : ' Antiqui scriptores means the classics, inasmuch as the age
in which they flourished has long been past ; veteresy inasmuch as they have
lived and influenced mankind for 2000 years.' b < Certain :' (Ex. 3, c.)
c sancte religioseque vivere. Remember that this whole passage is a statement
gathered from the poets : it is their doctrine, not the writer's. I. 460.
d inter se. • I. 393. f What is the proper word for beautiful^ as ap-
plied to objects that please the sight? [I. 212, note v.] fi diitinguere^
properly to relieve a surface by ornaments placed upon different parts of it.
hnitet difysoluminecoBlum. (Lucr.) i* there.' J * all [things].'
k^fiabella^jt]. ^ ventHare. Ut cum purpureas vent Hat aura comas.
(Ovid.) Obs. The words and general character of this passage do not always
belong to sober prose;' hut as it is a representation of poetical descriptions, this
IS 'perhaps permissible here. »» blandiri. What easel
Exercise 16.
1. Ancient authors are not agre6d<^ upon the reasons, why this
12*
274 BZERCISB 17.
or that animal was saorificedio this or that god. For some assert*^
that the favourite animal of each god was slain* before his altars ;
and thas the horse was the victim ofiered to Mars. And [on the
other hand] it was not kurfid to offer a wild boar to Venus,^ X be-
cause that animal*) had killed Adonis.
2. Others [however] held* that a god was best pleased with the
blood of the animal, :^ which he*' hated: that thus a cock' was
sacrificed to Night, because that bird seems' to be calling forth
the day by its song, [and] driving away the night : [und] a goat to
Pallas, because [that animal] infiicU greai injury u^pon^ th^ olive-
tree.
\. ^*Wb art not agreed^* non satis convenlt inter nos (de aliqua re). See Ex.
15, note a.) ^ * To assert Ms not aaaerere, ^ * that the [animal] which
was most acceptable (gratus) to each was wont to be slain,' &c. Relat. clause
to precede. I. 31. d (and because a wild-boar had, &c. it was not-
lawful (n^/otf), that sacrifice should be made (rem divinam Jiert) to Venus with
a wild-boar.'
2. * ' thought,' jnUare. f gaJhu gaUmaceua, s The verbs aeema —
ir^ids express the rtasona alleged by the holders of the opinion. Will this cir-
cumstance have any effect on the mood 7 If so, why 1 h inaigniier Uederc
(Cic. has inaigniter diligere.)
Exercise 17.
If nothing' is sacred and religious, but what is without orna-
ment, let gold be removed' from our temples ; let jewels, images,*
and** pictures be removed, and, in a word, votive-ofFerings of every
kind. But if it is an impiety even to entertain such a thought as
thiSy^ let us confess what common-sense^ itself in a (393) manner
teaches [us], that wealth is not* better employed in any things than
in the worship of God, nor eloquences better** than in refining »
and beautifying philosophy.
^ Dod. imago. Choose the word that means ' any plastic work : in opposi-
tion to tabiiUSf picturce (pictures). ' b Use the fig. asyndeton. * in a word,'
denique; * votive-offerings,* donarta. {Liv.) ® * this is impious (nc/bHtte)
even to be thought.' CogUare, which " denotes the usual activity of the mind,
which cannot exist without thinking or employing itself about something," is
here the best word for a thought entering the head. d ratio, • neque
— fitque. t * any where.' Usquam follows the same rule as lUhts, i. e.
stands in negative and virtually negative sentences : aUcubi and uspiam answer
respectively to oHqina and quispiam; ubivis to quioia, quUibet. 8 dicendk
eopia. h pr€Bclariua. i, excoiere.
EXERCISES I89 19. 275
Exercise 18.
1. I should never have thought it possible^ that I could derive
pleasure, •» I tnU not say^ from your^ grief, but from any** [man's].
And yet if the truth* must be spoken, I am obliged' to confess,
that it was most gratifying^ to me to learn'^ from your letter, that
you were exceedingly i grieyed, as soon as J the news of my
illness'' reached 1 you."
2. For that grief could not arise from any other source,^ than
from your great' affection for me ; and from [the time] that I first
saw you, and heard from^> very many others how distinguished
you were for learning and virtue, p J have had no fonder wish^
than to be loved') by"^ you.
1. * * that it would be ' (that I could derive, Ac.) b * To derive or receive
pleasure, pain, t&c, from any thing,' capere voluptatem, dolorem, &c., ex aliqu&
re. « nonmodo. d I. 389-391. * *the truth' must be trans-
lated by vera (*true things '), whenever the meaning Is, ^toJuU is true,* ^true
things,* If a single thing is meant, the sing, verum may be used. Verifas is
* truth,' as an abstract notion. f necesse est, I. 504 (1) : take the second
form. s gratissimus, h ' that {quod) I learnt.', intelligere, the notion
being, of * being made aware.* i vehementer. J I. 512. ^ valetudo
(' state of health ') or infirma valetudo, Cic. has two or three times vwalitudOf
but the reading is mostly doubtful. 1 qferri: aUatum esse. ™ * to
where you are,' iatuc, I. 387.
2. B 'from elsewhere,' a&*u7u2e. ^ exvnUus, p < a man of what erudi-
tion and virtue you' were.' ^ * nothing has been more desirable (pptabilius)
to me.' ' I. 348.
•
Exercise 19.
1. Socrates, in the^) dialogue which is entitled* * the first Alci-
biades,' employed || a witty*' and refined* artifice to check*) the
presumption** of Alcibiades. For whereas* the young man per-
suaded himself, tmth the characteristic self-confidence of Ms age,'
that he was already abundantly furnished with all the knotoledge
thai a statesman required,s Socrates (p) accosted him courteously,
and by proceeding from one question to another,^ made it plain
from his oum answers y^ that he had as yet obtained) no knowledge^
of justice and injustice. 1
2. And when Alcibiades took it impatiently, and was indignant
as considering" himself to be reproached with ignorance,* Socrates
defended himself [fipm the charge], and asserted') that he' was
276 SXERCISE 20.
not saying any thing whatever" of that sort against him, [but] that
it was Alcibiades himself, who was making the confession*" about
himself.
1. ^ ifucribi, ^ urbanus, which denotes refined and polished wit.
« elegoM, Cicero speaks of an el eg ana jocandi genua: 'to check,' r«prt-
mere, ' Dod. auperhia. * quum. I. 489. t < which is wont to be
the character (mgenium) of that age.' What is the word for age = * Utm of
life 7 ' ' ' with all those things which had reference {pertinere) to govern-
ing tho state.' ' To goverriy* adminiatraref of a statesman managing it under a
BO ereign power. ^ ' by questioning step-by-step ' (paulatim). Quintilian
bas paulatim et(tUdicUur) pedetentim inierrogare. i 'brought
him to that point, that it was plainly established by his own answers.' ' To
bring any body to that point,' aliquem eo perducere, tUj &c. ' To be plainly es-
tablished,' aperte effid {ex)» 1 Dod. inTenire. k Dod. cognitio.
1 juaturn^ injuatum : not the dbatract justitia, but that which is actually /u«<
or unjuat in practice.
2. ^ ' because — he thought.' (On the mood after quod^ see I. 518.)
■ *not — any thing whatever,' nxkU proraua, • Fateri, Translate *«to-
fended^ ^aaaerted^ by the hiatoriccd preaent. I. 414.
Exercise 20.
1. How highly the Athenians valued* || the poems of Homer ^
and how useful they judged them to be for inflaming^* [men's]
minds with a love of honour') and worth, *> may be perceived* from
their having passed'' a law, that** every • fifth year, at' the Pana-
thenaic festival, the poems of Homer, and of none hU Horner,^
should be publicly recited.
2. For their opinion tcas,^ that laws do indeed enjoin^ what is
to be done and [what] avoided, but that from their [necessary}
brevity, they do not teach [this knowledge] ; but that the poets,
who, imitating human life, give a copious narrative) of brave and
noble actions, and almost^ place them before [men's] eyes, are
better calculated^ to persuade [us to imitation].
1. * To value highly, magni faeere. How must this be modified to express
*how highly V b dignitaa ( = worth, virtue) as in Cic. voluptatem concea'
auram dignitatis &c. ^ e^Hatimare, d I. 75. « I. p. 139, note
d. ( Express the preposition 'in.' The Panathenaic festival, Panathe-
naica (sc. solemnia). Varr. 8 < of him alone out of the whole number of
poets.'
2. h ( thus they thought.' i Dod, jubgre. 1 copioae expmert, k pro-^
pemodum, i ap/ior (ad aliquid£Eu;iendum).
EXERCISES 21, 22. 277
Exercise 21.
1. The Lacedsemonianls paid a similar honour* to Tyrtseus.
For though in general*' they were indisposed* to poetic studies, and
not** fond" of listening to the strains of poets, they nevertheless had
passed a lato,^ that whenever* an ^rmy [of theirs] was dravm up
for a general engagements'^ the soldiers should be summoned to the
royal tent, and there * inspired with a contenapti of death in their
country^ s causey J X ^7 listening to the poems of Tyrtaeus.
2. To jEschylus, too, nearly the same honour was paid* by the
Athenian people ; for it was enacted by a public decree that even
after his (p) death his plays should he * acted, a privilege which
was granted to no other tragic poeU^
1. * 'To pay an honour to any body/ honorem alicui hab^ty trUmere; honore
auqutm affUtre : not honorem alicui txhihere. b cettroqui ( ^ ' in other
respects,' • with this exception '). « olienuB^ I. p. 77, note y. d tuque,
^ Diif. 111. Idiom given for ^dovCt likt to,' &c. f 'had appointed by
law,' lege conatUuere. t ' as often as,' quoties, h cum hjostUnu
dimicaturus in prodndu constiiisset, i Participle. Should you
use sperneref coniemnere^ ox despicere? (V. M, 5.) J *for (pro) their
country.'
2. k (the plays) * of [him] alone out of all the tragic poets— should be
♦ acted.'
Exercise 22.
{Dreams.)
* We sleep through whole nights,* and there is hardly any'*
[night] in which^ we do not dream : and do we [yet] wonder, that
what we have dreamed sometimes* comes true ?'** These are the
words II of a philosopher (p) who is discussing* the unreality' of
dreams, and asserting'^ that [even] if some^ dreams f are confirmedf
by the event, it does not follow •» from this, that dreams are not to be
looked uponi as [mere dreams]. For out of J such^ a number and
variety [of them], it would be more Wonderful if nothing ever*
came true<* of what we "fsee when we are asleep.""
* I. 302. b I. 477. * I. 402. d ' to come true,' ecaderty or
evenire^ both Cic. * exagitare^ to discuss a thing repeatedly ; to v}ork a
point. f vdnitaa, f comprobare. b to follow from any thing, ex aliqud
re effiei followed by ut : here by vi ne : Pt. I. p. 38, note). i haberi. J in ;
^thabl. kC. 10. 11.402. ra per quietem.
278 EXERCISES 23, 24.
Exercise 23.
{Semiramis.)
1. Semiramis is said to heLve gained a throne^ from^ a very low*
rank [of life] by an exceedingly || ingenious*^ and clever plan. She
had by degrees* obtained such influence over || king Ninus,^ that
nothing was so great that Semiramis would not dare to ask^
it (r) of the king, or that the king would venture to refuse her, (p)^
if she did ask it.
2. And so, having once^ thrown outi (358) in conversation,
that there was*°> something which she desired very much, and
the king having told) her to name^ it openly and fearlessly,
:|: whatevferi it might be, * I should wish you,' she said, ' to f grant"
me this [favour,] that I might (128) sit on"^ your throne and adi
minister justice'' for but^*^ a single ° day : and that, for the whole
of that day, all should obey me [just"] as they do you.'^
1. ^ 'To gain a throne/ ad regnum pervenire, i ex. • humilU
et aJbjectaa. d Dod. aatutua, * Dod. paulatim. f < bad
80 bound (aatringere) king Ninus to berself.' f petere. (See I. 252,
Remark.)
2. ^ aUqaando, Unjuitre. ifuberCf I. 76. ^jm^Ueru
1 guicquid tandem. ™ tribiiere. ^jus dicere. <> tmus, P 'as
{queTnadmodum) tbey do to you, so (Ua) they should obey me.'
Exercise 24.
(Semiramis continued.)
The king laughed, and granted [her] what she f requested.
Immediately it is proclaimed, that on an (393) appointed^ day, all
men should obey the commands^ of Semiramis : that such was the
king^s pleasure :^ that she for that day f was placed over'^ them all
with sovereign authority' and power. When (512) the^'^ day ar-
rived, the queen sat on*'^ the throne in royal pomp.^ Vast crou)ds
assemble [before her.] She at first, by way of experiments^ issues
some commands of no great importances
•■ Certua, « dido audientem ease, with dat. of person. « < that so
it pleased the king.' d praeaae, ^ imperiuni, t cuUus, im-
plying more than apparel only ; all the attendant circumstances of a king's
sitting in state. s < A very great concourse (concuraus) takes place.'
^ experiendi eauad. i * commands some things {ace.) of no ^3) great
moment.'
EXERCISES 25, 26, 27. 279
Exercise 25.
( Semiramis continued,)
When* she saw that all men obeyed her in earnest,^ whatever
she commanded,^ she orders the royal hody-giuird^ to arrest* (75)
the king himself: they arrest him. To bind him [in chains] :
he is bound. To put him to death :^ he is put to death. In this
manners her reign of a day is made perpetual.^ This is [the
queen] who surrounded Babylon with walla of brick, » and whose
famous J hanging^ gardens were the objects of such admiration.^
* < When ' = < as soon as ' (512). What tense and mood ? (514.) b serio.
c 4n a]l things.' With respect to the place of ' all,* see p. 242, 39, which should
lay down the rule as general^. not as confined to substantives only. d satellites
ac stipatores regii corporis, (Cic. RuU. 2. 13, 32, has; stipatores corporis
constituit eosdem ministros et satellites potestaiis.) * comprehendere,
f interjicere. s Ua. h * from^) [that] of-a-day (tfewmiw) becomes a
lasting [one].' Lasting, diviumus ; there is a sort of play on the similarity of
soimd in diumus and diviumus. This is called Paronomasia, see above, p.
264. So rum magis jirnore quafm more, (C. >Nep.); in ore atque amqre,
(Cic), &c.* i of brick, latericius, J I. 381. ^pensilis,
1 ' had such admiration.' C. 10.
Exercise 26.
Cicero, an extremely* good judge*' of eloquence, * thought so
highly II of Plato, that he said Jupiter himself, if he wished to
speak * Greek, would use no«^ language but*^> that*^^ of Plato.
And then^' Aristotle I did he not** both lay down* the rules' of
eloquence better than any other man^s and possess such eloquence^
himselfj that the same Cicero called him a river flowing with
gold ?
* in primis. b existimator. « non alius. d Nonne is,
of course, the regular interrogative particle here: but 'non is often used
without ne in vehement questions — especially questions of appeal.'
« tradere. f prcBceptum. e unus omnium optime. h ' of such (C.
10.) eloquence.'
Exercise 27.
1. Philosophy heals these and similar diseases, and produces*
in her [followers] such* a firmness of mind, as* neither** the
allurements of pleasure (p^.)» ^^^ *^® fires^ of pain (jp/.), nor the
280 BZBBCISBS 28, 29.
splendour of riches, nor obscure and despised' poverty, nor the
thirst of honour (pL)y nor the fear of disgrace, nor the desire of
life, nor the fear of death, can shaker and overthrow.^
2. For as the poets say that the top of Olympus is always calm,
becausei it is too high fori the power of the winds and tempests to
reach it :^ so the mind of philosophers is too loflyi and elevatedi
to feel those whirlwinds" of desires (p) that rage and battle"
together* on the ground for "^ things [of the] most worthless
[nature].
1. « ejictre. his^ea^id, (See I. 483 (2)). « C. 9. d Translate
tieUher—nor—noTt by I. 478 (4). *fax (torch). f Dod. spemere.
K eonvelUrey * pull violently from its place.' h labefaeiare.
2. i propterea quod: which is stronger than quiaoT quod only, and gives more
prominence to the reason assigned. 1 Diif. 94. k < to arrive thither,'
eo pervenire. i Dod. aliuM (t). ^JlaiuB (iU). ■ digladiari.
• inter ae.
Exercise 28.
1 should scarcely have dared to ask you to write* to me in Latin^
fearing that this would seem to you an exceedingly i" difficult
[task]. (Consequently, • the Latin** letters which I have lately
received from you were the more acceptable, — [they were] not
indeed* entirely' faultless,' but yet much more correctly and
elegantly written^ than I should^ have believed [possible]. I en-
courage' you therefore to hope with confdence,) and" not to doubt
but**^ that, under my guidance,^ you will orie ddy^ attain" to
some" [considerable] facility in this accomplishment, as well as in
others, °
•■ 75. b oppido, e QtM7 (the relative adverb, instead of the de-
monstrative eo), with the comparative adj. d 'written by you in Latin,'
Latine. See I. 53, note *. * I. 383. f omni ex parte, e emenr
daJtua, It mtidwres et cultiorea, ijubeo, * I bid you.' . 1 bene.
k 1. 364. 1 aliquando. » Dod. invenire. » aliquis, <> 'of thiA
kind also.'
Exercise 29.
(On a Recovery from Illness, )
Certainly, when all' my medical-attendants'^ asserted-repeat*
edly^ with one* consent, that there was hardly any hope left of
EXERCISES 30, 31. 281
ny recoveryf^ I had so prepared myself and composed my rnind^
as* to be neither grieved nor frightened by the fear of, as it was
supposed, approaching^ death : and asked nothing^' else* of^ the
* Almighty, but") that He would deal with me * mercifully, would
pardon the erroursi of my past life, and, in that separation of body
and soul, would not" suffer me to be tormented either in a greater
degree or for a longer timei than my strength could bear.
*■ medici, b dictUare. ^ aumnvus. d < of my escaping,'
evad^ndi, * I. 66. f imminens. 8 cdiua, ^ I. 252, Obs.
\ erraia, 1 ' more violently, or longer.* Comparatives of ve/^emm/er
and diu.
Exercise 30.
{Same subject continued.)
But I hope that / have been allowed by God to remain in this
worldf^ that the stains contracted'' in former years may be blotted
out by my tears; and that at last {p) I may slight* and reject the
temptations'* of vice (pL), and pursue now at least in my old age*
that course of life which I ought to have pursued^ from the begin-
ning. And I beseech you, * again and again, noble <Sir,r that, as
you stimulateh me to the (p) performance of this' resolution • by
your example, so you would be kind enough) to assist me [to do
so], not only^ by your admonitions and advice, but also by offering
* prayers to God in my behalf J
* ' I II have been left by God in this life.' b * To contract a stain,' macU'
lam concipere : ' to blot it out or efface it,' maculam delere or eluere.
« omitiere. d ilUcd>r<B. * aaltem jam aenex. f C. ' vir
clariasinu. b incUare. i animi mei propoaiium. J dignari.
k «not only — ^but also,' et — tt: or in the usual way, nonaolum — aedetiam,
1 *for me.*
Exercise 31.
[Obs. When a demonstrative is to be translated by a relative, the conjunction
at the head of the sentence must be omitted.]
Deucalion, in Ovid,* ingeniously interprets the response'' given
him by Themis, {p) when he asked by what means'' he could
restore the human race, ()?) which had been destroyed by the
flood. For, being ordered ' to throw behind his back the bones
282 EXERCISES 82, 33, 84.
of his great mother,' || he (r) made out' [that] \^hy the name cf
mother the earth [was meant], and that stones were called* the
bones || in her (r) body,
** The Ovidian Deucalion.' Omdianus. b sors, ^ cars,, Aintd'
Ugtre, * 8uJbj.i as being a thought o£ DeucaHon^a.
_ 4
Exercise 82.
[All men] submit to punishment with a better grace,^ when^ they
think that they deserve to be punished. « Wherefore Aristotle, in
his second book on the Art of Rhetoric^^ sets-down* this argument
with others^ among those which tend to soothe the mind ; that we
should point out to those who think that an injury has been done
them, that they' began,* and that what"* they complain of '^) has
befallen them deservedly.
*■ ' bear irtri^ a more even mind that they should be punished.' b Express
* all men — whetty* by quicunque (whosoever). * I. 486 (b). d *On the
rhetorical art,' rhetoricua. • ponere, f quoque, * * w^re the first
(priores) in ^inflicting injury.' h = * those things which.'
Exercise 33.
Soon [afterwards] he fell iU of* a * severe disease^ and suffered
so much from it^ for two* months, that his friends and medical-
attendants feared for* his life, and'* (p) though he f shook off the
disorder,* it was**^ but* '^ very slowly indeed' that he recovered the
* bodily strength (p) he had lost, and his former*^ health.
* in morhum incidere or eadere, b < was so shaken or oppressed by it ;'
m4irbo urgeri^ tentari, qffligi (Cic), cofnflictari (Com. Nep.). * hinx^ the two
months being considered as one apace, Bini ' extra diatrihution em sig-
nificat duOy nan aeparatim^ aed aim,ul aumptaJ (FaceiolaH.) d I.
231. * To shake ofi'a disorder, morbum or vim m4)rbi dapelUre, f ad-
modum tarde ac Unte, ' priaHmia.
Exercise 34.
I send you back your review,* in which I have scarcely found
[any thing] to cavil at,*» much less* to censure. Your judgment
is correct' and sure : your style elegant and in good LatinA
That' you have made such progress' in this (r) I rejoice the
more, because* it was'"> principally*' by my advice^ that you were
EXERCISES 35, 36. 283
persiiaded to add this accomplishment) of writing well, to your
other graces^ of genius and learning.
* ceruura. b Diff. 108 (I). * To cavU at,' calumniari, « * much
less/ Tudur/ij* I. 443. d < and quite {pUme) Latin.' « I. 517, note z.
t *To make such progress,' tantumproficere. s I. 516. h poHsaimum^
I. 364. i Use the subst. audor, (See I. ^&A.) 1 < thought that this
credit ijaus) — should be added/ — conjungere, as it was to be, not appended to
them, but united with them. k omamtnta.
Exercise 35.
As if* my house were turned into an infirmary,^ there are ill
in it both my youngest daughter, and , my two maid-servants. I
am therefore obliged to ask« you to defer* your coming,* which
for^^^ many reasons I was so anxiously^ expecting, to a time
more convenient to us. Farewell, excellent man. Leyden,
March 19.*^
* I. 494. b Sen. uses tqUtwiinarium, The term in Justinian's Code of
Laws is noaocomiwm^ from voaoKOjieXov, ^ I. 252. d I. 75. * adventue
t tantopere, e I. 526, 628. These rules may be given thus : —
Adde diem semper Nonis atque Idibus unum :
Accipiatque dies mensislux ultima binos.
Exercise 36.
The more* lazy* 1 grow^ in writing letters, the more vehe-
mently do I desire to converse with you, especially since* [we]
have* innumerable subjects^ of conversation.* You will there-
fore highly gratify^ both me and all mine, if you will revisit us,
and [that after so] long a time,i during the Easter holidays.) The
cold is sharp, I allow ; but you shall have^ a bright' fire'» in your
bed-room.
<" I. 407. b Dod. ignavia, « <age makes me.' d I. 489.
* esse. t arguTnenttan, s Grerund. h ' will have done [a thing]
most gratifying,' gra^Mmt£«. i intervaUum, J ferics Pasdiales.
k * there shall be prepared for you ' i focus.
* * Nedum is rare in Cicero, who generally uses mm modo instead of it after
ne — quidemj
284 EXERCISES 37, 38, 39.
Exercise 37.
Your letters are few and far between ;» but they make up forb
their rarity by their wonderful' tenderness.* Many parts of them*
have delighted me, but nothing more than the^^ affection, which
you not only manifest* to me in my life-tim^y^ but. also solemnly*
promise to manifest^ to my [family], when 1 am gone J
A < are certainly rare,' rarua quidem. b eompentare. « stuintas,
d * many [things] In them.' * amorem preestare (to manifest by sab-
Btantial kindness). f * to me alive.' f aanete. h Difi*. 2.
i * shaU have cecued to be J
Exercise 38.
As to* my property^ [which is] small* indeed,** but in a tolerO'
hly good condition,^ let us converse [about it] when you come in
the spring J I am so strong' both in body and mind, that unless
I f am carried off by apoplexy, •» I seem as if I mights arrive at
the same age that my mother reached :l nor do I feel that I am
* growing an old man || yroffi any things but"* my laziness in let-
ter-writing, i
* De. b rea (pi.). « modicua. d 1. 383. • *but sufficiently
miinvolved/ aatia explicatua. (So Cic. protfincia guam maxime apta e xp lie a-
taque.) ( avb tempus vemum. f * To be strong/ vigsre. b apo-
pUxia or apoplexia, i * to be able.' J aitingere. k < [from] anv
other circumstance/ rea, i Mn writing letters.'
Exercise 89.
Of our [men]* not more than twenty were [either killed or]
missing^ [after] all the engagements. But in the castle there was
not a single* soldier who was not wounded : and of one cohort four
centurions lost* their eyes. And desiring* to * produce evidence
of their exertions^ and the danger they had been in^t they counted
over before^ M arius about thirty thousand arrows^ [which had
been] shot J into the castle, and brought to him the shield^ of the
centurion Scseva, in which there were founds a hundred and twenty
boles. »
* In such enumerations the poaaesaive adjective is often used, of course in
agreement, instead of partUwe gen.y or ex, &c. Caesar, especially, is fond of
this construction: thus noatri circUer aeptuaginta ceeiderunt, (Bell. Civ.
1 46. b To be [killed or] missing (i. e. loat in any way), denderari.
EXERCISES 40, 41. 285
B * Single ' after general negatives, such as nemo^ nuUnSj neque quisquam or
iiUtis, is best translated by omnino = < at all, in all,' which extends the meaning
strictly to all. Here nemo— omnino. d I. 56, n. • 'when {quum)
they desired.' (subj,) ^ f /oftor (sing.). «r * /Aeir danger.' b 'To
count Over (again) before any body,' renumerare cut. » For military mat-
ters Csesar and Livy are the best authors to copy, but especially Csesar. With
respect to compound numerals of this, kind, he so nearly always places th^
thousands first, then the gen.^ and then the number of thousands^ that this is a
very good order to follow. Thus, miUia passuum decern ; miUia hominum circi-
ter viginti, Ac. , J ' To shoot ' (of weapons hurled^ as those of the ancients
were), conjjcere, k 'the shield being brought {referre\ \there\ were
found in it,' Ac. i foramen.
Exercise 40.
He sends thither M . Valerius with five cohorts of the eighth
legion. The people of Veii^ as soon as they saw our standards,
opened** their gates; and all,* both inhabitants'* and soldiers, came
forth « to meet^ -Valerius ?w7^ their congratulations :^ Sulpicius and
Manlius threw themselves down from^^ the wall. Manlius, being
brought*' before! Valerius, begs to be sentj toMarius. Valerius,
with the cohorts and Manlius, returns on the same day that^ lie
had set out [upon his march thither]. Marius incorporated* the
legions with his own army, and dismissed Manlius unpunished.'"
* Veienses. b V. M. 7. * universi. d oppidani (inhabitants
of the totDn). • exire. f * To meet * is generally translated by obviam '
with a dat., ire {exire^ <&c.) obviam alicui. f^ * congratulating.' h dedttci,
i ad. J I. 75. k C. 25. i conjungere aUquem cum aliqud re.
» incolumis.
Exercise 41.
I have heard our friend Pomponius say* that he had two
Soldiers in Spain, rich brothers from") the Faliscan territory ; their
father f having left them a small country-house,^ and a field* of
certainly* not more than pne acre, they** formed an apiary* round
the whole house, and had a garden [there], and filled up^ the rest
with thyme, cytisus, and balm.* These** [brothers, he said] used
never to make j less, on an average,^ than ten thousand sestertia
byj their honey.
• / have heard you say^ is, audivi te (ipsum) dicere ; audivi, quum diceres ;
audivi te dicentem. b * to whom when a small country-house had been left
by their father.' « agellus. d sane. * alveariumf 1. e. a system of
286 EXERCISES 42, 43.
bee-hiyes. t obsepire, s apia^rum, ^ Continue this in obUqm
narration. i ut perceque ducerent, 1 * to make so much by any thing,'
reeipere (with ace. of the thing) ex.
Exercise 42.
If there is no* food [for them] naturally-growing^ [there], the
owner ought to sow what bees Uke best:* such as^ roses, wild-
thyme, « balm,' poppies, beans, lentils, peas, basil,' the [sweet-
scented] rush,^ lucerne, 1 and especially cytisus, which is extremely
good J for them [when] in health. For it begins to flower at^ the
vernal equinox, and continues [in flower] to the autumnal equinoxA
But though*" this is best for'^>^ [their] health, thyme is best toiih
reference to the"^ making of honey . <> For ^^> this reason the Sicilian
honey bears Uie *pahn, because? the thyme is there good and
abundant.4
» < not.' (See p. 257, 103.) b naturaUa. « * most follow.' d * ffuse arc'
Obs. All the names are to be in the amguUir, « serpyllum, t apiaairum,
9 ocimum, fa <:yperuni, i medica (sc. herha). ) tUUiasvmus.
k < from,' ab, i ' to the other equinox of autumn.' What is the word for
' other ' of two things 1 n' * as this is best — so thyme,' &c., tit— etc, . » ad^
o mellificmm, p quod, 'ijrequena.
Exercise 43.
(On the Medical Art.)
As agriculture [provides] nourishment for healthy bodies, so
medicine promises * health to [them when] diseased.* There is*"*
indeed nowhere, [where] this [art] does not exist : since^ even the
most uncivilized*' nations are acquainted with herbs and other sim-
ple<* [remedies] for* the cure^ of wounds and diseases. Among**)
the Greeks, || howevery it was cultivated considerably' more than
amongst^ other nations : and' [yet] even amongst these, not from
the first beginning [of their national existence], but [only] a few
centuries before us, since i iEHsculapius was celebrated as the first
inventor [of it] ; who, because he studied somewhat'' more pro-
foundly this science, [which was] still rude and in its infancy, ^
was worshipped (tfter his death as a god,"^
*- V. M. II. b aiqpditm. ^ imperitiasimus, d promptus (i. e.
ready at liand). *ad. t auxUiuTiif i. e. help against them, whether
EXj^ciSES 44, 45. 287
whole ox partial cure. ? aliqaanio^ 1. 402. h in^ with abl. i ac,
J u^oto^ttm, with suJbj. ^patUo, i vu/jgfam. «» * was received
into the number of the gods.' recipi.
Exercise 44.
(Same subject continued,)
Aflei^ [him] || his two sons Podalirius and Machaon, following
Agamemnon in the war against Troy,^ afibrded no^^ inconsid-
erable*^ service to their comrades.*^ But yet Homer has described*
II them (r) not as having rendered them any^ aid against^^ pesti-
lence,^ nor^ the various kinds of diseases, but only as being
accustomed to curei wounds with the knife J and medicinal appli-
cations. ^ From which it [plainly] appears,*®^ that these [were]
the only branches* of medicine which"* they f attempted; and
that [consequently] these are the oldest. And we f may learn
[from] the same author," that diseases were referred to the anger
of the gods, and that it was***^ from them {that] assistance used to
be implored.
* Deinde. b * Trojan.' « mediocria. d commilUones. • proponeref
with inf. r The regular words after negatives are quisquam and uUtis : but
aliquis is sometimes found. According to MatthuB this is : ' when the thing
either reaUy exists^ or might bempposed to have existed,* (Ad. Cic. Cat. 1, 6, 16.)
Use aliquis here : and see I. 160. s tn, with abL h Dod. lues. i V.
M. 19. )JierTum. k medicamentum, i pars. «» Diff. 8.
A ' Author ' is never auctor (but scriptoVf &c.) except when, as here, he is our
aiUhority for a statement.
Exercise 45.
(Same subject continued,)
And it is * probable, that though there were no remedies^ against
bad health, yet that men for the most part enjoyed good health,^ on
account of their good habits'^ [of life], which neither sloth** nor
luxury had corrupted. For* it is"^ these two [vices], which first^
in Greece, and then*^^ amongst^®^ ourselves, have injured^ [men's]
constitutions. And consequently, •» this complicated* [art of]
medicine, which was unnecessary in former days, and is so now
amongst other nations,) {enables^ but a very few^ of us to reach the
beginning {pL) of old age.
288 EXERCISES 46, 47.
» irUtr nulla auxUia^ followed by gen. b « yet that it generally (plenimque,)
fell-to-men's-lot (contingere) good.' ® mores. d Ddd. ignavia.
• nquiiUm. ( priua^ there being only hDo cases mentioned. s affiigere :
* constitutions,' corpora. »» V. M. 20. » multiplex. J * neither
necessary in former days- nor amongst ^^ other nations.'. In former days :
olim. v. M. 9^ ^ * Enables to reach,' perducil ad^ &c. i vix aliqui.
Exercise 46.
Sylla with an inferior force' was besieging troops which had yet
suffered no loss or disaster ^^ they being* [also] supplied with an
abundance of every thing : for every day** a great number of ships
arrived from all parts* to bring them provisions : nor could the
wind hlow from any quarter that was not favourable to some of
them J He,« on the other hand,** having consumed all the com
round about f^ was in great distress ;j but yet his men*'^ bore tlieir
privations^ with extraordinary patience. For they called to mind?
that, after" suffering the same [hardships]! in Bithynia the year
before, they, by their exertions and patient endurance," put an
end" to a very formidable® war : they remembered p that, after*^
suffering great distress' before Nicomedia, and much greater
still'' before Mantinium, they gained a victory* over mighty
nations*
* mUUum numerus, b copia irUegrtB atque incolumeB, According to Dod.
incolumis and integer both mean * unhurt and untouched :' integer^ opp. to * being
attacked^* incolumis^ to * being wounded.' Dod. saltms. •^ quumilli. d 69, 1, t.
« undique. ( * nor could any wind blow, but {quin) they had a favourable
course from so^e quarter (pars).' * Could* should be the imperfect^ as it is an
expression of a repeated possibility. s ipse, h autem. ifdr and wide.
J angustuB (a ' strait'), pi. k * these things.' (See I. 24,) i See I. 24.
»» patientia. » conficere. ° maximua. P I. p. 72, note q. *» inopia
(distress for provisions). ' V. M. 21. • "I*o gain a victory,' victorem
or victores decedercy with gen. of course.
Exercise 47.
1. In the mean time,* L. Sanga, whom Sylla at his departure
(p) had left in command of the camp,** being informed [of what
was going on], came to the assistance* of the cohort with two
legions. On his (r) arrival, the Africans were easily repulsed ;
they did || not"^ [so much as] stand* the sight^ and [first] shock of
our [troops], but [as soon as] (p) their first ranks were broken,*
the rest turned their backs and fled from the field.** But Sanga
EXERCISE 48. 280
recalled our men, that they might not pursue them to any great
distanced
2. Now J many men think, that if he had chosen^*^ to pursue
them more warmly,^ the war might have heen terminated on that
day : it does not however * appear i that his decision was [justly]
censurable :" for the duties" of a lieutenant are one, « those of a
general another :• the former? ought to act in every thing ac-
cording to his instructions /^ the latter? to decide vMhout restraint
according to what seems best with reference to the whole state of
affairs,
1. * I. p. 141, noteg. b 'had placed over the camp,* prc^lcere.
c 1. 242 (1). dnequevero. ^ferrt, f Dod. rndere. ff «To
break the first ranks,' |7rt9?u» dejicere. h loco cedere, i Umgius,
2 i At. k acriua, i I. 297. ™ reprehendendus. The ad-
jectives in -ablej -ibley may be translated by the part, in diiSj when they mean
what (mgbi to be done : not when they mean what can begone. n partes,
*> I. 38. ' alter — aUer. i {id prcBscriptum libert ad summam rerum
con3ulere.
Exercise 48.
He* disposes his men [along] the"^ works he had begun •» to
raise, not at certain intervals,*^ as was done on^ the preceding*
day^, but in a continued line of guards and posts y^ so that [the par-
ties'] touched^ * each other, and [all together] Jilled up the whole
line of worksn^ He orders* the military tribunes and officers of
the cavalry to patrol [about the works], and begsJ them not only
to be on their guard against^ sallies, but also to keep an eye upon
individuals secretly leaving the gates, ^ Nor™ was there of the
whole [army] a-single individual"^ of so indifferent" and sluggish?
a mind, as to take a wink of sleep*^ that night.
* *He' (of the general), ipsf. b inalituere, «* certain space
being intermitted.' d ' as was the custom of,* &c. • superior,
r perpehds tfigiUis stationUmsque, s * disposes, being the historical pres-
ent. What tenses would both be correct here ? I. 414. h munUiorum ex-
plere : expUre; to leave no gapJB ; complere^ to JUl as full as a thing will hold.
» * to order to patrol,* circummittere. ) hortari^ I. 75. ^ ^ To he on
vn^sgwird against any thing,' cav^e ab aUqud re, i * to observe the secret
exits {exitus) of individuals,* singuli homines. ™ neque vero : the vero
adding emphasis to the assertion. ^ * any (one).' What word for * any 7 *
I. 389—391. » remissus. ? languidus, <> * as to rest,* con-
quiescere. (See I. 66, note s. Translate according to 1. 483 (a).)
13
290 EXERCISES 49, 50.
Exercise 49.
{Death of Poly carp.)
1. When* they f arrived*' || there,**^ he being* from»> his age
weak in his legs, and [consequently] allowed to ride upon an ass,d
a great concourse (pi*) took place both of Jews and Pagans :
some* of whom, remembering his old reputation, had c&mpassion'
on his age : but most [of them] were * exasperated [against him}
from*) their hatred against^ the Christians, and especially hecaus^
Poly carpus had prevented the offering of sacrifice^ to the gods of
their country.
2. Hence when, [upon] being ordered to curse Christ, he saidi
that he Would never do that to his King and Saviour, he was im-
mediately handed-oyer^ to the executioners to^^ be burnt» alive.
When they f were leading him to death, a certain presbyter, with
whom he had been intimate," met" him :• [and] said weeping, * O
Polycarp, what undeserved treatment art thou receiving!*^ he [re-
plied] :« *But not unexpected' [treatment], for many Christian
bishops will hereafter* meet mth this fate .''*
1. * vbi : what tense 1 I. 512, 514^ b pervenire, I. 296, * quum,
with subj. . d * riding upon an asj^' aaino vekL * Instead of making
these principal sentences, connect them with the preceding by quum with subj.
Som&--b%Umo9ti aJ^—^urvmivero. ( mUerari. ff I. 156. iimaxi"
meque quod, i tacra fieri prohibuerat,
2. J DifT. 2. k tradere, i comburi. ^familiariter uH.
n abviam ease. ^is quum. P ' what undeserved [things] thou <uri
mifferingl* ^huioiUe. ^ inopinatus, •ddnde^, ^hunc
exUum habire.
Exercise 50.
It is [kind in you and] like a brother* to exhort" me, but [you
exhort me who am] now^, by Hercules,^ running [apace, that way
myself, so] that I lavish* all my [assiduous] attentions'^ upon"
hipa* alone. Nay,' I shall perhaps^ with my ardent zeal accom-
plish** what often happens to travellers, :{: when they make haste ;i
[I mean] that as [they], if they have happened^ ° to rise later than
they intended,! [yet] by quickening their speed,^ they arrive even
earlier 1 at their journey^ s end,^ than if they had lain awake all the
morning;'' so I, since I have so long overslept myself'* in the ob«
EXERCISES 51, 52. 291
servancep of this man, [though], hy Hercules^ you heme many a
time tried to atoake me,*i will make up for' my laziness by
rimning. '
•'fraUrru (adv.). - b mekercule. The now' is to be made emphatic by
quidem, « conftrrt: d atudia (pi.). * him r= him whom you
mention, dkc. What pron. should be used for* Ae?' 1.377(c). t Ego
vero : the vtro adding emphasis to the statement. r V. M. 1^.
n ejffUcrt. i V. M. 22. J vdlt, k properare. i cUiua,
«*whithcir they wish,* vtUe. »cfo muUd node vigUare. oth-
dormire, p colere. I. 359. ^ ' you by Hercules often rousing me.'
«■ corrigere,
Egsercise 51.
Cato in 3icily was refitting his old ships of war,» and command'
ing the states to provide new ones for him.^ These [objects] he
pursued with great zeaL In Lucania and Bruttium,^ he, by
means of his lieutenants, raised troops'^ of Roman citizens : and
required • from the states of Sicily a certain amount^ of infantry
and cavalry. When these [preparations] were almost completed,
being informed of Curio's arrival, he complained in an address to
his troops^s that he was abandoned and betrayed by Pompey, who,
though utterly unprepared^ in every respect,^ had begum an unne-
cessary war ; and [when] questioned in the senate by him and
other [senators], had asserted'^ that he hdA^ every thing ready and
in good orders for'^^ a war.
*• navea longae. b < was commanding new [ones] to the states.' So
imperarefrumenium civUcUibuaf &c. ^ In Lucanis Bruttiiaqut. The name
of the people (Ijucani) is often thus used^ where ice use the name of the terri-
tory, d ddechts habere, * exigere, t rmmeruB. ' in condone.
Use the pros, historicum. h imparoHanmua followed by prep, db, i ' all
things.' J auacipere, k DifT. 47. ^ apta et parata.
Exercise 52.
Having given [him] these instructions,* he arrives .at Canusium
with six legions, three of them being composed of veteran soldiers,^
the rest such as he had formed** out of the new levies, and filled
up** on*« his march : for he had sent Domitius's* cohorts straight'
from Cbrfinium to Sicily. He found that the consuls were gone*
to Dyrrachium with a great part of the army, and 'that Lucceius
was remaining at Brundusium with twenty cohorts ; nor could it
202 EXEECISES 53, 54.
be found out [for] certainty, whether he had remained there for
the purpose of holding^ Brundusium, thati he might the more
easily remain master of the whole Hadriatic, or had [merely]
stopped there for^^ want of ships.
* mandata. b < three [of them] yeteran [legions].* veterantu.
c diUcttu (sing.). d compUre. * Domitianns (adj^). f proHniu.
f prqficUci, h obtin9re. i What word for ^UUUT
Exercise 53.
When the excited" body of young men^ were rashly taking arms,
and endeavouring to make a hostile attack upon' the unoffending"*
Thessali^-ns, it was 1 who compelled the senate to repress by
its authority the violence of [these] striplings : it was*°J I who
strictly charged* the qu8Bstoj?s not to supply money' for the pay-
ments [of the troops] : it was*"^ I who, (p) when the arsenal •» was
broken open, withstood [the multitude], and prevented^ [^^^^y] arms
from being carried out. And thus you know that it was***^ by my
exertions, and mine alone j^ that an unnecessary war was not brought
about.
* concUdre. b juventttf. ^ manu laceasere. d quietus. * irUermvnari
(Ter. followed by ne). ( sumptua. s sHpendium. h armamentarium,
i ' by my exertions [of me] alone.' Exertions, opera^ <s, aing. (Comp. Cic. aoliua
enim meum peccatum; in uniua med aalute,)
Exercise 54.
See how uncertain^ and variable' the condition* of life is ; how
unsettled** and inconstant [a thing] fortune ; what« unfaithfulness*
there is in friends ; what^ simulations* suited to times and circum-
stances,* what* desertion* [even] of our nearest [friends] in [our]
dangers, what* cowardice.* There will, there will, I say,^ be a*)
time, and the day will come* sooner or laier,^ when you will missi
the affection of a most friendly, the fidelity of a most worthy)
person, and the high spirit ^^ of the bravest man that ever lived,^
* ratio. How to make uncertain and variable emphatic, see p. 236, 16 (6).
^vagua. e Gaut. 21. d Plural. * aptua ad tempua. f prqfecto
(assuredly, verily). » tuceaeere <wlll dawn, i. e. begin to shine),
b aHquando. i deaiderare. In this construction the aubj. preaent is to be
used : not the iiit. indicative. J graviaaimua. & animi magnitudo,.
On the position of the two genitives see Introd. 27. i * The bravest man
that ever lived,' unua poat hommea natoafortiaaimua vir.
EXERCISES 55, 56, 57. 293
Exercise 55.
Are you trying to Jind*^ a new method of governing the state ?
Why,* you cannot discover® a better [one] than [that which] you
have received from your forefathers. Are you trying to find out,
at a vast outlay ^^ how you may not pay« taxes ? Why,* you can-
not by taking counsel (pL) increase the resources' of the treasury,
which you desire [to increase]. Are you trying to find out how
you may spare men [who are] polluted by crime ?'*> Why,* you
cannot, by pardoning the guilty,*^ secure** the safety of the inno-
cent.
• qucerere. ■ h ai. c v. M. 2. d * by mftking very great
outlays.' ffump<u«. *c(mferre, topes, tnocentes, hcuatodirt
(guard).
Exercise 56.
Even the bravest men have not, except in extreme necessity,
Jlung their lives away*^ for the sake of avoiding some* disgrace : as
[for instance] P. Crassus Mucianus, [when] conducting* the war
against Aristonicus in Asia, being taken [prisoner] between filsea
and Smyrna by [some] Thracians, of whom that prince^ had a
large force- in his fortified toumsy^ that he might not foil into his
hands,* escaped [this] disgrace by a voluntary death J For he is
reported to have thrust* his riding-stick^ into the eye of one of the
barbarians : who [then], enraged i by the violence of the pain,
stabbed Crassus with his dagger in thc^ side,J and [thus], whilst*
he avenged himself, delivered a Roman general from the dis^
graceful violation^ of his dignity."
* * sought death voluntarily,* mortem vUro oppetere. Some, 1. 392. b gerere
(bellum cum). ^ Only a pronoun. d * had a great number in garrison.'
* in diiionem ejus pervenire. ( arcessUa raHo mortis. f dir^ere,
b a riding stick, virgOy qud aliquis ad regendum equum viitur. The tense of
the verb, of course, to be altered according to circumstances. ~ i accendi.
J < stabbed (co^/bc^6)Crassus'8 side with his dagger.' kl.509. iturpiiudo,
*> majestas: which Cic. attributes to consuls, judges, dkc.
Exercise 57.
It was ever my persuasion,*^ that* all friendships should be main-
tained<^ with a religious exactness,'^ but especially* those which^
294 EXERCISES 58, 59.
are renewed^ afier*'^ a quarrel :*■ becausei in friendships [hith-
erto] uninterrupted] a failure* of duty is easily excused' by a
plea" of inadvertency, or, /o*> put a worse construction upon t7,of
negligence : [whereas] if^ after a reconciliation, •» any [new] offence
he given fP it does not pass for negligent^ hut wilful:'^ and is not
♦imputed*' to inadvertency, but to perfidy.
* II ' / have always thought.' b Connect these two clauses by qwm — turn
(both-'imd), 6 iiuri. d * with the greatest scrupulousness {religio) and
fidelity.* * * In quum—tumf the turn is often strengthened by vero^ ctrU etiam,
prtBciputf maxime.' f I, 476. r recaneiliaH in graHckrn, h inimicUuB, pi.
i propterea quod. 1 integer, k pr<Btermittere. I defendere.
» exctuatio. » granue interpretoH, ** red/ihu in gratiam.
P 'any thing is committed.* I. 389—91. ^ * is not thought neglected, but
violated.*
Exercise 58.
Having called together his men for the purpose of addressing
ihemy*' * Know,' he says, ' that in a very few days from this timey^
the king will he here* with ten legions, thirty thousand horse, a
hundred thousand light-armed^ [troops], and* three hundred
elephants. Therefore let certain persons cease to inquire or
* imagine [any thing] beyond [this], and let them believe me,
tD?u> have certain knmoledge .•' or, assuredly,* 1 will order them
(p) to be put on board *» the oldest vessels [in the service], and to
be carried to whatever country the icind may happen to take
tliem.'i
» Uo an assembly.* ad condontm vocare^ advocare^ or convocare. — in amcumem
advocare. (M. L. 4.) b The pron. hie. in agreement with 'days.* In I. 311,
paucis Ms diebua is given for * a few days ago,* It may also mean * within a few
days ;* the hie marks neameas to the speaker (i. e. to the time of his speaking),
on either side. ^ adease. d tevis armaiur<B. * DifT. 88. r See
above, Ex. 3, c. eompertum habere. Compare perepectum haJlare^ abeohUum habere.
I. 364. f and quidem: the quidem adding emphasis to the aid. b V. M. 23-
i * by any wind whatever into any lands whatever.* quicunque.
Exercise 59.
On**^ his approach being announced, L. Plancus, who * com-
manded the legions, being compelled by the critical state of affairs *^
takes [a position on] a rising ground, and draws up his army in
two diviswas"^ facing different ways^^ that he may not (414) be
EXERCISE 60. 295
surrounded by the cavalry. Thus, though Jus forces were ir^e-
rior,^ he kept his ground <> against furious charges [both] of the
legions and of the cavalry. When (p) the cavalry were already
engaged, both parties f behold at a distance^ the standards of two
legions, which V. Attius had sent from the upper bridge to the
support*^ of our troops, anticipating what really occiarredf^ that' the
generals of the opposite party would use the opportunity unex-
pectedly offered them, to fall upon our men. By the approach
of these (r) legions the battle wa,s broken off,i and each general
marched back his legions to his camp.
* rueessaria rea. b pars. ^ diverattSf in agreement with acies.
d * having engaged {congredi) with an unequal number.' * ausHnere (to
support : to bear without jrielding). Use the historical present. f V. M. 24.
r svbsidium. Use the construction I. 242. h ' suspecting [that] that would
be, which happened/, acete^ere or corUingere, Why 7 M.L.I. i*UiiB
sometimes used (with subj.) as explanatory of a demonstrative pronoun,— —
where qtuxl might rather have been expected, or the ace. and inf. J Pres.
his tor. —iiirim«r«.
Exercise 60.
Whilst he was preparing and carrying out* these [plans], he
sends his lieutenant, C. Fabius, before him into Spain, with three
legions, which he had put into winter-quarters at Narbo and its
neighbourhood;^ and directs that the passes* of the Pyrenees
should be quickly seized, which L. Valerius f was then occu-
pying with his troops:'* the other legions, which were in more
remote winter-quarters,* he orders to follow. Fabius, according
to his instructions,^ having made great despatch, clears the pass,^
and proceeded by forced marches against Valerius's army<.
*■ administrare. b circum ea loco, ^ aaltua. So saliuB Ther'
mopylarum. (Liv.) d pnBsidia. * * which were-ln-winter-quarters
(hiemare) further-off.' f < as had been commanded.' > r pnesidivm ex
Boltu dejicere : dejieere in this sense is a technical term of military science.
ON THE TENSES IN A LETTER.
1. It is a peculiarity in Roman letter- writing, that the writer
puts himself (as it were) in the time when the letter tciU he re-
ccived, and thus speaks of what he is doing, as what he was doing :
206 EXBBCISE 61,
an^o uses the imperfect and pluperfect instead of the present and
perfect.
2. Thus : ' I h a V e nothing to write,' niUl hah eh am quod
scriherem : *I have heard no news,' nihil navi audieram.
And this extends to the adverhs : instead of ' yesterday,^ we find
* the day hefore,'
3. To see that these are the tenses the receiver would use, sup-
pose him relating the substance of such a letter : turn quum Cicero
hanc epistolam scripsit, nihil hah eh at quod scriheret, neque
enim novi quidquam audierat, et ad omnes meas epistqlas re-
scripserat pridie, SfC,
4. But general truths and statements that are not made rela-
tively to the time of writing stand in the usual tenses (e. g. ego te
maximi et feci semper et facio): nor does the use of the
imperf. and pluperf. always occur where it might stand.
Exercise 61.
Although I have nothing to write,* and moreover f am possessed
by a'^ strange unwillingness^ to write*^ [at all], yet I am unwil-
ling that this good-for-nothing* [lad of] mine should go to your
neighbourhood** without [any] letters of mine to you. I love you
more every day,« because I am * persuaded that you' f love' your
studies* in the same way. But I would wish you to write to me
an accurate statement^ with what * author you are now engaged,
whether Cicero or Terence, or as» 1 would rather [have it], with
both ? You ought also to take painsJ to employ, in what you
write^f to me, the phrases > which you have observed in their
works : that this" itself may be a proof" to me of the * accuracy
with which you readthem,^ Farewell. Tibur, Aug. 28.
» Use the favorite form nihil est quod (477). b odium. « verhero {(mis).
* What adv. expresses 'to where you are,* * to your neighbourhood?' I. 387.
* Distfnguish between quotidiej indies. Which is used in both senses? I. 69, t.
f To be expressed by the passive voice, to avoid the ambiguity which the two
accusatives would occasion. ' amuse yourself,' oblectare. See D6d. obleckUio.
r litterarum studia. b < ^accurately.' i ' which.' J dare operam
(followed by ut). k shall write — shall have observed (notare) : the conduct
being recommended as what should be followed in future. i loquendi
genera. » Express res. » ^fidemfaeere cujua rei, ^ * of your *acca-
racy in reading them.'
]pz£Boisss^2, 63. 207
Exercise 62.
If I had as often* encountered^ toils and dangers against' you
and my country, and our hoiisehold-gods, as I have from the he-
ginning« of my manhood f scattered by my arms your most wicked
enemies, and f won** safety for you,, you could not have decided*
any thing more against me in my absence, O Conscript Fathers,
than you have hitherto been doing. You first^ hurried me off,
though not yet of the legal age,s to a most cruel war, and then'
destroyed me, with my most deserving army, by hunger, the most
wretched of all deaths.''^ Was this the hope with which the Ro-
man people sent out her children to war ? are these the rewards
for our wounds, and for'* our so often shedding our blood for our
country ? Being tired of writing and sending messengers, I have
exhausted all my private resources and expectations, whilst^* you
all the time have in three years sent the pay of scarcely one year.i
* < 80 many ' [toils, ^c.]. A sentence is occasionally arranged in this not
strictly accurate way, where tot refers to quoties, (Tfius Cic. pro Balbo, 20 ; at
tot consvMJbua meruisaetf quo ties ipse consulfuisset.) * under my command,'
dtidu meo. b auacipere. <^ I. 179. d qtuerere (which is often used
of a successful search : nearly = inpenire), " To * do,' when used in this
way as the representatioe of a preceding verb (here to be doing :=z tobe deciding)^
IS mostly /ocerf, but sometimes agere : e. g. Sail. Gat. 52, 19. f First— then
may often be translated by turning the verb with ^ first' into a past participle :
thus * me, being hastened away — ^you destroyed,* dkc. < To hurry a man off,'
projicere (if he be sent away recklessly, to be never cared for afterwards),
ff * against [my] age,' contra cetatem. b quum-^nterimf words often used
Indignantly of conduct that is a strong contrast to what it diould have been,
i * scarcely one-year's pay has been given by you.' One-year's, annuus. Pay,
stipendium; but sumptus when considered as given to the commander-in-chief
to defray with it all the expenses of the war.
Exercise 63.
{The same subject corUinued,)
By the immortal gods, is it*® that you think I serve* for a trea-
sury ? or that I can have an army without provisions and pay ?
I confess that I set out for this war with more zeal than prudence ;
seeing that** (p) though I had received from you only the name
of general,"^ I raised an army in forty days, and drove back** the
enemy, (p) who were already hanging over Italy,* from the Alps
13*
298 EXERCISE 64.
into Spain. Over' these [mountains] I opened^ a different^ road
from [that which] Hannibal [opened], and [one] more convenient
for us. I recovered Gaul, the Pyrenees, Laletania, the Indigetes ;
and with newly- raised* troops, and much inferior [in number],
stood) the first attack of the victorious' Sertorius : and [then] spent
the winter in camp, amongst the most savage enemies ; not in the
towns, or toith any such indulgence to my troops as a regard to my
own popularity vnth them would have suggested.^
* prtBBtare vieem {oHcujuM ret), b quippe qui .* here with indie. I. 482.
c t of a command,' imperium. ^ nimmovire. * in cervieibua jam
ItaUa agtrt. Nearly bo: nunc in ctrvicibua tvmufy ' are immediately
upon them:' helium in^ena in eervicihua erat, impended:' both Liv.
f per, » V. M. 7. h * different from,* aUue atque. i nomia.
J muUrvtrt. k ex ambitione med. The kind of ambitio meant, is the courting
popularity with an army by allowing it such indulgences as comfortable winter-
quarters, &c.
Exercise 64.
{The same subject continued.)
Why should I go on to enumerate* the battles [I have fought],
my winter expeditions, or the towns (p) that I have retaken or
destroyed ? since facts tire stronger^ than words. The taking* of
the enemy's camp at the Sucre,' the battle at the Durius,** the (p)
utter destruction* of C. Herennius, the general of our enemies,
with Valentia, and his whole army, are apparent^ enough to you :
and for these (r) [benefits] you give us in return,* ye grateful
Fathers, want and famine. And thus the condition of my army
and that of my enemies is the same : for pay is given to neither^
[of them] : and each, [if] || victorious, may come into Italy.
[Wherefore] I advise and beseech you to^ attend to this (r), and
not compel me, by my necessities, to consult my own interests
apart from those of the state,)
•■ * Why should I after this (eietn, for deinde) enumerate V b < the thing
(eing.) has more weight.' plus vatirt, c fhe Xucar. d The Douro.
* Use participles. I. 359. f e2aru«. , t redderc h <i8 giyen to
neither.' < I. 75. J privaUm,
EZEBCiSES 65, 66. 209
Exercise 65.
(The same subject continued,)
Either I (pL) or Sertorius have laid waste the tohole of higher
Spain J and cut off all its inhabitants y* except the maritime cities,
which [are however only] an additional^ burden and expense to
us. Last year [indeed] Gaul maintained^ the army of Metellus
with money and com, but now, in conspfuence of a bad harvest,^
that [country] hardly supports itself. * [For myself] I have ex-
hausted^ not only my private fortune, but also my credit. You
[alone] remain : and, unless you (r) succour us, the army, and
with it the whole Spanish war, will remove* itselfyrom this
country^ into Italy, % against my will, indeed, but according to my
predictions. i
*■ -* have wasted hither Spain to extennination,' ad intemecionem voMtare.
t> Express by the adv. vUro (properly meaning, * further on'). See I. 237.
c dUre, d media fructtbus. • * itself hardly gets on.' agUare.
f conaumere. f tranagredi. h * hence.' i * I being unwilling
and [yet] foretelling.'
Exercise 66.
Herennius, since his rear* was pressed by the cavalry, and he
saw the enemy before him, (p) when he had reached*' a certain
hill, halted there. From this he despatched* four cohorts of tar-
geteers^ to the highest of all the hills in sight;* and orders them to
make all possible haste tx> take possession of this, ^ with the intention
of following them with all his troops, and, changing his route,
reach Octogesa by the hills. As the targeteers were making for
this hill in an oblique line, the cavalry of Marius {p) saw [them]
and charged the cohorts ; who>* did not stand for a single moment
against the impetuosity of the cavalry, but {p) were surrounded
by them, and all cut to pieces in the sight of both armies.
* ruwisamuiti agmen. b naaicisei. « nUttere. Use the histori-
cal present. d cetraH. * * to a hill which was the hi^st of all
in sight.' Ddd. videre (4). f magno curau eoncUaioa ooeupare.
» 'with that intention, that he would follow.' fc 'mordld the
taigeteers stand,' Ac.
800 EXERCISES 67, 68.
Exercise 67.
I have received your three'*^ letters : but in the last there were
some [parts] so carelessly written, that it was plain* you were
thinking of something else when you wrote it. I will show you
these [faults], when 1 come to your part of the world ;^ and shall
pull your ear,* that you may be for the future more attentive
when you write,* and avoid at least such blunders,* as even little
hoys^ would avoid, who a|fe learning their accidence.^ Do not,
however, be distressed by this admonition of mine ; for I do not
wish to f take away any*" [thing] by it from your cheerfulness,
but f to add [somewhat] to your attention. Adieu. Tibur, 23
Sept.
* ' it is plain/ yoci^e wrutat : ' to be thinking of something else,' aUud agere,
b < to where you are :' to be expressed by an adv. derived from iste, the demon-
strative of the second person. I. 387. « aurtcvlam pervdUre,
d ' in writing.* * error or soUgeiamus (a solecism). ^ f pueruki». .
IT < to be learning one*s accidence/ primi» literia imbui* h I. 389 — 391.
Exercise 68.
Your letter gave me much pleasure,'^ as every thing [does] that
proceeds'* from you, although you had committed many [faults]
in it. But as lisping children'* are listened to with delight* by
fathers, and even their very mistakes are a pleasure to them, so
this your in f&ncy of letter -iDriting^ is delightful to me. I send you
it*^ back corrected by my own hand. For so, you know, we
agreed^** . Do you, dear, de^r^ Alexander, pursue with spiriu the
path, to which your natural disposition leads you, and which /
have always exhorted and urged you to follow.^ \ have, by my
report! fof you], raised great expectations in the minds of your
parents :.?" and you must now take all possible pains" that neither
I nor they fmay be disappointed® in them (r). Adieu. Tibur,
July 7, 1570.
• *[was] il awed to me.' b profidad (ab aUquo). « By mvltapeccare^
iJiUoli, • libtnter, f in literia, 8 ' it itself.' b * We agree [to
do any thi^g],' coTvohiit inter noa. i dvlciaaime ac atutmaaime, J magna
animo, k 'and I have always been your exhorter and impeller.' i testi-
monium. T^^magnam apem {alicujua) apud {aliquem) concitare. » omnt
-urd ac alvdio providlre. o speafallit aliquem.
CAUTIONS.
1. (a) Take care not to translate the English Inf., when it expresses a purpose,
by the Latin infinitive.— To make out whether the infin. expresses a
purpose, try whether you can substitute for it Hn order thatt* or ^ffuU,'
(b) The infin. after ^hwoe/'^U* is to be translated by the part, in dot, with
the proper tense of esse.
(Ens \\^ '"'** something to do,
c There ia something for me to do. •
{Lot.) Something U to be done by me.
(c) ' There ia aomething for me to do^ may also mean, ' there ia aomeffUngf
tohidi I may doy est aliquidy quod agam,
2. In translating *ago* by abhinc^ remember, (1) that it must precede the
numeral ; (2) that the numeral must be a cardinal^ not an ordinal^ nu-
meral ; and (3) that the accuaative is more common than the abl.
(a) Hence abhinc annoa guatitordecim is right ; tertio abhmc anno, quarto
dedmo abhinc die, doubly Mrrong ; tribua abhinc anniay or trea abhinc
annoay wrong.
3. Take care not to translate 'from* by 'a' or *db* in the following con-
structions : —
•
(1) To derive or receive pleasurefH^in, profit, &c.,/rom, capere volupiatem,
doloremjfructumy deaiderium ex, (not ab) aliqud re.
(2) To hear /rom any body, audire ex aliquo.
(3) * JFhvm [being] such— becomes so and so,* — ex.
(4) From such a district, town, Ac. (it being a man's birth-place or resi-
dence) — ex.
(5) To recover^rom a disease, convalescere ex morbo.
(6) To ret um/rom. a journey, redire, reverti ex itinere.
(7) F^om^ = ' on account of,' propter. * From their hatred against any
body.'
(8) To fiing or throw oneself /rom a wall, se de muro dejicere {Ctta.) : seed;
muro prsBcipitare (Ctc.).
(9) Fromj "zs. outof ex.
4. When a substantive is followed by a relative clause which defines it, be
careful not to omit the demonstrative is, eo, u2, or Ule (if there is empha-
sis), with the substantive, if a particular thing is meant. To determine
this, try whether you cannot substitute * thai ' for * a ' or * the.*
(a) Thus : < the oration which he delivered,' i&c. ( = ihai jparHeular oration
which he delivered), e a oratto, quam habuity &c.
(i) So, when a substantive is defined by a relative adverb, the 'a' ox^iha*
is to be translated by a pron. Thus :
302 CAUTIONS.
(JSTti^.) There will be a day, when, Ac.
(Lai.) There will be thcU day, irAen, Ac, {quum).
(Eng,) TVu day will come, when^ &c.
(Lot.) TTuU day will come, v^un, <&c. {(juuin), [Comp. Caution 13.]
6. Be very careful not to translate the English infinitive after a substantive or
acyective, by the Lot. infinUivef unless you have authority for It. Al-
ways consider what the rekUum is, in which the infinitive stands. Can
it be translated by a gerund In di? by ad with the gerundive (a partici-
ple in dus) 7 by a relative douse, Ac. 7
Thus : A desire to pray, s= a desire of praying,
A knife to cut my bread with, := (1) a knife for cutting my
bread ; (2) aknifiB, tpith tohidi I may cut my bread.
Obs. The *for cutting my bread* will not in Latin depend on knife,
but on the verb : e. g. I borrowed a knife for cutting iny bread with, s=
^for the purpose of cutting my bread, I borrowed a knife,*
6. Take care not to translate ' assert ' = * affirm,* by asserere, but by ajgilrmare,
oonfirmare, dicere, doctre, pronuntiare, Ac, ; or, if fc^owed by a rud or
other negative, negare.
7. Take care not to translate ^honour* by honor or hanos, when it means not
* an honour * (i. e. external mark of respect), but ' ihe inward principle
of honour * {honestas) ; or * integrity,* * trustworthiness * (Jides).
8. From nemo, let me never see i but nuUius and nuUo : or (after nega-
Neminis or nemine ; \ tives) cujusqtutm, quoquam,
9. When a clause that /ottou;« another in English, is to precede it in Latin, it is
ofteu necessary to place in it a word from the preceding sentence.
Thus : ' Alexander was blamed | because ?u indulged in drinking,'
< Because Alexander indulged in drinking, he was blamed.'
(a) This is especially the case, when n, pronoun in the 9econd clause refers
to a substantive in the first
10. From our having hardly any power of altering the order of words in a sen-
tence, it is very difficult to give emphasis to an oblique case without
placing it in a separate sentence with the verb to be. Thus : '/ desire
something* very much, (the ' wm^tn^ ' being emphatic) would
become : * there is sometiiing, that I desire very much.' Hence
O* In & sentence beginning with ^Uis* oi^it was * before * thai,* the
^ ii is* or ^U was * is omitted, and the sentence with ' that * made a prin-
cipal sentence.
{Eng.) It is the manufacturers, that I complain of.
(Lot.) 1 complain of the manufacturers.*
(a) So in a sentence beginning with * it isbut* or * it was but,* and foUowed
by* that,' dc.
{Eng.) It was but very slowly that he recovered.
{Lot.) He did no^ recover 6tt/ ( = except, nis€^ very slowly.
11. The boy has but a stupid head,
•Who always for k^ but* puts sed
• Instead of < (hot* which is here « relative, who ot whieh may ocoar. * B U
the farmers qf whom I complain.'
CAUTIONS. 808
Or ai : for other meanings * but' has got :
' Only^* * except,* 'aJtleatt;' or *who' with *not*
(1) * Stay hut one day ' = stay only one day {solum or modo).
(2) ' Do but stay ' = at least (or at all evente) stay (aaltem).
(3) ' Nobody but Caesar' = nobody exc«p/ Coesar {nisi or frater).
(4) 'There is nobody but thinks '= there is nobody to^does no/ think
(quin or qui non).
(5) 'Not to doubt but or but that' . . . =: non dubitare quin, Ac.
12. ' No ' before another adjectiye, as in ' a man of no great learning,' must be
translated by non, not nuUus,
13. ' 71i«,' when it relates to something that preceded, is often to be tnmslated
by a demonstrative pronoun. For instance, if it had been mentioned
that a day had been fixed, if it were afterwards stated that ' the day ' ar-
rived, it must be *that day* in Latin.
f;^ Hence, when ' the ' means a particular thing before-mentioned,
it must be translated by a demonstrative pronoun. Or, in other words,
when for '^' we might substitute *that,* it must be translated by the
demonstrative pronoun. [Compare Caution 4.]*
14. * TTiat,* in a clause following a comparative with quam^ or alius, malle, Ac,
is not translated.
{Eng.) 1 had rather support my country's cause than that of a private
man.
{Lot.) Patrice causam malo, quam privati sustinire.
15. Take i:are not to translate *qf' by a gen., in the following constructions : —
(a) To deserve well of any body, bene mereri de aliquo.
(6) To complain of any thing, queri de aliqiul re.
(c) To be made qf any thing, factum esse ex aliqu& re.
{d) A book of mine, liber m,eus,
{e) How many of us, three hundred of us, &c. See Pr. Intr. Pt. I. 174,
175.
16. Take care not to translate *on' or 'upon' by super, in the foUowing con-
structions : —
(1) To lavish, &c. — upon any body, conferre — in aliquem.
(2) To do any thing on his march, in itinere.
(3) To sit on a throne, in solio sedere.
(4) On this being known,
Upon
1 )
' > * this being known,' aid. abs.
(5) To write on a subject, scribere de (sometimes super) aliqud re,
(6) On descrying the troops, < the troops being descried,' abl, abs.
17. Take care not to translate 'for' by pro, In the following constmctions : —
(1) Fbr many reasons, multis de causis.
Jf\)r which reason, qvA de cans&. Cic.
For a weighty reason, gravi de causft. Cic,
The reasons/or which, . . . cavsie, propter quas, Ac.
* I have inadvertently referred sometimes to this Caution instead of to Cau-
tion 4.
304 CAUTIOfNS.
jFVm* that reason, ob earn canmm. CHe.
Fbr this reason, propter hoc.
(2) Gk>od or useful Jbr any purpose, utllls ad allquld.
Fit foTf aptus or Idoneus ad allquld : also dative.
(3) .FV, := u catiM, abl.
(4) For =: eoncemingi e. g, to battle^br any thing, de aliquft re.
(5) My reason/or not doing this, caiua nonfacienda hujtu reu
18. Amongat^ before the name of a nation, amongst whom a habit prevailed, is
usually apud (not inter) : sometimes 'tn* with abl.
19. When two substantives are governed by the gameprepoaitum, the preposition
is repeated, unleaa the two substantives are to form, as it were, cne conv-
plex notion. Hence they are repeated whenever the two substantives
are opposed to each other. Hence in
(a) et~-^i nec^nec; . . . always repeat the preposition.
(6) aid — avJt; vd — vel ^
after nisi, > generally : it is better, therefore,
after quam following a comparative, j to repeat it.*
Thus : et in hello et in pace : nee in betlo nee in pace : in nuUd alia re
nisi in virtute : in nuUd alid re quam in virtute.
20. Take care not to use apparere when * appears * zr 'seems * {indetur) : nor to
use videri (but apparire) when appears = * is manifest ;* or * makes its
appearance,*
21. A boy who is thoughtful is never perplezt.
By ' then^B* meaning *at thai time,* and 'therefore^' and 'next.*
(a) Thek, =: ' at that tim^* tum tunc; = ' next,* delude; = ' Vuro'
fore* igitur, Ac.
22. ' Men * is often used for * soldiers,' milites. * His men ' should be ' sui,* if
there is any reference to their commander : if not, milites, * the soldiers*
23. * Before * a town should be ad, not ante. See I. 457.
24. Choose often means, to ' wish,* to ' he pleased* &c., veUe, not digere, &c, :
e.g. 'if you had chosen to do this* {si voluisses).
25. In modem English there is often used for thither, and must be translated by
the adverbs meaning 'to that place* (hue, ilktc, &c.)
26. ' Crime* is not crimen (which is 'adiarge,* ' dnaocusalion*) \i\xiscdus,faci^
nus, &c.
27. "take care not to translate ttfter by post, in the following constructions :
(1) To be reconciled c^ter a quarrel, reconciliari in graiiam e x inimicitiis, Ac.
(2) Immediately after the battle, confestim a proelio.
28. Take care not to translate in by * in,* in the following construction :
(1) It is written in Greek authors, scriphtm est apud Gracos.
29. In 'this is life,* let 'this* with 'life* agree :
Hoc id, or iJUud, barbarous would be.
30. ' Ought * is a word that requires case : for it is often translated by an im-
* Sometimes a common preposition preceding the conjunction is not repeated
with e^->«f; ati<--<m^; e. g. ciim etnoctwmoeldiumomehi.
CAUTIONS. 305
perfect or fut. indicative, where our idiom would lead us to use the
present.
(a) When a present ditii/i &c.j exists, but is not acted upon, the imperfect is
often used, especially when it is a general duty, {Madvig. 308.)
1^ Hence, when *you ought* = * you ought (but do not),' use debe-
ham or oportd>at.
(6) When ouglU refers to what tpill be right or proper, wJun or after some-
thing has taken place, use oportebity debebo.
(1) The ^ after* is often implied by an abl. absoL, the participle being of the
passive voice.
31. Remember the care with which the Romans mark both the cqmpUtian of
every precedent action, and the futurity of every future action,
(a) Remember that the fut. perf, of direct becomes the pluperf. avbj. in
oblique narration.
32. When one verb has Hndted* and the next ^but, take care not to omit the
pronoun in Latin, if the nom. to the verb is a pronoun,
(a) This pronoun should be followed by the qxddem : if it is ego, write egut-
dem for ego quidem.*
{Eng.) He did not indeed laugh, but he smiled.
(Lot.) Non riait ille quidenij sed aubrisit,
33. When for 'so that* (introducing a consequence) you c6uld put Hn such a
manner^ ihatj* take care not to use ut only, but ita — tc/, placing the ita
in the preceding sentence.
34. Take care to use a distributive numeral instead of a cardinal one, with a
plural noun used in a singular sense, as litene^ castruy <&c.
f^j" But observe, uni and temi are used, not singuli or trini.
* For equidenif though probably not compounded of ego quidem^ is yet used
where quidem with the personal pronoun YfOiM be used for the second or third
person.
TABLE
OF
DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM,
English. Latin.
1. AU^who or whidi, Ac, > Often : — all — oB-many-aa (omnes —
All men — who. ) quotquot) : which is stronger ; s= all
vfWunU exception.
2. This was not done till afterwards. This was done afterwards at length
(postea demum).
C Nothing is beautiful, but tohai.^
Those things only are beautiful, TJioae thiagB at length {ea demum)
( whu^. which.
3. What do you mean by a wooden Q,uem tu intelligis murum llgneum ?
wain
4. I am reproached with ignorance. Ignorance is objected {objicUur or ex
probratuTf which is stronger) to me.
Participial Substantiyb.
5. [Nom.] Grieving. DolSre.
Your sparing the conquered is a It is a great thing, that you have spared
great thing. the conquered.
Blagnum est, guod vic^s pepercisti.]
olfire.
\Sepeccati insimulant, quod dolers
irUerimjBerint.']
7. From, with part, subst. : —
(1) To pr went any thing from hemg Prohiblre — aliquid Jfori* (rare).
done, — _— — _ ji e^fiat.
quo m.t nus ^fiat,
(2) Either /rom thinking, that, <&c. Sive eoquod — existimarent, &c.
f3) He did it^om remembering. Ex eo quod meminis^et^ &c.
(4) /^ar/rom doing this, &c. Tantum abest, ut hoe facial^
uty Ac,
(5) Not from despising — but be- Non quod aspemaretur— sed quod, Ac.
cause, Ac, /
8. By.—
[The most usual way is the gerund
in do; or partic. in dus (in
agreement).]
* Principally with the inf. pass. : ignes fieri in ca^ri» prohibet (Ges.) :
prohibuit migrari Feio* (Liv.).
TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 307
EkOLISH. liATIN.
By doing this. (Often) 'tfUe being doruj* (abl. aba.).
9. In :—
To be wrong in thinkingy &c. In hoc errare^ quod puiem^ &c.
10. Without : —
(1) He did any thing without being Non rogatus.
asked, ■ ', .
(2) He went away without reading He went away, the letter not being read
the letter. (epistold non lectd).'
(3) Many praise poets iri^^ou/ linear- Many praise poets, nor understand
standing them. them {neque intelligunt).
(4) He never praised him without He soever praised him so that he did
adding^ &c. not add {ut non adjiceret).
(5^ Nor ever saw him without catling Nor ever saw him biU she ccUled him a
him a fratricide. fratricide {quin — c o mp ellaref),
(6) I enjoy any thing indeed^ but not I so enjoy any thing, that I perceive
without perceivings <&c. [aliqui re Ha potior, ut animadver-
tam, &c.]
(7) I enjoy any thing without per- I so enjoy any thing, that I do not per-
ceiving, &c. ceive faliquft re ita potior, ut non
animadvertam, &c.]
11. To: — GJenerally ad, with part, in
dus. See Obs. on Fob.
12. Through : — By part, in dus, abl.
of gerund; or by ex eo quod
with subj. See Df. 7, From
(2).
♦12. Op:— The gerund in di, or the
part, in dus. in the gen., is the
most usual form j but these forms
do not always serve.
(1) ' Let nobody repent o f h a V 1 n g Nequem pceniteai se^ maluisBe,
preferred following,' <&c. <^c.
(2^ ' I do not despair of there Non despero Jo r e aliquem^ <f*c.
D e i n ff some one,' &c.
(3} 'I think he should repent of EgoiXLiiquoddesuSLstnttnt^dtctS'
having given u p his opinion.' sisset^pcenitendumcenseo.
(4) ' They accused Socrates o f c o r- Socratem accusarunti quod eorrum-
rupting,'&c. p eret^ ilf^.
{Sy Instead of.' See 32.
I For:—
%
13.
Q) 'Pardon me for writ ing.' Ignosee nUhi, quod s crib am.
(2) *To revile,^ abuse a man for matedicere hominiy cur fecerit^ ^.
navingdoneany thing.'
(3) 'Many reasons occurred to me Mutta mihi veniebant in mentem^
for thinking,' Ac. quamobrem putarem, ^.
(4) 'Ithankvou for compelling Gratias ago^ quod me {hoc facere)
me to do this.' coegisti.
'You are greatly to blame for Magna tua est evtpa^ qui hoc fcceris.
aving done this.'
14. And not. Nor.
And nobody, nothing, no where, Nor any thing, nor any body, nor anv
never, no. where, nor ever, nor any {nee quid-
quamy quXs^juain^ usquam, unquam^
uUus (or qutsquam).
And hardly any.* Nor scarcely any. {neque vUusfere).
* The exceptions are, (1) When the negative is to be emphatic, et semper me
eoluit et a studiis nostris non abhorret: (2) When et non or ac non = not
rather or mudi more = ac non potius {iXiepotius being often expressed), si res
verba postularet, ac non pro se ipso loqueretur.
308
TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM.
Enolish.
15. Hardly any.
Hardly any body.
16. Your i
His > accomplishments.
Their >
17. After with the varticipial subd.
is mostly translated by the perf.
participle.
I
18. It is kind in you to ask me, Ac,
19. I shall accomplish iMoi, <&c.
20. If they hqppen to do, Ac.
21. It is ascribed, &c. (of a general
truth).
22. And then Aristotle ! (i. e. is not he
a case in point 7 &c. in appeals
introduced in an argument.)
23. A. U right in saying.
24. From which.
25. It seems likely [enough] that he
will call, (&c.
26. i?\)r— not, Ac.
27. A strange fury.
28. Must (of a necessary inference).
See to what a condition the state
miLst come.
He must have made great progress.
What progress he must have made !
29. To be on the point of being kiUed.
To be on the point to run.
30. ito, sic are often used where they
seem superfluous, e. g.
(1) With verbs of hearings Uaming^
(Mrmingy dovhtifigj 4*c. — They are
tnien generally foUowed by the in-
fau (if the verb would otherwise
be so constructed), or with ut and
the subj.
(2) Also in adverbial sentences of
equality : He thinks as he speaks.
To do any thing as if, &c.
It is as is said.
31. In the case of the Nervii.
32. Participial substantive with 'in-
stead of.'
Latin.
Prope nuUus.
Nemofere.
Sometime : * the accomplishments,
tohich are in you^ him,, ihemy <&c.
C (Eng.) After having suffered (or «*/*-
feringSXhiByl went, &c.
(Lat.) Having suffered this, I went,
^ &c.
r (Eng.) After consuming the com, he
) went, i&c.
I (Lat.) The com being consum^d^ he
t went, &c.
You act kindly indeed, (in) that you
ask me.
(Jacis amice tu quidem, quod me rogas,
<&c.)
(Often) I shall accomplish that {hoe or
iUvd)j quody <&c. : i. e. the dem. pron.
is often inserted i^
If perchavjce they do, &c. {si forte).
It is wont (solet) to be ascribed.
(Often': not always.)
What Aristotle?
Quid Aristotdes 7
A. rightly says {rede).
Often * whence ;' unde.
He seems about-to-call {videtur voca-
turus).
Neque enim : but non enim is not un-
common even in Cic, j and is to be
preferred, when there is any anti-
thesis ; i. e. when followed by a ' but J
A certain strange fiiry {quidam after the
adj. — this addition of quidam to an
adj. is very common).
Cic. often translates this by putare.
Vide quern in locum rempubUcam ven-
turam putetis.
IhUandus est multum profecisse.
duos pi'ogressus eum putoTnus fecisse !
In eo esse ut interficeretur ; or with
part, in rus with jam.
Jam cursurum esse.
Examples. — 1. iSic a majoribus suisac-
ceperant, tanta esse beneficia, Ac.
C. — 2. Quum sibi ita persuasisset
ipse, meas — literas, &c.(v}ithinfin.)
C. — 3. Se ita a patribus aidicissej ut
magis virtute quam dolo contend-
erent. C<m.— 4. Ita Helvetios
instUuios essCjUt consuerint, Ac.
CcBs.—B. Ita enim definit, ut pertur-
batio sit.
Ita sentit ut loquitur.
Ita facere aliquid — tanquam.
Est ita ut dicitur.
In NervOs.
TABLE OF DIFFEHENCES OF IDIOM.
800
English.
(1) Instead of reading, <&c.
(2) Why do you laugh instead of
crying?
33. . Participial subst. with 'far from.*
(1) Far from doing this, he does that,
<&c.
(2) To be far from doing any thing.
(3) To be not far from doings <fcc. .
34. (1) A, B, C, and such, Ac, )
5. J
(2) A, B, C, and the rest. >
.others. J
35. Despairing.
similar, Ac.
the res
others.
36. Not very ancient.
37. The mosfwretched of all states,
38. The very celebrated Cicero.
Latin.
Quumpossitf or quum, debeat U-
ferCf <&c., according as the thing not
qjae was a duty omitted^ or merely
a thing that might have been done.
Cur rides ac non potius lacrima-
ris7
(1) TaiUum abestvt — te< (with subj.) —
or, if the verb has a * r»<rf ' with it,
tanium abtst vi — vi ne — quidem^ &c.
(2) Longe abesse tU, <&c. (e. g. ille lon-
g^ssime aberity ut credat, <&c.)
(3) Paulumy haud or non miUltmiy or
haud procul abesse^ ut, Ac,
Obs. The abesse is to be used im-
personally,
A, B, C, such.
— similar.
A, B, C, the rest.
A, B, G, others.
Since he despairs. ^ Consider uhuh
Since he despaired. > form should be
{Cluum with subj.) >used.
Not so ancient, non ita antiquus : but
non vakUj non admodum, are not bar-
barous, as some teach.
The most wretched state of all,
( Cicero, a verv celebrated man.
( Cicero, vir darismmus.
MEMORIAL LINES.
1. ConHngU use of things we like,
But aceidU when evils strike. '
2. Prom nemo let me never see > UgenuZKiw, nuUo.
NeniiniB or ncmine, $
3. For crime let crimen never come,
But a(xlu8tfacinu8fjlagitium,
4. When the word 'mm* means ^aoldiersj* these
Should rendered be by mi2i^.
5. The boy has but a stupid head.
Who always for &* but* puts Md
Or ai : for other meanings • but * has got :
» On/y,' * Mrc«pi ' *a^ least;' and * w^' with 'not.\
^' ^' (See Caution 11.)
6. A boy who is thoughtful is never perplext
By trim's meaning 'cU that Hme' and* therefore 'and ^^^^ ^i \
7. In*ttiffMKfe' let * (Aw' with *Zifc' agree;
Hoe, id or ttturf barbarous would be.
8. In* 80 many apiece * leave ajnece quite alone j
But of numerals use a distributive one:
9. After these impersonals itf
Or »M will be correctly put :
ConJtvngUy evenit, or accidU,
With restat, reliquum eat and jW.*
10. Let* that' translated be by yuo,
When with comparatives it does go.
11. Vereor n«, I fear he totB;
Vereor ut, I fear he vfonU :
Txanfui. by subjunctive present
After fear : forget it donh.
12. By ut translate infinitive , _^. ^
With aak^ command, advise, and atrwe.o
But never be this rule forgot :
Put ne for ut when there's a nat.
a So after seguitur sometimes. , , « . «i. --
b Under abk are included beg, pray, beseech, Ac; under commani>, ctiarget
direct, Ac. ; under advisb, exhort, admonith^ persuade vmpd, vutueSf 4c.
VERSUS MEMO R I ALES.
1. SvMXMUs usurif capxmus(%ue vApoasideamus; *•
Pbenduittusqub manu volumus quscunque tenere.
2. Q,iii queerU bepbbit, turn qtuesita iNVENivNTus.b^
3. Navis, equus, currusqu^i vehuitt ; postabit asellus
Pondera, PORTABUNTque humeri : leviora febitjttvs.
Lsva CEBIT clipeum, vestesque gebuktvb et anna.
4. Tu 8UCCENDE roguHi ; tsdas accende focesque.
5. VUia DESPiciMus : contemne pericvla^ miles ;
Spebne voluptateSffcedasque libidinis eacaa.'^
6. Pars OBJB est litus : retinentur flumina bipis.
7. Clausa out tecta apebi : patefit quod reaiat apertumA
8. Rarius intebdum quam NONNVNauAM esse memento.
9. Olim prceteriium spectatque futuntm*
10. Bis tebque augebit, minuet bijs tebve notatum.
11. Mens JBGBA est, corvusque jbgrum : de corpore solo
iEoBOTUM dicas : nunt ontTno/ia tantum.
MoBBiDA, non homines : haec tu discrimina serves.
12. De spaiio nusquam dicas, de tempore xuNituAM.
13. Plebs sdscitj jubet at fofulus, cenaetque bbnatus.
14. Nemo dblaiivum nee habet, nee habet ^eni/trum \ ^fj^^****'
15. Particulas »if ecquid^ nm, ru num fobtb sequatur.r
*■ But capere arma occurs as well as sumere arma.
b This is true of reperirey but invenire is the general term for ^^ndingj* even
after search or examination.
^ Despicebe relates to what we might value or respect : contemnebb to what
we miehtfear or think important : spebnebe to what we might accepty or to ob-
jects tnat we might pursue.
d Hence aperire os {never patefacere) : oculos aperireor patefacere:
portas {foreSy ostium) aperire or patefacere ; rnam aperire^ (for one occasion),
patefacere (to throw it open). Aperire is also • to mafte a thirig visible.* Palefor
cere often implies the permane/nJt removal of obstacles.
• Hence olim, := formerly ^ informer days once upon a time, and hereafter.
{ That is, perhaps or perchance must never Y>e forte (but fortasse with indie.)
except after the particles *i, Ac. The real meaning oi forte is * bv accident,* * by
ihance* and it does not lose this meaning after «t, Ac. : this is also the original
meaning of perchxmce, perhaps.
312 VERSUS MEMOEIALES.
16. Dat -ficiOf -ficior^ -facio sed dat tibi -fidJS
17. Quicquid habet pennas 'voLucRia* complectitur : ales
Magna avis eal : 06cen prsdicit voce futura.
18. Ne potius quam non post dwrn^ modoj dummodo dicas.
19. Et morbum et morbi spectat medicamina sano :
JEgrotum medeor spectat medicumqne peritum.
20. ^Atque igUur* pravum est HgUurque;^ — 'ideoque* Latinum est.»»
21. ^ Major ad hue* Romae dicebat seiior stas :
Cum Cicerone ^etiam' sed tu, et cum Cssare dicas.!
22. Festinabe potes nimium : pbopesare virorum est
Optatam quicunque volunt contingere metam.
23. Rectlus in navem quam nave imponere dicas :
Dicere sed mivi, scribas si carrnlna, fas est.)
24. Q,uod cemia procul esse potest : quas longius absunt
Humanum effugient r^rum discrimina visum.k
25. * Non-—pariter ' vites : * non — €eque * dicere fas est.
26. Nee {neque) ' vero ' habeat post se : non accipit autem.
27. Particuias tUf ne recte neu, neve sequuntur.i
28. ExiMO quae mala sunt; adimo bona; demere possum
Quidlibei: — haec teneas justo discrimine verba.
e That is, the compounds o{ facio that retain the a, have Jio in the passive.
Conficioli&a conJUAor^ according to the rule here given: but also sometimes
confieri.
h That is, never use igUur when * consequently * or * therefore * follows * and :*
but ideo : — et ideo, atque idea, or ideoque.
i That is, ttiam is the classical word for * still* or ' yety with comparatives :
not adhuc.
i Miiites in navem imj^onere^ Cees. Liv. : nave^ Suet. — carince^ Ov.
k ProQulf far off but withm sight; Umge, so far off as to be ou^ of sight,
I But nee neque are sometimes found : e. g. Liv. 24, 3.
EXTRACTS FROM THE « ANTIBARBAROS," *
Accuracy^ diligentia, cura. [accuratio
once Cic. Brut. 67, 238.]
Act a plai/j docere fabulaixi (of those
who gel it upy ^c.y and of the author) :
agere {of the player acting his
part.)
Again and again^ etiam atque etiaixi
( = 9ery earnestly with verbs
of enireating).^=-8everal times^
often : iterum et or ac tertio : ite-
rum et sspius ;t iterum ac tertium.
C.
Against the stream^ amne or flumine
adverse \not fluvio adv.].
Agree, (1) /= rnake an agreement;
agreement with any body^ mihi cum
quo convSnit. Tre agreed^ inter nos
convSnit. Even the constUs were not
thoroughly agreed^ ne inter consules
quidem ipsos satis conveniehat. L.
[not convenio cum quo.] (2) r= cor-
respond vnthf answer to, consentire
cum qua re. (3) Of a thing U is
used personauy: pax convenerat:
quae convenerant : si posset inter eos
quid convenire. C.
Almighty^ summus, maximus [m^ om-
nipotenSj except as a theoU^uxd term^
or by Deus only for * the Almighty.
The Romans used Optimus Maxi-
mus wUh the name of Jupiter. —
Jupiter O. M.
Appear = ' make his appearance
amongst us ' {of one who is dead^ <f*c.):
exsistere.
— ' := * seem^^ videri (not apparSre).
r= * to be manifest^ apparere
{not videri).
Appear {in a dream)^ ostendere se cui
in somnio ; videri cui in somnis ; per
somnum, quiete, per quietem ; tohith
Wceness appears in their bodies^ qu8B
similitude m corporibus appiret. C.
Appear in any bodjfs eyes^ judicio cujus
esse ; ab quo existimari ; videri cui ;
esse apud quern.
. Day appears^ dies venit
{comes) : illucescit (pegins to shine).
Author i scrip tor.
Authoritv.. An authority {used of a
person)^ auctor. A weighty auihorityj
locuples auctor.
Bodily (pleasures) J corporis (volup-
tates^. Corporeus if ^consisting of
a body.*
Break. Tb bretdc down, a bridge, pon-
tem rescindere, dissolvere, interrum-
pere (not pontem rumpere or fran-
gere].
Classical author^ scriptor optimus,
prsestantissimus ; or scriptor primse
classes. Cic, \^Gellius introduced
scriptor classicns, as opposed to
scriptor proletarius.]
Command {an army), prseesse.
Compassion. JFVom compassion, miBO'
ricordi& captus, ductus, or permotus.
Demagogues, concionatores : popu-
lares, or populares homines, [{f
demagDgi be used auos Grseci dicunt,
or ut GriBco veroo utar slumld be
added.]
Each other, inter se ; of what is done
mutually or reciprocally:
not invicem.
* These Extracts are taken from a larger work of Mr. Arnold's, principally
on the Latin Particles, which is in course of preparation for the American
public.
t 7b ask again and ajgain, etiatn atque etiam ; or iterum et sepiuA rogare.
BtU etiam atque etiam is never really numerical.
14
314
BXTSACTS FROM THE " AlfTIBASBARUS.
)9
EzAiPXBATi : exacuere (iVep.) ; in-
fensum reddere : iram cujus inceh-
dere. [Ezasperare, exaoerbare. Iav.]
Experience, ubus renim, U8U8[no/ ex-
perientiaj. JFYom experience, re, usu,
exitu doctuB, expertus ifrom my own
esperiencey expertus in me, expertus.
F%eth: in^toloeejie^* ^gainJU^* 4*c,
corpus amittere [not camem].
Flamy {qfpUaaurea^ if^.), by gen., cor-
poris.
Oreek, Tb apeak Greek or good Greek,
Grace loqui.
Grow {an old inan, <^. ^ ^6eoome*),
fieri.
Health, Yt}etudo.-Good health, sanitas :
bona or prospera valetudo (tio^ vale-
tudo only). — salus {the continued state
orpreservaHon qfgood heaUh),
Imagine (I) =: to form a reprtaentatian
in the mind, animo cogitare, conci-
SBre, complecti :— animo fingere, ef-
ngere ; cogitatione fingere or depin-
gere : — ^proponere sibi ante oculos
animumque : (2) = conjecture, con-
jecturam capere, facere: conjicere
[|;;|riniaginari belongs to the silver
agej. (3) := to entertain an unfounded
notion, opinari, in opinione esse : in-
duisse sibi fiusam cujus rei per-
Buasionem. Q. quid somniare
( =s dream if). (4) /imagine {insert-
ed in a sentence), opinor : ut opinor.
Impure. An impure style, inquinatus
sermo, inquinata oratio.
Impute a thing to anybody, tribuere,
attribuere, adscribere, adsignare,
acceptum rderre (quid cui). [Im-
putare. Quint. Plin.iun.].
Inspire anybody with hope, fear, <f*c.,
spem, admirationem, fofmidinem,
cui injicere.
— — anybody with a desire, quem
cupiditate cujus rei faciendsB inci-
tare, or incitare ad aliquid faciendum.
Inspired, afflatus numine divino; in-
stinctu divino perculsus ; instinctus
divino spiritu.
Invite {to supper, &c.), invitare {by
word of mouth) : vocare {by a slave).
Key of a country, janua. [* auum earn
urbem sibi Mithridates ABiddjanuam
fore putasset, qud effractd et revtUsd
tota patSret provincia.' C],
Latin. To speak Latin or good Latin,
Latine dicere, loqui.
Mercifully [not misericorditer, bu£] cum
misericordiA or miseratione, miseri-
cordii captus, &c. Tb decU merci-
fully with anybody, misericordem
esse in aliquem ; misericord i& uti in
aliquem; misericordem se prebere
in aliquem.
C^er violence, vim aiierre alicui.
One oriuM), unus et alter, unusitemque
alter. Unus alterve {:=zone or at
most two).
Open a way or road (e. g. by the sword),
viam aperire, patefacere. L.
Opportunity, occasio, locus or fietcultas ;
tempus (alicujus rei faciendae). ^ An
opportunity of doing any thing is of-
fered, locus faciendffi alicujus rei
datur.
fPalm: to bear the palm, palmam
ferre.
Pay honours to anybody, cui honores
habere, tribuere: honore aliquem
fl^cere {hot honorem cui exhibere).
Prayers, To offer prayers, precation-
em or preces racere, preces Deo adhi-
bSre (C). preces mittere {lAv.).
Obs. preces tundere is poet.
Preserve {states, <f«.), conservare.
Probable, verisimilis [not probabilis,
whichm^ans,^ respectable,' ' tolerably
good ']. It seems probable that Milo
kaUd Clodius, Milo Clodium inter-
fecisse v i d e t u r {but verisimilis is
quite correct).
Produce a passage, to, locum (versum,
&c.) afierre.
witnesses, producere or pro-
ferre testes : to produce evidence, tes-
timonium proferre.
-a Treason, to, causas afierre.
Pure {of style), purus et emendatus.
Purity of style, integritas, castitas or
sinceritas orationis.
Quote an author, to^ producere, proferre
scriptorem (producere, proferre tes-
tes being used, but not locum).
a passage^ locum afferre, proferre
[nU producere].
Reason, causa, when =i Aground,* * mo-
tive.^ To bring anomer reason, al-
teram afferre rationem or causam.
Severe (of a disease), gravis.
Shed tears, lachrymas efiundere or
profundere.
Shed blood ss km, occidere.
iSZay oneself {lay violent hands on one-
EXTRACTS FROM THE *^ ANTIBARBARUS.
}9
815
94/) <^ ^ oru*9 own hamds^ commit
micide\ ee interimere, mortem sibi
consciscere ; mortem or vim sibi in-
ferre ; se multare morte.*
Speak, The thing> speaks for itself , si
res verba desideraret, ac hod pro s e
ipsoloqueretur. C.
StyU^ oratio, dictio, genus scribeBdi or
dicendi.
. Tb express oneself iUy or to pos-
sess a good style (of a haim aiwior)
iSy oratione emendate et Latinft uti ;
emendate et Latine dicere.
Suicide {to commit)^ mortem sibi con-
sciscere ; mortem or vim sibi inferre ;
se interimere, &c. ; mortem ultro
oppetere {token the death is not com-
mxUed by on^s ovm hands ; i. e. is
virtualynot actual, suicide),
TJUnk highly off <^e., de aliquo magni-
fice sentire.
* Also; manus sibi afferre : manu sibi vitam ezhaurire. (C)
INDEX I
ENGLISH.
[Q, stands for QuM/ion*. — The numerals refer to the First Part of
Latin Prose Composition.]
A.
A, sometimes transhited by alupiisy
quispiam, or quidanif 393.
abandoned, perdUua.
able (to be), poMe^ ^ire(guw\ 125, e.
Abdera (of), Abdcrttes^ G. s.
abilities, ingenium {sing,).
abound, abundarc (abl.).
about ( = concerning), de (abl.).
about ( = nearly )j /ere, aav. ; circttcr,
prep,
above (such an age), 306, and Q,.
absence (in his), absens.
absent (to be), abesse^ 227.
abstain from, temperare abj 220.
abundance of, abunde^ ado, {gen.),
accM>table. gratua^ 212.
accident (oy), caau.
accompany, cotnUari.
accomplish, wnfcert^ fcc^ feet.
account : on — of, ergo { ^en,) : 207.
accuse, aceusare ; (if not in a court of
justice) incusare {gen^ of charge),
accused-person, reus.
accustomed (to be), soUre, solituB.
acquainted, to become, rvoscere^ 385.
acquit, ab^vere^ aolVy sohit {gen. of
charge),
acquit ofa capital charge, eapUia abaci-
vere.
adapted, accommodatuaj 212.
addition : in — to this, hucaccedU^ acce-
dAat^ &c., 513.
adherents (his own), aui,
adjure, obteatari {ace.).
admire, admirari.
adopt a resolution, conailium inire or
capere.
advantage, emotumuntum.
advantageous : to be, prodeaae {dot.).
advantageous : to be very — , magrue
uLUUati eaae, 242 (3).
adversity, rea adveram.
advice, conailium.
advise, auadere {dot.) See 222; mo-
nere (with act. of person) : both
with tttf nc, by 75.
affair, rea.
afraid : to be — , Hmgrej vereri, S. 99, e.
afterwards, poatea: with nouns of
time : poat, used adverbially,
after (before a ae7vttmce\ poetquam,. See
514.
after, prep, post (with ace.).
after the hattle, (confeatim) a prcBlio,
again and again, ettam aique etiam.
again from the beMnning, a6 inlegro.
against, adveraua ^tec.) ; in (with aa:, ;
of feelings, actions, &c.y against a
person),
against his will, invitua {adj.).
against the will of Caius, Caio irwitOf
364.
age ( = time of life), ceto^, atia.
age (of that or such), id ckatia ? ifn />
age (of what 1) quid astatia 7 \ ^^"' P'
agitate, perturhare.
agitated (having his mmd), incenaua
animium^ 298.
ago, abhine (to precede the subst. or
numeral), 305.
agreeable, p'otua^ 212,
agreed : it is — ^ constat (occ with infin.),
agricultural operations, res rusticce.
8ul, omnia, cunetva ; ( = whole), tmiver-
sua, totua.
all together, euneti univeraif 443.
all over again, ab integro.
all taken one by one, aingiUi.
INDEX I.^ENGLISH.
317
allowed: it is—, cansiat {ace, with
infin.),
allowed : I am — f. licet mUd,
allow it to happen, commiUere vJt,
almost, prope^ pane.
almost: I — thiDk, hattdacio arij 161.
(See note on Diff. 25.>
alone, soltu; 6t (if one person) imus.
Alps, AlpeSf Q. turn,
already, jam.
also, sometimes translated by the pro-
noun idem^ 387.
altar, ara.
although, 451, and d. on S 56.
although indeed, quamquam (indie.).
always, after »up^lat. by quiaqtic. See
a man ( = any : indef.), quia.
amanuensis, a manu servtta.
among, inter.
amongst (a people), apiui with ace.
amuse, delectare.
and, p. 18, d ; * to me and you,' in Lat.
* to me with you,* p, 78.
and that too, not — , nee i«, 385.
anger, ira.
angry : to be — . irasd (dd.): sttceena^re
{dot.) 222.
animal, animal, alia.
another, alter ^ era, &c. O. alteritta : an-
swering to ' t^ i« one thing,* alitid,
38.
another man's, alienua.
answer, reapondire {dot.),
antiquity, antiquitaa.
any ♦ (^ter expera), omnia.
any. See 389.
any where (= any whither), uaqtiam,
any man may, cujuavia eat. (See
389—92.)
appeal to, appellare (aee.).
appear, (= seem), videri {viaua).
appear (show myself), apparere.
apply vigorously to, incwnbere in (with
€ux.^ ; ctibUy cubit.
approved (valour, 4^c.,) apectatua.
arms, to take, arma eapere.
army, exerdtua, ^.
arrived at: men have—', ventum eat.
296.
arrow, aagitta.
as, after tarn, taliaj tantua, tot^ is, (mam^
mumtuaj qualiaj miot, respectively.
as, alter idem^ qui^ 43 (or acy atque).
as far as I know, quad adaniy 5o.
as far as I can, quoa dejua facere poa-
aum. 512.
as lar as possible, > quoad ejua fieri
as for as can be done, > potest, 512.
as it were, qfuaai.
as soon as, aimvl ac ; ut primum ; quum
primum,f ubi; ^1,012; 514.
as many as SKX), addueentoa.
as not to, after * auidi ' or ' ao ' in a nega-
tive sentence, quia ^85) : if *auch'
or ' «o ' were in a positive sentence,
tU would be used b> 66.
ashamed : am — o^ puaet, 207.
ask, rogare.
ask pardon for a fault, delicti veniam
petere,
assault (a town), oppugnarei
assault : to accuse of an — , reufii facers
devi.
assist, aurUiari, adjUvare, opitulari;
aublevare, auccurrere, aubvenire,
(See p. 81, k.)
at anybody's feet. See 75, 1.
at once, — and; idem — idem, 396.
at, of place near which a battle is
fought, &c., apud (or ad), 457.
at two miles' distandie, a mtlUbua paa-
auwn duobua. 348.
at two miles ofi, a miUibua paaauum
duobus.
Athens, AthentB.
Athenian, Athenienaia.
attached to, amana; diligena (with
gen.). 183.
attack, cuagredi, greaaua; adoriri. ortua
{ace.).
attend to, attendere, 229.
averse to, alienua^ 212.
avoid, vitare.
authority, audoritaa.
aware, to be, intelUgere.
B.
Baggage, impedim,cnia, p^ (properly
hindrancea).
banish, peUere ex civitate (pepvl,pula).
banished from, extorria {am.), 276.
banquet, convvdum..
barbarian, harharwa.
base, turpia.
battle, helium.
battle of Cannse, pugna Cannenaia.
be it far from us. bee note t, p. 40.
bear, ferre \tul, lot, 33).
beasts, fer<B.
beaten (to be^, vapulare {ab).
become, Jierx, faetua aum.
become acquainted with, noaeere, 385.
* The pronouns and adverbs for *any* may be exhibited in a convenient and
318
INDEX I.— ENGLISH.
becoming (to be) deOre (aee.),
bcfal, aeadere (oat.),
before, adv. caUea.
before, prep, ante (ace.).
before (standing before a sentence),
anUquam^ 498, Ac.
before one's eyes, ob oeuloa.
behold, adapicere^ to, *P*^i tptet,
beg, peUrCf petio^ petit, ab.
begin, ccepisse (began, before pass. inf.
cceptuB eaty
beginning, inttium.,
believe, credere, (dot.) credid, credit.
believe, I can scarcely — , vix credide-
rim, 428, and note.
believed, I am, mi/d creditur, 285.
belongs. See 191.
benefit, bene/Unum.
benefit, v. bentfacere (dot.),
' bereave, orbare (abU),
beseech, ohaecrare.
bespatter, Co^P*^""* (««?«« ^fetii,
best, optimus.
best to be done, ) *._. _ ^ j /_ \
best to do, J ophmumfactu (sup.).
betrayer, prodiior.
better, melior.
better : it is — (» more saHafadory,
preferable), saHw eat, L^. Ex. 34,
p. 84.
better : it would have been — ^ aatiuB or
utUiu8fuU,A2^(h).
between, inter.
beware of, cavere, cap, caut, 233.
bird, avia : (great bird) ale». VUvcria
= any wing^l creature,
black, niger.
blame, culnare.
bleed afresn (of a wound), recrudeacere,
crudu.
blessing r a — on your valour 1 maeta
virtute eatol 280, a.
blind, ciBcua.
blood, aanguia, Tniff, m. (when ahed^
eruor).
blot out, deUre, delev, ddet.
boast, gloriari, (abl.) also de, in, 273.
boast, to make tlie same, idem gloriari.
body, corp-ua, oria.
border fn; adjacivfi, 229.
bom, natua: oom to, natuaad.
born, to be, naaci (natits).
both — and: et — et.
bounds. See Exceed.
boy, puer, G. pueri.
branch-of-learnin^, doctrina.
breach of duty: it is a — ^ contra qffir'
cium eatL
breadth, a fi|||rer's. See Depart.
break one' i^ word, ) fdem faJUrti
break a promise, ) ftf'dL
bribery, ambUaa, Ha.
concise form^ as in the following table
Exclusion
of dU.*
Inclusion of
aU aUke.
Inclusion of aome.
Less em-
phatical after
8i,ne,num,Ac,
Pronouns.
quisquam
ullus
quivis
quilibet
aliquis
quispiam
quis
any (body)
Adverbs.
(a) Place.
(b) Time.
1
.(to)
usquam }
^(id)
quovis (to)
ubivis \ f„f.
ubiUbet \ V^>
aliquo (to)
alicubi \ , ..
uspiam \ W
quo (to)
quando
any place
or
any where.
unquam
aliquando
any time
or
-.
* li^All are generally excluded when *any* follows negaiioea; or * without,*
*acarcely,* *than:' and in questions that expect the answer 'no,* ('nobody*
* nothing,*) &c»
INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH.
319
bridge, pons, ntisy m.
bring an action or charge against, reum
facere ; fee, fact : (with gen. or de,)
187.
burden, onus^ oneris,
burnt : to be — ^ deflagrare.
burst out afresh, recrudeacert^ crudu,
business, negoHum.
but if, sin; »in autemt 451.
but if not, sin minu8y 451.
but a little more, and he would have
perished, minimum c^fuU (impers.)
quinperireti 91.
but, after universal negatives, (= who
- not), qtiinf [or, qui — non,] 44.
but, after universal negatives (= ex-
cept), nisif or prep, proBter,
but, after camud. See Cannot,
butcher, trucidart,
buy, emert^ em^ empt.
by letter, per literae.
by = near, prope.
C.
Csesar, dsaar, aria*
call, vocarty appeUare, nondnaref dicere^
See 51.
call = summon, vocare,
call upon, convenirtf v«n, vent (ooe.).
call to mind, reminisd.
camp, castray pi.
campaign, end of, 308.
can, posse^ quire (ffueo), 125, e.
Cannae, oif CannenaiSf adj,
cannot: I cannot but — ^ facere non
posBum quin, &c.
cannot : it cannot be but that, jSeri non
potest quin.
capable of containing, capojc {gen.).
capital, cap-^y itis,
care a straw for, flocci facere.
care that for, hujus facere.
care, cura.
care : for any thing I care, 470.
careless of, negligena {gen.).
carry, portare.
Cartilage, Carthag-Oy inis.
cast foTlb^j>rojicere jecj ject.
cause to "be done, faciendum curare^
351, 356.
cease, dceinere desi, deait : ceaaed^ be-
fore inf. pass, aeaitua eat.
cease speakine tacirej 299.
censure, reprmenaiOj onia.
chameleon, cfurniadeon.
chance, caauSf Ha.
character, moria pi. G. um.
charge (udsely,) inaim,uUi.re {gen. of
diarge).
charge : hring^ or prefer a — , = to
make him an accuaed peraon, reum
facere de — , 187.
charge ( ^ enjoin), m4indare {dot.).
chargeable (with a fault), (iffiniay 212.
chaste, caatua.
children, /i6ert, pi.
cheese, cdaeua.
choose (= elect), eUgere^ Ug, lect,
christian, chriatianua.
circumstance. A circumstance which
{referring to a preceding aentence),
qtUB rea. 36, 37 (&).
citizen, civia.
city. urhBy urhia.
civil-gown, toga.
claim, poatuhre.
clear ( = excuse), purgare.
clothe oneself^ induere^ 283.
coast, oroy 40.
co\dy Jrig-u£f dria.
come, venire^ vin^ vent.
come to the assistance o^ alicui aux-
iiUo venire^ 242.
come to a determination, conaUium
inire.
command, imperare {dot.).
command an army. pr<eeaae {dot.),
commission, manaare {dot.).
commit many sins, muUa pecoare,
common, communia.
common : of a — kind, vulgaria.
compassion, miaericoraia.
compel, cogere. cotg^ coact.
completed : I have — the work, opuo
cAaolutum habeOf 364.
concerns (it^, intereat^ 207.
condemn, aamnarey condemnare: to
deathj capitia.
condemn a man to pay his vow, voti
damnare.
conduct, honorable, honeataa.
confer (benefits) on, conferre {benefida)
in ; ace ; tuly lot.
confer an obligation on, gnUiam inire
ab aliquo {Cic.) apvd aliquem {Ldv.)
339.
congratulate, congreUuIariy 492.
connection with, eonjunctio. See 157.
conquer, ptncere, vicy vict.
consequence : it is of — , intereat.
consequence : it is of no — ^ nihil in-
tereatj or referty 207.
consider = think, exidimxirey arbitrari.
consider = attend to, attenderey 229.
considerable quantity, (diqwmtum.
considerably, aUquantOy 406.
constancy, conatanHa.
constantly, perpetuo.
constellation, aatrvmg nd^ue^ erit,
consul, conMiUy uUb,
820
INDEX I. — ENGLISH.
consult, consuUre^ ntlUf sult.^ ace.
consult, for, > consulere
consult a man's interests^ \ alicui, 233.
contemporary, eequalU.
contented, amUntus {abl.).
contention, conterUio,
continue, pergere, perrex^ perrect.
contract to build, cvndvcerefaciettdum ;
duXf duct.
contrary to each other, itUer se am-
trariiy m^ a.
convenient, commodtu.
conversant, to be, call9re (aec.).
converse, loqui^ loctUus.
corrupt, corrumpere^ rvp^ rupL
cost, atare^ conatare^ 26o. abl. : {dot. of
person),
count, nurrurart.
country, /Mitfrta; as opposed to town,
rusy ruria,
country, in the, ruri,
country, into the, ma,
country, from the, rwrt,
courage, virtua^ utia.
courageously , /ortt^er.
courtesy, humanitaa,
cross over, tranajieere or trajicert^ jee^
Jectj (ace.).
crown, corona,
cruelly, crtideliter,
cruelty, enuUlUaa.
cry out, damare.
cultivate, coUre^ colu, ctdt: if it be a
atudt/i e. g. eloquence — atudire
{dot'),
cure, mederi (dot.).
custom, conauetua-Of inia,
cut off, interduderey dua^ 233.
D.
Daily, quoiidief indiea or in diea aingu-
loa. (See 69, t).
danger, periculum.
dare, avdire^ auaus awn,
day, by, interdiu, 311.
deai^ aurdita.
dearer, pluriaj G. 266.
death, mora.
death, to (after eondemn)^ eapiiia.
debt, cea (dienumf 273.
debt, heavy, mc^num aa alienum,
deceive, decipere^ to, cep^ cept.
decree, decemeTe^ creVf cret.
deem, putare.
defend what is actually attacked, de-
fendere {fendy fena): — what may
be attacked, itieru
Degree, to what a — I quoy (with gen,)
612.
deliberation (after opua eat), conauHo
271.
delight, deledare.
delightful, jiLcundtta.
delightful to the sense of sight, amomua.
demand, postulare ; .poscere^ poposc ; to
demand vmportunaielyy e^iagitare.
(See 257).
deny, negare.
depart a finger's breadth, tranareraum.
digUum discedere.
depena on, niti, niaua or niarua : (in with
ai)l.).
deprive o^ apdiare, orbare ; {abl.),
desert, deaerere, seru, aert.
deserve, Tiureri (merit) ; well of, bene de.
deserving ofj dignua (abl.).
deserving to be, <&c., dignua eaae qui,
with aubj.
design, conatlium.
desire, vdU ; cuoere, cupvo, cupit : = ex-
preaa a wisn, optare (See 420, z).
desirous, cupidua (gen,).
despair of, deaperare.
destroy utterly, delere, delev, deUt,
destroy ( = burn), concr^hnare, 141, c.
destroy : eo about to destroy, perditum
ire, ^2,* a.
deter, aderrtre, [See JVonu]
determine, conatiniere,
detrimental, to be, ddrimento eaae, 242.
devote oneself to, incumbere in, with
ace. (cubu, cuhi£),
devote oneself to, atudire (dat.).
die, m,ori, ior, mortuua; mortem or ««-
premum diem obire, 249.
difficult, difficilia.
difficulty : there is — in doing, Ac. = it
is done, difficile,
difficulty : he has — in doing, &c. = he
does it, difficiU,
difference, diatantia,
difference, it makes a very great, per-
multum vnUreat, 122.
difference, what is there 1 quid intereat ?
difference, there is no, > nihil intereat,
difference, it makes no, ) or refert, 207.
diligence, eUligentia.
dinner, coena,
direct = instruct, praeipere, ceo, cept.
discharge, fungi, fvndua, {abl,) per-
fungi,
discipline, diaciplina,
discontented, am— with, pctnitd me,
207.
discourse, aermo, onia.
discover, invenire, repirere. See 177, o.
disease, mxyrbua,
disgraceful, turpia,
disgusted: am — at, teadd (pei£ per-
tteaum eat) me, 207.
INDEX I. ^ENGLISH.
321
dishonorably, turpUer,
displease, diapUare, (dot,),
dissatisfied: am — witt^ jHsnitU me,
207.
distance : to be at a distance of, «&c.
abe88t^ diatarty 319.
distance : at two miles' distance, 348.
distant : to be — from, a6eM« ; distarc
(a), 319.
ditch, j^^tfa.
divest, exwrCf exu, exiUf 233.
do nothing but — , nihU aliud quam
(JaciurU omitted), 420.
do well, ^cBclare facere.
dog, cants.
doubt : dubitare.
doubt: I don't at all — , nuUu8 dubito
(gum). See note 492.
doubt : there is no — ^ non eat dvbium
(gui/i), 89.
dream, somrdare.
dream, s. aomnium.
draw, ( = call) away, tmocare,
draw up an army, acitm inatruere^
atruXf atruct.
draw up an army in three lines, triplv-
cem aciem inatruere,
dress, veatitua.
drink, bibere^ &i&, bibit,
drink, s. potua, ^^} ? 177
drinking, oo^io, J*"*
drive, petlere^ pepulj puis : — drive
away, abtgere^ egj act,
dutiful anection, pi«fiiM.
duty, (ifficium.
E.
Each (of two), tUerque, vJbraqiu^ utruM'
qWy G. uiriuaque.
each one, umiaguiaqtie.
each other (after ' to love,' «&c.), inter
acy 470.
each of them, singly, aingidi, pi,
eagerly^ desirous, atuduoaua^ (gen,);
aviduay (gen,).
easYifaciUa, Easily, ./actte.
eat, edere (gd^ ea) ; vead (See 273).
eclipse, defectio.
eclipsed, to be, deficere^fecjfect.
efface, ddire, deUVy ddet,
either — or : aut — out ; vel — vel ; aive
— aivey 456.
elecf, eligercy legj led.
election, eomitioj n. pi.
eloquence, doquentioy facundia {natu-
ral eloquence).
emulate, cemtcZart, 229.
encamp, conaJdirey aedy aeaa.
encounter death, mortem oppetere,
encounter a danger, pertcmum. obire.
end o£, extremuay agreeing with ita
subst., 179.
endued with, prcaditaa (abl ).
endure, auatimrey tinuy tent,
enemy (private), inimictia.
enemy public), hoatia.
engage = fight with, conjligerey Jlix,
Jlict.
engage = undertake, recipercy cep, cept.
engaged in : to be — y operam dare^
337 : (in a baitley affaWy <ftc.) in-
tereaaey 224.
enjoy, /rui, (abl.).
enoush, satiay afftUim. (See 512^
enquire of, queerer e ex ; quamXy qiusait,
enter into partnership, coire aocietatem.
entrust, crederey credidy credit {daJt. of
person),
envy, invidere. vidy via {dot,),
Ephesian, Eiiheaiua.
equal, pary oat. Equal to (in magni'
tujdcy real or figurative), inatar
{gen.)y 207.
error, error,
escape from, s.fugOy 157.
escape : it escapes me, me fugUyfaUU^
prteterity 259.
eternal, eetemita (= everlasting) ; aemr
pUemuay 123, c.
even, etiam.
even mind, aquua animua,
even — not, iu — quidem,
evening, in the, veaperi,
every, omnia.
every body, quiaquCy 396.
every tenth man, decimita quiaqru,
every body who or that, q^iaquiay qui-
cunquey 396.
every thing, omniOy pi.
ever, unquaniy aUqwmdOy quandOy 402.
evil, malumy neut. adj.
exactly, with anum^o/; ipaey in agree-
ment, 308.
exceed the bounds of moderation, mo-
dum excederey ceaa,
exceedingly, vekem,erUer,
excel, ofUecellerey praatarey 229.
exhort, hortariy adhortari.
expedient, utUia (dot,).
expedient : it is —y expedU,
expediency, utUitaa,
experience (familiarity with a thing),
naiUy Ha.
exposed to, obnoxiua, 212.
extortion, pecunuB repetunda ; or only
repetunda.
extremely flourishing, longe opuUntia-
aimua.
eye, oculua.
14*
322
INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH.
P.
Face, to know a man by, de facie noBse,
&il (a MendYdecMc {dat,\ ftdl (one),
aeficertf 229.
Mthjjdea, 6.
faithful. /J«2».
fall on j[= seize on), tnce«Mre, 229.
falsehoods, utter many, rnvJia mentirif
38.
family, ^mitia.
far from (thinking) this, tantum abeat
vJt — {ut\,
far : not to oe — from, haud mulinm
or proetd abea8e'{quin)j 91.
far be it from me not, 83. See note t,
p. 40.
far, tmUto (with compar. and superl.)^
410.
farewell, ave^ galve, vale^ 281.
fate,^/um.
fault, cuUpa.
favour, a, heneficium,
fieiyour, favirr^dat,\ fav^ favt-
fawn upon, adulari {dot. or aec.).
fear, of body^ timor ; of mind^ mehu, its,
fear, timertf metutrt^ vereri. See 99.
feeble, imbecUlus.
feed on, vesci. See 273.
feel thankful, graiiain habere,
fever, /«6rw, abl. i
few, paudf ce, a.
few : a few days ago, pauda hia diebua.
few: a few. days before, paueia iUia
diebua.
fidelity, j!(/m.
field, in the, mUiiuB.
fight, pugnare ; fight on horseback, ex
e^uo.
find, tnvenire, reperire, 177.
find: hard to find) a^^lcUia inotntUf
364.
finger's breadth. See Depart
finish, conficere.
fire, tgnia^ ( = conflagration) incen-
dium.
first, primum : at first, pritM, See 83.
fit, apttia, 212.
fitted, accommodahta^ 219.
fix by edict, edicire (uQ.
flank, on the, a latere.
flatter, adtilari {dai, or ace.),
flaw, vUium,
flight, /iig'o.
flogged, to be, vtrgia etadi; ceeaua.
ftrfly, atuUUia,
fond, eupfdua (gen,).
food, ciouaj i.
foot, pea^ pedis.
for, when untranslated, 266.
for how much ? quanti?
for as much— as, tantir—quanH, 266.
for less, minoriat 266.
for just as much — as, ^ tantidem —
for no more, than ^ quanti^ 226.
for ( = tn behalf of), pro.
for ( s: ounn^ to, of obstacles), pr<B,(aM.)
for instance, verbi cauaa.
for some time, dudum, jamdudum^ 420.
for (after to /ear), sign of dat.
for any thing I care, per me Ucet.
for us (after inake)^ a nobis,
foreign to, aUenuSf 212.
foretell, oreedicere.
forget, obliviaci^ oblttua^ 199.
former, the, t//e, 378.
forsooth : as if — ^ quasi verOf 494.
fortune. See Good.
fortune: let — see to it, id Fartuna
vidgrit.
found, conderej condidf condU.
founder (of a family), prtnc«p«yami2ue.
free from, liberare {abl.).
freedman, libertinua : (but with refer-
ence to his master f liberiua,)
friendly, amicus,
friends, his own, aui,
from a boy, puero.
from the heart, ex anim/o, ,
from a wall, ex muro.
from your neighbourhood, iatinc.
from a different direction, aliunde,
from, after conceal^ omitted, 251.
from, aftet prevenUf detera^ Ac, quomi'
nua^ 94.
from, after recovery ex,
front, in, afronte.
frvig&Mty f/rugalUaa.
fruits (of the earth\frugea: (of a /r««),
fructus.
full, pUnuSf 182.
fury,/Mror.
G.
Grain an advantage, emoltanenium ca-
pere {cepf caj^)^ — Mr.
gain possession o^ pe^ri {abl. gen.).
Ghiul, GaUus. <
get possession of, potiri, potitus (abl).
gift, donwny munuSy eris. (See 242.)
give information, doeerey 253: give
much information, msdia docsn
{de)y 252.
give battle to, ^rcBlitan committere
cum; mUy nuas.
given x>ver, deapa aiua,
given it is, dahtr,
glad, to be, leetarit 521.
fflo^} gloria.
INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH.
823
glorious, glorioaus,
go wrong, errare.
go away, o&tre, decedercj cesa. See 308.
go about to destroy, perdUum ire,
362*, a.
go on, pergerCf perrtx^ perrect.
go on in your valour ! macU virhUt
estoJ 280.
god. DeuSf 56.
gold, aurum.
golden, aureus,
good, bonus; ( «= beneficial, expedient)
tUilis.
good : to do ~, prodessc {dtU.).
good fortune : it was my — {contigit
mihif'^utf 374).
good time, in, \ ^^-
govern; imperare^ dat. ; ( = regulate,
direct) moderari (ace. or dot. See
220).
grateful, grains,
gratitude, gratia,
greatest (when degree is meant rather
than size), summvM,
geedy, avidns igen.),
reece, Crrceiia.
Greek, Grtscua.
grief, dolor.
grieve, ddere, motrere. See 521.
ground, humvs ; on the ground, humi.
grudffe, irwidere (dat.)y rnd, vis.
guard against, > oavere (ace. 233), caVf
guard, be on my, 5 oaut.
guidance, under youi^ te duee; under
the ^idance of Herdonius, Her-
dorm duetu.
H.
Habit of silence, taeUumitas.
had rather, malle^ 150 (co^jug. 142, 1).
hail, av«, ra/ve, 281.
hand, maniM, fi«, 4. f.
hanging, suspendium,
happen (of mb), acddere : oifortunaU
eventSfeontingere{Hg): = turn out,
eDenire. (See 374^.
happen : how does it nappen that ... 7
qutJU vJli <ftc.
happy, beatus^feHx, (See 443.)
hard: are hard to avoid, difficile ti-
iantur.
hard to find, d^j^eilia inventu (sup,),
hardly ( « scarcely), vix.
hardly any body, nemo fere.
harvest, messisjf,
hate, otUeee (wiui tenses derived from
perl).
hateful, to be, odio ease, 242.
have, habere.
have a thing done, faciendum curare,
356.
have an interview with, eorofenire,
(ace).
have, in such sentences as, '*tnih
whom ue have to do.' (See 336.)
head, capix/, eamtisy n.
heal, mederi (oat.),
healed, to be (of a wound), consanes'
* cere,
health, to be in good, valire.
hear, audire,
hearing : without hearing him ( &= him
w^ieard)^ inauditum (ace. masc.)
heart (as the seat of the ejections) j anir
muSf 92.
heart, coTt cordis, n.
heavy, gravis.
height : to such a — ^ eo, adv. (gen.).
help (a person in perplexity), subvenire
(dot.) I juvare (^,), auxiUari
{dat,% suceurrere (dot See 222, k.).
her (ace, sing.\ «e, if relating to nom.
of sentence ; if not, earn,
her, adj. suus^ o^um, if relating to nom.
of sentence ; if not, efus,
hesitate, dubitare.
hidden, occvJUus.
him, «e, if relating to nom. of sentence ;
if not, ewn,
himself 369 ; 373, c. (d. on § 48.)
hinder, impedire. See Q. on § 16.
hindrance, trnpedtmenlum,
his own friends, adherents, Ac. euL
hit ( = strike), ferire. icere, ctedere, ee-
eld, COBS. See 299, i.
hold, tenere.
hold a levy of troops, ddeetam habere,
hold one's tongue, eiUre, tacere, See
299, g.
hold cheap, parti pendfre^ 266.
home, to, domvm : at, domi : from, dome.
honey, mel, mellis.
honour (sthe honorable), honeetasf
( = probity) ^M, eL
Sroa^«s:i'^-^="2-
honorable conduct, ft<me«to«. Honor-
able, honeshu. Honorably, honeste.
hope, sperare, (See 15.)
horseback, on. ex equo : (of more than
one person) ex equis,
house, at my, domi meee.
how (with a<Q.), quam.
how disgraceful it is, quanio opprobrio
est,
how many, quot,
how much, quaniumm
how does it nappen? quiJU, ut,,.7
S24
INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH.
how few there are, who — 7 quotus-
quiagiu eat, qui . . ? {with aubj.)
hunger, /am6«, is.
hurry, to be in a,/e«Mnar«.
hurt, nocerCf dat. ; Uedere {aee. luu.)
hurtful, to be, noeere,
husband, vir, 291.
I.
I for my part, equiidein,
if — not, niai, 451.
if however, sin autem, 461.
ignorant, to be, ignorare {ace).
ignorant : not to oe ignorant that, ^c,
rum ignorare, ^in.
ignorant : who is ignorant that, &c. 7
qtu8 ignoratj quin ... 7
ignorant of, rudia (gen.).
immediately after the battle, confealim
aprcdio^ 348.
immense, ingma,
immortal, immortalia.
impiety, impietaa.
impiety : if it may be said without — ,
ai'faa est dictut 364.
impiety : it <sannot be said without — ,
nefaa est dictu^ 364.
importance, it is oi, interest (g^m.), 203.
importance, it is of great, magni (or
miUtumy&Uereat, ^6, a.
important, graoisr,
importune, Jlagitare.
impose on, imponere^ poau, poaiif 233.
impute as a fault, vttio or culp<3B dare
or vertere, 242.
in the presence of the people, apud
populum.
in (an author), apud {Xietiopkoatsmy
«&c.).
in fronfe-, afronte,
in flank, a latere.
in the rear, a tergo.
in triumph (to lead), per triumphum.
inattentive to, negligena {gen.), 183.
increase, aitgirej aux. aucty {trans.)
creacere, crev ^letU.).
incredible, incredunlia,
inconsistent with, alienua, 212.
inconvenient, inoommodus.
induce, adducere tU, &c.
indulge, indxdgere, dtds, dtdt {dot.).
industry, dUigerUia.
inflict punishment on, aliquem pcend
afflcere, 276.
influence : to have great — with, mul-
iwn valere apud tdiquem.
inform, cer tior em facer e, 187.
information. See Give.
inhabit, incoUre, colu, cult.
injure, violarej ( ==: do harm to) Itedere
{ace.).
injunous, it is, nocet{dat.).
injury, injuria.
innocent, innocens.
insignificant: how — ! quam nuUus!
insolence to such a height of, eo {adv.)
insolentuBj 612.
instance, for, verbicausd,
interest ( = true interest^, utilitas.
interest ; it is the — ofi interest {gen.),
203.
interests (to consult the). See 233.
interests (to provide for). See 233.
interview. See Have.
intimate : to be — vilthf famHiariter uii,
abl.
inventor, inventor, fern, inventrix.
invest ( = blockade), obsidere, sedy sess.
invoke, appeUare.
iron-hearted, Jerreus.
is ( = is distant), distal.
island, insula.
it cannot be but that, Jieri ntm potest
quin.
it is not every man who can, &c., nan
cujusvis est, &c. 190.
Italy, Italia.
J.
Javelin, jocu/um.
jest, jocus.
jewel, gemma.
join battle with, committere praeUum
{cum).
journey, on the, inter viam.
joyful, Uetus.
just (equitable), cequus.
justice, justitia.
Keep, servare.
keep one's word, fdemprcestare.
keep up a certain state, splendide se
^erere.
kill, xnterjicere, ocddere, necore, 308.
king, reXj rigis.
know, scire, novisae, caUgre, 385.
L.
Labour, labor.
lame of one leg, daudus altera pads.
lamp, lucema.
INDEX I. ^ENti^LISH.
325
large, magnua.
lasting, sempUemus,
latter, the, hie.
laugh, riderCj rf^, rU.
law, leXy legis.
lay on, imponere.
lay asid^' \ponere, poau, posU.
lay a person under an obligation, gror
iiam ab cUiquo tnire.
lay down a magistracy, magistralum
abdicare ; (or sc with abL^ 308.)
lead a life, agere vitam ; tg^ act.
league, ^cccftiA, tris,
learning, branch of, doclrina.
lean on, nt/t, nisua, nixua {abl. 273).
learn, discere^ didic.
learn by heart, ediscere.
leave, relinquere, liq^ lict: (by will), rc-
linqiiere.
leave ( = go out of), excedere {with abl.)
ceaSf 83.
leave nothing undone, nihil prcBtermU-
tere quin.
leave off, deainertf deai^ deait.
leg. See Lame.
leisure : 1 have — , vacat mihiy 154.
Lemnos, Ltmnoay G. i.
let me know, fac aciam {wUh ut
omitted).
let out to oe built by contract, locare
faciendum.
letter, literay pi : epiatola.
levy troops, aelectum habere,
liable to, obnoxiuay 212.
liar, Tnendoje {adj.).
lie, mentiri.
lie near, adjacsrey 229.
life, vi^a; ( = life- time) tetaa. In the
life-time of Augustus, Auguato
vixoy 364.
lift up, toUerey auahdy avJblat.
light, ievia.
light ( = kindle), aecendere : aiuxendere
ropim^ Ac. (See 299, h.)
lightning, ./Vi/m^n, inia.
like, aimUiay dat.: ( = equal to in size)
xnataTy {gen.).
like (9er6). See 491, d
lines : to draw up an army in three — ,
triplicem aciem inatruere.
literature, literea.
little, or a little ( =few thxngay) paucoy
23.
little : but or too — , parum.
little, a ( = some, but not much), pan-
lum ; pazdulumj 402.
long, diu tpridemf jamdvu, jampridem.
See 420.
long for, avercy of an impatient j geatire
of a Joyous longing.
look to that yourself, id ipae vidgria.
loquacious, loquax.
lose, perdere, perdid, perdU : lose (pas-
sively), amittere. (See 56.)
lose an opportunity, occaaionem amil-
tere.
lose flesh, corpua amittere.
love, amarej diligere. (See 185, a.)
lover of, amana^ diligena {gen.^ 183.).
lover, such a lover of, adeo amana or
diligena {gen.^ 183).
lowest, infimuaj imtua.
lust, libidu)y inia.
luxurious, luxurioaua.
lyre, to play on the. See Teaxh,
M.
Mad, to \)eyfurere.
madness, amentia. 512.
magistracy, to hold, magialrahim ge-
rere.
make, facert {fec^ fact ) ; efficio : am
made,^o. Oba. ' makes all tkinga
{ace.) flourish;' in Lat. * makes
that (u/) all thinga (nom.) should
flourish,' 254.
make the same promise, idem poUiceriy
poUicUua.
make treaty, Ac, fcedua icere^ 299.
make this request of you, iUud te rogo
{ut ne).
make ( = appoint to an office), creare.
make mention of, meminiaae, recor-
dari, 201.
make the same boast, idem gloriari.
make it my first object, id agere {ut).
make for us, a nobiafacere.
make a decree in a man's favour, ae-
cundum aUquem decemere; decrev^
decret.
making haste (after opua eaC)yprope'
raUy {abl. part 171).
maker, effector : fern. ffFectrix.
man, homoy vir. (See so, y.)
man : I am not the — to ; non ia aum^
qui {artbj.).
manners ( — monds, character,) morta^
um, pi.
many, mvUL
march a^nst the enemy, o&riam ire
hoatibua.
marry (of a female), nubere {dot. 222).
Marseilles, MaaaiUa.
master, miigiaterf dominuay herua. (See
180.)
matter, rea.
I mean, aibi velle.
328
INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH.
mean time ; in the — , irUenm, interea.
(See 402.)
means, by no, minime.
meat, cilnu,
medicine, medicina.
meditate, meditari (ace.).
meet, to go to, obviam ire (dai.).
melt, liqutactre^ Ucu, "^
merchant merc€Uor.
middle of, medius (in agreement with
its subsi. 179).
mile ( — 1000 paces), miUe paaeua : pi.
Abulia passuum.
Miletus, of, MiUaiut.
milk. laCy lactia.
mind, merUf mentis : animus.
mindful, memor (gen,). .
miserable, mistry era^ &c, ^
mistaken, to be,/a^i.
mistaken, I am, mefalUt.
mock, illudere (dot. 229).
moderate, moderari (ace. or dai. 220).
money, pecunia.
month, m.erm8i m.
moon, luna.
mora], sanctus.
morals, morest urn.
more, pltis (with gen.). For more,
plurie.
mortal, mortalia,
most men, pleriqtu.
motion, mohiMt ^.
mound, agger,
move, moverej movj moi. Move, ne*U.
moveri.
much, mvJUa^ n. pi. (but if opposed to
many things, or followed by gen.
multum.)
much less, tudum^ 443.
multitude, muitUydOy inis.
N.
Naked, nudus.
name, nominare (also == to appoint).
nature, natura; rerum naiura.
near, prove (tux.),
near, to oe very, minimum abesse (Im-
pers.) qiiinf 92.
nearer, propior; (adv.) propitiSf 2\l.
nearer am, propius absum (quam\ 319.
nearest, p^ximta.
nearly, proptf pome.
need, egerey indigere (abl. or gen.).
need, hare — of| opus est^ 17oj e.
need, you have no — ^ nihil opus est.
negligent, negUgens (jB^en.), 183.
neighbourhood, in your, isticj ^
neighbourhood, from your, i^ine, > 387.
neighbourhood, to your, istuc. 3
neither -nor, Sneqiu---neque.
' (_ nee — nee.
neutral, melius.
never, nunquam,
nevertheless, tamen.
news of the town, res urhance.
next : the next thing is, sequiiur ui^ 85.
night, by, noctu or nocte.
no, nuUus ; after ne, quis,
no one, ntmo.
no painter, nemo pictor,
no where, }
no whither, I "«'»««^
no time, nihil temporis.
nobody, nemo^ inis.*
none of you, nemo vestrunu
none of those things, nihil eorum.
nor, neque^ nee : but after ut^ or ^ne it
is neve or neu.
not, nan. After rel., see p. 216, d.
not yet, nandum.
not one's own, alienus,
not even, ne — quidem.
not only — but also, non solum- sed,
or verum etiam.
not so fiir off, to be, propius abesse.
not to say, ne dicam.
not that — but, non quod — seds non
quo — sed; non eo or ideo quod —
sed, 492.
not at all, nikU.
not as if not, non quint with subj.
not to be far from, hkud midfum (or
haudprocul) abesse (quin).
nothing, nihil.
nothing but, nihil alvud ntn, 185.
nourish, edere^ ahiy alit or aU.
now ( = already), jam.
number, numerare.
O.
Obey, partrct dbedire (dot. See 222j|.
object, not to, nan recusare quin^ 92.
obligation, lay a man under a great,
confer an — on, magnam abaiiquo
(Ctc.), apyd aUquem (Iao.\ gra-
tiaminiref 339.
obliging, commodus.
obstruct, tnterduderef dus..
obtain, poHri (abl. gen.).
occasion: you have no — to hurry,
nihUest quodfesHnes, 477.
* Neminis and nemins are not found, but nuUius^ nuUo : — except now and then
nemine with pass, participle. — ^Nbmo al^aHvum nee habet, nee babet geniUman,
INDEX I. — ENGLISH.
827
occasioa: have — for, opu«e«<, 170.
ocean, oceanua.
occupy myself in, aperam dare^ 337.
odious, to be, odao ease. 242.
of, after * atrip^* Ac. (abl.)
off after ^becoTrUf* ^aeatrvt weUf* Ac.
*am perauadedy* and when qf=
concerning, de. '
of| after ' enquire^* ex.
of others, oZientt^, a, um.
of such a kind, ejusmodu
oiren.d, qghndertyfend^ftna {ace.),
offend against, xnolare.
offence : if I may say so without — ^
pace tud dtxerim.
old, veiua^ veteria (n. pi. Vetera).
old man, aentXy G. aeniay O. pi. um.
old afe, aenecttLSj atia.
one (of two), alter, G. iua^
one thing — another, aliud — alittd, 38.
one ( = a certain), qaidam.
one ( ^ some one, no matter who),
aliquia.
one's, auuB.
only, adj. aolua, G. iua.
only ; the — one who, wnua qui (with
avjbj.).
only son, unicua JUiua.
opinion, to be of, censure.
opportunity, occaaio.
oppose, repugnare {dat.)^ cXwtare {dot.).
or, aut, ve/, v«, 466 (in questions aiC).
or not, necne. See 122.
orator, orator.
order,jubere, juaa {ace. with inf.),
ought, oportet. See 126.
out of e, ex.
out of doors, .^fltf.
out : to dine out, camare foria^ 339.
over : it is all over with, aetwn at de,
over against, adveraua.
overpower (with emotion), /rong^cre,
fregyfrad,
overthrow, everterey vert, vera,
owe, debere.
owing : it is owing to, per aliquem ataty
quominusy Ac. 99.
own {emphatie)y ipaiua or ipaortmiy after
meuay iuuay Ac.
P.
Pace, jmaauMy Ita.
pained, to be, doiUrt {ace. or oU. with
de.),
pardon, venia.
pardon, ignoacerCy nov {dot,) ; (of a su-
perior) vaniam dare,
parent, parena; gen/Uor, fern, genUrix.
part, paray partia.
partner, conaoray 185.
party, to be on our, a nabia aentire.
past, atk^y praterita,
peck, modiua.
peculiar, propriuay 212.
perceive, aentire.
perchance (in questions), quid in ec-
quidy numqwdy 400.
performj^un^ perjungiyfuxictua {abl).
perhaps, fortaaae.
permitteo, it is, Ucet.
permitted, I am, licet mihi,
perpetual^ aempitemua.
perseverance, peraeverardia,
persist, peraeoerare.
persuade (= advise), auadere (dot.) ; =
advise effectually, perauaacrey auaa
{dot.).
persuadea, I am, perauaaum eat mihi
dcy Ac, or perauaaum habeOy 291.
perverse, perveraua.
perversely, perverae.
philosopher, phUoaoj^ua.
philosophy, philoaophia.
piety, jpietaA.
pity (I), miaeret may or miaereoTy gen,
(See 201, r.)
pity, miaericordta.
plainly: see — through, perapedum
fiabeOy 364.
planet, planeta or ea.
plan, cmaUium.
plant, aererCy aeVy aat.
play, IvderCy Iua.
play on the lyre. See Teach,
plead a cause, a^ere eauaam.
pleasant, jucunaua,
please, plaeere {dot.),
pleasure, voluptaa*
poet, poeta.
point: to be on the — oi^ in to eaae ui,
479.
poison, venentan.
Pompey, Povmp^ua,
possesdon, to oe in, teiare,
possession, to gain, potior {abL organ,),
possible as (alter auperl,), 911am, vel,
410.
possibly. As great aacan possiblv be,
quantua maximua poteat eaae, 412.
post himself^ conaidircy aed, aeaa,
poor, paviptr.
power, pattmiia of aetiwH, poteataa oi
legaly conceded, Ac, power,
power : to put himself in their—, po-
teatatem aui facer e,
power: to be in our—, m noatrd po-
teatate eaae,
powerful, potena.
practice (justice. Ac.), colere, eolu, eult»
praise, Uma, kaiaia.
328
INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH.
praise, to, l^adare,
pray (s beg* earnestly), orare.
predict, prcedicere.
prefer, antqfHmerCt poetiy pont,
prefer a charge, ream facere ck, 187.
prefer a capital charge ajninst, ret
capUaUa rewn facert^ 187.
prefer a charge of immorality against,
de morUma reum facer e^ 187.
prejudicial, to be, obeeee {dot.).
prepare, parare.
present with, doncare^ 207.
present, give us a, dmo OTwuturidare,
242, (3.)
present, to be, adesae {dot.).
preservation : tend to the — ^ 335, c.
pretend, aimuUire,
pretty often, nonnunouam.
prevent, obatare, obatit (dal.).
priest, > g^^j.fj^ f^
pnestess, J •^-^^'ww, w*».
proceed against a person, consulere in
aliguem.
produce (= fruitaf), fruftea^ pi.
productive of, efficiena {genX 183.
profitable, to be, ^odessc {oat.).
promise, poUicen^ licihu; promittere.
See 17, 1. See 15.
prompt execution (after optu est), ma-
iurejactoy 177.
prone, proclivia (ad.),
property, all my ^omnia mea.
property, all their, omnia sua,
prosecute, postulare. 201.
protection, take under one's, tuerij 374.
proud, supeHnis.
prove an nonour, honori esse ; (prooe
done by sum with the do/., 242.)
prove myself mindful; prtesiare me
m>emore7n.
prove my gratitude, > gratiam re-
prove myself grateful, J ferre,^
provide for the interests o% providere
vid, vis; prospieeref spex, sped
(both with dot.],
provided that, dum, modo, or dum~
mMo (after which *not* is ne).
494.
pull down, diruerey ru, rut.
punishment, wena.
purpose, for tne, causd.
purpose, to no, nequicquam^ frustra.
put ; put down, pon^'e, posu, posit.
put ol^ exuere. exu, erut,
put in mind of, admoneref 194.
pyre, rogus.
d.
Q,uite (to be without), plane (carere).
IL
Ratify a treaty, icere fadus.
rather, I had, mMo.
rational faculty, mens.
rear, in the, a tergo.
reason, you, «ftc., have no, nihil est
quod {subj.).
receive, ac-, ex-, re- dpere, cep, cept.
^ (See 308.)
receive favourably, honi consulere {in
QuintU'i Seneca, <f«.) ; in bon&m
partem accipere, 185.
reckon, numerare.
reckon one thing after another, postha-
bere.
reckon as a fault, vitio vertere, 242.
recollect, reminisci.
reconciled, to be, in gratiam redire
{cum).
recover, convalescere, vaJu.
recruit myselfj me refcere.
refrain: I cannot — from, temperare
mihi non possum, quin, &c.
regard the interests of, prbspicere, spex,
spect {dot.) 4
reign, regnare.
reign : in your — , te rege: te regnanie
or imperante, 364.
reject, repudiare.
rejoice, gaudere, gavisus sum.
relate, narrare.
leheve from, liberare{abL); (of a, par-
tial relief) Uvare {abl.).
religion, religto.
relying on, fretus {abl.).
remainder = rest of, 179.
remains, it, reliquum eH, restat {ui).
remedy, remedium.
remember, m^mdnisse {Imperat. vnt-
m.ento); recordari, reminisci. (See
201, q.)
remind, adjrumere (gen.).
render, reddere, did, dU.
renew, renovare.
repair, reficere, fee, fed.
repay a kindness, gratiam referre.
repent : I — me, m« pcmitei (gen.).
report, fama.
require, egere, indigere {gen. abL).
required, are, opus sunt, 172.
resignation, tsquus animus.
resignation, the most or greatest,<B7UK»-
simus animus.
resist, resistere, restU* repugnare
{dot.).
resolve, eonstittiere, stitu, sHtut.
rest, requies.
rest on, niti, 273.
rest of. adj. rdiquus. (See 179.)
rest, all tli^i cdera omnia.
INDEX I. — ENGLISH.
329
restore liberty to his country, pairiam
in libertaUm vindieare,
restrain, temperare ifUU.), 220.
restrained, to be, irutiberi,
retain a grateful sense, gratican habere,
return, redire^ reverHy revenire. (See
339, p.)
return thanks, groHas agere ; egj act,
revile, matedicere {dat,).
reviler, vituperaior.
revolt from, d^ficere ab; fec^ JttdL,
rich, dvoea,
ribhes, divilue,
right, rectus : (of situation,) dexter,
rise, oririy tor, ortua. (See 443.)
rivaJ, (smulari {dot, or ace.).
river, Jlumeriy amnia^ JluviuSf 472, o.
rob, spoliare {abl.),
rod, virg<B^ pi.
rope (= hanging), suapendium,
Rome, Roma.
Roman, Ronuxnua,
rule, regtUa.
ruling power} t6 be, rerwn potiri.
S.
Safety, aatua^ uHa.
^rng, |p'v«fefT^W,~<*« (ace.).
sake : for the — of, eavad.
sake, for its own, propter aeae.
salute, acUutare,
same, idem.
satisfaction, to your, Ac, ex (tuA) aen-
terUid.
satisfactorily, ex aeiUentid,
satisfv, aatiafacere (dot.).
say, dicere : (= aaaerta) ait,
say that — not, negare,
say : not to say, ne dicam,
say : they (= people) say, /crun/.
saymg : as tne — is, )
says he, inquit. >
sauce, conaimentum,
scarcely, vix.
sea, mare. By sea and land, terrd
marigue,
season, tempeataa.
seasoning, condimentum,
second, alter.
sedition, aeditio,
see, videre ; (= distinguish ; have the
aenae of sight) cemere,
see that you don% vide ne,
see (plainly) through (any thidg), ali-
quid perapectum habere^ 364.
see ; do you see to that, id tu vFcfifru.
seem, victeri, viava.
seize on, inceaaere {of fear, Ac.), 229.
sel^ selves. (See 368.) I myself
ipaef 33.
sell, Tendere (vendidy vendii).
sell, neut, venire {veneo)j 267.
senate, aenaiua,
send, mitteref mia^ miaa.
send forward, prcemittere.
send (news by letter), peracribere.
send to the assistance of, auxtlio mit^
tere {two daiivea),
sentence, aententia,
serpent, aerpena.
serve a campaign, aUpendium mereret
or mereri, 308.
serves, eat (with dot. 237).
service, to be o^ prodeaae {dot.).
serviceable, idoneua,,
sesterce, aeatertiua.
set on fire, meendere, auccendere. See
299.
set out, prqfieiaciyjectua,
set out to the assistance ol^ auxilio
pro^ciaci {tipo daHvea),
several, plvrea.
several times, 420.
severe, gravia : groDioTf 409, g.
severity, gravitaa,
shadow, U7n6ra.
shed , wt^underej fudy fua,
should, = ought, debere^ oportet, 126 :
or (after Ezerc. 49, Pt. I.) part,
in dua, 326, 327.
show (myself brave), pr<Aere.
SicUy, SicUia.
sick, <Bger^ gra^ grum: (of body or
mind) tcgrotua,
side, to be on our, a nbbia atare,
siege, obaidio,
silence, aiUntium: {habit of) tacUur-
nitaa,
silent, tadhta: {habihuUly) iaeitumua,
silent, to be, ailere, tacere. See 299.
silver, argentum.
sin, peccare,
since, quunij quoniamf 492.
sister, aoror.
size, magnitudo,
skilled in, peritua (gen.).
slaughter, trucidare,
slave, aervua,
slave, to be the, aervire {dot,).
slay, ocddere^ nd^ da.
sleep, aomnua,
smack of redoUre {aec,). } ojik
smell of; oferd, J ^45.
snatch away, eripere, ripu^ rept {dot. of
pers.).
snares, xnaUHtB,
380
Xin)BX I. — ^El^GLISH.
snow, ruf , twHb,
80 near home, toTnpropeatUtmo.
80. The thing is so, re§ itaat habtt.
Socrates, SocraUa^ Gen. ia.
sold, to be, venire {veneo)^ 267.
some, aliqui8f mnepiam^ 392. See
note X. and 390, v.
some one or other, neacio ^u, 394.
some body of consequence, aliquia^ 396.
some other place, to, alio. 394.
some other place, frpm, cUiunde,
some other direction, in, alio.
some other direction, from, aliunde.
some considerable, aUquantum.
some — others, alii — o^t.
sometimes nonnunquam, aliquandOy
interdum. See 402.*
somewhat. Omit, and put adj. in
compar. 408 : or translate by pauh
with compar.
sorry : I am — for, piget me (gen.).
sou], oTiimua.
sow, eereref ««o, <a/.
Spain, Wspania.
spare, parcere, peperc (dat.).
speak, loqui, locunie.
speak the truth, verum dicere.
BpeBT.haaia.
speech. oraHOf 249.
spend nis life, vitam agere.
spend his time (in), temptts impendXre,
337.
spoken ill oiy to be, rnaleaudire.
sport: to make — o£ Hlvdere. Itu
(dot.).
stand in need of, erere (gen. aid.).
stand by, adesse (oat.).
star, stdla. See 51.
stay (in a place), commorari.
starvation, Jamea.
state, reapublica.
stick, bacillum,
stir out of the city, urbe exeedere^ 249.
stone, lapia^ adj. lapidetu.
storm, oppugnare (ace.).
storm, to take by, per vim expugnare,
strange, mirua.
strength, virea^ ium.
strip off*, exuere.
strive, niti^ enUi^ niaua. nixiUf id.
struck (by atonea. Ughtkingf ^c), ichu.
study, atudere (dot!).
subject to, obnoxiua (dat.)^
succeed ( = follow), excipere (ace.),
successfully, ear aenttniut.
succour, auofltrere (dot.).
such, talia.
such is your temperance, qwe tua eat
temperanHOf 66.
such a manner, in, ita (tU).
suffer, ainerej aiv ; pati, paaaua. See
532.
suggestion, at your, te auctore.
suitable, ieUmeua^ 212.
sun, aoL
superior, to be, > anteeeUere^ pree^are,
surpass, ) 229.
superstition, auperatUio.
supper, ccBna.
support ( = nourish), alere^ alu, ality or
alt.
surround, cvrcumdftre {urhem muro^ or
murum urbC).
survive, aupereaae.
survivor, auperatea^ itia.
suspense, to be in anxious, pendire
animif animo (or if necessary,
animia.
suspicion, auapicio.
swallow, hirundOi d^^nia.
swear, jurare.
Syracuse, Syracuace.
T.
Take,t eapere (eep, capt) : aumere
(aumaf aumpt). See 492.
take oy storm, expugnare.
take in good part, boni canaulere^ 185.
take away, €tdimere, eximere. See 385,
o (em, empt) : eripere (dot. of pers.).
take measures against, conaulere in
(ace.).
take cruel measures against, crudeliier
in (aliquem) conaulere.
take a camp, exuere hoatea atatria^ 233.
take care, cavere^ caVf caut.
take care that, vide (ne).
take under one's protection, tueri, 374.
take hold of, prehendere.
teach, docercj two ace. 257.
teach to play on the lyre, ^i&u« docere
(i. e. teadi toith ot onthe atringa).
teacher, magiater; ftm. magiaira.
temple, templum.
tenacious, tenax (gin.).
tend, to, 335, c.
terrify, terrere.
territory, agar.
thank, graMaa agere.
that (after doubts dtny^ dc. with neg.),
quin.
* Rarius ianJterdum quam nonnunquam esse memento,
t Take arms, etnna eapere^ or aum,ere. (Cicero.)
INDEX I. — ^EXGLISH.
881
that (after feaT\ ne; ihat—^Mty at (or
nenon),
that, as nom. to ^i9,' Ac,, agrees with
nom. after it, 386, m.
that famous, Ule^ dQl,
that (after ' it renuUna,' ^U follow '), ut,
that too, et ia; idcmqite, 7 »qR
that too not, nee is, S '
that only, ia demum, 386.
Thebes, HubtB^ arum,
then rWat that time), fum.
then ( = after), deinde^ vntU.
then ( = therefore), igUur^ itaque.
there, ibi.
there is no doubt, rum est dubium quin.
there are some who (think), ataU qui
{ptUent).
there are not wanting, non denmt qui
{subjX ,
there are found some who, reperiiaiiur
n* {avbj.),
, tnaere, putdrej exiatimarey ar-
bUraH. See 257.
think nothing of, nihili facerej 266.
ttiigh, /emur, orw, n.
thing. A thing which (referring to a
preceding sentence), id quod :
sometimes, quae res^ 36.
thirst for, aitiref ace, 240.
this beinff the case, quae quum ita aint,
thousand, mille, adj. ; pi. mUliOy subst.
threaten, minari. See end of 222.
three hundred, trecenti.
three days, space of, "triduum,
three years, space ot, triennium,
through, expressing the cauae, sign of
obL
throw before, prqncHre. jec. led (see
75, y.
throw of!, exuere.
till, coleref colu, cult,
till, donee, durn^ quoad, 507, dc.
time, at that, id temvoria,
time : at the time ot the Latin Games,
L/udia Latirda.
time, for a long, doidum, diu^ jamdu-
dum, &c. See 420.
times, two or three ( =: several times),*
bia terque.
times, two or three ( = not more than),*
bia terve.
times: many times as great, multia
partibua major,
timid, timidua.
tired : am — of, ttedet me (gen.),
to death (after condemn), capUia.
to no purpose, nequicquam, fruatra.
See 33.
to each other (after contrary, compare),
inter ae, *
toga, toga,
together (after to compare), inter ae.
to-morrow, eraa.
tongues : tp hold their—, 299.
too much, nirAiua {nimiua aorhnua, or
nimiumaomw),
too dear, nimio.
top o^ aummtu, {adj. See 179).
torch, tada.
tortured : to be — in mind, diacruciari
animi.
towards, adveraua, ergo, 470 : in, 281.
treachery, proditio,
treason, prodiiio,
treaty ifcedus, eria.
tribune, tribunua,
triumph, triumphua,
triumph in, par triumphum (ducere),
triumph : gain a — for a victory over
the (Huls, de GaUiairiumphare.
troublesome, moleatua,
Troy, Troja,
true : it is —but, iUeqvidtimr-aad, 383.
truly, vera.
trustworthy, fddia,
truth, veritaa,
turn back, revertere, reoerti, 339.
turn out, evadere, vaa.
turn it into a fault, nHo vertere, 242,
Tuscan, Tuocua.
two days, space o^ biduum.
U.
Unacquainted with, rudia (gen.).
unbecoming, it is, dedecet {ace,)',
unburied, immnuUua.
under favour, bond tud venid,
under such an age, 306.
understand, intdtigere, lex, led,
undertake, auacipere: ( = engage to do)
redpere.
undertake to corrupt, corrumpendum
auadpere.
unexpectedly, de improviao.
unfriendly, mimicua.
unless, ntai, 451.
unless indeed, niai vero, or forte.
unless I am mistaken, niaimefaUU.
unlike, diaaimtUa (dat.y
unmindful, immcTnor (gen.).
unskilled in, imperitua (gen.).
unteach, dedocere ; {two accua.)
unwilling, to be, nolle.
* Bis TSBdTJB augebU, minud bis tsbvx notatum.
332
INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH.
unworthy, vndxgmis {abl.).
use, nit \U8ua\ abl.
use, make a bad — of, Tnale vJti {abl.),
use, make a perverse — of, jtcrverBt uJti
{abl.).
useful, ulUia, 212.
useless, imUUia^ 212.
utter many falsehoods, mutta menivri
{dt), is.
V.
Vain, in, rucquicqttam ; Jru»tra (See
33).
yalue, teatimare, 264.
valuable, pretioms.
very (witn 8upeH.)j vel, 410.
very many, permidtL
very much, permuUa.
very little, perpauea.
very, to be translated by magma or
9ummu8j when the adj. after * very *
is translated by a subst. * Is very
honoraMe,* *magnohonorieaty'2i2,
vice, vUium.
violence, vis,
virtue, virtuSf virtuHs.
virtuous, honeshu.
virtuously, honeste.
visit (on bu9ine88)y adire ; (as h friend)
viaere; (on buaineeSy or no£) con-
venire. See 249.
voyage, to have a prosperous, ex eenr
teniid navigare.
W.
Wage, gerere^ gees^ geat,
wait, manere,
wait for, txpectare^ opperiri^ prtBatolarif
See 299.
wait upon, convenire {ace.).
walk, amMtiare.
wall, murus ; (x>{ a walled city) moentOf
pi. ; (of a house) paries^ eHs : (of a
garden, &c.) maceria.
wanting to be, deeeee {dot.).
war, in, bello.
warn, monere (u<, ne). See p. 222, note,
washed, to be (of an island), cvrcum-
fundi, ftisus.
watch over, cavere, cat, caut {dot.).
water, aqua.
waYe^Jludus, ds.
way, in such a, ita (ti/).
weary, am, tadei me (gen,).
weight, onuMy eria.
welt ^^ne : ( = lightly), rede.
whatever, quicquid,^ neut. as aubat. g
quicun^ue (adj.).
wheat, triticum.
when, qitum, quando, 105. ( = as soon
as) ubi, tU, 512.
whence, unde.
where, ubi.
where you are, istve; from where you
are, iatine ; to where, dc. iatuc^
where in thq world, ubi or ubinam
gentium.
whether — or (of two statements left
doubtful), 9ive — aive: aeu—aeu,
whether (in double dependent ques-
tions), see 118, 119; num{iaaingle
dependent questions),
which (of /iro), uter.
whip with roas, virgia aedere; eecid,
aea.
white, albua.
whither, quo.
why. cur, quare, 105.
whole, totua, univeraua. (See 179)
will, against my, invitua. Against the
will of Caius, invito Caio.
willing to be, vdle.
wind, ventua.
wine, vinum.
winter (as adj.), fUbemua.
wisdom, aapientia,
wise, aapiena.
wish, veUe, 142.
wish well to, cupere alicui.
with, cum.
with, after, * to do* de.
with, after ' to make a beginning,* a, ab.
apud {ace.)
(and after
muUum
{in the house of,
in the mind of,
in the estimation
-r I mUUUWi
inthepresenceof,J ^^^^')
without, airu ; or adj. expera {gen.).
without, to be, carer e {abl.).
without being heard, inavdiiua, a, um.
without : before partic. aubat., non, or
some other negative, with parti-
ciple, 363, c. neque. ut non, quin,
620.
without, after nunquam and before
particip, auM. quin with aubj.^
88, c.
wol^ lupua.
wonder at, admirari.
wonderful, mirua.
wont, to be, aolere, aolitua aum,
wooL lana.
word, verbum.
word for word, ad verbum.
worship, to, e(dere, co/u, eulL
world, mundus: orbia teme or terra-
rum,
world, in the (after supetL^f vel, 410.
worthy, dignns {abl.).
would, nave been (better), > fuU^ not
would be (tedious, «&c.)i $ fuisstt.
wound, wlntLSj eria.
wound, ferire, icere^ 299.
wretched, miaer^ a, um.
INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH.
write (news), peracribere.
333
y.
Yesterday, Aeri.
young, juvenia.
youth (s: time of ), /uven/iitf, uHa; ju-
verUa,
youth (= body of), juventua. See 3^.
INDEX II.
LATIN, AND CRITICAL REMARKS.
Words followed by (s) are dlsdngidshed from their synonymes.
A, ab, abs, 348.
ab hinc : not witfi ordinal». Place qf^
abhinc, 305.
a nobis stare ; fiicere ; sentire, 348.
amanu servus, 348.
abdicare magistratum, or se magis-
tratu, 306.
abesse (s), 227. r. (propius).
ac, atque (s), 4, d.
accedit (hue — quod or ut), 513.
accendere (s), 299. h.
accidere (s), 374, a.
accipere (s), 299, h.
ACCUSATIVE of the personal pronoun
seldom omitted before ^e inJBii, ex-
cept slteTfaterif dieere, opinari, dc.
p. 55, s.
acies (s), 348, t.
actum est de, 59.
adesse (s), 227, q.
adimere (s), 385.
adire (s), 294, k.
adjuvare (s), 2!22, k.
adspergere aliqnid alicui, or aliquem
aliqui re, 233.
iBdes m, 356, y.
SBqualis, 212, z.
sBqui boni facere, 186*.
SBtemus (s), p. 49. c.
ait esse paratus, 149, c.
ales (s), 480, u.
aliquapdo (s), > ^qo
aliquantum (s). J
aliud — aliud, 38.
aliud alio (fertur), 4UO, d.
amare (s), p. 68, a.
ambulatum est, 296.
amittere (s), 56, n.
amnis (s), 472, o.
amoenuB (s), 212, v.
an, in HngU cruuHonSf 120, f.
an non (s), 122, b.
an quisquam 1 p. 139, c.
anima, -us (s), 92, e.
apparere (s^, 150, w.
appellare m, 51, i.
aptuB (s), 2i2.
astrum (s), 51.
audis seu Jbne, 272, p.
aut (s), 456.
auxiliari (s), 222, k.
[s), 2sl, s.
ave (c
avere (s), 42U.
ayis (s), 480, u.
B.
Beatus (s), 443.
bibere (s), 257, k.
bon& tu& yeniH, 428.
boni consulere, 185.
BUT qfter nemo, nuUus, dc. 44.
C.
cadere (s), 299, i.
calldre (s), 386.
capere (s), 492.
caput feritur alicui, 294 (b).
carere <s). 273, h.
caiitas (s), 281. r.
cave putes, 539.
cayfire alicui; aliquem; aibi; ab ali-
quo, 233.
censere (s). 257, z.
certiorem uicere, 187.
t Bib TsaQXTB augibitf mmuet bib tbbvb notatum.
INDEX II. — ^LATIN.
2K#«i
orfAHGB in the ace, if expressed by a
neu^. pron.^ 194.
circumdare urbem muro, } 932
circumdare murum urbi, >
civiTAs in appoa, to tiie plural name of
a pjtople: Carmonenses, qiuB est
dvitasy 138, k.
claudus altera pede, 276.
CCBpl (s), 160, z.
cceptus est, 150, z.
comes (sV 185, z.
comissatio (s), 428, b.
committere ut, 479.
COMPABATXVX of On ADVSBB, p. 37, V.
compilare, 267, g.
componere (s), 222, r.
concessum est (s), 124, d.
CONDITIONAL forvM of the infin.f p.
160, X.
conferre (s), 222, r.
CONSEQUENCE in per/, stfbj. for im-
per/., 418.t
coQsors (s), 185, z.
consulere aJicui : in aliquem, 233.
contendere (s), 222, r.
contingere (s), 374, d.
convenire (s), 249, f.
convivium (s), 428, b.
creber (s), 410, n. .
crederes, 426.
credor (whenright), 474, r.
cruor, 229, f.
cujus es temperaintiee, 66.
culpa (s), 242, g.
cuncti (s), 443.
cupere (s), 420.
cur (s), 105, f.
curare aliquid faciendum, 351.
D.
damnare voti, votis. 201, s.
damnare capitis, 201.
damnor a nidente esse bono^ not Latin,
152, y.
dapes (s), 428, b.
de facie nosse, f
de improviso, > 521.
de industrid, 3
debere (s), 126, f.
deesse (s), 227, r.
defendere, 374.
delictum (s), 428, c.
DBMONSTKATivB PMON. eonutimes ex-
pressed qfler qtjin, p. 30, note e.
See 88, (a).
desitus est, 150, y.
desperatus, 229.
deterior (s). 410.
dlcere (s^, 177,
diligere (s), p
diu (s), 420.
['^
dolere (s), 521, a.
dono dare, ^42, (3).
donum (sk 242, n.
S(
dominus (s), 180.
■ i,i4 —
dubito. See Ciuestions, § 14.
dudum (s), 420.
dulcis, 211^ Y.
dum, 494.
dummodo (ne), 494.
E re me& est, 542.
ecquis. J ^^' ®-
edere (s^, 257.
egere (s), 273, h.
ego creaor, when correct, 474, r.
eo insolentiae, 512.
epulas (s), 428, b.
ergo, with gen., 207.
esse honor! allcui, 242.
est infinitum, 426.
et is (idem, &c.), 385.
evenire, 374, d.
EVER, how translaied, p. 141, k.
ex pedibus laborare, 542.
excedere urbe, urbem, 244, q.
excipere (s), 299, a.
eximere (s), 385.
expilare (s), 257, g.
exspectare (s), 227, z.
Ixto^iris \ («)' 276. u.
F.
fac ut, 639.
facere de, 291 ; facere nou possum
quin, 89.
facturos pollicentur, 149, c.
fallere (s), 38, z.
fallit me, 209.
familiariter uti, 466.
fanum (s), 356, y.
fari (s), 177, q.
fas est, 124, d.
faustus (s), 443.
feUx (s), 443.
t Potitts dizerim, ubi de re prsteriti agatur, perfectum subjunctivi magis
eventumfaeti spectare ; imperfectum Tnenteni et oonsiUum ogeTitis. Ganther.
336
INDEX n. LATIN.
festinare (s), 177, m
fieri potest ut, 129.
flagitare (s), 257.
fluvius (8), 472, V.
forsitan, 494.
fortior quam prudentior, 452, w.
frequens (s), 410, n.
frustra (s), 33, y.
fueit me, 209.
fuit utiliuB, Ac, 426.
fandamental nile for the sequence of
tenses, 40.
FUTURE BUBJUNCT.. 41.
G.
gaudere (s), 521, a.
gestire (s), 420.
gratus (s), 212, y.
H.
hieres ex drodante, &c., 556.
baud (s), p. 70, h.
baud scio an, 116.
baud scio an nemOf stronger ffum baud
scio an quisauam. Is the loiter
Jf^orm correct? See note on Diff.
qf Idiom. 25.
hems (s), 180.
hie, 377, Ac., relaJtingtothe more remote
wordy 378, li: to idde mto potissi'
mum mmus^ 376) h (3 ).
homo (s), 38, y.
ho8ti8(8), 221,z.
I.
icere (s), 299, i.
id, not to he used as nam, to *to be*
when a subst. foUows^ but to agree
with that subst., p. 135, m.
id statls 163, 0.
ID QUOD /or quod onfy, adds emphasis^
p. 27, note *.
idem (^aZffo). 387.
idem est qui (or ac, atque), 45, b.
idoneus (s), 212* ; qui, 486.
ifnoscere(s), 428, c.
iUe, 49, 377, &c. : vnth quidem in par-
tial eoncessionSf followed by a ' out,'
383.
imperare (a). 76, w.
impertire aliquia aiicui ; or aliquem
aliquA re, p. 86, c.
in ante diem, 530.
in dies, 69, t.
esse eloqutntis,
incendere (s), 299, h.
incipere (s), 150, z.
incolumis (s), 542.
incumbere re! or in rem, p. 86.
incusare (s), p. 72, m.
indigere (s), 25t.
induere, 233.
inimicus (s), 212, z.
iNFiNiTiyK, with participle or suJbst. in
the nom. by attraction, 54.
inquit, 177, q.
inspergere aliquid aiicui or aliquem ali-
iqu2 re, p. 66, d.
instar : when to be used, 207.
inter se oontraria, 25.
interdum (s), 402.
interea (s), 402 ; in neg. sentences, see
noteg.
interesse (s)^ 227, q.
interest Cvceronis
wrongy 152, z.
interficere (s), 308.
interim (s), 402.
inyenire (s), 177, o.
ipse ( = exactly), 308.
IPSK, withpers. pron., when in the nom.,
when in obbque case, 368.
iPBK, hardly ever in the nom. {in Cic.)
after appended met, p. 131, c.
ira8cr(8),222.
is sum Qui, 483.
is (ea, id), the usual pron. for the third
person where there is no emphasis,
no distinction to be marked, 37, u.
iste, that qf yours, 377 (c).
iste, in ubttkbs, refers to the place
where on£s correspondent resides,
382.
i8tin(^ 387.
ito justum, si est, Ac, 451c
J.
j^mpridem cupio, 413.
JUBKBB (ace. wiUi inf.; ut when used
absolutdy), p. 80, h.
jucunde yivi non potest, 504.
jucundus (s), 211, y.
juyare (s), 222, k.
L.
IflBtari, 521.
latet me, or mibi (bad), 259, a.
libenter( = /i&«to), 492.
jibertinus ) . v ggj
libertus S ^ "
licet (s), 124, d.
licet esse beatum, or beato, 153, b, c.
INDEX II. — LATIN.
337
licet (altfum^h)j 451.
locare aliquid faciendum,
locare (s), 480, v.
loqid (s), 177, q.
ludis Latinis, 311.
hig^re (s), 521, a.
M.
maceria (s), 233.
macte esto, &c., 280, q.
major annis viginti, &c., Q. on S 42.
male audire, 492.
mandare (s), 78, w. .
me (miserom) qui, 486, i.
mederi (s), 222, 1.
medicina >/ ^ o^ i
medicamentum { Wi *o'i »•
memini (s), 62, q. 61, 1.
memini legere, 426.
mens (s), 92, c.
metuere (n«, vi)^ 95 ; s. 99, e.
minari mortem alicui, 222.
miserari ^
misereri > (s), 201, r.
miseret me)
modo, 494.
moenia (s), 233.
mcerere (s), 521,
monere t, w*; n« ; ace. with irif., 189, k.
monere (a), 222, i.
munus (s), 242, h.
mums (s), 233.
N.
nam appended iointerrogaUvetf p. 140,
398.
no quia (notf uti
nemo), - I when a purpose ig
ne quid (not, ut ( expressed toWunU
nihil), [ emphasis on the
ne unquam (no/, negative, 80.
ut nunqjiam), J
ne =: that after verbs of fear, 95.
ne — quidem, 185.
ne dlcam, 443.
necare (s), 308.
necesse est. 504.
necne (s), 122, b.
nedum (ut), 145.
nemo pictor, 443: neminis, nomine;
see note p. 129.
neque, toUh verb = toUhoutf 620.
nequicquam (s), 33, v.
nescio quia, 394.
nescio an, 116.
nihil me terret, 443.
nihil habeo quod, 477.
nihi aliud nisi, 185.
nihil aliud quam rident, 450.
nisi, 451.
nisi forte, or vero, 451.
noli putare, 539.
nolle = would not^ 541.
nomen est mihi Caio, 239.
non (s), p. 70, h.
non possum quin {forfacere non pos-
sum quin; or^ non possum non
wUh infin.) should not be imitated,
[Cicero guotes non possum
-quin exclamem, from Plautus.]
non quod, or quo — sed, 492.
non desunt qui putent, 477.
non solum — verum {or sed) etiam, 267.
non est quod, 477.
nonne, 102.
nonnunquam (s), 402.
noscere (s), 365.
NOSTRUM, VESTBUM, (tftcr pOTtitwet,
and with omnium, 372.
nuUus dubito, 492.
num, 102
nuptam esse, 222, m.
O.
OB, in oberroj Ac. ^iamb. htt6L 24B, r.
obedire (s), 222.
obire mortem, &c. (s), 249, u.
obtingere > /„% qva a
obvenire jW-^'^^'^-
obviam ire, 512.
occidere (s), 308.
opersB pretium est^ 532.
opitulari (s), 222, k.
oportet (s), 126, f
oportet me facere,
oportet (ego) faciam^
opperiri (s), 229, z.
oppetere mortem (s), 249, vl
oppidum (s), 63, z.
opprobrium (s), 242,1.
optare (s). 420, opto ut, p. 214.
opus est (a), 126, f. 170, L
opus est properato. 177.
opus absolutum haoeo, 364.
I
126.
t MoneOf = to team a person to do something, sometimes takes Infin. instead
of ut with subj.— Cic. hardly ever U8e& the infin. if any particular svJbjeet U
named : — raiio ipsa mokbt, amicitias compaikabe.
338
TNDEZ I. — LATIN.
omre (s), 267.*
OUttW OF THB PIRFSCT WITH * RAYB '
Uf MODXBN LANGUAGES, p. 130, a.
QTtOB
i
P.
Catttlon
pace tu& dixerim, 428.
par (b), 212jX.
parCre (s). 222.
panun (a), 402.
paries (s), 233.
PABTICIFIAL BirBSTANTIYB,
26. See also p. 161, e.
PABTIOIPLX8 IN BUS AND DUS, f 46, p.
126.
pABTioiPLBs of deponent verbs, 366.
pasci (s), 257, k.
pati (s), 632.*
pejor (s), 410.
PBBF. suBj. (for imperf.) tn a const-
quenee with ut, 418 : in obL narr,
p. 161, z.
PIBSONAL PBON. BZPBB88ED, tohen there
w a distinction between two tKtions
of the Baxne person^ p. 17, note,
persuadere (s), 222, i.
persuasum est mihi, 291.
persuasissimum habeo (6acQ, 291, z.
petere (s), 257.*
pietas (s), 281, r.
plerique: pleroramque plerarumque,
not found, 291.
poUlceri (s), 17, L
polliceri, vnth infin. Jut. 15, a.
ponere (s). 480, v.
poBcere (s), 257.*
possum (s), 125, e.
post — annos quam excesserat ; or ex-
cessit, 310, s. 514.
posthabere aliquid alicui, 227.
postquam, 512.
postulare (s), 257.*
potare, 257, k.
potentia>/v 45,
potestas J ^^f* *°*'
potestatem sui facere, 451.
prsemium (s), 242.
praBsens, >227 a
praesentem esse, y * ^'
prffistolari (s), 227, z.
prsBterit (non me), 259.
prehendere (s), 4^.
PBBBBNT qfier si in connection wOhfui,,
p. 14^ t.
I PBSSBNT one? IMPEBF. PASSiyB^.&n^
li^ verby 135, e.
PBXSENT or PEBF. SUBJ. in connection
with infin. where the general rtds
wotUd require imperf . or jduperf.,
pridem (s), 420.
prim-um, o (s), 83, a.
probrum (s), 242, i.
C pro re natfi, }
^provirili, 5542:
C pro eo ac mereor, 3
pro tuft temperantii, 56.
prcBlium (s), 34a t.
profugus (8), 276, n.
projicere se alicui ad pedes ; or ad
alicujus pedes, p. 89, note 1.
promitto (s). 17, 1
properare (s), 177, m.
propior, 211.
propius (dat. or ace.), 612.
propius abesse, 319.
prober (s), 443.
prospicere, ) 900
providere, S
prozlme, 512.
prozimus, 211.
pugna (s), 348, t.
purganai «itxaus&, 334.
putares {you would have thought)^ 426.
que res, 36.
qu8B quum ita sintj 492.
qu8B tua est temperantia, 56.
quam pro {after compar.), 409, fl
quam nuUus, 492. '
quam ut sit, &c. {after compar.), 486.
quam brevissime^ <&c., 410.
quam omitted after ampllus, Ac, 652, k.
3ZJ3Sr''|4Bl. See note u.
quamvis, )
quanta maxima potest esse, ^., 410.
quare, 105, f.
quasi, 494.
queo (s), 125, e.
quid SBtatis, 164, ^9.
quid facerem 7 427, c.
quilibet (s), 390. u.
quin, 44, 3. See note e, p. 30, and
note d, p. 215.
quin ofieT verbs qf doubting, Ac, in
negaUve sentences^ 85, 86.
quippe (qui), 482, a.
quis est qui 7 477.
quis sum qui 7 483.
quis(|uam, 389, 390, (>).
si qmsquam, 391, w.
qulsquam : an est-- qui 1 477.
INDEX I. — ^LATra.
quiMDe: docliBBlmuB mtiiqiu, 399.
quivia (h), 390, n.
qao, 63, aUhout eompor,, p. 2IS, a
qua ameDClm, E12.
quoad ejus, Ac, 513.
quod Bclam, 66.
quominua, 94.
qnODiam, 492.
qaol estlB, Ac, 174.
qualidle, 69, 1,
quDtusqulBqus est, qui (aobj.), 477.
quum tntflrTogaretuT, nit iDterragatns
esBel, 416, ■.
ie = il>nli,a49,y.(=(^.l)
wdpere (s), 306, «.
Tecordar), p. 72: (■), 201, q.
tedire (b), 330, p.
■ILATIVB PBOHOOW, wtol
agraaithiii proper m,
remeffium (b), Z67^ I.
reminlBcl U), 201, q.
raperlM (aj, 177, o.
rBperioutui, Ac, qui, 4TT.
Tea ita ae h^Mt, 461.
team facete, 187.
revBra (<»>■«
rlvna (a), 472, v.
rogaro (a), 2GT.>
■aiuiuis (b)739,'
aapientic- "'-
saplentiot qnain CaluB, J ""*' "'
MmpllemuB (a), 123, c.
■enalt delapsua, 149, n.
aeateotia (ez), 17.
al^icA«f/ur, p. 15S, t.
bI hoc dicoH, p. 163, h.
A (mood), 461, t.
dnnunu^ 1
slnautem, I.,,
alnaecus, f*^"'
™(B),5
!', 391, m
aodBlla)
BDoUara (b), 273.
alella (a), 67.
gtlpeudium meieri, 30B.
Buadere (e), 322, 1.
auavla (b), 212, v.
aublevare ) , . „ng b
flubyanire ( ''" • '■
BUccondeiB (b), 299, h.
aucourrBre(8),222,k.
autnere (a), 492.
aDccensSre (a), 222.
anrnmua mong, 179.
>u>rT «tri puteDl, 4S and 477.
8DPIII.ATITI and tiktr adfj.
OtaTdat.inatead^iii&'
ebaut, 63.
lacera (a), 299, g.
tanquam, 494.
laDinta BbsBi ut — nt, 534.
templum(a),36G, 7.
trlpUcem acleiii Inalrucre, 4S6.
trucldars (b), 308.
'to, -tote (imperaiiet Jbnni bi), 48(^x
tueri, 374.
.utuB(a),642.
temruin, {eio
nbiDam gentliun, {
unlveral (■)> 443.
T ira, iBliia littdfor ne, 77, D
t qulaque— lla,407.
t Hjuui, 319.
840
INDEX I. — LATIN.
ntorlibet (b)jJ90, u.
utervls {b). 390, u.
utinam, 494.
vtpote qui, 482.
V.
VBcat mihi. 154 : 337.
valere apua aUquem, 463.
vapulare ab, 291.
velim (ut) jadlces, 417, b.
▼eUesBiMm^ 541.
vellesibi. 242.
veniam dare, 428, c.
verb! causi, 443.
vereri (s), 99, e.
videri, 160, w.
vir (b), 38, y.
vis, decl. p. 69, note g.
vlsere (s), 249. 8.
vitium (s), 242, g.
vltio vertere, Ac, 242.
vix crediderim, 428.*
vocare (s), 61. i.
volucres (s), 480. u.
-^. { 86 6886 pnncipem,
^ ease princeps,
149.
Apphtau^ Catalogue of YdhuMe PutUeaHoM.
CLASSICAL So SCHOOL BOOKS.
illlNOLD.— A FIRST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK
And Practical GTammar. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revked and careftUlf
Corrected, by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12mo., neatly bound, 75 cents.
(Or If preferred, the Hrst Latin Book, or the Second Latin Book and Grammar
.ean be had separately. Price 50 cents each.
The chief object of this work (which ft founded on the prinelplea of imitation snd fraqner
npetition) is to enable the pupil to do exerciaet from the first day of his beginning nis aoeidenos
ARNOLD.-^LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION :
A Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Coraposition. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.BL
Revised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, ISmo., neatly
bound, $1,00.
This woric is also founded on the principles of imitation and frequent repetition. It is at ones
a S^tax, a Vocabula^, and an Exercise Book ; and oonaideraUe attention lias been p^ to the
mbject of ^rhonymes.
ARNOLD.— A FIRST GREEK BOOK ;
With Easy Exercises and Vocabulary. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised ana
Corrected by J. Ap Spencer, A.M. 12mo. 62i cts.
ARNOLD.— GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION:
A Practical introduction to Greek Prose Composition. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M.
Revised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, ISmo. 76c.
This work consists of a Greek Syntax, founded on Buttmann*s, and Easy Sdntenoes tnmlated
•nto Greek, after giyen Examples, and with girea Words.
ARNOLD.-^A GREEK READING BOOK;
Includine a Complete Treatise on the Greek Particles. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M.
Revised oy J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12mo. (In Press.)
ARNOLD.— CORNELIUS NEPOS ;
With Practical Questions and Answers, and an Imitative Ezerdse on each Chap
ter. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised, with Additional Notes, by Prof. John
Mn, Professor of the Latin Language in the University of the City of New- York
One neat volume, 12mo. 62i cts.
** Arnold's Greek and Latin Series. — ^The publication of this Talnable eoileetion of elMt
•ical school books may be regarded as the presage of better things in respect to the moide of teach
ing and acquiring languages. Heretofore boys have been condemned to tlis drudgery of goiiy
erer Latin and Greek Grammar without the remotest conception of the value of what they weis
learning, and every day becoming more and more di^usted with the dry and unmeaning task;
but now, by Mr. Arnold's admirable method— «ubstantially the same with that of OUnndorff— the
moment they take up the study of Latin or Greek, they beffin to learn sentences, to acquire ideas,
to see how the Romans and Greeks expressed themselves, how their mode of expression diflfered
from ouTB, and by degrees they lay up a stock of knowled^ which is utterly astonishing to those
who have dragged on month eifter month in the old-fiuhioned, dry, and tedious way of Wrn'wg
languages.
** Mr. Arnold, in fact, has had the good sense to adopt the system of nature. A child learns his
own language by imUatin^ what he hears, and constantly rep&ating it till it is &stened in the
memory ; in the same way Mr. A. puts the pupil immediately to work at Exercises in Latin and
Greek, involving the elementary principles of the language— words are supplied— the mode of
putting them together is told the pupil— he is shown how the ancients expressed their ideas ; ani
tban, by repeating these things agam and again— itenint itemmqiLe — ^the docile pupil has tbisa
inJeiibly impressed upon his memory and rooted in his understanding.
** The American editor is a thorough classical scholar, and has been a oractical teacher fo
yestfs in Uiis city. He has devoted the utmost care to a complete revision of Mr. Arnold's works
aas corrected sevesal errors of inadvertence or otherwise, has rearranged and improved varioa
matters in the early volumes of the series, and has attended most diligently to the accurate print
tu and Mechanical execution of the whole. We anticipate most confidently the speedy adoption
Mthese works in our schools and colleges."—- Ontr. Sr Enq.
Jj^ Arnold's Series of Classical Works has attained a circulation almost unparalleled in Engitod,
bemg introduced into nearly all the great Public Schools and leading Educational Institutions.
Tliey are also very highly recommended by some of the best American ^holars, for introduction
into the Chusical Schools of the United States. They are already used m the University of the
City of New-Tork, Sutger's Femaje Institute, N. V.; Union College, Schenectady; Mt. flt
Ifaff's College, Md. ; Tale College, New-Haven ; ana nui>iinous large schools throng hovt th«
Unlot.
AppleUms* Catalogue of VaiuaMe PubHtcattons.
CLASSICAL Sc SCHOOL BOOKS— CoNTiNirn
ARNOLD.— LECTURES ON MODERN HISTORY.
Bf Thomas Arnold, D.D. With an Introduction and Notes, hy Prof. Hemry Reec'
One volume 12mo., $1,25
9;^ This TolunM hu already boaa adoptad as a text-book in the Univenity of Pehnsyhraai '■
and Union College, Schenectady.
ADLER.— A NEW GERMAN READER ;
With Reference to Ollendo^'s German Grammar. By G. J. Adler, Prof, of tb
German Language and lit. in the Univernty of the City of New-York. (In Press. >
GRAHAM.— ENGLISH SYNONYMES ;
Classified and Explained, with Practical Exercises. By G. T. Graham, author of
" Helps to English Grammar," etc. Edited, with illustratiye authorities, by Henry
Reed, Prof, of Eng. lit. in the Univenity ctf Pennsylvama. One Yolume, 12mo.
** It is inifMMsible not to praise both the design and execution of this work. It fills a chasm ia
onr scholastic literature. Prerioos to this publication, we had bat three works of the kind,
whether for young or old students, (Truieler, Taylor, Grabb,) and not one <^ them is praeUeal
anongh for dnnentary pnrp— es.**— Z^emton Ath9»m¥M.
GESENIUS.— HEBREW GRAMMAR, BY RODIGER.
Gesenius's Hebrew Grammar. Enhuved and Improved by & lUJdiger, Prof, of
Oriental Literature in the University o? HaUe. Translated oy Qenj. Bavies, Doct
in Philosophy of the Uniyersity of Lehisic ; with a Hebrew Reading Book, prepared
by the translator, carefully reprinted from the Ibuteenth edition, (just pulnished in
I>ondon, by Bagster.) Complete in one handsome 8vo. volume.
** The excellence of Gesenius*s Grammar is unive^Uy acknowledged. Iti adaptation, boti
in matter and method, to meet the wants of Hebrew students, is triumphantly estaMislied by tb<
fact that no fewer than thirteen editions hare been sold. The new edition, from whiefa this trans
lation has been made, was prepared hy Prof. Bddiger, and appeared in 1845. Amons liying Phi
lologists, there are bnt few names in higher repute than Kodiger's. His edition of this Gmmma
may thereforis be supposed to contain some real improrements, as well as chMiges and additions
and this presumption m fully borne out by a comparison with the thirteenth edition, which wai
itself improved by the author's last rerision. The addition of the Reading Book, as an intro
duction to the translating of Hebrew, will proye (the compiler hopes) of material service to tbt
student in mastering the Grammar and acquiring the language." — ExL/rvm TrmukOar'a Fr^
GUIZOT.— GENERAL HISTORY OF CIVILIZATION
In Europe, from the fall of the Roman Elmptre to the French Revolution. Trans*
Ated from the French of M. Guizot, Professor of History to la Faculte des Lettrea
of Paris, and Minister of Public bstruction. Third American edition, with N^es
by C. S. Henry, D. D. One volume, 12mo., $1,00.
** H. Guizot, in his instruetiye I^tures, has giren us an epitome of modern history, distin^ished
by all the merit which, in another department renders Blackstone a subject of such peculiar and
unbounded praise— a work closely condensed, including nothing useless, omitting nothing essen-
tial ; written with graoe, and conceiyed and arranged with consummate ability.** — £osto» TVair*
KEIGHTLEY.— THE MYTHOLOGY OF GREECE
And Italy ; designed for the use of Schools. By Thomas Keightley. Numerous
wood-cut illustrations. One volume, 18mo., half bound, 44 cents.
" This is a neat little yolume, and well adapted to the purpose for which it was prepared. It
presents, in a very compendious and conrenient form, eyery thing relating to the subject, of im-
.wrtance to the young student" — L. L Utar.
MICHELET.— HISTORY OF THE ROMAN REPUBLIC.
By M. Michelet, Professor of History in the College of France, author of " The
History of France," etc. One vol., ISmo.
**I have looked over Michel%t*s Roman Historj in the original, with the admiration which all
the works of that great master must inspire. It is in many respects admirably adapted to the par-
poses of instmeiion in our higher seminaries of learning, 4m. *' Alonzo ^ottsk.
"ITnton CoUegeV
MANDEVILLE.— NEW ENGLISH READER :
A Course of Reading for Common Schools and the Lower Classes of Academie^
on a Scientific plan ; being in part an abridgement of the author's " Elements <■
Reading and Oratory." By H. Mandeville, Prof, of Moral Philosophy and BeMes
Letties in Hamilton College, N. Y. One volume, 12mo.
31
AppUtons^ Catalogue of Valuable PuhlicatUms,
CLASSICAL & SCHOOL BOOKS— Contintjbd.
OLLENDORFF.— NEW GERMAN GRAMMAR.
A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Grennan Lan^age.
By H. G. Ollendorff. Reprinted from the Frankfort edition ; to which is added a
Systematic Outline of the diiferent Parts of Speech, their Inflection and Use, with
full Paradigms, and a complete list of the Irregular Verbs. By G. J. Adler, Prof,
of the Grerman Language in the University of the City of New- York. 12mo, 91,50.
" Ollendorff's New Method of Learning to Read, Write, uid Speak the German Langnage, has
had an extensive circnlation in England, and its demand in this country also has constantly been
increasing of late. Nor is its popularity undeserved ; for it supplies a deficiency which has been
long and deeply felt bv all those who have engaged in either teaching or learning the German.
*' The German has hitherto been treated too much like a dead language ; and hence many, dis-
ffusted with the cumbrous terminology and crabbed rules which in the very outset met their eve,
have ipven vp the acquisition of the language in desnair. Ollendorff has completely remedied
this evil. Beginning with the simplest phrases, he gradually introduces every principle of Gram-
mar ; and he does it by interblending the rules with such copious exercises ana idiomatic expres-
sions, atvity by a few months' diligent application, and under the guidance of a skilful instructor,
any one may acqu ire eve ry thing that is essential to enable him to read, to write, and to converse
in the language. t^~ A Key to the above, in a separate volume, uniform ; price 75 cents.
OLLENDORFF.— NEW FRENCH GRAMMAR.
A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the French Language. By
H. 6. Ollendorff. With an Appehdu, containing the Cardinal and Or£nai Nam*
bers, and full Paradigms of the Regular and Irregular, Auxiliary, Reflective, and
(ntpersonal Verbs, by 7. L. Jewett. One volume, 12iiio., |^1,50.
** The plan pursued in teaching the French is snbstantially the same with that developed in th«
German Method. Avoiding the exclusively didactic character of the older treatises on the one
hand, and the tedious prolixity of detail which encumbers modern systems on the other, OUendorfl
combines and thoroughly teaches at once both the theory and practice of the language. Th«
student who pursues his method will therefore be relieved from the apprehension uf either for
getting his rules before practice has grounded him in their principles, or of learning sentences by
rote which he cannot analyze. Speaking and writing French, which in other systems is deiaved
until the learner is presumed to be master of Etymology and Syntax, and consequentlv is seldom
acquired, by this method is commenced with the first lesson, continued tliroughout, and made the
efficient means of acquiring, almost imporceptibly, a thorough knowledge of grammar : and this
without diverl ing the learner's attention for a moment fVom the language itself, with which he is
uaturally most desirous «f becoming familiar.
The text of Ollendorff, carefully revised and 6orrected, is given in the present edition without
abridgment. To this the American editor has added an Apfiendix, containing the cardinal ana
Ordinal Numbers, and full conjugation of all the Verbs. The work is thus rendered complete, and
the necessity of consulting other treatises is wholly obviated.*'
^Slf^ A Key to the above, in a separate volume, uniform ; 75 cents.
OLLENDORFF.— NEW ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Italian Language. By
H. G. Ollendorff. With Additions and Corrections, by Felix Foresti, Prof of the
Italian Language in the University of the City of N. Y. One vol., 12nio. (In Press.)
M. Ollendorff's System, a|>plied to the study of the Italian Language, possesses^ all the ad van
lages of his method of learning the German and French, and will undoubtedly, as its merits be
eome known, take the place of all other Grammars.
8Cr A Key to the above, in a separate volume, uniform.
REID.— A DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
Containing the Pronunciation, Et3rniology, and Explanation of all Words authorized
by eminent writers ; to which are added a Vocabulary of the Roots of English
Words, and an accented list of Greek, Latin, and Scripture Proper Names By
Alexaiuler Reid, A.M., Rector of the Circus School, Edinburgh. With a Critical,
Preface by Henry Reed, Prof, of Eng. lit. in the Univ. of Pa. 12mo. , near 600 p. , $ 1 .
The attention of Professors, Students, Tutors, and Heads of Families is solicited to this volume
Notwithstanding its compact size and distinctness of type, it comprises fortitf thouaa»d words.
tn addition to the correct orthoepy, this manual of words contains four valuable improvements:—
L The primitive word is given, and then follow the immediate derivatives in alphabetical or*
dcr, with the part of speech appended.
II. After the primitive worais inserted the original term whence it is fonned, with the noma
of the language from which it is derived.
in. There is subjoined a Vocabulary of the Roots of Bnglish woTds, by whioh the aocunle
purport of them is instantly discoverable.
iV. All accented List, to the anmber of fifteen thoniand, of Greek, Latin, and Scripture pro-
per Names, is added.
352
A^ppUtom* CaidLogue of Valuable PMieaiknu*
CLASSICAL So SCHOOL BOOKS— CoNxiNraD.
SURRENNE.— THE STANDARD PRONOUNCING DIC
TIONARY OF THE FRENCH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES, in two parts.
Part one, French and English ; part two, English and French ; the first part com-
prehending words in common use — ^terms connected with Science — ^terms belonging
lo the Fine Arts~4000 Historical names— 4000 Geographical names — 11,000 terms
lately published, with the pronunciation of every word according to the French
Academy, and ^e most eminent Lexicog^phers and Grammarians ; together with
750 Griti<»l Remarks, in which the yarious methods of pronouncing employed by
different authors are investigated and compared with each other. The second part,
containing a copious Vocabulary of English words and expressions, with the pro-
nunciations according to Walker. The whole receded by a practical and compre-
hensive system of French pronunciation. By Gabriel Surreime, F.A.S.E., French
Teacher in Edinburgh, Corresponding Member of the French Grammatical Society
of Paris. One volume, 12nio., nearly 900 pages, neatly bound — $1,50.
** This work must hSTS bean one of very great labor, as it it evidontly of deep xeaeareli. We
have EiTen it a earefttl examination, and are pei&cUy iafe in laying, we have never before aeen
any thing of the kind at all to coinpare with it Our ipaee wul not permit us give more than
thu general testimony to its value. Long as the title is, and much as it promises, oar examination
sf tbs work proves tliat all the promises are fulfilled^ and we think that no student of the French
language should, for a moment, hesitate to possess hunself of it. Nor, indeed^ will it be found lesi
useful to the accomplished French scholar, who will find in it a fond of information which can
00 wliere be met with in an^ one book. Such a work has for a long time been greatly needed,
and Mr. Surrenne has supplied the deficiency in a masterly style. We repeat, therefore, our well
digested opinion, that no one in search ofa knowledge of the niceties of the French languaga,
•hoald be without it.'*— JVotiraoJ JUagaxinefor May, 1846.
TAYLOR.— A MANUAL OF ANCIENT AND MODERN
HISTORY ; comprising, I. Anoiknt Hibtort, containing the PoUtical History,
Gepgraphiou Position, and Social State of the Principal Nations of Antiquity, care
fully digested from the Ancient Writen,and illustrated by the discoveries of Modem
ScholarB and Imvellers.
n. Modern Histort, ccmtaining the Rise and Progress of the principal Euro-
pean Nations, tbeir Political History, and the Changes in their Social Condition ;
with a Hittiory ui tue Colonies founded by Europeans. By W. Cooke Taylor,
LL. D., of Trinity College, Dublin. Revised, with additions on American History,
by C. S. Henry, D.D., Professor of History in the University of N. Y. One hand-
some vol., 8vo., of 800 pages, 82,25. OC^ For convenience as a class-book, the
Ancient or Modem portion can oe had in separate volumes.
This Manual of History is fast superseding all other compends, and is already adopted as a
text-book in Harvard, Columbia, Yale, New-York, Pennsylvania, and Brown Universities, and
several leading Academies.
WARNER.— RUDIMENTAL LESSONS IN MUSIC.
Containing the Pnmary Instraction requisite for all Beginners in the Art, whether
Vocal or Instrumental. By James F. Warner, translator of " Weber^s Theory of
Musical Coinposition," "Kiibler's Anleitung zum Gesang-Unterrichte," [Boston
Accidemy's Manual,] &c., &c. One vol., 18mo., cloth, 50 cents.
** We do not know how we can do a more sabstantial service to teachers and scholars fn musie
vocal or instrumental, than by urging^ them to adopt this volume as a class book. It is full and
complete on every topic connected with the sutyect^ clear ih its arrangement, and concise in ex-
Kression. The iiiastrations are numerous and ingenious, and must prove very valuable aids to the
Mimer, in comprehending the subject, as well ssto the teacher in imparting instruction.^— TVitene
WARNER.— FIRST STEPS IN SINGING.
The Primary Note Reader, or First Steps in Singing at Sight. By James F. War
ner. 12mo., 25 cents.
Tbia volume of musical exercises is designed as a supplement to the author's " Rudimental
Lenons in Music.** The two works, taken together, are mtended to furnish the beginner in vocal
music, with a complete set of books adapted to his purpose.
WRIGHT.— PRIMARY LESSONS :
In which a Single Letter is first Taught, with its power ; then another Letter la
faught in the same manner, and tlie two combined into a Word — an application of
*be letters being made in words as fast as they are learned- The words thus learned
tue arranged into easy sentences, so that the .earner is immediately initiated into
Reading Lessons. By Albert D. Wisght, author of " Analytical Orthography *
P umological Chart, &i.
B. APPUBTON dB CO. HAVE JUST FUBLUHID.
A MANUAL
OP
ANCIENT AND MODEEN HISTORY.
COMPBISINO
L
Ancient l^fistotrfi ;
flitaiaiM tbe Political Hiitory, Geographical Poaition, and Social State of the Ptrindpal N»
tieni of Antiquity, earefiilly reviled from the ancient writers, and illoetratad
by the diicoveries of Modem Seholan and Travellen.
II.
drtifaff the Eiee and Progreis of the Principal European Nations, their Politieal Hklaff • Mi
the changes in their Social Condition, with a History, of
the Colonies foanded by Europeans.
BY HIT. OOOZE TAYIiOB, XA. Di>
Of Trinity College, Dublin.
Revifled, with an Additional Chapter on the United States,
B7 O. 8. UliWKY, D. D.,
Professor of History in the UniTorsity of New-Tork
One handsome volume 8vo. of upwards of 700 pages, %St 35
%* For the convenience of Students as a text book, the Ancient or Modem ptMrtioM eui bt
iMd separately bound.
The AiroiBirT Histort division comprises Eighteen Chapters, which include the genera] ovi
lines of the History of Egypt — the Ethiopians — Babylonia and Assjrria— Westem Asia — ^Palestini
— 4he Empire of the Modes and Persians — Phenician Colonies in Northem Africa— Foundatioi
and History of the Grecian States— Greece — ^the Macedonian Kingdom and Empire— the States
thafi &.'CMe from the Dismemberment of the Macedonian Empir»— Ancient Italy— Sicily-— the Ro>
■Ha Repnblio— Geographical and Political Condition of the Roman Empiro— History of the Ro>
■san Empire— and India— with an Appendix of important illustrative articles.
This portion is one of the best Compends of Ancient History that ever yet hat appeared U
eoDtains a complete text for the collegiate lecturer ; and is an essential hand-book for the stuleal
mhn is desirous to become acquainted with all that is memorable in general secular archsology.
Tbe Mo'^nnir Hibtort portion is divided into Fourteen Chapters, on the fbllowing general
•■hjeeta :— Consequences of the Fall of the Westem Empire — Rise and Establishment of tbe
■■neesde Power— Restoration of the Western Empire — Growth of the Papal Power— Revival ei
tiitiitTe rtoyrnss of Civilization and Invention— Reformation, and Commencement of the
System in Europe — Augustan Ages of England and France— Mercantile and Colonial Bys>
-Age elf Revolutions — French Empire— History of the Peace — Colonization— China— the
— wfttk Chronological and Historical Tables and other Indexes. Dr. Henry has appended a
Mir ea^pwr on the History of the United States.
fUt llaaiia] of Modern History, by Mr. Taylor, is the most valuable and instiueUve work
MMtiMBf the general subjeeta whieh it eonprehemisy that ean be found is the WMie de partMMl
tf kiMHiisI liieralam.
Dm Appteton 4* ^c* tune jutt puttKiked
LECTURES
MODERN "history.
BT
THOMAS ARNOLD, D.D.,
Author of " Uiftory of Rome.'* eto., etc.
With an Introdaetion and Notes by Himr Rbbd, PrcfeBBor of EngUah
Literature in the Uniyenity of Pennj^yania. One handsome volume
13ma $1 25.
Thia Tolome oontains the lint Leetans which were delJyered by Dr. Arnold after hie
appointment ae Regius Profeeaor of Hietoiy in the uniyenity of Oxftod. The eeries cl
Leotures mnet be oonaidered merely aa introductory to the expanded views and re
■eare h ee which the author would have developed had his life been prolonged. In the
primaiy lecture which was delivered when he entered upon his official duty, the leetnrei
presented his definition of history with a summuy of the duties ^nnertaining to the pro-
feseor of it. Appropriate, dignified and perspicuous, it exhibits iM^h originality and
power fai a high degree, comminglod with telicicous iUiutrations of the characteristics,
eflects, and value of historical literature. — Four lectures follow on the study of histwr,
ridi in the prominent topics of inquiry oonceraing national pitMperity— among whica,
with masterly eloquence and delineations he adverts to the political economy, the r»>
Ugioua controversies, the national wars, and the geographical relations of conntries.— >
liie next three lectures contain a survey of European history, particularly examining
the revolutions in ecclesiastical affairs, and the continuous struggles to cast off the
deqiotic yoke, and to sain and establish religious and civil freedom. — ^The eighth lecture
displays the natare of that historical testimony which claims and merits credence. In
this disquisition the author exhibits in his truth and forcefalness the law of evidence
and the method of its appUcation in investigating historical facts.— The course of Lec-
tures is an elegant memorial of the author whoee unquenchable philanthropy and ua
tiring zeal in behalf of the best interests of mankind render his decease the subject oi
■egret to the civilized world.
WILL 8HORTLT PUBLISH
HISTORY
ROMAN REP U B L I C .
BT
M. MICHELET,
PtofesBor of History in the Uniyenity of France, Anthor of ** The
History of France,*' etc., etc
** M. Micbeiet* m his histoiy of the Roman Republic, firstintroduces the reader to the
Ancient Geography of Italy ; then by giving an excellent picture of the present state of
Rome and the surrounding country, fuU of grand ruins, he excites in the reader the desire
to investigate the ancient history of this wonderful land. He next imparts the results oi
the latest investigatiouB, entire, deeply studied and clearly arranged, and saves the on*
educated reader the trouble of investigating the sources, while be givee to the more edu-
eated mind an impetus to study the uterature from which he gives ve^ accTirate quo-
tations in his notes. He describes the peculiarities and the life of the Roman people ia
a masterly manner, and he fissdnates every reader, by the brilliant clearness and vivid
frMhness of his style, while he shows himself a good historian, by the justness ind
mipartiality with which he relates and philosophizes."
The Westminster Review observes : ^* His * Ilistoire Romaine' is not only the histivry
at iaskitntions and ideas, as in Niebuhr, hut also by virtue of the vast interpretative fiujul^
of imaginafion, places the mm of Roma, with their creeds aad aspicatioiis, vividif bafim
4 ISW SCHOOL AND REFERENCB DIGTIONARI,
Published hy D, Appleton <ljf Company,
« DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CONTAlMIlfO TBB
•PRONUNCIATION, ETYMOLOGY, AND EXPLANATION
Of sll words authorized by eminent writers ;
TO WHICH AXB ADDED,
A VOCABULARY OF THE ROOTS OF ENGLISH WORDS,
*••• AM AGO HTBD LIST OF OREIK, LATIN, AND SCRIFTURB PROPER NAMB
BY ALEXANDER REID, A. M.,
Rector of the Cireua Sehool^ MltUnhurgh,
WITH A CRITICAL PREFACE,
BY HENRY REED,
Pref teoor ofEnglUh Literature in the fTnivereity of Penneylvanir^
Oae VqIuih * l^Vno. of near 600 pages, neatly bound in leather. Price $1
Among tht wants of oar time was a good Dictionary of our own language, esp*
«iaUy adapte i for sxademies and schools. The books which have long been in use
«trere of Uttic value to the junior 8^adents, being too concise in the definitions, and
knmetbodical in the arrangement Reid's English Dictionary was compiled expressly
10 develop the precise analogies and various properties of the authorized ;ivords in
general use, by the standard authors and orators who use our vernacular tongue
Exclusive of the large numbers of proper names which are appended, this Diction-,
ary includes four especial impn)vements — and when their essential value to tlM
•ftudent is considered, the sterling character of the work as a hand-book of our Ian
^age instantly will be perceived.
The primitive word is distinguished by a larger type ; and where there are any de-
rivatives fipom it, they follow in alphabetical order, and the part of speech is append
ed, thus ftnrnishing a complete classification of all the connected analogous word* ol
the same species.
With this facility to comprehend accurately the determinate meaning of the English
word, is conjoined a rich illustration for the linguist The derivation of all the priiu
*tlve words is distinctly given, and the phrases of the languages whenee they are de
«acei, whether composite or simple ; so that the student of foreign languages, both
*.aeient and modem, by a reference to any word, can ascertain the source whence it
has been adopted into our own form of speech. This is a great acquisition te the
.lenon who is «nxious to use words in their utmost clearness of meaning.
Te these advantages is subjoined a Vocabulary of the tloots of English Words,.
vUeh is of peculiar value to the collegian. The fifty pages which it includes, to*
iish the linguist with a wide-spread field of research, equally amUsittg and instruct-
.Te. There is also added an Accented List, to the nnmiber of fifteeu thousand ci
4raek, Latin, and Scripture Proper Names.
WlUi such novel attractions, and with such decisive merits, the rocommendationa
which are prefixed to the work by Professors Frost, Henry, Parks, and Reed, Messrs
Baker and Greene, principals 6f the two chief grammar schools at Boston, and by Dr.
Raeiw, Bupennveciient of Common Schools fcur the city and county bif ^ew, York, an ,
jBstty Aie to \hr laDoirs of the author. They fully corroborate the opinion expreseed
ty sefwal other competent auth irities, that " Reid*s English Dictionary is pecnliarlf
for the use of "^nools vt^ families, and is far saperior to any other ezlst!a|
eonpUatio* *
D. Afpieton 4* CC' lune jtut publMed
LECTURES
MODERN "history.
■ T
THOMAS ARNOLD, D.D.,
Aotlior of ** Uiitary of Rone." eto., etc.
With an Introdaetion and Notes by Hknet Rbbd, ProfesBor of ESngliah
Literature in the UniTenity of Penmrjiyania. One handsome Tolome
13ma $1 25.
Thie Tdame oonUina the first Lectures which were delivered by Dr. Arnold after hie
appointment tm Regius Professor of Histoiy in the university of dzfbnl. The series d
Leotures mnst be oonsidered merely as introductoiy to the expanded views and re
■eaiohea which the author would have developed had his life been prolonged. In the
prinuuy iectnie which was delivered when he entered upon his official doty, the lecturer
presented his definition of history with a summary of the duties ^nnertaining to the pio-
fesBor of it. Appropriate, dignified and penpinuous, it exhibits tMtb originality and
power fai a high degree, oonuninglod with felicitous iUiutrations of the characteristics,
eflecto, and value of historical literature. — Four lectures follow on the study of histotr,
ri<Bh in the prominent topics of inquiry oonoeraing national pixisperity— among which,
with masterly eloquence and delineations he adverts to the piditical economy, the r»>
Ugious oontruversies, the national wars, and the geographical relations of conntries.—
Iiie next three lectures contain a survey of European history, particularly examining
the revolutioni in ecclesiastical afiiurs, and the continuous struggles to cast off the
despotic yoke, and to sain and establish religious and civil fifeednm. — ^The eighth lecture
displays the nature of that historical testimony which claiins and merits credence. In
this disquisition the author exhibits in his truth and forcefulness the law of evidence
and the method of its application in investigating historical facts. — The course of Lec-
tures is an elegant memorial of the authw whoee unquenchable philanthropy and un
tiring zeal in behalf of the best interests of mankind render his decease the subject oi
■egret to the civilized world.
WILL 8HORTLT PUBLISH
HISTORY
ROMAN REP U B L I C .
BT
M. MICHELET,
ProfesBor of History in the Univenity of France, Anthw of ** The
History of France,*' etc., etc.
** M. Micneiet, m his history of the Roman Republic, firstintroduoes the reader to the
Ancient Geognphy of Italy ; then by giving an excellent picture of the present stite of
Rome and the surrounding country, fuU of grand ruins, he excites in the reader the desire
to investigate the ancient history of this wonderful land. He next imparts the results oi
the latest investigations, entire, deeply studied and clearly arranged, and saves the un*
educated reader the trouUe of investigathig the sources, while be gives to the more edu-
eated mind an impetus to study the literature from which he gives ve^ accTirate quo-
tations in his notes. He describes the peculiarities and the lift of the Roman people in
• masterly manner, and he fisschiates every reader, by the brilliant clearness and vivid
freshness of his style, while he shows himself a good historian, by the justness ind
isnpartiality with which he relates and philosophizes."
The Westminster Review observes : ^' His * Ilistoire Romaine' is not only the history
at institutions and ideas, as in Niebnhr, but also b^ virtue of the vast interpretative fiujul^
sf isMffiaation, places the Men of Roma, witii their creeds and aspiiatioiis, vividif baftm
4 ISW SCHOOL AND REFERENCB DIGTIONARI,
Published hy D. Appleton 4* Company,
« DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CONTAlMIlfO TBB
•PRONUNCIATION, ETYMOLOGY, AND EXPLANATION
Of cll words authorized by eminent writers ;
TO WHICH AXB ADDBD,
A VOCABULARY OF THE ROOTS OF ENGLISH WORDS,
mm AM AGO HTBD U8T OF ORKIK, LATIN, AND SCRIPTURB PROPER NAMB
BY ALEXANDER REID, A. M.,
Rector of the Circus School^ EdinJburgh.
WITH A CRITICAL PREFACE,
BY HENRY REED,
ProJ mwr of English Literature in the Vnivereitif of Ponneylvanitm
bae VQlum • l^Vno. of near 600 pages, neatly bound in leather. Price
Among tht wants of oar time was a good Dictionary of our own language, espe
«ially adapte 1 for academies and schools. The books which have long been in use
«trere of little value to the junior students, being too concise in the definitions, and
knmethodical in the arrangement Reid's English Dictionary was compiled expressly
10 develop the precise analc^e? and various properties of the authorized .words in
general use, by the standard authors and orators who use our vernacular tongue
Exclusive of the large numbers of proper names which are appended, this Diction-,
ary includes four especial impnivements — and when their essential value to the
•ftudent is considered, the sterling character of the work as a hand-book of our Ian
^age instantly will be perceived.
The i^imitive word is distinguished by a larger type ; and where there are any de-
rivatives fkook it, they follow in alphabetical order, and the part of speech is append
ed, thus ftnrnishing a complete classification of all the connected analogous wonU ol
the same species.
With this facility to comprehend accurately the determinate meaning of the English
word, is coojo^^d & '^d^ illustration for the linguist The derivation of all the priiu
*tlve words is distinctly given, and the phrases of the languages whence they are de
•need, whether composite or simple ; so that the student of foreign languages, both
*.aeient and modem, by a reference to any word, can ascertain the source whence it
has been adopted Into our own form of speech. This is a great acquisition to the
.wrson who is «nxious to use words in their utmost clearness of meaning.
Te these advantages is subjoined a Vocabulary of the tloots of English Words,,
vUeh is of peculiar value to the collegian. The fifty pages which it includes, to*
iish the linguist with a wide-spread field of research, equally amusing and instruct-
.T*. There is also added an Accented List, to the nimiber of fifteen thousand ci
4raek, Latin, and Scripture' Proper Names.
With suQhnptvel attractions, and with such decisive merits, the rccommendationi
which are prefixed to the work by Professors Ffoat, Henry, Parks, and Reed, Messrs
laker and Greene. pHncipals of the two «faief grammar schools at Boston, and by Dr.
Reese, Bupermvecijent of Common Schools for the city and county 6t New Yovk, an .
Jnetty Aie to vhr laoors of the author. They fhlly corroborate the opinion ezpraeeed
ty twwial other competent autb urities, that ^ Reid^s English Dictionary is pocoliarlf
1 for the use of "^nools nod families, and is &r saperior to any other exIst^Hf
eonpUatiov *
D. AfpUUm ti Co. FMitk
THE STANDARD PRONOUNCINQ DICTIONARY
OF THE
FKENCH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES,
/JV TWO PJRTS.
PART I.) FRENCH AND ENGLISH.— PART II., ENGLISH AND FRENCH.
The Firat Part eomprehending words in common o«e. Terms connected with Science. Terms
kekmflng to the Fine Arts. 4000 Historical Names. 4000 Geographical Names. 1100 teoM
ately poblished, with the
PRONUNCIATION OP EVERY WORD
Aeeordinf to the French Academy and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians,
TOGETHER WITH 750 CRITICAL REMARKS,
la whieh the Tarioos methods of pronouncing employed by different aathors are investigated and
compared with each other.
The Beeond Part, eontaining a copious ▼ocabulary of English words and ezpreseioas, with the
pronunciation according to Wallcer.
THE WHOLE PRECEDED BY
A PRACTICAL AND COMPREHENSIVE SYSTEM OF FRENCH PRONUNCIATION
Br GABRIEL SURKN'J^E, F. A. S, E
French Teacher in Edinburgh : Corresponding Member of the French Grammatical Society e(
Paris ; Lecturer on Military History m the Scottish Naval and Military Academy ; and author
of several works on Education.
Reprinted from a duplicate cast of the stereotype plates of he last Edinburgh edition. One
stont volume, ISmo., of nearly 900 pages. Price $1 50.
This new Pronouncing French Dictionary will be found to be the most complete that has yet
appeared. It is admirably adapted for the purposes of education, as well as reference for the
French scholar. Although convenient sized, and sold at a low price, it contains every word in
■se in the language.
The Preface of the Author (here inserted) explains more fully the nature of the compilatlcm.
author's PREFACE.
** No French Pronouncing Dictionary having as yet appeared in the English field of French
Education, the public aie now presented with one, the nature and compass of which will give an
idea of the numerous and laborious investigations made by the Author, to render the present
work useful and acceptable.
** Tt is now upwards of six years since this work was undertaken, and the resolution of bring-
ing il to It^lit, arose from a diversity of opinion in Pronunciation, whieh he discovered long ago
m the various Dictionaries and Grammars made use of by Ulm in preparing his former course of
Lectoies on French and English Comparative Philology.
<* In the course of his labors, had the Author found but little difference among Frendujrritere,
probably no criticism would have appeared in the present work ; but as he went along, hu atten-
tion was arrested by so many opposite views in the mode of sounding letters and words, that
aothingehort of a full investigation could satis^ him. The result of his investigations is em-
bodied in the Dictionary, and hence the origin of the critical remarks with which it abounds : the
nature and extent of which, of themselves, would form a volume conveying much solid mstrao-
tioo, as well as offering a sad picture of the uncertainties of French Pronunciation, of which
nine tenths perhaps of the Author's countrymen are not aware. Even upon the mere sounds of
ifo, mere are man^ conflicting opinions, and the vacillating pen of Laudais, the last writer upon
Parisian pronunciation^ by whom oi is represented sometimes by oo, and sometimes by •, has in-
ereased the perplexity in no small degree.
" The method employed by the Author for representing the sounds of words, is intended tr
meet the English eye ; and he has been careful to make use of none but genuine French letters
that the reader may not be deceived, nor induced to follow a vicious system of articulation.
** As to the pronunciation of Foreign Historical and Geographical names, it is laid down in
the same manner, as if a Frenchman at Paris were reading aloua ; in this case nothing would be
left to him but to Frenchify every jproper name, with the exception of a few livinc Authors.
" In ending this part of the Preface, it is of importance to observe that no syllable in th'S work
is invested with the syllabical accent, because, as yet, excepting two or three Grammarians along
with the Author, no writer in France, nor even the Academy itself, has thought proper to enforce
this part of delivery, how unfortunately neglected.
'* The Phraseology, forming the second essential part of this Dictionary, is based on that of
the Academy, the sole and legitimate authority in France ; and every effort of the Author has
been so directed, as to render it both copious and practical. With this view, an improved method
ef elucidating new meanings, by employing parentheses, has been introduced, and it is hoped that
the utility and benefits resultine from this improvement will not &il to be duly appreciated.
" Another novelty to which um Author may lay claim, is the placing of Historical and Geo-
graphical namen below each page : and, by this arrangement, the facility of being acquainted
with their definition and pronunciation at a single glance, will be found of no small advantage
As to the English or second part of this Dictionary, the reader will find it to consist of a copious
vocabulary of terms, with their pronunciation, according to the system of Walker. The various
meanings of the words are translated into French ; and when the expressions happen to be sub-
stantives, the French gender is pointed out by means of proper signs.
" Lastly, that competent judges mny be aware of thea uthoriti»-s on which the pronunciation
and entical remarks pervading this Dictionary are founded, the titles and dates of the works
y g'f j "*y® ^«®" c°/>»«'ted, wrthb^ an their professed object, wi'.J be found in tb
^
L
T
•^
/